Call Manager PDF
Call Manager PDF
Administration Guide
Release 7.1(2)
Americas Headquarters
Cisco Systems, Inc.
170 West Tasman Drive
San Jose, CA 95134-1706
USA
http://www.cisco.com
Tel: 408 526-4000
800 553-NETS (6387)
Fax: 408 527-0883
THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL
STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS.
THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT
SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE
OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.
The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCBs public
domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright 1981, Regents of the University of California.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED AS IS WITH
ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF
DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO
OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
CCDE, CCSI, CCENT, Cisco Eos, Cisco HealthPresence, the Cisco logo, Cisco Lumin, Cisco Nexus, Cisco Nurse Connect, Cisco Stackpower, Cisco StadiumVision,
Cisco TelePresence, Cisco WebEx, DCE, and Welcome to the Human Network are trademarks; Changing the Way We Work, Live, Play, and Learn and Cisco Store are
service marks; and Access Registrar, Aironet, AsyncOS, Bringing the Meeting To You, Catalyst, CCDA, CCDP, CCIE, CCIP, CCNA, CCNP, CCSP, CCVP, Cisco, the
Cisco Certified Internetwork Expert logo, Cisco IOS, Cisco Press, Cisco Systems, Cisco Systems Capital, the Cisco Systems logo, Cisco Unity, Collaboration Without
Limitation, EtherFast, EtherSwitch, Event Center, Fast Step, Follow Me Browsing, FormShare, GigaDrive, HomeLink, Internet Quotient, IOS, iPhone, iQuick Study,
IronPort, the IronPort logo, LightStream, Linksys, MediaTone, MeetingPlace, MeetingPlace Chime Sound, MGX, Networkers, Networking Academy, Network Registrar,
PCNow, PIX, PowerPanels, ProConnect, ScriptShare, SenderBase, SMARTnet, Spectrum Expert, StackWise, The Fastest Way to Increase Your Internet Quotient, TransPath,
WebEx, and the WebEx logo are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the United States and certain other countries.
All other trademarks mentioned in this document or website are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship
between Cisco and any other company. (0903R)
Any Internet Protocol (IP) addresses used in this document are not intended to be actual addresses. Any examples, command display output, and figures included in the
document are shown for illustrative purposes only. Any use of actual IP addresses in illustrative content is unintentional and coincidental.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration Guide
2009 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
C O N T E N T S
Preface
PART
CHAPTER
xxvii
Introduction
1-1
1-1
1-10
1-11
System Configuration
CHAPTER
1-8
1-10
PART
1-7
Server Configuration
2-1
2-4
Configuring a Server
Deleting a Server
Related Topics
2-1
2-5
2-6
2-8
iii
Contents
CHAPTER
3-1
3-1
3-4
3-6
CHAPTER
3-6
3-7
3-8
4-1
4-1
4-3
4-4
CHAPTER
5-1
5-1
5-2
CHAPTER
5-3
5-4
5-5
6-1
6-1
6-3
6-4
CHAPTER
4-5
4-6
Related Topics
4-4
6-5
6-6
6-6
7-1
iv
OL-18611-01
Contents
CHAPTER
Region Configuration
8-1
8-1
8-4
Configuring a Region
8-5
CHAPTER
8-9
8-9
8-10
9-1
9-1
9-10
9-11
9-13
9-14
CHAPTER
10
CHAPTER
11
CHAPTER
12
10-1
11-1
12-1
CHAPTER
13
12-1
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-5
12-6
13-1
13-1
13-2
9-13
13-3
13-4
13-4
Contents
CHAPTER
14
14-1
14-1
CHAPTER
15
14-3
14-4
15-1
15-4
CHAPTER
16
15-1
15-5
15-6
15-6
16-1
CHAPTER
17
16-4
16-5
Location Configuration
17-1
17-1
17-4
Configuring a Location
Deleting a Location
17-5
17-6
16-1
17-7
17-7
CHAPTER
18
CHAPTER
19
18-1
Related Topics
19-1
19-2
19-1
19-4
19-4
19-5
vi
OL-18611-01
Contents
CHAPTER
20
20-1
20-2
CHAPTER
21
20-1
20-3
20-3
20-4
21-1
21-2
CHAPTER
22
22-1
22-2
23
21-4
22-1
CHAPTER
22-3
22-3
22-4
23-1
23-1
CHAPTER
24
25
24-1
25-1
23-2
24-1
CHAPTER
21-3
21-4
Related Topics
21-1
25-1
25-3
25-4
CHAPTER
26
CHAPTER
27
26-1
27-1
vii
Contents
CHAPTER
28
CHAPTER
29
29-1
29-3
CHAPTER
30
29-4
29-5
30-1
CHAPTER
31
31-1
CHAPTER
32
30-1
30-2
29-1
29-2
28-1
31-1
31-2
32-1
32-1
32-5
CHAPTER
33
32-7
32-7
33-1
33-1
33-2
33-3
32-2
33-3
33-4
viii
OL-18611-01
Contents
CHAPTER
34
Autoregistration Configuration
34-1
34-3
Disabling Autoregistration
34-4
Geolocation Configuration
CHAPTER
36
35-1
36-1
CHAPTER
37
38
37-1
37-4
37-4
37-5
38-1
38-3
CHAPTER
39
38-1
38-2
Related Topics
38-4
38-5
39-1
39-1
39-2
37-1
37-3
CHAPTER
34-5
34-6
CHAPTER
PART
34-1
39-3
39-4
39-4
ix
Contents
CHAPTER
40
40-1
40-1
40-3
40-7
40-8
CHAPTER
41
40-9
41-1
41-1
41-2
41-4
41-4
41-5
CHAPTER
42
41-7
41-10
42-1
42-1
42-3
42-4
42-5
CHAPTER
43
41-6
41-6
40-8
42-6
42-6
42-7
43-1
43-1
43-2
43-4
43-5
OL-18611-01
Contents
43-6
CHAPTER
44
43-7
43-7
44-1
CHAPTER
45
44-1
44-10
44-11
44-12
44-13
45-1
45-1
45-6
45-8
45-8
CHAPTER
46
45-9
45-10
45-10
46-1
46-1
46-2
46-4
46-5
46-5
CHAPTER
47
43-6
46-6
46-6
46-7
47-1
47-1
47-11
47-12
xi
Contents
CHAPTER
48
47-14
47-14
48-1
48-5
48-6
48-6
48-7
CHAPTER
49
49-1
CHAPTER
50
50-1
CHAPTER
51
50-1
50-3
50-4
50-5
50-6
51-1
CHAPTER
52
51-1
51-2
48-1
51-4
51-4
51-5
Partition Configuration
52-1
52-1
52-3
Configuring a Partition
52-4
52-5
52-5
52-6
52-7
xii
OL-18611-01
Contents
CHAPTER
53
53-1
53-3
53-1
53-4
53-4
53-5
CHAPTER
54
CHAPTER
55
CHAPTER
56
CHAPTER
57
CHAPTER
58
CHAPTER
59
CHAPTER
60
54-1
56-1
57-1
58-1
59-1
60-1
60-1
60-9
55-1
60-10
60-11
60-12
CHAPTER
61
Call Park
CHAPTER
62
CHAPTER
63
63-1
CHAPTER
64
64-1
61-1
62-1
64-1
64-24
64-25
64-26
xiii
Contents
64-28
CHAPTER
65
64-29
64-30
65-1
CHAPTER
66
65-1
65-2
64-27
65-4
65-4
65-5
66-1
66-2
CHAPTER
67
66-7
67-1
67-1
67-2
67-3
CHAPTER
68
66-6
67-3
67-4
68-1
68-5
68-1
68-6
68-7
68-7
xiv
OL-18611-01
Contents
CHAPTER
69
69-1
69-5
Mobility Configuration
CHAPTER
71
70-1
72
Annunciator Configuration
71-1
72-1
72-1
72-3
72-5
72-5
Synchronizing an Annunciator
CHAPTER
69-6
CHAPTER
69-6
69-7
CHAPTER
PART
69-1
72-5
72-6
73-1
73-1
73-3
73-6
73-9
73-15
73-16
73-12
73-17
73-17
73-18
xv
Contents
CHAPTER
74
74-1
74-2
74-3
74-4
74-5
74-6
CHAPTER
75
CHAPTER
76
CHAPTER
77
CHAPTER
78
Transcoder Configuration
Finding a Transcoder
CHAPTER
79
78-1
78-3
78-4
78-5
Synchronizing a Transcoder
Deleting a Transcoder
78-5
78-6
78-6
79-1
CHAPTER
80
79-1
79-2
79-4
79-4
79-5
80-1
80-1
80-2
76-1
78-1
Configuring a Transcoder
Resetting a Transcoder
75-1
77-1
Related Topics
74-2
80-3
80-4
80-4
xvi
OL-18611-01
Contents
CHAPTER
81
CHAPTER
82
PART
82-1
CHAPTER
81-1
83
83-1
83-1
83-6
83-7
CHAPTER
84
83-9
83-9
84-1
84-1
84-6
CHAPTER
85
85-1
86
85-1
85-2
85-4
CHAPTER
85-4
85-5
86-1
86-1
86-2
84-7
84-7
Related Topics
83-8
86-3
86-4
86-5
xvii
Contents
CHAPTER
87
87-1
87-1
87-2
87-3
PART
87-5
87-5
Device Configuration
CHAPTER
88
88-1
88-7
88-8
88-8
88-9
88-10
Gatekeeper Configuration
89-1
89-4
89-5
89-5
Synchronizing a Gatekeeper
CHAPTER
90
89-1
89-3
Configuring a Gatekeeper
Related Topics
88-2
88-6
CHAPTER
87-4
89-6
89-6
Gateway Configuration
90-1
xviii
OL-18611-01
Contents
90-88
CHAPTER
91
90-104
91-1
91-2
91-24
91-26
91-25
91-26
91-26
xix
Contents
91-27
91-30
91-32
Synchronizing a Phone
Deleting a Phone
91-32
91-33
91-34
91-38
91-40
CHAPTER
92
92-1
Resetting a Trunk
92-48
92-49
92-49
Synchronizing a Trunk
Related Topics
92-1
92-46
Configuring a Trunk
Deleting a Trunk
92-50
92-51
CHAPTER
93
CHAPTER
94
93-1
94-1
91-41
91-42
Trunk Configuration
Finding a Trunk
91-39
94-1
94-2
94-3
xx
OL-18611-01
Contents
CHAPTER
95
95-1
CHAPTER
96
95-1
96-1
CHAPTER
97
96-6
96-7
97-1
98
97-1
97-8
CHAPTER
96-1
96-7
Related Topics
95-1
97-8
97-11
97-11
98-1
98-1
98-2
98-3
CHAPTER
99
98-5
98-5
98-6
99-1
99-1
99-2
99-3
99-4
99-8
xxi
Contents
CHAPTER
100
99-8
99-9
100-1
100-1
100-3
100-4
100-5
100-6
100-7
100-8
CHAPTER
101
100-9
100-9
101-1
101-1
101-9
101-10
101-11
101-11
CHAPTER
102
101-12
101-13
102-1
102-1
102-6
102-7
CHAPTER
103
102-7
102-8
102-8
103-1
103-1
103-4
103-5
103-6
xxii
OL-18611-01
Contents
103-7
103-7
CHAPTER
104
CHAPTER
105
105-1
PART
105-1
105-2
104-1
105-3
105-3
105-4
Application Configuration
CHAPTER
106
CHAPTER
107
CHAPTER
108
CHAPTER
109
CHAPTER
110
Plug-in Configuration
PART
109-1
110-1
110-3
110-3
CHAPTER
108-1
110-2
107-1
110-1
106-1
111
111-1
111-1
111-2
111-3
111-4
xxiii
Contents
CHAPTER
112
112-1
112-3
CHAPTER
113
112-1
112-4
112-4
112-5
113-1
113-1
113-5
113-6
113-9
Related Topics
CHAPTER
114
113-9
113-10
113-11
113-12
113-13
114-1
114-1
114-8
114-9
114-10
114-11
114-11
114-12
114-13
114-14
114-15
113-7
114-17
114-17
114-18
xxiv
OL-18611-01
Contents
CHAPTER
115
Role Configuration
115-1
115-3
Configuring a Role
CHAPTER
116
115-2
115-4
Deleting a Role
115-5
Related Topics
115-5
116-1
116-1
116-2
116-3
116-4
116-6
116-6
CHAPTER
117
116-8
117-1
117-2
117-4
117-4
CHAPTER
118
CHAPTER
119
CHAPTER
120
PART
118-1
119-1
120-1
CHAPTER
116-7
121
121-1
xxv
Contents
PART
Appendixes
10
APPENDIX
Dependency Records
A-1
APPENDIX
A-1
A-2
A-2
A-4
B-1
B-1
B-3
B-4
Migrating from Cisco Unified Communications Manager Release 5.0 to Release 7.1(2)
Where to Find More Information
B-5
B-6
INDEX
xxvi
OL-18611-01
Preface
This preface describes the purpose, audience, organization, and conventions of this guide and provides
information on how to obtain related documentation.
Note
This document may not represent the latest Cisco product information available. You can obtain the most
current documentation by accessing Cisco's product documentation page at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/voicesw/ps556/tsd_products_support_series_home.html
The preface covers these topics:
Purpose
The Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration Guide provides instructions for
administering the Cisco Unified Communications Manager (formerly Cisco Unified CallManager)
system. This guide includes descriptions of procedural tasks that you complete by using Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration. The Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Administration Guide also provides references for commands to assist you in using Cisco Unified
Communications Manager. This book acts as a companion to the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager System Guide, which provides conceptual information about Cisco Unified Communications
Manager and its components as well as tips for setting up features by using Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration.
xxvii
Preface
Audience
The Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration Guide provides information for network
administrators who are responsible for managing the Cisco Unified Communications Manager system.
This guide requires knowledge of telephony and IP networking technology.
Organization
The following table provides the organization of this guide.
Part
Description
Part 1
Part 2
System Configuration
Contains information on how to configure the items in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration System menu.
Part 3
Part 4
Part 5
Part 6
Device Configuration
Contains information on how to configure devices in Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration.
Part 7
Application Configuration
Contains information on how to configure plugin applications and application
interfaces to work with Cisco Unified Communications Manager.
Part 8
Part 9
Part 10
Appendixes
Contains information about dependency records and configuration of non-Cisco
phones that are running SIP.
xxviii
OL-18611-01
Preface
Related Documentation
Refer to the following documents for further information about related Cisco IP telephony applications
and products:
Cisco Unified IP Phone Administration Guide for Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Conventions
This document uses the following conventions.
Convention
Description
boldface font
italic font
[ ]
{x|y|z}
[x|y|z]
string
A nonquoted set of characters. Do not use quotation marks around the string
or the string will include the quotation marks.
screen
font
boldface screen
Terminal sessions and information the system displays are in screen font.
font Information you must enter is in boldface
screen
font.
Arguments for which you supply values are in italic screen font.
This pointer highlights an important line of text in an example.
xxix
Preface
Convention
Description
The symbol ^ represents the key labeled Controlfor example, the key
combination ^D in a screen display means hold down the Control key while
you press the D key.
< >
Note
Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to material not covered in the
publication.
Timesavers use the following conventions:
Timesaver
Means the described action saves time. You can save time by performing the action described in the
paragraph.
Tips use the following conventions:
Tip
Caution
Means reader be careful. In this situation, you might do something that could result in equipment
damage or loss of data.
Warnings use the following conventions:
Warning
This warning symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury. Before you
work on any equipment, you must be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and
familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents.
xxx
OL-18611-01
Preface
xxxi
Preface
xxxii
OL-18611-01
A R T
CH A P T E R
Introduction
Cisco Unified Communications Manager (formerly Cisco Unified CallManager) serves as the
software-based call-processing component of the Cisco Unified Communications family of products. A
wide range of Cisco Media Convergence Servers provides high-availability server platforms for Cisco
Unified Communications Manager call processing, services, and applications.
The Cisco Unified Communications Manager system extends enterprise telephony features and
functions to packet telephony network devices such as IP phones, media processing devices,
voice-over-IP (VoIP) gateways, and multimedia applications. Additional data, voice, and video services,
such as unified messaging, multimedia conferencing, collaborative contact centers, and interactive
multimedia response systems, interact through Cisco Unified Communications Manager open telephony
application programming interface (API).
Cisco Unified Communications Manager provides signaling and call control services to Cisco integrated
telephony applications as well as third-party applications. Cisco Unified Communications Manager
performs the following primary functions:
Call processing
Directory services
Additional Information
1-1
Chapter 1
Introduction
Because Cisco Unified Communications Manager is a software application, enhancing its capabilities in
production environments requires only upgrading software on the server platform, thereby avoiding
expensive hardware upgrade costs.
Distribution of Cisco Unified Communications Manager and all Cisco Unified IP Phones, gateways, and
applications across an IP network provides a distributed, virtual telephony network. This architecture
improves system availability and scalability. Call admission control ensures that voice quality of service
(QoS) is maintained across constricted WAN link and automatically diverts calls to alternate public
switched telephone network (PSTN) routes when WAN bandwidth is not available.
A web-browsable interface to the configuration database provides the capability for remote device and
system configuration. This interface also provides access to HTML-based online help for users and
administrators.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager, designed to work like an appliance, refers to the following
functions:
Cisco Unified Communications Manager servers can get preinstalled with software to ease customer
and partner deployment and automatically search for updates and notify administrators when key
security fixes and software upgrades are available for their system.This process comprises
Electronic Software Upgrade Notification.
You can upgrade Cisco Unified Communications Manager servers while they continue to process
calls, so upgrades take place with minimal downtime.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager supports the Asian and Middle Eastern markets by
providing support for Unicode on higher resolution phone displays.
Additional Information
Web Browsers
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration supports the following Microsoft Windows
operating system browsers:
Netscape 7.1
1-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 1
Introduction
Browsing to Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration
From any user PC in your network, browse into a server that is running Cisco Unified Communications
Manager Administration and log in with administrative privileges.
Note
Note
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration does not support the buttons in your browser.
Do not use the browser buttons (for example, the Back button) when you perform configuration tasks.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager currently operates with starter (demo) licenses, so upload
the appropriate license files.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager currently operates with an insufficient number of licenses,
so upload additional license files.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager does not currently use the correct software feature license.
In this case, the Cisco CallManager service stops and does not start until you upload the appropriate
software version license and restart the Cisco CallManager service.
Procedure
Use the following procedure to browse into the server and log on to Cisco Unified Communications
Manager Administration.
Step 1
Step 2
In the address bar of the web browser, enter the following case-sensitive URL:
https://<Unified CM-server-name>:{8443}/ccmadmin/showHome.do
where: <Unified CM-server-name> equals the name or IP address of the server
Note
Step 3
Step 4
At the main Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration window, enter the username and
password that you specified during Cisco Unified Communications Manager installation and click
Login.
1-3
Chapter 1
Introduction
Note
For security purposes, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration logs you out after 30
minutes of inactivity, and you must log back in.
Additional Information
Use the following procedure to log off Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration.
Step 1
From the main Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration window, click the Logout
button that is in the upper, right corner.
Step 2
Additional Information
Using Internet Explorer 6 and HTTPS with Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration
The first time that you (or a user) accesses Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration or
other Cisco Unified Communications Manager SSL-enabled virtual directories (after the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager installation/upgrade) from a browser client, a Security Alert dialog box asks
whether you trust the server.
1-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 1
Introduction
Browsing to Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration
When the dialog box displays, you must perform one of the following tasks:
By clicking Yes, you choose to trust the certificate for the current web session only. If you trust the
certificate for the current session only, the Security Alert dialog box displays each time that you
access the application; that is, until you install the certificate in the trusted folder.
By clicking View Certificate > Install Certificate, you intend to perform certificate installation
tasks, so you always trust the certificate. If you install the certificate in the trusted folder, the
Security Alert dialog box does not display each time that you access the web application.
By clicking No, you cancel the action. No authentication occurs, and you cannot access the web
application. To access the web application, you must click Yes or install the certificate via the View
Certificate > Install Certificate option.
Note
The address that you use to access Cisco Unified Communications Manager must match the
name on the certificate or a message will display by default. If you access the web application
by using the localhost or IP address after you install the certificate in the trusted folder, a security
alert indicates that the name of the security certificate does not match the name of the site that
you are accessing.
Perform the following procedure to save the HTTPS certificate in the trusted folder in the browser client.
For other tasks that you can perform in the Security Alert dialog box, refer to the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Security Guide.
Procedure
Step 1
Access the Tomcat server (for example, enter the hostname, localhost, or IP address for Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration in the browser).
Step 2
When the Security Alert dialog box displays, click View Certificate.
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Click the Place all certificates in the following store radio button; click Browse.
Step 6
Step 7
Click Next.
Step 8
Click Finish.
A Security Warning Box displays the certificate thumbprint for you.
Step 9
Step 10
Step 11
To trust the certificate, so you do not receive the dialog box again, click Yes.
Tip
You can verify the certificate was installed successfully by clicking the Certification Path tab in
the Certificate pane.
1-5
Chapter 1
Introduction
Additional Information
Using Internet Explorer 7 and HTTPS with Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration
Internet Explorer (IE) 7 adds security features that change the way that the browser handles Cisco
certificates for website access. Because Cisco provides a self-signed certificate for the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager server, Internet Explorer 7 flags the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Administration website as untrusted and provides a certificate error, even when the trust store contains
the server certificate.
Note
Internet Explorer 7, which is a Windows Vista feature, also runs on Windows XP Service Pack 2 (SP2),
Windows XP Professional x64 Edition, and Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1 (SP1). Ensure that Java
Runtime Environment (JRE) is present to provide Java-related browser support for IE.
Be sure to import the Cisco Unified Communications Manager certificate to Internet Explorer 7 to secure
access without having to reload the certificate every time that you restart the browser. If you continue to
a website that has a certificate warning and the certificate is not in the trust store, Internet Explorer 7
remembers the certificate for the current session only.
After you download the server certificate, Internet Explorer 7 continues to display certificate errors for
the website. You can ignore the security warnings when the Trusted Root Certificate Authority trust store
for the browser contains the imported certificate.
The following procedure describes how to import the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
certificate to the root certificate trust store for Internet Explorer 7.
Procedure
Step 1
Browse to the application on the Tomcat server (for example, enter the hostname, localhost, or IP address
for Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration in the browser).
The browser displays a Certificate Error: Navigation Blocked page to indicate this website is untrusted.
Step 2
Step 3
To import the server certificate, click the Certificate Error status box to display the status report. Click
the View Certificates link in the report.
Step 4
Step 5
Select the General tab in the Certificate window and click Install Certificate.
The Certificate Import Wizard launches.
Step 6
Step 7
Verify that the Automatic option, which allows the wizard to select the certificate store for this certificate
type, is selected and click Next.
1-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 1
Introduction
Browsing to Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration
Step 8
Step 9
Step 10
Click OK. The next time that you click the View certificates link, the Certification Path tab in the
Certificate window displays This certificate is OK.
Step 11
To verify that the trust store contains the imported certificate, click Tools > Internet Options in the
Internet Explorer toolbar and select the Content tab. Click Certificates and select the Trusted Root
Certifications Authorities tab. Scroll to find the imported certificate in the list.
After importing the certificate, the browser continues to display the address bar and a Certificate Error
status in red. The status persists even if you reenter the hostname, localhost, or IP address or refresh or
relaunch the browser.
Additional Information
Using Netscape and HTTPS with Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration
When you use HTTPS with Netscape, you can view the certificate credentials, trust the certificate for
one session, trust the certificate until it expires, or not trust the certificate at all.
Tip
If you trust the certificate for one session only, you must repeat the following procedure each time that
you access the HTTPS-supported application. If you do not trust the certificate, you cannot access the
application.
Note
The address that you use to access Cisco Unified Communications Manager must match the name on the
certificate or a message will display by default. If you access the web application by using the IP address
after you install the certificate in the trusted folder, a security alert indicates that the name of the security
certificate does not match the name of the site that you are accessing.
Perform the following procedure to save the certificate to the trusted folder:
Procedure
Step 1
Browse to the application on the Tomcat server (for example, enter the hostname, localhost, or IP address
for Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration in the browser).
The certificate authority dialog box displays.
Step 2
1-7
Chapter 1
Introduction
Step 3
Note
Note
To view the certificate credentials before you continue, click Examine Certificate. Review the
credentials, and click Close.
Click OK.
The Security Warning dialog box displays.
Step 4
Click OK.
Additional Information
Note
The minimum supported screen resolution specifies 1024x768. Devices with lower screen resolutions
may not display the applications correctly.
The choices in the drop-down list box include the following Cisco Unified Communications Manager
applications:
Cisco Unified Communications Manager AdministrationShows the default when you access
Cisco Unified Communications Manager. Use Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Administration to configure system parameters, route plans, devices, and much more.
Cisco Unified ServiceabilityTakes you to the main Cisco Unified Serviceability window that is
used to configure trace files and alarms and to activate and deactivate services.
Disaster Recovery SystemTakes you to the Cisco Disaster Recovery System, a program that
provides full data backup and restore capabilities for all servers in a Cisco Unified Communications
Manager cluster. You must log off from any other application before you can log in to this
application.
After you log in to Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration, you can access all
applications that display in the Navigation drop-down list box, except the Cisco Unified Operating
System Administration and Disaster Recovery System, without needing to log in to each application.
You cannot access the Cisco Unified Operating System Administration or Disaster Recovery System
GUIs with the same username and password that you use to access Cisco Unified Communications
1-8
OL-18611-01
Chapter 1
Introduction
Navigating the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration Application
Manager Administration. To access these applications from Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Administration, you must first click the Logout button in the upper, right corner of the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration window; then choose the application from the Navigation
drop-down list box and click Go.
If you have already logged in to one of the applications that display in the Navigation drop-down list box
(other than Cisco Unified Operating System Administration or Disaster Recovery System), you can
access Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration without logging in. From the
Navigation drop-down list box, choose Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration and
click Go.
1-9
Chapter 1
Introduction
Accessibility
When you log in to Cisco Unified Communications Manager for the first time, the system displays the
last successful login time as the current time.
Additional Information
Accessibility
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration and Cisco Unified CM User Options provide
functionality for users that allows them to access buttons on the window without using a mouse. You can
perform the following procedures from any point on the window, so the user does not have to scroll or
tab through various fields.
Accessing the Icons in the Window
Many of the windows in Cisco Unified Communications Manager include icons that display at the top
of the window; for example, an icon of a disk for Save, an icon that is a plus sign (+) for Add, and so on.
To access these icons, perform the following procedure.
1.
Press Alt, press 1; then, press Tab. The cursor will highlight the first icon from the left. To move to
the next icon, press Tab again.
2.
Press Enter. The system performs the function of the icon; for example, Add.
Many of the windows in Cisco Unified Communications Manager and Cisco PCA have buttons that
display at the bottom of the window; for example, a button for Save, a button for Add, and so on. To
access these buttons, perform the following procedure.
1.
Press Alt, press 2, and then press Tab. The cursor will highlight the first button from the left. To
move to the next button, press Tab again.
2.
Press Enter. The function of the button gets performed; for example, Save.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager CDR Analysis and Reporting Administration Guide
1-10
OL-18611-01
Chapter 1
Introduction
Related Topics
Related Topics
Using Internet Explorer 6 and HTTPS with Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Administration, page 1-4
Hypertext Transfer Protocol Over Secure Sockets Layer (HTTPS), page 1-4
Navigating the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration Application, page 1-8
1-11
Chapter 1
Introduction
Related Topics
1-12
OL-18611-01
A R T
System Configuration
CH A P T E R
Server Configuration
This chapter contains information on the following topics:
Make sure that you only add each server once in the Server Configuration window. If you add a
server by using the hostname and add the same server again by using the IP address, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager cannot accurately determine component versions for the server after a
Cisco Unified Communications Manager upgrade. If you have two entries in Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration for the same server, delete one of the entries before you
upgrade (see the Deleting a Server section on page 2-6).
When you perform a fresh installation of Cisco Unified Communications Manager, you must define
any subsequent servers (nodes) in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration
Server Configuration window before you can install Cisco Unified Communications Manager on
each subsequent server. To define a subsequent node, click Add New and perform the procedure in
the Configuring a Server section on page 2-5. After you add the subsequent server, you can then
install the Cisco Unified Communications Manager software on that server.
If you use IPv4 in your network, you must update the DNS server with the appropriate Cisco Unified
Communications Manager name and address information before you use that information to
configure the Cisco Unified Communications Manager server.
2-1
Chapter 2
Server Configuration
Caution
If your network supports IPv6 or IPv4 and IPv6 in dual-stack mode, you can provision your
DNS server for IPv6 prior to upgrading from Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Release 7.0(1) to Release 7.1(2). However, do not configure the DNS records for Cisco
Unified Communications Manager for IPv6 until after you upgrade to Release 7.1(2).
Configuring the DNS records for Cisco Unified Communications Manager for IPv6 prior to
upgrading to Release 7.1(2) causes the upgrade to fail and causes your system to become
nonfunctional after you reboot.
For DNS, make sure that you map the IP addresses of all servers, including dummy nodes, to the
host names on the DNS server. If you do not perform this task, Cisco Unified Communications
Manager generates alarms that inform you that the License Manager service is down.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration does not prevent you from updating the IP
Address field under any circumstances.
When you attempt to change the IP address in the Server Configuration window, the following
message displays after you save the configuration: Changing the host name/IP Address of the
server may cause problems with Cisco Unified Communications Manager. Are you sure that you
want to continue? Before you click OK, make sure that you understand the implications of updating
the Host Name/IP Address field; for example, incorrectly updating this setting may cause Cisco
Unified Communications Manager to become inoperable; that is, the database may not work, you
may not be able to access Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration, and so on. In
addition, updating this field without performing other related tasks may cause problems for Cisco
Unified Communications Manager.
For additional information on changing the IP address or host name, refer to the document,
Changing the IP Address and Host Name for Cisco Unified Communications Manager Release
7.1(2).
Table 2-1
Field
Description
Server Information
Host Name/IP Address
If your network uses DNS that can map to IPv4 addresses, you can enter
the host name of the Cisco Unified Communications Manager server.
Otherwise, you must enter the full IPv4 address of the server.
Tip
If your network supports IPv6 (or IPv4 and IPv6), configure the
IPv6 Name field in addition to the Hostname/IP Address field.
Note
You must update the DNS server with the appropriate Cisco
Unified Communications Manager name and address
information before you enter that information in this field.
2-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 2
Server Configuration
Server Configuration Settings
Table 2-1
Field
Description
Server Information
IPv6 Name
This field supports IPv6. If your network uses DNS that can map to IPv6
addresses, you can enter the host name of the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager server. Otherwise, enter the non-link-local IP
address of the Cisco Unified Communications Manager server; for
information on how to obtain the non-link local IP address, refer to
Running IPv6 CLI Commands or Configuring IPv6 in the Ethernet
IPv6 Window in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features
and Services Guide.
This field, which gets included in the TFTP configuration file, gets used
by phones that run SCCP to retrieve the IPv6 address of the Cisco
Unified Communications Manager server, so phone registration occurs.
Tip
Caution
Tip
MAC Address
Description
2-3
Chapter 2
Server Configuration
Finding a Server
Finding a Server
Because you might have several servers in your network, Cisco Unified Communications Manager lets
you locate specific servers on the basis of specific criteria. Use the following procedure to locate servers.
Note
During your work in a browser session, the cookies on the client machine store your find/list search
preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item, or if you close the browser
and then reopen a new browser window, your Cisco Unified Communications Manager search
preferences get retained until you modify your search.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
2-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 2
Server Configuration
Configuring a Server
Configuring a Server
This section describes how to add or update a server address to the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager database.
Before You Begin
Make sure that you only add each server once on the Server Configuration window. If you add a
server by using the host name and add the same server by using the IP address, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager cannot accurately determine component versions for the server after a
Cisco Unified Communications Manager upgrade. If you have two entries in Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration for the same server, delete one of the entries before you
upgrade (see the Deleting a Server section on page 2-6).
When you perform a fresh installation of Cisco Unified Communications Manager, you must define
any subsequent servers (nodes) in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration
Server Configuration window before you can install Cisco Unified Communications Manager on
each subsequent server. To define a subsequent node, click Add New and perform the procedure in
the Configuring a Server section on page 2-5. After you add the subsequent server, you can then
install the Cisco Unified Communications Manager software on that server.
If you use IPv4 in your network, you must update the DNS server with the appropriate Cisco Unified
Communications Manager name and address information before you use that information to
configure the Cisco Unified Communications Manager server.
Caution
If your network supports IPv6 or IPv4 and IPv6 in dual-stack mode, you can provision your
DNS server for IPv6 prior to upgrading from Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Release 7.0(1) to Release 7.1(2). However, do not configure the DNS records for Cisco
Unified Communications Manager for IPv6 until after you upgrade to Release 7.1(2).
Configuring the DNS records for Cisco Unified Communications Manager for IPv6 prior to
upgrading to Release 7.1(2) causes the upgrade to fail and causes your system to become
nonfunctional after you reboot.
For DNS, make sure that you map the IP addresses of all servers, including dummy nodes, to the
host names on the DNS server. If you do not perform this task, Cisco Unified Communications
Manager generates alarms that inform you that the License Manager service is down.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration does not prevent you from updating the IP
Address field under any circumstances.
When you attempt to change the IP address in the Server Configuration window, the following
message displays after you save the configuration: Changing the host name/IP Address of the
server may cause problems with Cisco Unified Communications Manager. Are you sure that you
want to continue? Before you click OK, make sure that you understand the implications of updating
this field; for example, incorrectly updating this setting may cause Cisco Unified Communications
Manager to become inoperable; that is, the database may not work, you may not be able to access
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration, and so on. In addition, updating this field
without performing other related tasks may cause problems for Cisco Unified Communications
Manager.
Changes to the server configuration do not take effect until you restart Cisco Unified
Communications Manager. For information about restarting the Cisco CallManager service, refer to
the Cisco Unified Serviceability Administration Guide.
2-5
Chapter 2
Server Configuration
Deleting a Server
For additional information on changing the IP address or host name, refer to the document,
Changing the IP Address and Host Name for Cisco Unified Communications Manager Release
7.1(2).
Procedure
Step 1
To add a server, choose System > Server and click Add New.
To update a server, find the server by using the procedure in the Finding a Server section on
page 2-4.
Step 3
To save the data and to add the server to the database, click the Save icon that displays in the tool bar in
the upper, left corner of the window (or click the Save button that displays at the bottom of the window).
Changes to the server configuration do not take effect until you restart Cisco Unified Communications
Manager. For information about restarting the Cisco CallManager service, refer to the Cisco Unified
Serviceability Administration Guide.
Additional Information
Deleting a Server
This section describes how to delete a server from the Cisco Unified Communications Manager database
and how to add a deleted server back to the Cisco Unified Communications Manager cluster.
Before You Begin
In Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration, you cannot delete the first node of the
cluster, but you can delete subsequent nodes. Before you delete a subsequent node in the Find and List
Servers window, Cisco Unified CM Administration displays the following message: You are about to
permanently delete one or more servers. This action cannot be undone. Continue?. If you click OK, the
server gets deleted from the Cisco Unified CM database and is not available for use.
Tip
When you attempt to delete a server from the Server Configuration window, a message that is similar to
the one in the preceding paragraph displays. If you click OK, the server gets deleted from the Cisco
Unified CM database and is not available for use.
Before you delete a server, consider the following information:
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration does not allow you to delete the first node
in the cluster, but you can delete any subsequent node.
Cisco recommends that you do not delete any node that has Cisco Unified Communications Manager
running on it, especially if the node has devices, such as phones, registered with it.
Although dependency records exist for the subsequent nodes, the records do not prevent you from
deleting the node.
2-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 2
Server Configuration
Deleting a Server
If any call park numbers are configured for Cisco Unified Communications Manager on the node
that is being deleted, the deletion fails. Before you can delete the node, you must delete the call park
numbers in Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration.
If an application GUI, for example, Cisco Unity, Cisco Unity Connection, and so on, contains the
IP address or host name for the server that you plan to delete, update the configuration in the
corresponding GUIs before you delete the server. If you do not perform this task, features that rely
on the configuration may not work after you delete the server.
The system may automatically delete some devices, such as MOH servers, when you delete a server.
Before you delete a node, Cisco recommends that you deactivate the services that are active on the
subsequent node. Performing this task ensures that the services work after you delete the node.
Changes to the server configuration do not take effect until you restart Cisco Unified
Communications Manager. For information on restarting the Cisco CallManager service, refer to
Cisco Unified Serviceability Administration Guide.
To ensure that database files get updated correctly, you must reboot the cluster after you delete a
server.
After you delete the node, access Cisco Unified Reporting to verify Cisco Unified Communications
Manager removed the node from the cluster. In addition, access Cisco Unified Reporting, RTMT, or
the CLI to verify that database replication is occurring between existing nodes; if necessary, repair
database replication between the nodes by using the CLI.
Procedure
Step 1
Find the server by using the procedure in the Finding a Server section on page 2-4.
Step 2
From list of matching records, choose the server that you want to delete.
Step 3
Click the Delete Selected Item icon that displays in the tool bar in the upper, left corner of the window
(or click the Delete Selected button that displays at the bottom of the window).
If you delete a subsequent node (subscriber) from Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Administration and you want to add it back to the cluster, perform the following procedure:
Procedure for Adding a Deleted Server Back to the Cluster
Step 1
In Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration, add the server by choosing System >
Server.
Step 2
After you add the subsequent node to Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration, perform
an installation on the server by using the disk that Cisco provided in your software kit.
2-7
Chapter 2
Server Configuration
Related Topics
For example, if you have a version 7.1(2) disk, perform a 7.1(2) installation on the node. If you
have a disk with a compatible version of 5.X on it, for example, use the disk to install
Cisco Unified CM on the subsequent node; during the installation, choose the Upgrade During
Install option when the installation displays the options.
Tip
Make sure that the version that you install on the subsequent node matches the version that runs
on the first node (publisher) in the cluster.
If the first node in the cluster runs Cisco Unified Communications Manager 7.1(2) version and
a service update (or engineering special), you must choose the Upgrade During Install option
when the installation displays the installation options; before you choose this option, ensure that
you can access the service update (or engineering special) image on DVD or a remote server. For
more information on how to perform an installation, refer to installation documentation that
supports your version of Cisco Unified Communications Manager.
Step 3
After you install Cisco Unified CM, configure the subsequent node, as described in the installation
documentation that supports your version of Cisco Unified CM.
Step 4
Access the Cisco Unified Reporting, RTMT, or the CLI to verify that database replication is occurring
between existing nodes; if necessary, repair database replication between the nodes.
Additional Information
Related Topics
Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6), Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services
Guide
Changing the IP Address and Host Name for Cisco Unified Communications Manager Release
7.1(2)
2-8
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
Field
Description
Server Information
CTI ID
Cisco Unified
Communications Manager
Server
This read-only field displays the server where this Cisco Unified
Communications Manager is installed.
3-1
Chapter 3
Table 3-1
Field
Description
Cisco Unified
Communications Manager
Name
Enter the name that you want to assign to this Cisco Unified
Communications Manager.
Description
Auto-registration Information
Starting Directory Number
Partition
If more than 250 partitions exist, the ellipsis (...) button displays next
to the drop-down list box.
1.
2.
3.
In the list of partitions that displays in the Select item to use box,
click the desired partition name.
4.
Click OK.
3-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 3
Table 3-1
Field
Description
Enter the literal digits that you want to appear in the caller ID
information and use Xs to represent the directory number of the
autoregistered device.
Auto-registration Disabled
on this Cisco Unified
Communications Manager
3-3
Chapter 3
Table 3-1
Field
Description
Cisco Unified Communications Manager TCP Port Settings for This Server
Ethernet Phone Port
Accept the default port value of 2000 unless this port is already in
use on your system. Choosing 2000 identifies this port as
non-secure.
Accept the default port of 2427 unless this port is already in use on
your system.
Accept the default port of 2428 unless this port is already in use on
your system.
3-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 3
Note
During your work in a browser session, the cookies on the client machine store your find/list search
preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item, or if you close the browser
and then reopen a new browser window, the system retains your Cisco Unified Communications
Manager search preferences until you modify your search.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
3-5
Chapter 3
Step 2
To update a Cisco Unified Communications Manager, locate the appropriate Cisco Unified
Communications Manager as described in Finding a Cisco Unified Communications Manager section
on page 3-4. Click the Cisco Unified Communications Manager that you want to update and continue
with Step 3.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Save.
Additional Information
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
The window displays a list of Cisco Unified CMs that match the search criteria.
Step 4
Click the Cisco Unified Communications Manager that you want to synchronize with its devices.
Step 5
Step 6
Click Save.
Step 7
Step 8
Click OK.
3-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 3
Additional Information
Additional Information
Add the server. Cisco Unified Communications Managers automatically get added when a server
gets configured.
2.
Activate the Cisco CallManager service, as described in the Cisco Unified Serviceability
Administration Guide.
Note
From Cisco Unified Serviceability, you can view the status of the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager by accessing Tools > Service Activation.
When the Cisco CallManager service is deactivated, no one can make calls on that Cisco Unified
Communications Manager.
You may still be able to perform configuration operations on a deactivated Cisco Unified
Communications Manager if the Cisco Communications Manager Administration web service is active
and the database is up and running.
3-7
Chapter 3
Related Topics
When you reactivate the Cisco CallManager service on the Cisco Unified Communications Manager, the
database automatically re-creates the Cisco Unified Communications Manager by retaining the original
configuration (server name or IP address). This Cisco Unified Communications Manager then becomes
active; you can verify that the Cisco CallManager service is running by accessing Tools > Control
Center - Feature Services in Cisco Unified Serviceability.
For more information about Service Activation, refer to the Cisco Unified Serviceability Administration
Guide.
Additional Information
Related Topics
3-8
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
Synchronizing a Cisco Unified Communications Manager Group with Affected Devices, page 4-4
RedundancyThis feature enables you to designate a primary and backup Cisco Unified
Communications Managers for each group.
Call processing load balancingThis feature enables you to distribute the control of devices across
multiple Cisco Unified Communications Managers.
For most systems, you need to have multiple groups, and you need to assign a single Cisco Unified
Communications Manager to multiple groups to achieve better load distribution and redundancy.
4-1
Chapter 4
Table 4-1 describes the configuration settings for Cisco Unified Communications Manager groups. For
related procedures, see the Related Topics section on page 4-6.
Table 4-1
Field
Description
Auto-registration Cisco
Unified Communications
Manager Group
4-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 4
Note
During your work in a browser session, the cookies on the client machine store your find/list search
preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item, or if you close the browser
and then reopen a new browser window, your Cisco Unified Communications Manager search
preferences get retained until you modify your search.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
4-3
Chapter 4
Before configuring a Cisco Unified Communications Manager group, you must configure the Cisco
Unified Communications Managers that you want to assign as members of that group. See the Updating
a Cisco Unified Communications Manager section on page 3-6 for more information.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To copy an existing Cisco Unified Communications Manager Group, locate the appropriate Cisco
Unified Communications Manager Group as described in the Finding a Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Group section on page 4-3, choose the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager Group that you want to copy, click Copy and continue with Step 3.
To add a new Cisco Unified Communications Manager Group, click Add New and continue with
Step 3.
To update an existing Cisco Unified Communications Manager Group, locate the appropriate Cisco
Unified Communications Manager Group as described in the Finding a Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Group section on page 4-3 and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
Step 4
Click the Save icon that displays in the tool bar in the upper, left corner of the window (or click the Save
button that displays at the bottom of the window) to save the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Group configuration in the database.
After you have configured the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Group, you can use it to
configure device pools. Devices obtain their Cisco Unified Communications Manager Group list setting
from the device pool to which they are assigned.
Additional Information
4-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 4
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
The window displays a list of Cisco Unified CM Groups that match the search criteria.
Step 4
Click the Cisco Unified CM Group that you want to synchronize with affected devices. The Cisco
Unified CM Group Configuration window displays.
Step 5
Step 6
Click Save.
Step 7
Step 8
Click OK.
Additional Information
Note
You cannot delete a Cisco Unified Communications Manager group if it is assigned to any device pools
or MGCP gateways or if it is the current Auto-registration Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Group for the cluster.
To find out which devices are using the Cisco Unified Communications Manager group, choose
Dependency Records from the Related Links drop-down list box on the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager Group Configuration window and click Go.
If the dependency records feature is not enabled for the system, the dependency records summary
window displays a message that shows the action that you can take to enable the dependency records;
the message also displays information about high CPU consumption that is related to the dependency
records feature. For more information about dependency records, see the Accessing Dependency
Records section on page A-2.
4-5
Chapter 4
Related Topics
If you attempt to delete a Cisco Unified Communications Manager group that is in use, a message
displays. Before deleting a Cisco Unified Communications Manager group that is currently in use, you
must perform some or all of the following tasks:
Assign a different Cisco Unified Communications Manager group to the device pools or MGCP
gateways that currently use this Cisco Unified Communications Manager group. See the
Configuring a Device Pool section on page 9-11.
Procedure
Step 1
Find the Cisco Unified Communications Manager group by using the procedure in the Finding a Cisco
Unified Communications Manager Group section on page 4-3.
Step 2
From the list of matching records, choose the group that you want to delete.
Step 3
Click the Delete Selected icon that displays in the tool bar in the upper, left corner of the window (or
click the Delete Selected button that displays at the bottom of the window) to delete the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager group.
Step 4
When asked to confirm the delete operation, click either OK to delete or Cancel to cancel the delete
operation.
Additional Information
Related Topics
Synchronizing a Cisco Unified Communications Manager Group with Affected Devices, page 4-4
4-6
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
Field
Description
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the NTP server that you want the phone that is
running SIP to use to get its date and time.
Note
Description
5-1
Chapter 5
Table 5-1
Field
Description
Mode
From the drop-down list box, choose the mode for the phone NTP reference.
The values from which you can choose follow:
Directed BroadcastIf you choose this default NTP mode, the phone
accesses date/time information from any NTP server but gives the listed
NTP servers (1st = primary, 2nd = secondary) priority. For example, if
the phone configuration contains NTP servers where A = primary NTP
server and B = secondary/backup NTP server, the phone uses the
broadcast packets (derives the date/time) from NTP server A. If NTP
server A is not broadcasting, the phone accesses date/time information
from NTP server B. If neither NTP server is broadcasting, the phone
accesses date/time information from any other NTP server. If no other
NTP server is broadcasting, the phone will derive the date/time from the
Cisco Unified Communications Manager 200 OK response to the
REGISTER message.
UnicastIf you choose this mode, the phone will send an NTP query
packet to that particular NTP server. If the phone gets no response, the
phone will access date/time information from any other NTP server. If
no other NTP servers respond, the phone will derive the date/time from
the Cisco Unified Communications Manager 200 OK response to the
REGISTER message.
Note
Note
During your work in a browser session, the cookies on the client machine store your find/list preferences.
If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item, or if you close the browser and then
reopen a new browser window, the system retains your Cisco Unified Communications Manager search
preferences until you modify your search.
Procedure
Step 1
5-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 5
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
Step 2
To add the phone NTP reference to the Cisco Unified Communications Manager database, click the
Add New button and continue with Step 3.
To update an existing phone NTP reference, locate the existing phone NTP reference as described
in the Finding the Phone NTP References section on page 5-2 and continue with Step 3.
5-3
Chapter 5
Step 3
Step 4
To save the configuration in the database, click the Save icon that displays in the tool bar in the upper,
left corner of the window (or click the Save button that displays at the bottom of the window).
Next Steps
After you add a new phone NTP reference to the Cisco Unified Communications Manager database,
assign it to a date/time group. For more information, refer to the Configuring a Date/Time Group
section on page 6-4.
Additional Information
Before you can delete the phone NTP reference from Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Administration, you must delete the phone NTP reference from the date/time group. To find which
date/time groups use the phone NTP reference, choose Dependency Records from the Related Links
drop-down list box in the Phone NTP Reference Configuration window and click Go. When you know
which date/time groups use the phone NTP reference, you can then remove that phone NTP reference
from that group.
If the dependency records feature is not enabled for the system, the dependency records summary
window displays a message that shows the action that you can take to enable the dependency records;
the message also displays information about high CPU consumption that is related to the dependency
records feature. For more information about dependency records, refer to the Accessing Dependency
Records section on page A-2.
Procedure
Step 1
By using the procedure in the Finding the Phone NTP References section on page 5-2, find the phone
NTP reference.
Step 2
To delete multiple phone NTP references, check the check boxes next to the appropriate phone NTP
references in the Find and List window; then, click the Delete Selected icon or the Delete Selected
button.
Step 3
To delete a single phone NTP reference, perform one of the following tasks:
In the Find and List window, check the check box next to the appropriate phone NTP reference; then,
click the Delete Selected icon or the Delete Selected button.
In the Find and List window, click the Name link for the phone NTP reference. After the Phone NTP
Reference Configuration window for that specific phone NTP reference displays, click the Delete
Selected icon or the Delete Selected button.
5-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 5
Step 4
When prompted to confirm the delete operation, click OK to delete or Cancel to cancel the delete
operation.
Additional Information
Related Topics
5-5
Chapter 5
Related Topics
5-6
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
Note
CMLocal resets to the operating system date and time whenever you restart Cisco Unified
Communications Manager or upgrade the Cisco Unified Communications Manager software to a new
release. Do not change the name of CMLocal.
Tip
For a worldwide distribution of Cisco Unified IP Phones, create one named Date/Time Group for each
of the 24 time zones.
Table 6-1 describes the date/time group configuration settings. For related procedures, see the Related
Topics section on page 6-6.
6-1
Chapter 6
Table 6-1
Field
Description
Group Name
Enter the name that you want to assign to the new date/time group.
Time Zone
From the drop-down list box, choose the time zone for the group that you are
adding.
The default setting for new Cisco Unified Communications Manager
installations equals (GMT) Monrovia, Casablanca.
If you upgrade from a compatible Cisco Unified Communications Manager
release and you use local time zone of Communications Manager in the
configuration, the Cisco Unified Communications Manager database
determines the appropriate time zone for the database server and then
displays that time zone as replacement for the Communications Manager
time zone.
Separator
Date Format
Choose the date format for the date that displays on the Cisco Unified IP
Phones.
Time Format
To ensure that a phone that is running SIP gets its date and time
configuration from an NTP server, add the phone NTP reference(s) to the
date/time group. To add a phone NTP reference to the date/time group,
perform the following tasks:
1.
2.
Find the phone NTP reference(s) that you want to add, as described in
the Finding the Phone NTP References section on page 5-2.
Only phone NTP references that exist in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager database display. For information on adding
a phone NTP reference to Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Administration, see the Configuring the Phone NTP References
section on page 5-3.
3.
After the search results display, check the check boxes for the phone
NTP references or click Select All.
4.
After you add the phone NTP reference(s) to the date/time group, you can
prioritize them, starting with the first reference that you want the phone to
contact. For example, to move a reference to the top of the list, highlight the
entry in the pane and click the Up arrow. To move a reference to the bottom
of the list, highlight the entry in the pane and click the Down arrow.
Tip
6-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 6
Note
During your work in a browser session, the cookies on the client machine store your find/list search
preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item, or if you close the browser
and then reopen a new browser window, your Cisco Unified Communications Manager search
preferences get retained until you modify your search.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
6-3
Chapter 6
Step 2
To copy an existing date/time group, locate the appropriate date/time group as described in the
Finding a Date/Time Group section on page 6-3, choose the date/time group that you want to copy,
click the Copy icon that displays in the tool bar in the upper, left corner of the window (or the Copy
button that displays at the bottom of the window), and continue with Step 3.
To add a new date/time group, click the Add New button and continue with Step 3.
To update an existing date/time group, locate the appropriate date/time group as described in the
Finding a Date/Time Group section on page 6-3 and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
Step 4
To get its date and time, a phone that is running SIP can use NTP server(s) that exist in Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration, as described in the Phone NTP Reference Configuration
section on page 5-1. To add a phone NTP reference to a date/time group for a phone that is running SIP,
perform the following tasks:
a.
b.
Find the phone NTP reference(s) that you want to add, as described in the Finding the Phone NTP
References section on page 5-2.
Only phone NTP references that exist in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager database
display. For information on adding a phone NTP reference to Cisco Unified Communications
Manager Administration, see the Configuring the Phone NTP References section on page 5-3.
c.
After the search results display, check the check boxes for any phone NTP references that you want
to add to the date/time group or click Select All.
d.
Tip
Step 5
After you add the phone NTP reference(s) to the date/time group, you can prioritize them,
starting with the first server that you want the phone that is running SIP to contact. For example,
to move a server to the top of the list, highlight the entry in the pane and click the Up arrow. To
move a server to the bottom of the list, highlight the entry in the pane and click the Down arrow.
To remove a phone NTP reference from the date/time group, highlight the reference in the pane and click
Remove Phone NTP References.
Removing the phone NTP reference from the date/time group does not remove the phone NTP reference
from the Cisco Unified Communications Manager database.
Step 6
To save the new date/time group in the database, click the Save icon that displays in the tool bar in the
upper, left corner of the window (or click the Save button that displays at the bottom of the window).
6-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 6
Note
Step 7
See the procedure described in Synchronizing a Date/Time Group With Affected Devices
section on page 6-5 before deciding on whether to proceed to Step 7.
To reset the devices that use the date/time group, click Reset.
Next Steps
After adding a new date/time group to the database, you can assign it to a device pool to configure the
date and time information for that device pool. For more information, refer to the Configuring a Device
Pool section on page 9-11.
Additional Information
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
The window displays a list of Date/Time Groups that match the search criteria.
Step 4
Click the Date/Time Group to which you want to synchronize applicable devices. The Date/Time Group
Configuration window displays.
Step 5
Step 6
Click Save.
Step 7
Step 8
Click OK.
Additional Information
6-5
Chapter 6
Note
You cannot delete a date/time group that any device pool uses.
To find out which device pools use the date/time group, choose Dependency Records from the Related
Links drop-down list box on the Date/Time Group Configuration window and click Go.
If the dependency records feature is not enabled for the system, the dependency records summary
window displays a message that shows the action that you can take to enable the dependency records;
the message also displays information about high CPU consumption that is related to the dependency
records feature. For more information about dependency records, refer to the Accessing Dependency
Records section on page A-2.
If you attempt to delete a date/time group that is in use, Cisco Unified Communications Manager
displays a message. Before deleting a date/time group that is currently in use, you must perform either
or both of the following tasks:
Assign a different date/time group to any device pools that use the date/time group that you want to
delete. Refer to the Configuring a Device Pool section on page 9-11.
Delete the device pools that use the date/time group that you want to delete. Refer to the Deleting
a Device Pool section on page 9-13.
Procedure
Step 1
Find the date/time group by using the procedure in the Finding a Date/Time Group section on
page 6-3.
Step 2
From the list of matching records, choose the date/time group that you want to delete.
Step 3
Click the Delete Selected Item icon that displays in the tool bar in the upper, left corner of the window
(or click the Delete Selected button that displays at the bottom of the window) to delete the date/time
group.
Step 4
When prompted to confirm the delete operation, click either OK to delete or Cancel to cancel the delete
operation.
Additional Information
Related Topics
6-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 6
6-7
Chapter 6
Related Topics
6-8
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
SIP trunkWatcher
Application userWatcher
End userWatcher
For information about configuring presence groups, refer to the Presence chapter in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Features and Services Guide.
7-1
Chapter 7
7-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
Region Configuration
Use regions to specify the bandwidth that is used for audio and video calls within a region and between
existing regions. Use the following procedures to add, update, or delete regions, and to synchronize
configuration changes with affected devices:
Refer to the Regions section in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide for more
information about configuring regions and selecting audio codecs.
Note
The audio codec determines the type of compression and the maximum amount of bandwidth that is
used per audio call.
The video call bandwidth comprises the sum of the audio bandwidth and video bandwidth but does
not include overhead.
The default audio codec for all calls through Cisco Unified Communications Manager specifies G.711.
If you do not plan to use any other audio codec, you do not need to use regions. See the Related Topics
section on page 8-10 for more information.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager supports up to 2000 regions. The following limitations and
restrictions apply:
Configure as many regions as possible to Use System Default for inter-/intra-region audio codecs
and video bandwidth.
8-1
Chapter 8
Region Configuration
Refer to the Regions subtopic under the Administration Considerations topic of the IP Video
Telephony chapter of the Cisco Unified Communications Solution Reference Network Design
(SRND) for the current release, which provides recommendations as to how the video bandwidth
should be set for regions and locations, so the video portion of video calls will succeed, and the
video calls will not get rejected nor set up as audio-only calls.
Table 8-1 summarizes the audio codec and video call bandwidth settings that can be specified for
regions. For related procedures, see the Related Topics section on page 8-10.
Table 8-1
Field
Description
Region Information
Name
Enter a unique name for this region. This name can comprise up to 30
characters. Valid characters include letters, numbers, dashes, dots
(periods), blanks, and underscores.
Note
Region Relationships
Region
The entries in this column display all regions for which non-default
relationships have been configured.
Note
Audio Codec
The entries in this column specify the audio codec relationship between
the region that you are configuring and the region that displays in the
corresponding row.
The entries in this column specify the video call bandwidth relationship
between the region that you are configuring and the region that displays
in the corresponding row.
The entries in this column specify the link loss type relationship between
the region that you are configuring and the region that displays in the
corresponding row.
The entries in this window pane specify all existing regions, including the
Default region, the region that you are configuring, and all other regions.
Choose a region in this pane prior to configuring the relationships
between the region that you are configuring and the chosen region.
8-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 8
Region Configuration
Region Configuration Settings
Table 8-1
Field
Description
Audio Codec
For each region that is specified in the Regions window pane, choose the
corresponding value from the drop-down list box in this column to set the
audio codec to use for calls between this region and the specified region.
To choose the default setting, choose the Use System Default value.
Cisco recommends that you choose the default settings that you
configured in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Administration Service Parameters Configuration window. See the
Configuring Default Values section on page 8-5.
For each region that is specified in the Regions window pane, click one
radio button in this column as specified:
Keep Current SettingClick this button to use the current setting for
the video call bandwidth.
Use System DefaultClick this button to use the default value. The
default value normally specifies 384 kb/s, unless the default value
has been set to a different value in the Service Parameters
Configuration window.
For each region that is specified in the Regions window pane, choose the
corresponding value from the drop-down list box in this column to set the
link loss type to use for calls between this region and the specified region.
Choose from the following values:
Keep Current SettingChoose this value to keep the link loss type
between the region that you are configuring and the region that you
specified in the Regions window pane.
8-3
Chapter 8
Region Configuration
Finding a Region
Finding a Region
Because you may have several regions in your network, Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Administration lets you locate specific regions on the basis of specific criteria. Use the following
procedure to locate regions.
Note
During your work in a browser session, the cookies on the client machine store your find/list search
preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item, or if you close the browser
and then reopen a new browser window, the system retains your Cisco Unified Communications
Manager search preferences until you modify your search.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
8-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 8
Region Configuration
Configuring a Region
Configuring a Region
Use the following procedure to add or update a region.
Before You Begin
For every region, an association exists with that region in other regions; therefore, the addition of regions
occurs in a matrixlike fashion. For example, if you add regions A, B, and C, a matrix with region A,
region B, and region C as both columns and rows results, as shown in the following matrix:
Region A
Region B
Region C
Region A
Region B
Region C
If you assign 20 regions, the database adds 400 entries (20 x 20). Some performance limitations exist
when large numbers of regions are assigned.
Note
Audio CodecYou define audio codec values that are to be used within the same region, and you
also define audio codec values that are to be used between regions.
Video Call BandwidthYou define video call bandwidth values that are to be used within the same
region, and you also define video call bandwidth values that are to be used between regions.
Link Loss TypeYou define the link loss types that are to be used within the same region, and you
also define link loss types that are to be used between regions.
Tip
If you set both the audio codec values and the video call bandwidth values to use the default, the system
optimizes its performance by making more efficient use of resources.
Note
Regions have default values for use within a region (the recommended default value specifies G.711),
and regions have default values for use between regions (the recommended default value specifies
G.729).
You configure the default values for regions in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Administration Service Parameters Configuration window. Use the following procedure:
1.
2.
From the drop-down Server list box, choose the Cisco Unified Communications Manager server that
you want to configure.
3.
From the drop-down Service list box, choose Cisco CallManager (Active) as the service.
8-5
Chapter 8
Region Configuration
Configuring a Region
4.
5.
Scroll down to Clusterwide Parameters (System - Location and Region) and configure the
parameters in this section.
6.
Click the Save icon that displays in the tool bar in the upper, left corner of the window (or click the
Save button that displays at the bottom of the window).
Step 2
To add a new region, click the Add New button and continue with Step 3.
To update an existing region, locate the appropriate region as described in the Finding a Region
section on page 8-4 and continue with Step 3.
Note
Cisco recommends that you reset devices after changing a region name.
Step 3
In the Name field, enter the name that you want to assign to the region.
Step 4
To save the new region in the database, click the Save icon that displays in the tool bar in the upper, left
corner of the window (or click the Save button that displays at the bottom of the window).
Step 5
To configure the default codecs to use within this region, click the name of this region to highlight it in
the Regions window pane.
a.
From the Audio Codec drop-down list box, choose a default audio codec value to use within this
region.
The audio codec determines the type of compression and the maximum amount of bandwidth that is
allocated for these calls. See Table 8-2 for a summary of the available codec types and bandwidth
usage.
b.
In the Video Call Bandwidth column, click the appropriate radio button to configure the default
value to specify the video bandwidth to use for video calls within this region.
If you specify None, the system does not allow video calls.
c.
Note
From the Link Loss Type drop-down list box, choose a default link loss type to use within this
region.
For enhanced scalability, Cisco recommends that you properly set the default values in the
Clusterwide Parameters (System - Location and Region) section of the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration Service Parameters Configuration window for the
audio codec, video call bandwidth, and link loss type values and then choose Use System Default
in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration Region Configuration window.
8-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 8
Region Configuration
Configuring a Region
Step 6
To configure the default codecs to use between this region and other regions, click another region name
(other than this region) to highlight it in the Regions window pane.
a.
From the Audio Codec drop-down list box, choose a default audio codec value to use between this
region and the region that you highlighted.
The audio codec determines the type of compression and the maximum amount of bandwidth that is
allocated for these calls. See Table 8-2 for a summary of the available codec types and bandwidth
usage.
b.
In the Video Call Bandwidth column, click the appropriate radio button to configure the default
value to specify the video bandwidth to use for video calls between this region and the region that
you highlighted.
If you specify None, the system does not allow video calls between this region and the specified
region.
c.
Note
From the Link Loss Type drop-down list box, choose a default link loss type to use between this
region and the region that you highlighted.
For enhanced scalability, Cisco recommends that you properly set the default values in the
Clusterwide Parameters (System - Location and Region) section of the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration Service Parameters Configuration window for the
audio codec, video call bandwidth, and link loss type values and then choose the Use System
Default entries in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration Region
Configuration window for these fields.
Step 7
To save the new region in the database, click the Save icon that displays in the tool bar in the upper, left
corner of the window (or click the Save button that displays at the bottom of the window).
Tip
The Region Configuration window displays an Items per page drop-down list box that allows you to list
25, 50, 100, 150, 200, or 250 configured regions. If you choose to display 100 or more regions, Cisco
Unified Communications Manager may experience performance degradation.
Next Step
After adding a new region to the database, you can use it to configure device pools. Devices acquire a
region setting from the device pool to which they are assigned. See the Configuring a Device Pool
section on page 9-11 for information on configuring device pools.
Additional Information
Note
The codecs that Table 8-2 specifies correlate to an approximate bandwidth usage per call. For
information on bandwidth usage for each codec, refer to Cisco Unified Communications Solution
Reference Network Design (SRND) for the current release of Cisco Unified Communications Manager.
8-7
Chapter 8
Region Configuration
Configuring a Region
Table 8-2
Audio Codec
G.711
80 kb/s
G.722
80 kb/s
G.723
24 kb/s
G.728/iLBC
Description
24 kb/s
Wideband/AAC
272 kb/s
GSM
29 kb/s
8-8
OL-18611-01
Chapter 8
Region Configuration
Synchronizing a Region With Affected Devices
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
The window displays a list of Regions that match the search criteria.
Step 4
Click the Region to which you want to synchronize applicable devices. The Region Configuration
window displays.
Step 5
Step 6
Click Save.
Step 7
Step 8
Click OK.
Additional Information
Deleting a Region
This section describes how to delete a region from the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
database.
Before You Begin
Note
You cannot delete a region that any device pools are using.
To find out which device pools use the region, choose Dependency Records from the Related Links
drop-down list box on the Region Configuration window and click Go.
If the dependency records feature is not enabled for the system, the dependency records summary
window displays a message that shows the action that you can take to enable the dependency records;
the message also displays information about high CPU consumption that is related to the dependency
records feature. For more information about dependency records, see the Accessing Dependency
Records section on page A-2.
8-9
Chapter 8
Region Configuration
Related Topics
If you attempt to delete a region that is in use, Cisco Unified Communications Manager displays a
message. Before deleting a region that is currently in use, you must perform either or both of the
following tasks:
Update the device pools to use a different region. See the Configuring a Device Pool section on
page 9-11.
Delete the device pools that use the region that you want to delete. See the Deleting a Device Pool
section on page 9-13.
Procedure
Step 1
Find the region by using the procedure in the Finding a Region section on page 8-4.
Step 2
From the list of matching records, choose the region that you want to delete.
Step 3
To delete the region, click the Delete Selected icon that displays in the tool bar in the upper, left corner
of the window (or click the Delete Selected button that displays at the bottom of the window).
Tip
The Region Configuration window displays an Items per page drop-down list box that allows you to list
25, 50, 100, 150, 200, or 250 configured regions. If you choose to display 100 or more regions, Cisco
Unified Communications Manager may experience performance degradation.
Additional Information
Related Topics
8-10
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
Refer to the System-Level Configuration Settings chapter in the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager System Guide for more information about device pools and the device settings that are assigned
through device pools.
Refer to the Common Device Configuration chapter in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Administration Guide for more information on configuring Common Device Configuration parameters.
Field Name
Description
Enter the name of the new device pool that you are creating. You can
enter up to 50 characters, which include alphanumeric characters,
periods (.), hyphens (-), underscores (_), and blank spaces.
9-1
Chapter 9
Table 9-1
Field Name
Description
Cisco Unified
Communications Manager
Group
Choose the calling search space to assign to devices in this device pool
that auto-register with Cisco Unified Communications Manager. The
calling search space specifies partitions that devices can search when
attempting to complete a call.
Choose a clusterwide priority setting for reverted calls that are invoked
by the hold reversion feature. This setting specifies which call type,
incoming calls or reverted calls, have priority for user actions, such as
going off hook.
The Not Selected setting specifies the reverted call focus priority
setting for the default device pool at installation. At installation,
incoming calls have priority. You cannot choose this setting in Cisco
Unified Communications Manager Administration.
Note
From the drop-down list box, choose a route group to use as the local
route group for the devices in this device pool. Choosing the default
value <None> prevents implementation of the Local Route Group
feature.
Refer to the Local Route Groups chapter in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration Guide for additional
information about the Local Route Groups feature.
Date/Time Group
Choose the date/time group to assign to devices in this device pool. The
date/time group specifies the time zone and the display formats for date
and time.
Region
9-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 9
Table 9-1
Field Name
Description
From the drop-down list box, choose a media resource group list. A
media resource group list specifies a prioritized list of media resource
groups. An application selects the required media resource (for
example, a music on hold server, transcoder, or conference bridge) from
the available media resource groups according to the priority order that
is defined in a media resource group list.
Location
Network Locale
From the drop-down list box, choose the locale that is associated with
phones and gateways. The network locale contains a definition of the
tones and cadences that the phones and gateways in the device pool in
a specific geographic area use. Make sure that you select a network
locale that is supported by all of the phones and gateways that use this
device pool.
Note
If the user does not choose a network locale, the locale that is
specified in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
clusterwide parameters as Default Network Locale applies.
Note
9-3
Chapter 9
Table 9-1
Field Name
Description
SRST Reference
From the drop-down list box, choose a survivable remote site telephony
(SRST) reference to assign to devices in this device pool. Choose from
the following options:
Connection Monitor
Duration
DisableIf you choose this option, devices in this device pool will
not have SRST reference gateways that are available to them.
This setting defines the time that the IP phone monitors its connection
to Cisco Unified Communications Manager before it unregisters from
SRST and reregisters to Cisco Unified Communications Manager.
The default value, which specifies 120 seconds, resides in the
Connection Monitor Duration enterprise parameter.
Change this setting if you need to disable the connection monitor (by
changing the value to zero) or if you want to extend the connection
monitor time.
Note
OffIf you choose this option, the devices in this device pool will
have the Single Button Barge/cBarge feature disabled.
BargeIf you choose this option, the devices in this device pool
will have the Single Button Barge feature enabled.
CBargeIf you choose this option, the devices in this device pool
will have the Single Button cBarge feature enabled.
DefaultIf you choose this option, the devices in this device pool
will use the service parameter setting for the Single Button
Barge/cBarge feature.
9-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 9
Table 9-1
Field Name
Description
OffIf you choose this option, the devices in this device pool will
have the Join Across Lines feature disabled.
OnIf you choose this option, the devices in this device pool will
have the Join Across Lines feature enabled.
DefaultIf you choose this option, the devices in this device pool
will use the service parameter setting for the Join Across Lines
feature.
Physical Location
Select the physical location for this device pool. The system uses
physical location with the device mobility feature to identify the
parameters that relate to a specific geographical location.
Choose the appropriate calling search space for the device to use when
automated alternate routing (AAR) is performed. The AAR calling
search space specifies the collection of route partitions that are
searched to determine how to route a collected (originating) number
that is otherwise blocked due to insufficient bandwidth.
AAR Group
Choose the automated alternate routing (AAR) group for this device.
The AAR group provides the prefix digits that are used to route calls
that are otherwise blocked due to insufficient bandwidth. An AAR
group setting of None specifies that no rerouting of blocked calls will
be attempted.
Calling Party Transformation This setting allows you to localize the calling party number on the
CSS
device. Make sure that the Calling Party Transformation CSS that you
choose contains the calling party transformation pattern that you want
to assign to this device pool.
Tip
Before the call occurs, the device must apply the transformation
by using digit analysis. If you configure the Calling Party
Transformation CSS as None for the device pool and you check
the Use Device Pool Calling Party Transformation CSS check
box in the device configuration window, the transformation
does not match and does not get applied. Ensure that you
configure the Calling Party Transformation Pattern in a
non-null partition that is not used for routing.
9-5
Chapter 9
Table 9-1
Field Name
Description
This setting allows you to localize the called party number on the
device. Make sure that the Called Party Transformation CSS that you
choose contains the called party transformation pattern that you want to
assign to this device pool.
Note
Geolocation Configuration
Geolocation
Geolocation Filter
To delete all prefixes for all calling party number types, click Clear
Prefix Settings.
To enter the default value for all prefix fields at the same time, click
Default Prefix Settings.
9-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 9
Table 9-1
Field Name
Description
National Number
Tip
9-7
Chapter 9
Table 9-1
Field Name
Description
International Number
Tip
9-8
OL-18611-01
Chapter 9
Table 9-1
Field Name
Description
Subscriber Number
Tip
9-9
Chapter 9
Table 9-1
Field Name
Description
Unknown Number
Tip
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your device pool search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item,
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your device pool search preferences
until you modify your search or close the browser.
9-10
OL-18611-01
Chapter 9
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
9-11
Chapter 9
Before you configure a device pool, you must configure the following items if you want to choose them
for the device pool:
Cisco Unified Communications Manager group (required). Refer to the Configuring a Cisco
Unified Communications Manager Group section on page 4-4.
Date/time group (required). Refer to the Configuring a Date/Time Group section on page 6-4.
SRST reference (optional). Refer to the Configuring an SRST Reference section on page 19-4.
Media resource group list (optional). Refer to the Configuring a Media Resource Group List
section on page 80-3.
Calling search space for auto-registration (optional). Refer to the Configuring a Calling Search
Space section on page 53-4.
Reverted call focus priority (optional). Refer to the Hold Reversion chapter in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Features and Services Guide.
Device mobility group (optional). See the Configuring a Device Mobility Group section in the
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide.
Device mobility calling search space. See the Configuring a Calling Search Space section on
page 53-4.
Physical location (optional). See the Configuring a Physical Location section in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Features and Services Guide.
AAR group. See the Configuring an AAR Group section on page 37-4.
AAR calling search space. See the Configuring a Calling Search Space section on page 53-4.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To copy an existing device pool, locate the appropriate device pool as described in the Finding a
Device Pool section on page 9-10, click the Copy button next to the device pool that you want to
copy, and continue with Step 3.
To add a new device pool, click the Add New button and continue with Step 3.
To update an existing device pool, locate the appropriate device pool as described in the Finding a
Device Pool section on page 9-10 and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
Step 4
Additional Information
9-12
OL-18611-01
Chapter 9
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
The window displays a list of Device Pools that match the search criteria.
Step 4
Click the Device Pool to which you want to synchronize applicable devices. The Device Pool
Information Configuration window displays.
Step 5
Step 6
Click Save.
Step 7
Step 8
Click OK.
Additional Information
You cannot delete a device pool if any devices are assigned to it, if it is used for Device Defaults
configuration, or if it is the only device pool in the database. If you try to delete a device pool that is in
use, a message displays. Before deleting a device pool that is currently in use, you must perform either
or both of the following tasks:
Update the devices to assign them to a different device pool. Refer to the Deleting a Phone section
on page 91-33.
Delete the devices that are assigned to the device pool that you want to delete. Refer to the Deleting
a Phone section on page 91-33.
Procedure
Step 1
Find the device pool by using the procedure in the Finding a Device Pool section on page 9-10.
9-13
Chapter 9
Related Topics
Step 2
From the list of matching records, choose the device pool that you want to delete.
Step 3
Step 4
When prompted to confirm the delete operation, click OK to delete or click Cancel to cancel the delete
operation.
Additional Information
Related Topics
Local Route Groups, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide
Calling Party Normalization, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide
9-14
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
10
10-1
Chapter 10
10-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
11
11-1
Chapter 11
11-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
12
Description
Host Server
Select a host server from the drop-down list of available host servers.
You can enable the IP phones to access the TFTP server using DHCP
custom option 150. This is the method that Cisco recommends.
This field specifies the IPv4 address for primary Trivial File Transfer
Protocol (TFTP) server.
This field specifies the IPv4 address for secondary TFTP server.
12-1
Chapter 12
Table 12-1
Description
This field specifies the address of the server that is used in the next step
of the bootstrap process. You can use as the IPv4 address of the TFTP
server or as the default value to DHCP server address if the server
supplies the next bootstrap service.
Domain Name
The Domain Name specifies the domain name that you should use when
resolving hostname via the Domain Name System.
TFTP Server Name (Option You can enable the IP phones to access the TFTP server by using DHCP
66)
option 66.
Use this field to identify a TFTP server. You can configure only one
DNS name or a dotted decimal IP address in this parameter.
ARP Cache Timeout
This field specifies the timeout in seconds for ARP cache entries.
Specify the time as a 32-bit unsigned integer. The default for the Cisco
Network Registrar (CNR) DHCP server specifies 60 seconds.
The DHCP server uses the information in this field to specify the lease
time that it is willing to offer. Specify the time in units of seconds and
as a 32-bit unsigned integer. The default for the CNR DHCP server
specifies seven days (604,800 seconds).
This field specifies the time interval from address assignment until the
client transitions to the RENEWING state. Typically, set this field to
half the value of the IP address lease time. For example, if the IP address
lease time is typically set to 60,000 seconds, the renewal time gets set to
30,000 seconds.
This field specifies the time interval from address assignment until the
client transitions to the REBINDING state. Specify the value in units of
seconds and as a 32-bit unsigned integer. Typically, set this field to
approximately 75 percent of the value of the IP address lease time. For
example, if the IP address lease time is set to 60,000 seconds, the
rebinding time typically gets set to about 45,000 seconds. In Windows,
85 percent of the value of the IP address lease time represents the
standard.
Step 2
Choose the Cisco Unified Communications Manager server from the Servers drop-down list box and
click Go.
Step 3
Choose Cisco DHCP Monitor Service from the Unified CM Services list and click Save.
12-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 12
Note
Step 4
Note
If the service is already activated, the Activation Status will display as Activated.
The service gets activated, and the Activation Status column displays the status as Activated.
The DHCP monitor service starts automatically after it is activated. See the Starting DHCP Monitor
Service section on page 12-3 to stop, start, or restart the service.
Additional Information
In Cisco Unified Serviceability, choose Tools > Control Center - Feature Services.
The Control CenterFeature Services window displays.
Step 2
Choose the Cisco Unified Communications Manager server from the Servers drop-down list box and
click Go.
Cisco DHCP Monitor Service displays in the list under Service Name column, in Unified CM Services.
Note
If the Cisco DHCP Monitor Service was activated by using Activating DHCP Monitor Service
section on page 12-2, the Status displays as Activated.
Step 3
Step 4
If you want to restart the Cisco DHCP Monitor Service, click Restart.
The service restarts, and the message, Service Successfully Restarted, displays.
Step 5
If you want to stop the Cisco DHCP Monitor Service, click Stop.
The service stops, and the message, Service Successfully Stopped, displays.
Step 6
If you want to start a stopped Cisco DHCP Monitor Service, click Start.
The service starts, and the message, Cisco DHCP Monitor Service Restarted Successfully, displays.
Additional Information
12-3
Chapter 12
Note
During your work in a browser session, the cookies on the client machine store your find/list search
preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item, or if you close the browser
and then reopen a new browser window, the system retains your Cisco Unified Communications
Manager search preferences until you modify your search.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records:
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criteria or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All or matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by
choosing a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
12-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 12
Step 2
To update a server, find the server by using the procedure in the Finding a DHCP Server section
on page 12-4.
To copy a server, find the server by using the procedure in the Finding a DHCP Server section on
page 12-4, select the DHCP server that you want by checking the check box next to the server name,
and click the Copy icon.
Step 4
Click the Save icon that displays in the tool bar in the upper, left corner of the window (or click the Save
button that displays at the bottom of the window) to save the data and to add the server to the database.
Additional Information
Find the DHCP server by using the procedure in the Finding a DHCP Server section on page 12-4.
Step 2
From list of matching records, choose the DHCP server that you want to delete.
Step 3
Click the Delete Selected icon that displays in the tool bar in the upper, left corner of the window (or
click the Delete Selected button that displays at the bottom of the window) to delete the server.
If the server is not in use, Cisco Unified Communications Manager deletes it. If it is in use, an error
message displays.
Note
You can delete multiple host servers from the Find and List Servers window by checking the
check boxes next to the appropriate servers and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all
servers in the window by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
12-5
Chapter 12
Related Topics
Additional Information
Related Topics
Additional Information
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide
12-6
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
13
Description
DHCP Server
Choose the DHCP server name from the drop-down list box.
13-1
Chapter 13
Table 13-1
Description
Domain Name
This field specifies the name that you should use when resolving
hostname via the Domain Name System.
TFTP Server Name (Option Use this field to identify a TFTP server. You can configure only one
66)
DNS name or a dotted decimal IP address in this parameter.
Primary TFTP Server IPv4
Address (Option 150)
This field specifies the IPv4 addresses for primary Trivial File Transfer
Protocol (TFTP) server.
This field specifies the IPv4 addresses for secondary TFTP server.
This field specifies the address of the server that is used in the next step
of the bootstrap process. You can use this as the IPv4 address of the
TFTP server or as the default value to DHCP server address if the server
is to supply the next bootstrap service.
This field specifies the timeout in seconds for ARP cache entries.
Specify the time as a 32-bit unsigned integer.
IP Address Lease Time (sec) The DHCP server uses the information in this field to specify the lease
time that it is willing to offer. Specify the time in units of seconds and
as a 32-bit unsigned integer.
Renewal (T1) Time (sec)
This field specifies the time interval from address assignment until the
client transitions to the RENEWING state.
This field specifies the time interval from address assignment until the
client transitions to the REBINDING state. Specify the value in units of
seconds and as a 32-bit unsigned integer.
Note
During your work in a browser session, the cookies on the client machine store your find/list search
preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item, or if you close the browser
and then reopen a new browser window, the system retains your Cisco Unified Communications
Manager search preferences retained until you modify your search.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
13-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 13
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criteria or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All or matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by
choosing a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
Step 2
To update a subnet, find the subnet by using the procedure in the Finding a DHCP Subnet section
on page 13-2.
13-3
Chapter 13
To copy a subnet, find the subnet by using the procedure in the Finding a DHCP Subnet section
on page 13-2; select the DHCP server that you want by checking the check box next to the server
name and click Copy.
Step 4
Click the Save icon that displays in the tool bar in the upper, left corner of the window (or click the Save
button that displays at the bottom of the window) to save the data and to add the subnet to the database.
Changes to the server configuration do not take effect until you restart Cisco Unified Communications
Manager. For information about restarting the Cisco CallManager service, refer to the Cisco Unified
Serviceability Administration Guide.
Additional Information
Find the DHCP subnet by using the procedure in the Finding a DHCP Subnet section on page 13-2.
Step 2
From list of matching records, choose the DHCP subnet that you want to delete.
Step 3
Click the Delete Selected icon that displays in the tool bar in the upper, left corner of the window (or
click the Delete Selected button that displays at the bottom of the window) to delete the subnet.
If the subnet is not in use, Cisco Unified Communications Manager deletes it. If it is in use, a message
displays.
You can delete multiple DHCP servers from the Find and List Servers window by checking the
check boxes next to the appropriate servers and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all
servers in the window by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
Note
Additional Information
Related Topics
13-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 13
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide
13-5
Chapter 13
Related Topics
13-6
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
14
LDAP System
LDAP Directory
LDAP Authentication
The setting of the Enable Synchronizing from LDAP Server check box in this window affects the ability
to modify end users in Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration. LDAP synchronization
applies only to end users; LDAP synchronization does not affect application users. Refer to the
Understanding the Directory section on page 20-1 for more information about LDAP synchronization.
For end user data, you cannot use the End User Configuration window to update the attributes that get
synchronized from the corporate directory. You can update these attributes only in the corporate
directory itself, after which you should perform a resynchronization.
You can make changes to LDAP Directory information and LDAP Authentication settings only if
synchronization from the customer LDAP directory is enabled in the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager Administration LDAP System window.
14-1
Chapter 14
Note
If end users exist in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager database before synchronization with
a corporate directory occurs, the system will delete those end users that did not have a matching user ID
in the corporate directory. For example, if users bob and sanjay were in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager database, but only bob was in the LDAP directory, then sanjay would be
marked inactive and eventually get deleted by the garbage collector program.
Note
After an LDAP Directory configuration for the DirSync service gets created or the LDAP user
authentication is enabled, the settings in the LDAP System window become read only.
Note
After you configure LDAP synchronization in Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration,
users without last names in the corporate directory do not synchronize with the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager database. No error displays in Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Administration, but the log file indicates which users did not synchronize.
Table 14-1
Field
Description
You cannot modify end user data, except for the fields (attributes) that
are not synchronized from the corporate directory. Example: user PIN.
(The administrator can always modify application user data.)
If synchronization with the LDAP server is not enabled (is disabled), the
following circumstances occur:
14-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 14
Table 14-1
Field
Description
OpenLDAP
Step 2
Step 3
Additional Information
14-3
Chapter 14
Related Topics
Related Topics
Application Users and End Users, Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide
14-4
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
15
LDAP System
LDAP Directory
LDAP Authentication
Before you can synchronize the LDAP directory, you must activate the Cisco DirSync service. For
information about how to activate services, refer to the Cisco Unified Serviceability Administration
Guide.
Changes to LDAP Directory information and LDAP Authentication settings are possible only if
synchronization from the customer LDAP directory is enabled in the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager Administration LDAP System window.
15-1
Chapter 15
Table 15-1
Field
Description
LDAP Manager
Distinguished Name
Enter the user ID (up to 128 characters) of the LDAP Manager, who is
an administrative user that has access rights to the LDAP directory in
question.
LDAP Password
Confirm Password
Reenter the password that you provided in the LDAP Password field.
Enter the location (up to 256 characters) where all LDAP users exist.
This location acts as a container or a directory. This information varies
depending on customer setup.
hours
days
weeks
months
This field remains active only if you do not check the Perform
Sync Just Once check box.
User ID
sAMAccou For these fields, the Cisco Unified Communications Manager data in the
ntName
field specified at left gets synchronized with the LDAP user data in the
field specified at right.
or
uid
15-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 15
Table 15-1
Field
Middle Name
Description
(drop-down For these fields, the Cisco Unified Communications Manager data in the
list box)
field specified at left gets synchronized with the LDAP user data in the
field specified at right.
For the LDAP User field, choose one of the following values:
Manager ID
manager
middleName
initials
For these fields, the Cisco Unified Communications Manager data in the
field specified at left gets synchronized with the LDAP user data in the
field specified at right.
Phone Number (drop-down For these fields, the Cisco Unified Communications Manager data in the
list box)
field specified at left gets synchronized with the LDAP user data in the
field specified at right.
For the LDAP User field, choose one of the following values:
telephoneNumber
ipPhone
First Name
givenName For these fields, the Cisco Unified Communications Manager data in the
field specified at left gets synchronized with the LDAP user data in the
field specified at right.
Last Name
sn
For these fields, the Cisco Unified Communications Manager data in the
field specified at left gets synchronized with the LDAP user data in the
field specified at right.
Department
department
or
department
number
For these fields, the Cisco Unified Communications Manager data in the
field specified at left gets synchronized with the LDAP user data in the
field specified at right.
Mail ID
(drop-down For these fields, the Cisco Unified Communications Manager data in the
list box)
field specified at left gets synchronized with the LDAP user data in the
field specified at right.
For the LDAP User field, choose one of the following values:
sAMAccountName
uid
Host Name or IP Address for Enter the host name or IP address of the server where the data for this
Server
LDAP directory resides.
LDAP Port
Enter the port number on which the corporate directory receives the
LDAP requests.
Default LDAP port for Microsoft Active Directory and for Netscape
Directory specifies 389. Default LDAP port for Secured Sockets Layer
(SSL) specifies 636.
15-3
Chapter 15
Table 15-1
Field
Description
Use SSL
Check this check box to use Secured Sockets Layer (SSL) encryption
for security purposes.
Note
Click this button to add another row for entry of information about an
additional server.
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your LDAP directory search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu
item, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your LDAP directory search
preferences until you modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records:
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criteria or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All or matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by
choosing a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
15-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 15
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
Step 2
To add new information about an LDAP directory, locate the appropriate directory as described in
the Finding an LDAP Directory section on page 15-4, click the Add New button, and continue
with Step 3.
To update existing information about an LDAP directory, locate the appropriate directory as
described in the Finding an LDAP Directory section on page 15-4 and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Save.
The new LDAP directory gets added or updated to the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
database.
Additional Information
15-5
Chapter 15
When you delete an LDAP directory, Cisco Unified Communications Manager removes information
about that directory from the database.
Note
You can delete multiple LDAP directories from the Find and List LDAP directories window by checking
the check boxes next to the appropriate LDAP directories and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete
all LDAP directories in the window by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
Procedure
Step 1
Find the LDAP directory that you want to delete by using the procedure in the Finding an LDAP
Directory section on page 15-4.
Step 2
Click the name of the LDAP directory that you want to delete.
The LDAP directory that you chose displays.
Step 3
Click Delete.
You receive a message that asks you to confirm the deletion.
Step 4
Click OK.
The window refreshes, and the LDAP directory gets deleted from the database.
Additional Information
Related Topics
Application Users and End Users, Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide
15-6
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
16
LDAP System
LDAP Directory
LDAP Authentication
You can make changes to LDAP directory information and LDAP authentication settings only if
synchronization with the customer LDAP directory is enabled in the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager Administration LDAP System window.
Use the following topics to configure LDAP authentication information:
16-1
Chapter 16
Table 16-1 describes the LDAP authentication configuration settings. For related procedures, see the
Related Topics section on page 16-5.
Table 16-1
Field
Description
Click this check box to require authentication of end users from the
LDAP directory. If the check box is left unchecked, authentication gets
performed against the database.
Note
LDAP Manager
Distinguished Name
LDAP Password
You can only access this field if LDAP authentication for end
users is enabled.
Reenter the password that you provided in the LDAP Password field.
Note
You can only access this field if LDAP authentication for end
users is enabled.
Confirm Password
You can only access this field if LDAP authentication for end
users is enabled.
You can only access this field if LDAP authentication for end
users is enabled.
Enter the host name or IP address where you installed the corporate
directory.
Note
You can only access this field if LDAP authentication for end
users is enabled.
16-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 16
Table 16-1
Field
Description
LDAP Port
Enter the port number on which the corporate directory receives the
LDAP requests. You can only access this field if LDAP authentication
for end users is enabled.
The default LDAP port for Microsoft Active Directory and for Netscape
Directory specifies 389. The default LDAP port for Secured Sockets
Layer (SSL) specifies 636.
How your corporate directory is configured determines which port
number to enter in this field. For example, before you configure the
LDAP Port field, determine whether your LDAP server acts as a Global
Catalog server and whether your configuration requires LDAP over
SSL. Consider entering one of the following port numbers:
LDAP Port For When the LDAP Server Is Not a Global Catalog Server
636When SSL is required. (If you enter this port number, make
sure that you check the Use SSL check box.)
LDAP Port For When the LDAP Server Is a Global Catalog Server
3269When SSL is required. (If you enter this port number, make
sure that you check the Use SSL check box.)
Tip
16-3
Chapter 16
Table 16-1
Field
Description
Use SSL
Check this check box to use SSL encryption for security purposes.
Note
If you check the Use SSL check box, enter the IP address or the
hostname that exists in the corporate directory SSL certificate in the
Host Name or IP Address for Server field in the LDAP Authentication
Configuration window. If the certificate contains an IP address, enter the
IP address. If the certificate contains the hostname, enter the hostname.
If you do not enter the IP address or hostname exactly as it exists in the
certificate, problems may occur for some applications; for example,
applications that use CTIManager.
Add Another Redundant
LDAP Server
Click this button to add another row for entry of information about an
additional server.
Note
You can only access this button if LDAP authentication for end
users is enabled.
The setting of the Enable Synchronizing from LDAP Server check box in the LDAP System
Configuration window affects your ability to modify LDAP authentication settings. If synchronization
with the LDAP server is enabled, you cannot modify LDAP directory information and LDAP
authorization settings. Refer to the Understanding the Directory section on page 20-1 for more
information about LDAP synchronization.
Conversely, if you want to enable administrators to modify LDAP directory information and LDAP
authorization settings, you must disable synchronization with the LDAP server.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Additional Information
16-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 16
Related Topics
Application Users and End Users, Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide
16-5
Chapter 16
Related Topics
16-6
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
17
Location Configuration
The following topics explain locations in more detail:
Note
If you do not use call admission control to limit the audio and video bandwidth on an IP WAN link, an
unlimited number of calls can be active on that link at the same time. This situation can cause the audio
quality of each audio call and the video quality of each video call to degrade as the link becomes
oversubscribed.
Tip
Do not confuse locations with geolocations. Locations, which you configure by using the System >
Location menu option, allow you to define entities that a centralized call-processing system uses to
provide call admission control (CAC). Geolocations, which you configure by using the System >
Geolocation Configuration menu option, allow you to specify geographic locations that you use to
associate Cisco Unified Communications Manager devices for features such as logical partitioning.
In a centralized call-processing system, a single Cisco Unified Communications Manager cluster
provides call processing for all locations on the IP telephony network. The Cisco Unified
Communications Manager cluster usually resides at the main (or central) location, along with other
devices such as phones and gateways. The remote locations contain additional devices, but no Cisco
Unified Communications Manager. IP WAN links connect the remote locations to the main location.
17-1
Chapter 17
Location Configuration
Cisco Unified Communications Manager supports up to 2000 locations. The following limitations and
restrictions apply:
Configure as many locations as possible to Use System Default for the RSVP policy.
Refer to the Regions subtopic under the Administration Considerations topic of the IP Video
Telephony chapter of the Cisco Unified Communications Solution Reference Network Design
(SRND) for the current release, which provides recommendations as to how the video bandwidth
should be set for regions and locations, so the video portion of video calls will succeed, and the
video calls will not get rejected nor set up as audio-only calls.
Table 17-1 describes the location configuration settings. For related procedures, see the Related
Topics section on page 17-7.
Table 17-1
Field
Description
Location Information
Name
Enter the name of the new location that you are creating.
Two default locations that cannot be modified exist:
Note
17-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 17
Location Configuration
Location Configuration Settings
Table 17-1
Field
Description
Audio Bandwidth
Enter the maximum amount of audio bandwidth (in kb/s) that is available
for all audio calls on the link between this location and other locations.
For audio calls, the audio bandwidth includes overhead. Choose between
the following options:
Note
Video Bandwidth
Enter the maximum amount of video bandwidth (in kb/s) that is available
for all video calls on the link between this location and other locations.
For video calls, the video bandwidth does not include overhead. Choose
among the following options:
NoneThe system does not allow video calls between this location
and other locations. Video calls can, however, take place within this
location.
Location
RSVP Setting
This display-only field displays the RSVP policy setting between the
selected location and the location that is listed in the Location column to
the left.
17-3
Chapter 17
Location Configuration
Finding a Location
Table 17-1
Field
Description
Location
To change the RSVP policy setting between the current location and a
location that displays in this pane, choose a location in this pane.
RSVP Setting
To choose an RSVP policy setting between the current location and the
location that is chosen in the Location pane at left, choose an RSVP
setting from the drop-down list box. Choose from the following available
settings:
Use System DefaultThe RSVP policy for the location pair matches
the clusterwide RSVP policy. See the Clusterwide Default RSVP
Policy section of the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
System Guide for details.
Finding a Location
Because you might have several locations in your network, Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Administration lets you locate specific locations on the basis of specific criteria. Use the following
procedure to find locations.
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your location search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item, Cisco
Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your location search preferences until you
modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
17-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 17
Location Configuration
Configuring a Location
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criteria or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search criteria.
Click Find.
All or matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by
choosing a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
Configuring a Location
This section describes how to add, copy, or update a location to the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager database.
Before You Begin
Before configuring a location, you must configure the Cisco Unified Communications Managers that
form the cluster. Before configuring a location, you must configure the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager. For details, see the Updating a Cisco Unified Communications Manager section on page 3-6
Procedure
Step 1
17-5
Chapter 17
Location Configuration
Deleting a Location
Step 2
To copy an existing location, locate the appropriate location as described in the Finding a Location
section on page 17-4, click the Copy button next to the location that you want to copy, and continue
with Step 3.
To add a new location, click the Add New button and continue with Step 3.
To update an existing location, locate the appropriate location as described in the Finding a
Location section on page 17-4 and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
Step 4
Next Steps
After adding a new location to the database, you can assign devices to that location; for example, see
Additional Information
Deleting a Location
This section describes how to delete a location from the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
database.
Before You Begin
You cannot delete a location to which devices are assigned. To find out which devices are using the
location, click Dependency Records from Related Links in the Location Configuration window; then,
click Go. If the dependency records are not enabled for the system, the dependency records summary
window displays a message. For more information about dependency records, see the Accessing
Dependency Records section on page A-2. If you try to delete a location that is in use, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager displays a message. Before deleting a location that is currently in use, you
must perform either or both of the following tasks:
Note
Delete the devices that are assigned to the location that you want to delete.
Deleting a location allocates infinite bandwidth for the links that are connected to that location and
allows an unlimited number of calls on those links. Deleting a location can cause audio quality on the
links to degrade.
17-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 17
Location Configuration
Resynchronizing a Location Bandwidth
Procedure
Step 1
Find the location by using the procedure in the Finding a Location section on page 17-4.
Step 2
From the list of matching records, choose the location that you want to delete.
Step 3
Step 4
When prompted to confirm the delete operation, click either OK to confirm deletion or Cancel to cancel
the delete operation.
Additional Information
Find the location by using the procedure in the Finding a Location section on page 17-4.
Step 2
From the list of matching records, choose the location that you want to resynchronize.
The Location Configuration window displays.
Step 3
To resynchronize the bandwidth for the chosen location, click Resync Bandwidth.
This following message displays: If calls are using the bandwidth for this location when the bandwidth
is resynchronized, the bandwidth might be oversubscribed until all calls that are using the bandwidth for
this location disconnect.
Step 4
Additional Information
Related Topics
17-7
Chapter 17
Location Configuration
Related Topics
17-8
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
18
18-1
Chapter 18
18-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
19
Field
Description
Name
Enter a name in the SRST Reference Name field. The name can
comprise up to 50 alphanumeric characters and can contain any
combination of spaces, periods (.), hyphens (-), and underscore
characters (_). Ensure that each SRST reference name is unique.
Note
Port
Enter the port number for this SRST reference. Default value specifies
2000.
Note
IP Address
Change this value only if it does not match the gateway port
setting. This value and the gateway port setting must match.
Enter the IP address of the gateway for devices in a device pool to use
as an SRST reference.
19-1
Chapter 19
Table 19-1
Field
Description
Enter the IP address of the server that the phones that are running SIP
will use when in SRST mode.
Tip
You must configure the SIP Network/IP Address field and the
SIP Port field for a SIP device to fall back to the SRST-enabled
gateway
SIP Port
Enter the SIP port of the SRST gateway. Default value specifies 5060.
Is SRST Secure?
This port monitors requests for the Certificate Provider service on the
SRST-enabled gateway. Cisco Unified Communications Manager uses
this port to retrieve the certificate from the SRST-enabled gateway. The
Cisco SRST Certificate Provider default port equals 2445.
After you configure this port on the SRST-enabled gateway, enter the
port number in this field.
Tip
Tip
This button displays only after you check the Is SRST Secure?
check box and click Save.
Update Certificate
After you click this button, the Cisco CTL client replaces the existing
SRST-enabled gateway certificate that is stored in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager database, if a certificate exists in the
database. After you reset the dependent phones, the TFTP server sends
the cnf.xml file (with the new SRST-enabled gateway certificate) to the
phones.
19-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 19
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your SRST reference search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu
item, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your SRST reference search
preferences until you modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
19-3
Chapter 19
Step 2
To add a new SRST reference, click the Add New button and continue with Step 3.
To update an existing SRST reference, locate the appropriate SRST reference as described in the
Finding an SRST Reference section on page 19-2 and continue with Step 3.
To copy an existing SRST reference, locate the appropriate SRST reference as described in the
Finding an SRST Reference section on page 19-2, click the Copy button next to the SRST
reference that you want to copy, and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Save.
Note
If devices are associated with this SRST reference, a message displays to tell you that devices
need to be reset for the update to take effect. Cisco Unified Communications Manager may drop
calls in progress on an affected gateway may be dropped when the gateway is reset.
To reset the affected devices, click the Reset Devices button when the update is complete. If you
do not want to reset the devices at this time, you can return to this item at any time and click the
Reset Devices button to initiate the required device resets.
Additional Information
You cannot delete SRST references that device pools or other items are using. To find out which device
pools are using the SRST reference, click the Dependency Records link from the SRST Reference
Configuration window. If the dependency records are not enabled for the system, the dependency records
summary window displays a message. For more information about dependency records, see the
Accessing Dependency Records section on page A-2. If you try to delete an SRST reference that is in
use, Cisco Unified Communications Manager displays an error message. Before deleting an SRST
reference that is currently in use, you must perform either or both of the following tasks:
Assign a different SRST reference to any device pools that are using the SRST reference that you
want to delete. Refer to the Configuring a Device Pool section on page 9-11.
19-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 19
Delete the device pools that are using the SRST reference that you want to delete. See the Deleting
a Device Pool section on page 9-13.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the SRST reference that you want to delete. See the Finding an SRST Reference section on
page 19-2.
Step 3
Check the check box of the SRST reference that you want to delete and click Delete Selected.
A message displays, that tells you that you cannot undo this action.
Step 4
Caution
To delete the SRST reference, click OK or to cancel the deletion, click Cancel.
Before initiating this action, check carefully to ensure that you are deleting the correct SRST reference.
You cannot retrieve deleted SRST references. If an SRST reference is accidentally deleted, you must
rebuild it.
You can also delete an SRST reference by locating and displaying the SRST reference that you
want to delete and clicking Delete.
Tip
Additional Information
Related Topics
Survivable Remote Site Telephony References, Cisco Unified Communications Manager System
Guide
19-5
Chapter 19
Related Topics
19-6
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
20
Field
Description
Enter the name that you want to assign to the new MLPP domain. The
name can comprise up to 50 alphanumeric characters and can contain any
combination of spaces, periods (.), hyphens (-), and underscore
characters (_). Ensure that each MLPP domain name is unique.
Note
Domain ID
20-1
Chapter 20
Note
You can add secure MLPP over SIP trunks by configuring a Resource Priority Namespace Network
Domain and Resource Priority Namespace List. See Configuring a Resource Priority Namespace
Network Domain, page 21-3 and Configuring a Resource Priority Namespace List, page 22-3.
Additional Information
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your MLPP domain search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item,
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your MLPP domain search preferences
until you modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
20-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 20
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
Step 2
To copy an existing MLPP domain, locate the appropriate MLPP domain as described in the
Finding an MLPP Domain section on page 20-2, click the Copy button next to the MLPP domain
that you want to copy, and continue with Step 3.
To add a new MLPP domain, click the Add New button, and continue with Step 3.
To update an existing MLPP domain, locate the appropriate MLPP domain as described in the
Finding an MLPP Domain section on page 20-2, and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
In the MLPP Domain Configuration window that displays, enter or edit the appropriate settings as
described in Table 20-1.
Step 4
Click Save to save the new or updated MLPP domain in the database.
Additional Information
You cannot delete an MLPP Domain that any device is using. To find out which devices are using the
MLPP domain, from the MLPP Domain Configuration window, choose Dependency Records from the
Related Links drop-down list box and click Go. If the dependency records are not enabled for the system,
the dependency records summary window displays a message. For more information about dependency
20-3
Chapter 20
Related Topics
records, refer to the Accessing Dependency Records section on page A-2. If you try to delete an MLPP
Domain that is in use, Cisco Unified Communications Manager displays an error message. Before
deleting an MLPP Domain that is currently in use, you must perform either or both of the following
tasks:
Assign a different MLPP domain to any devices that are using the MLPP domain that you want to
delete.
Delete the devices that are using the MLPP domain that you want to delete.
Procedure
Step 1
Find the MLPP domain by using the procedure in the Finding an MLPP Domain section on page 20-2.
Step 2
From the list of matching records, choose the MLPP domain that you want to delete.
Step 3
Click Delete.
Step 4
When prompted to confirm the delete operation, click either OK to delete or Cancel to cancel the delete
operation.
Additional Information
Related Topics
Multilevel Precedence and Preemption, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and
Services Guide
20-4
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
21
Field
Description
Name
Enter the name for the Resource Priority Namespace Network Domain in
the information section. The maximum number of domain names is 100.
Description
Check the box if you want the domain name to be the default.
21-1
Chapter 21
Additional Information
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your resource priority namespace network domain search preferences. If you navigate to other menu
items and return to this menu item, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your
resource priority namespace network domain search preferences until you modify your search or close
the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose System > MLPP > Namespace > Resource Priority Namespace Network Domain.
The Find and List Resource Priority Namespace Network Domain window displays. Records from an
active (prior) query may also display in the window.
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
21-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 21
Step 4
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
Choose System > MLPP > Namespace > Resource Priority Namespace Network Domain.
The Find and List Resource Priority Namespace Network Domain window displays.
Step 2
To copy an existing Resource Priority Namespace Network Domain, locate the appropriate Resource
Priority Namespace Network Domain as described in the Finding a Resource Priority Namespace
Network Domain section on page 21-2. Click the Copy button next to the Resource Priority
Namespace Network Domain that you want and continue with Step 3.
To add a new Resource Priority Namespace Network Domain, click the Add New button, and
continue with Step 3.
To update an existing Resource Priority Namespace Network Domain, locate the appropriate
Resource Priority Namespace Network Domain as described in the Finding a Resource Priority
Namespace Network Domain section on page 21-2 and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
In the Resource Priority Namespace Network Domain Configuration window that displays, enter or edit
the appropriate settings as described in Table 21-1.
Step 4
Click Save to save the new or updated Resource Priority Namespace Network Domain in the database.
Additional Information
21-3
Chapter 21
You cannot delete a Resource Priority Namespace Network Domain that any device is using. To find out
which devices are using the Resource Priority Namespace Network Domain, from the Resource Priority
Namespace Network Domain Configuration window, choose Dependency Records from the Related
Links drop-down list box and click Go. If the dependency records are not enabled for the system, the
dependency records summary window displays a message. For more information about dependency
records, refer to the Accessing Dependency Records section on page A-2.
If you try to delete an Resource Priority Namespace Network Domain that is in use, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager displays an error message. Before deleting a Resource Priority Namespace
Network Domain that is currently in use, you must perform either or both of the following tasks:
Assign a different Resource Priority Namespace Network Domain to any devices that are using the
Resource Priority Namespace Network Domain that you want to delete.
Delete the devices that are using the Resource Priority Namespace Network Domain that you want
to delete.
Procedure
Step 1
Find the Resource Priority Namespace Network Domain by using the procedure in the Finding a
Resource Priority Namespace Network Domain section on page 21-2.
Step 2
From the list of matching records, choose the Resource Priority Namespace Network Domain that you
want to delete.
Step 3
Click Delete.
Step 4
When prompted to confirm the delete operation, click either OK to delete or Cancel to cancel the delete
operation.
Additional Information
Related Topics
21-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 21
Multilevel Precedence and Preemption, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and
Services Guide
21-5
Chapter 21
Related Topics
21-6
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
22
Field
Description
Name
Enter the name for the Resource Priority Namespace List. The maximum
number of characters is 50.
Description
Available Resource Priority Use the Up and Down Arrows to select or deselect already configured
Namespaces
Resource Priority Namespace Network Domains.
Selected Resource Priority
Namespaces
Additional Information
22-1
Chapter 22
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your Resource Priority Namespace List search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and
return to this menu item, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your Resource
Priority Namespace List search preferences until you modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose System > MLPP > Namespace > Resource Priority Namespace List.
The Find and List Resource Priority Namespace List window displays. Records from an active (prior)
query may also display in the window.
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
22-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 22
Choose System > MLPP > Namespace > Resource Priority Namespace List.
The Find and List Resource Priority Namespace List window displays.
Step 2
To copy an existing Resource Priority Namespace List, locate the appropriate Resource Priority
Namespace List as described in the Finding a Resource Priority Namespace List section on
page 22-2, click the Copy button next to the Resource Priority Namespace List that you want to
copy, and continue with Step 3.
To add a new Resource Priority Namespace List, click the Add New button, and continue with
Step 3.
To update an existing Resource Priority Namespace List, locate the appropriate Resource Priority
Namespace List as described in the Finding a Resource Priority Namespace List section on
page 22-2, and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
In the Resource Priority Namespace List Configuration window that displays, enter or edit the
appropriate settings as described in Table 22-1.
Step 4
Click Save to save the new or updated Resource Priority Namespace List in the database.
Additional Information
You cannot delete a Resource Priority Namespace List that any device is using. To find out which
devices are using the Resource Priority Namespace List, from the Resource Priority Namespace List
Configuration window, choose Dependency Records from the Related Links drop-down list box and
click Go. If the dependency records are not enabled for the system, the dependency records summary
window displays a message. For more information about dependency records, refer to the Accessing
Dependency Records section on page A-2. If you try to delete an Resource Priority Namespace List that
is in use, Cisco Unified Communications Manager displays an error message. Before deleting an
Resource Priority Namespace List that is currently in use, you must perform either or both of the
following tasks:
Assign a different Resource Priority Namespace List to any devices that are using the Resource
Priority Namespace Network Domain List that you want to delete.
Delete the devices that are using the Resource Priority Namespace List that you want to delete.
22-3
Chapter 22
Related Topics
Procedure
Step 1
Find the Resource Priority Namespace List by using the procedure in the Finding a Resource Priority
Namespace List section on page 22-2.
Step 2
From the list of matching records, choose the Resource Priority Namespace List that you want to delete.
Step 3
Click Delete.
Step 4
When prompted to confirm the delete operation, click either OK to delete or Cancel to cancel the delete
operation.
Additional Information
Related Topics
22-4
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
23
Note
Many of the enterprise parameters rarely require change. Do not change an enterprise parameter unless
you fully understand the feature that you are changing or unless the Cisco Technical Assistance Center
(TAC) specifies the change.
Tip
Clicking the Set to Default button updates all parameters to the suggested value, which is the default that
displays on the right side of the parameter. If a parameter does not have a suggested value, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager does not update the value when you click the Set to Default button; for
example, the Phone URL Parameters in the Enterprise Parameters Configuration window do not display
a suggested value, so clicking the Set to Default button does not change the value that you configured.
Step 2
Step 3
23-1
Chapter 23
Step 2
Step 3
Click Save.
Step 4
Step 5
Click OK.
23-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
24
Step 2
Step 3
Note
Parameters that you set in this window may also appear in the Common Phone profile window and the
Device Configuration window for various devices. If you set these same parameters in these other
windows too, the setting that takes precedence is determined in the following order: 1) Device
Configuration window settings, 2) Common Phone Profile window settings, 3) Enterprise Phone
Configuration window settings.
24-1
Chapter 24
24-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
25
Note
For information about what happens to service parameter values during an upgrade, refer to Upgrading
Cisco Unified Communications Manager.
For more information about Cisco Unified Communications Manager services, refer to the Cisco Unified
Serviceability Administration Guide.
Use the following topics to configure or display service parameters:
For information about what happens to service parameter values during an upgrade, refer to
Upgrading Cisco Unified Communications Manager.
Feature services, which display under Service Activation and Control CenterFeature Services in
Cisco Unified Serviceability, can display as active or inactive in the Service Parameters
Configuration window. If you activated the feature service in Cisco Unified Serviceability, the
service displays as active in the Service Parameters Configuration window; for example, Cisco
CallManager (active). If you have not activated the feature service, the service displays as inactive
in the Service Parameters Configuration window.
25-1
Chapter 25
Network services, which display under Control CenterNetwork Services in Cisco Unified
Serviceability, always display as active in the Service Parameters Configuration window; for
example, Cisco DRF Master (active). With network services, you do not need to start the service in
Cisco Unified Serviceability because it automatically runs on the server after the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager installation/upgrade.
In the Service Parameters Configuration window, be aware that network services display as active
even for dummy nodes, which are servers that display in the Server Configuration window in Cisco
Unified Communications Manager Administration but that do not have Cisco Unified
Communications Manager installed on them.
For more information about Cisco Unified Communications Manager services, refer to the Cisco
Unified Serviceability Administration Guide.
In the Server drop-down list box in the Service Parameter Configuration window, all servers,
including dummy nodes, display as active; for example, <server name> (active). In this case, active
means that you provisioned the server in Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration.
If you deactivate a service by using Cisco Unified Serviceability, Cisco Unified Communications
Manager retains any updated service parameter values. If you start the service again, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager sets the service parameters to the changed values.
Clicking the Set to Default button updates all parameters to the suggested value, which is the default
that displays on the right side of the parameter. If a parameter does not have a suggested value, Cisco
Unified Communications Manager does not update the value when you click the Set to Default
button; for example, the Mobile Voice Access service parameter for the Cisco CallManager service
does not display a suggested value, so clicking the Set to Default button does not change the value
that you enter for this parameter.
Caution
Some changes to service parameters may cause system failure. Cisco recommends that you do not make
any changes to service parameters unless you fully understand the feature that you are changing or unless
the Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC) specifies the changes.
Note
You can configure a SIP trunk to use a DNS SRV port on a Cisco Unified Presence server as a
destination. If you use a SIP trunk with a DNS SRV destination to configure the CUP Publish Trunk
service parameter and then modify the DNS record, you must restart all devices (phones) that previously
published, so they point to the correct Cisco Unified Presence server destination.
Before You Begin
Ensure the following prerequisites are met before proceeding with the steps:
Make sure that servers are configured. Refer to the Server Configuration section on page 2-1 for
more information.
Make sure that the service is available on the servers. The Service Parameter Configuration window
displays all the available services. For more information on services, refer to the Cisco Unified
Serviceability Administration Guide for more information.
Use the following procedure to configure the service parameters for a particular service on a particular
server.
25-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 25
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
From the Service drop-down list box, choose the service that contains the parameter that you want to
update.
Note
The Service Parameter Configuration window displays all services (active or not active).
Update the appropriate parameter value. To set all service parameters for this instance of the service to
the default values, click the Set to Default button.
To view a list of parameters and their descriptions, click the question mark button. To view the list with
a particular parameter at the top, click that parameter in the Service Parameter Configuration window.
Note
Step 5
Some services contain service parameters that should rarely be changed. Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration does not automatically display these parameters
when you access the Service Parameter Configuration window. To view all parameters, click
Advanced. After all parameters display, you can redisplay the basic parameters by clicking
Condensed. If the Advanced button is disabled, all parameters for that service display by
default.
Click Save.
The window refreshes, and Cisco Unified Communications Manager updates the service parameter with
your changes.
Additional Information
Step 2
25-3
Chapter 25
Related Topics
Step 3
From the Service drop-down list box, choose the service for which you want to display the service
parameters on all servers in a cluster.
The Service Parameter Configuration window displays all services (active or not active).
Note
Step 4
In the Service Parameter Configuration window that displays, choose Parameters for All Servers in
The Related Links Drop-down List Box; then, click Go.
The Parameters for All Servers window displays. For the current service, the list shows all parameters
in alphabetical order. For each parameter, the suggested value displays next to the parameter name.
Under each parameter name, a list of servers that contain this parameter displays. Next to each server
name, the current value for this parameter on this server displays.
For a given parameter, click on the server name or on the current parameter value to link to the
corresponding service parameter window to change the value. Click Previous and Next to navigate
between Parameters for All Servers windows.
Step 5
If you need to display out-of-sync service parameters, choose Out of Sync Parameters for All Servers
in the Related Links drop-down list box, then click Go.
The Out of Sync Parameters for All Servers window displays. For the current service, service parameters
that have different values on different servers display in alphabetical order. For each parameter, the
suggested value displays next to the parameter name. Under each parameter name, a list of servers that
contain this parameter displays. Next to each server name, the current value for this parameter on this
server displays.
For a given parameter, click the server name or the current parameter value to link to the corresponding
service parameter window to change the value. Click Previous and Next to navigate between Out of
Sync Parameters for All Servers windows.
Step 6
If you need to display service parameters that have been modified from the suggested value, choose
Modified Parameters for All Servers in the Related Links drop-down list box; then, click Go.
The Modified Parameters for All Servers window displays. For the current service, service parameters
that have values that differ from the suggested values display in alphabetical order. For each parameter,
the suggested value displays next to the parameter name. Under each parameter name, a list of servers
that have different values from the suggested values displays. Next to each server name, the current value
for this parameter on this server displays.
For a given parameter, click the server name or the current parameter value to link to the corresponding
service parameter window to change the value. Click Previous and Next to navigate between Modified
Parameters for All Servers windows.
Additional Information
Related Topics
25-4
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
26
26-1
Chapter 26
26-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
27
27-1
Chapter 27
27-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
28
28-1
Chapter 28
28-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
29
Tip
Application server configuration does not support Cisco Unity Connection 2.x. To push a list of valid
user templates for Cisco Unity Connection 2.x to Cisco Unified Communications Manager, create an
AXL connection via Cisco Unity Connection 2.x, as described in the System Administration Guide for
Cisco Unity Connection.
Table 29-1
Field
Description
29-1
Chapter 29
Table 29-1
Field
Description
Name
IP Address
Tip
URL
Enter a URL for the end users that are associated with this
application server.
This pane displays the application users that are available for
association with this application server.
To associate an application user with this application server,
select the application user (for example, CCMAdministrator,
CCMSysUser, UnityConnection, and so on) and click the Down
arrow below this pane.
This pane displays the application users that are associated with
the application server. To remove an application user, select the
application user and click the Up arrow above this pane. To add
an application user, select an application user in the Available
Application Users pane and click the Down arrow.
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
29-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 29
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criteria or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search criteria.
Click Find.
All or matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by
choosing a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
You can configure the application servers in Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration
after both the Cisco Unified Communications Manager servers and any other application servers are set
up and fully operational and are running with a valid configuration.
Note
For Cisco Unity and Cisco Unity Connection, make sure that AXL is running on the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager server that was configured to communicate with the Cisco Unity and
Cisco Unity Connection server.
Procedure
Step 1
29-3
Chapter 29
Step 2
To copy an existing application server, locate the server that you want to copy as described in
Finding an Application Server, page 29-2; click the server name. The Application Server
Configuration window displays. Click the Copy button and continue with Step 4.
To add a new application server, click the Add New button and continue with Step 3.
To update an existing application server, locate the appropriate server as described in Finding an
Application Server, page 29-2, and continue with Step 4.
Step 3
From the Application Server Type drop-down list box, choose the appropriate server type and click Next.
After you choose an application server type, you cannot modify it.
Step 4
Step 5
Click Save.
Additional Information
Step 2
To locate a specific application server, enter search criteria and click Find.
A list of application servers that match the search criteria displays.
Step 3
Check the check boxes next to the application servers that you want to delete and click Delete
Selected.
Delete all the application servers in the window by clicking Select All and then Delete Selected.
Choose the name of the application server that you want to delete from the list to display its current
settings and click Delete.
Click OK.
Additional Information
29-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 29
Related Topics
Cisco Unity Messaging Integration, Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide
29-5
Chapter 29
Related Topics
29-6
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
30
Note
For more information on requesting licenses, refer to the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
System Guide.
A unit license refers to a fixed number of device license units that correspond to each phone type. For
example, Cisco Unified IP Wireless 7920 requires four device license units, and a Cisco Unified IP
Phone 7970 requires five device license units. If you are provisioning four 7920 phones and four 7970
phones, you require 36 phone license units.
The number of licensed units in the license file corresponds to the number of unit licenses for all the
phone types that are purchased.
The License Unit Report window displays the status of a license file. For example, the Status column
for each license type may display Demo, Missing, or Uploaded.
Note
To determine the number of license unit that are required for each device, choose System > Licensing >
License Unit Calculator. This window lists the number of license units that are required for each type
of device.
Use the following procedure to generate a report for the number of licenses that are available.
Procedure
Step 1
30-1
Chapter 30
Related Topics
Step 2
The License Unit Report window displays. This window displays the number of phone licenses, number
of node licenses, and software license versions. Phone and node licenses that are available display by
Units Authorized
Units Used
Units Remaining
Additional Information
Related Topics
30-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
31
Step 2
In the Number of Devices column, update the number of needed devices, corresponding to each node or
phone.
Step 3
Click Calculate.
The total number of Cisco Unified Communications Manager node license units and phone license units
displays.
Additional Information
31-1
Chapter 31
Related Topics
Related Topics
31-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
32
Note
Because license manager is a network service, it automatically starts and runs after the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager installation.
Procedure
Step 1
In Cisco Unified Serviceability, choose Tools > Control Center - Network Services.
The Control CenterNetwork Services window displays.
Step 2
Choose the Cisco Unified Communications Manager server from the Servers drop-down list box.
Step 3
Step 4
32-1
Chapter 32
Step 5
Step 6
Additional Information
Note
You do not need to obtain new licenses if you are upgrading within a software release train, such as Cisco
Unified Communications Manager 6.0(1) to 6.1(1).
To obtain a license, see the section that applies to your situation:
If you are installing new Cisco Unified Communications Manager or devices that require additional
device license units, see the New Cisco Unified Communications Manager Nodes and Devices
section on page 32-2.
If you are upgrading from Cisco Unified CallManager 4.x, obtain a software feature license as
described in Obtaining a Software Feature License section on page 32-3 and then upgrade the
product licenses as described in the Upgrading Product Licenses section on page 32-4.
If you are upgrading from supported versions of Cisco Unified Communications Manager 5.x or 6.x,
see the Obtaining a Software Feature License section on page 32-3.
32-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 32
Procedure
Step 1
Enter the Product Authorization Key (PAK) that you received with your Cisco Unified Communications
Manager or phone order in the License Registration web tool at http://www.cisco.com/go/license.
Step 2
Click Submit.
Step 3
Follow the system prompts. You must enter the MAC address of the Ethernet 0 NIC of the first node of
the Cisco Unified Communications Manager cluster. You must enter a valid e-mail address as well as the
number of nodes and device license units for which you want licenses.
Note
For information on calculating the number of device license units that are required for the
devices in your system, refer to the Calculating License Units section on page 31-1.
The system sends the license file(s) to you via e-mail by using the E-mail ID that you provided. The
format of a license file specifies CCM<timestamp>.lic. If you retain the .lic extension, you can rename
the license file. You cannot use the license if you edit the contents of the file in any way.
Note
Step 4
Note
One license file may apply to more than one node in your cluster. For information on how to
interpret the license file, see the Uploading a License File section on page 32-5.
You must upload the license file to the server with the matching MAC address that you provided in
Step 3. See the Uploading a License File section on page 32-5. This server then takes on the
functionality of the license manager.
You can use the licenses that are specified in the license file only within the cluster on which the license
file is uploaded.
Additional Information
Step 2
Enter the Product Authorization Key (PAK) that you received with your Cisco Unified Communications
Manager upgrade.
32-3
Chapter 32
Step 3
Click Submit.
Step 4
Follow the system prompts. You must enter the MAC address of the Ethernet 0 NIC of the first node of
the Cisco Unified Communications Manager cluster. You must also enter a valid e-mail address.
The system sends the license file to you via e-mail by using the e-mail address that you provided. To
view the contents of a software feature license, refer to License File Contents in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager System Guide.
Step 5
You must upload the software license file to the server with the matching MAC address that you provided
in Step 4. See the Uploading a License File section on page 32-5.
Step 6
If you are upgrading from Cisco Unified CallManager 4.x, perform the procedure that is described in the
Upgrading Product Licenses section on page 32-4.
Additional Information
When you use Data Migration Assistant to migrate your data, choose the Export > Storage Location >
Destination Option for License File tool to specify a local directory destination for the license file
licupgrade.lic
Note
Do not specify a mapped network directory for the Local Directory. If you do, be aware that
DMA may not be able to create the destination folder.
Step 2
Run DMA according to instructions in the Data Migration Assistant User Guide.
Step 3
Upgrade the Cisco Unified Communications Manager servers according to instructions in the document
Upgrading Cisco Unified Communications Manager Release 7.1(2) from Cisco Unified Communications
Manager 4.x Releases.
Step 4
Upload the license file to the server with the matching MAC address of the Ethernet 0 NIC of the first
node of the Cisco Unified Communications Manager cluster.
32-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 32
Step 5
If your system requires additional device license units, you can obtain licenses for new devices that you are
adding to the upgraded system. For detailed instructions, see the New Cisco Unified Communications
Manager Nodes and Devices section on page 32-2.
Procedure 2
Step 1
After you complete the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration upgrade process, as
described in Upgrading Cisco Unified Communications Manager, navigate to Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration and choose System > Licensing > License File Upload.
The License File Upload window displays.
Step 2
Choose the licugrade_<upgrade version>.lic file from the Existing Files drop-down list and click View
File. The window refreshes and displays the license information for existing devices and nodes. Copy
this information. To copy the contents on this window, you can use Ctrl-A (Select All) and Ctrl-C
(Copy).
Step 3
Step 4
Enter the MAC address of the Ethernet 0 NIC of the first node of the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager in the cluster.
Step 5
In the text box that is provided, paste the license file contents that you copied in Step 2 by using the
appropriate keyboard shortcuts, such as Ctrl-V.
Step 6
Enter a valid e-mail address and click Continue. A license file generates.
The system sends the license file to you through e-mail by using the e-mail address that you provided.
Step 7
You must upload the license file to the server with the matching MAC address that you provided in
Step 4. See the Uploading a License File section on page 32-5.
Step 8
You can obtain licenses for new devices that you are adding to the upgraded system, if your system requires
additional device license units. For detailed instructions, see the New Cisco Unified Communications
Manager Nodes and Devices section on page 32-2.
Additional Information
32-5
Chapter 32
complete the upgrade to Cisco Unified Communications Manager 7.1, upload the software feature
license that is required for Cisco Unified Communications Manager 7.1 in Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration and restart the Cisco CallManager service in Cisco Unified
Serviceability. Until you perform these tasks, devices fail to register with Cisco Unified
Communications Manager 7.1.
Note
Upload the license file only on the first node of Cisco Unified Communications Manager cluster.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
The Existing License Files drop-down list box displays the license files that are already uploaded to the
server.
Note
Step 3
To view the file content of any existing files, choose the file from the drop-down list box and
click View File.
Step 4
Note
Step 5
The format of the license file that you receive specifies CCM<timestamp>.lic. If you retain
the .lic extension, you can rename the license file. You cannot use the license if you edit the
contents of the file in any way.
Click Upload.
After the upload process completes, the Upload Result file displays.
Step 6
Click Close.
Step 7
In the License File Upload window, the status of the uploaded file displays. In Cisco Unified
Serviceability, restart the Cisco CallManager service.
Note
The system uploads the license file into the database only if the version that is specified in the
license file is greater than or equal to the Cisco Unified Communications Manager version that
is running in the cluster. If the version check fails, an alarm gets generated, and you should get
a new license file with the correct version. The system bases the version check only on major
releases.
Additional Information
32-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 32
Related Topics
32-7
Chapter 32
Related Topics
32-8
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
33
Field
Description
User Information
User ID
Displays the name of the user for which you are enabling capabilities
assignment.
33-1
Chapter 33
Table 33-1
Field
Description
Enable CUP (Cisco Unified To enable CUP for this user, check the Enable CUP (Cisco Unified
Presence)
Presence) check box.
Enable CUPC (Cisco
Unified Personal
Communicator)
To enable CUPC for this user, check the Enable UPC (Cisco Unified
Personal Communicator) check box. You can enable both CUP and
CUPC; however, if you want CUPC, you must also enable CUP.
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your location search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item, Cisco
Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your location search preferences until you
modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criteria or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All or matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by
choosing a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
33-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 33
Step 4
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
Before configuring a capabilities assignment, you must obtain licenses from Cisco Systems by using the
License File Upload under the System menu.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To add a new capabilities assignment or update an existing capabilities assignment, locate the
appropriate capabilities assignment as described in the Finding a License Capabilities Assignment
section on page 33-2 and continue with Step 3.
The Capabilities Assignments Configuration window displays.
Step 3
Step 4
Additional Information
Before configuring a capabilities assignment, you must obtain licenses from Cisco Systems by using the
License File Upload under the System menu.
33-3
Chapter 33
Related Topics
Note
You can assign licenses for up to 250 users when you are using the bulk assignment capability.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To add a new capabilities assignment or update an existing capabilities assignment, locate the
appropriate capabilities assignment as described in the Finding a License Capabilities Assignment
section on page 33-2 and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
To enable a new capabilities assignment or to update an existing capabilities assignment for multiple
users, check the check boxes next to the users or click the Select All button.
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Additional Information
Related Topics
33-4
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
34
Autoregistration Configuration
This section covers the following topics on autoregistration configuration:
Note
Cisco recommends that you use autoregistration to add fewer than 100 phones to your network. To add
more than 100 phones to your network, use the Bulk Administration Tool (BAT).
After a phone has autoregistered, you can move it to a new location and assign it to a different device
pool without affecting its directory number.
Table 34-1 describes the autoregistration configuration settings. For more information about related
procedures, see the Related Topics section on page 34-6.
Table 34-1
Field Name
Description
34-1
Chapter 34
Autoregistration Configuration
Table 34-1
Field Name
Description
Partition
Auto-registration Disabled
on this Cisco Unified
Communications Manager
34-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 34
Autoregistration Configuration
Enabling Autoregistration
Enabling Autoregistration
This section describes how to enable autoregistration for new devices.
Caution
Ensure that the TFTP server is up and running. Ensure that the DHCP option for TFTP specifies the
correct server.
Check that the Device Defaults Configuration window specifies the correct phone image names for
SIP and SCCP. Ensure that these files are available on the TFTP server.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
In the Auto Registration Phone Protocol drop-down list box, choose either SCCP or SIP.
Step 3
Step 4
From the list of Cisco Unified Communications Managers, choose the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager, in the cluster, that you want to enable for autoregistration.
Note
Always enable or disable autoregistration only on this Cisco Unified Communications Manager.
If you shift the autoregistration function to another Cisco Unified Communications Manager in
the cluster, you must reconfigure the appropriate Cisco Unified Communications Managers, the
Default Cisco Unified Communications Manager Group, and, possibly, the default device pools.
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
From the list of Cisco Unified Communications Manager groups, choose the group that is enabled for
autoregistration. (In most systems, the name of this group specifies Default. You can, however, choose
a different Cisco Unified Communications Manager group.)
34-3
Chapter 34
Autoregistration Configuration
Disabling Autoregistration
This group serves as the default Cisco Unified Communications Manager group for devices that
autoregister. Ensure that the Selected Cisco Unified Communications Managers list for this group
contains the Cisco Unified Communications Manager that you configured for autoregistration in Step 4.
The Cisco Unified Communications Managers get selected in the order in which they are listed in the
Cisco Unified Communications Manager group.
Step 9
If you made any changes to the group configuration, click Save to save the changes in the database.
Step 10
Configure a calling search space specifically for autoregistration. For example, you can use the
autoregistration calling search space to limit autoregistered phones to internal calls only.
Step 11
Configure the Default device pool for autoregistration by assigning the Default Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Group and autoregistration calling search space to the Default device pool. If
you are configuring a separate default device pool for each device type, use the Device Defaults
Configuration window to assign the default device pools to the device.
Step 12
Enable autoregistration only during brief periods when you want to install and autoregister new devices
(preferably when overall system usage is at a minimum). During other periods, turn autoregistration off
to prevent unauthorized devices from registering with Cisco Unified Communications Manager.
Step 13
Step 14
Reconfigure the autoregistered devices and assign them to their permanent device pools.
Step 15
In the Enterprise Parameters Configuration window, set the Auto Registration Phone Protocol setting to
SIP or SCCP, whichever is needed.
Step 16
If you autoregister more phones with a different protocol, repeat Step 1 through Step 15.
Additional Information
Disabling Autoregistration
This section describes how to disable autoregistration.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
From the Cisco Unified Communications Manager list, choose the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager where you want to disable autoregistration.
Step 3
To disable autoregistration for this Cisco Unified Communications Manager, click the Auto-registration
Disabled on this Cisco Unified Communications Manager check box. (When this box is checked,
autoregistration specifies disabled.)
Note
Step 4
You can also disable autoregistration by setting the Starting Directory Number and Ending
Directory Number to the same value.
34-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 34
Autoregistration Configuration
Reusing Autoregistration Numbers
Step 5
Repeat Step 2 through Step 4 for each Cisco Unified Communications Manager where you want to
disable autoregistration.
Additional Information
Step 2
Choose the Cisco Unified Communications Manager where you want to reset autoregistration.
Step 3
Write down the current settings for Starting Directory Number and Ending Directory Number.
Step 4
Caution
Step 5
Click Save.
Step 6
Set the Starting Directory Number and Ending Directory Number to their previous values (or to new
values, if desired).
Step 7
Click Save.
Additional Information
34-5
Chapter 34
Autoregistration Configuration
Related Topics
Related Topics
34-6
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
35
Geolocation Configuration
The System > Geolocation Configuration menu option in Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Administration allows configuration of geographic locations for use with geographic location filters and
logical partition policies to provision logical partitioning and other features.
Tip
Do not confuse locations with geolocations. Locations, which you configure by using the System >
Location menu option, allow you to define entities that a centralized call-processing system uses to
provide call admission control (CAC). Geolocations, which you configure by using the System >
Geolocation Configuration menu option, allow you to specify geographic locations that you use to
associate Cisco Unified Communications Manager devices for features such as logical partitioning.
For an explanation of geolocations, including configuration details, refer to Introducing Geolocations
and Geolocation Configuration in the Geolocations and Location Conveyance chapter in the Cisco
Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide.
For more information on how the logical partitioning feature uses geolocations, refer to the Logical
Partitioning chapter in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide.
35-1
Chapter 35
Geolocation Configuration
35-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
36
36-1
Chapter 36
36-2
OL-18611-01
A R T
CH A P T E R
37
Note
For AAR to function, you must configure AAR groups and also ensure that the Automated Alternate
Routing Enable clusterwide service parameter is set to True. (The default value for this service
parameter specifies False.)
Refer to the Understanding Route Plans chapter of the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
System Guide for more information about automated alternate routing groups.
37-1
Chapter 37
Table 37-1 describes the AAR group configuration settings. For related procedures, see the Related
Topics section on page 37-5.
Table 37-1
Field
Description
Enter the name that you want to assign to the new AAR group.
The name can contain up to 20 alphanumeric characters and can contain
any combination of spaces, periods (.), hyphens (-), and underscore
characters (_).
Enter the prefix digits to use for automated alternate routing within this
AAR group. Valid entries include numeric characters (0-9), alpha
characters (A-D), asterisk (*), pound (#), plus (+), and hyphen (-).
Enter the prefix digits to use for automated alternate routing when
routing a call from this group to a device that belongs to another AAR
group.
Valid entries include numeric characters (0-9), alpha characters (A-D),
asterisk (*), and pound (#).
Note
Prefix digits that are entered in this field for the originating AAR
group also get added in the Prefix Digits (To this group) field of
the AAR destination group.
Enter the prefix digits to use for automated alternate routing when you
are routing a call to this group from a device that belongs to another AAR
group.
Valid entries include numeric characters (0-9), alpha characters (A-D),
asterisk (*), and pound (#).
Note
Prefix digits entered in this field for the destination AAR group
also get added in the Prefix Digits (From this group) field of the
AAR originating group.
Additional Information
37-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 37
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your AAR group search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item,
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your AAR group search preferences
until you modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records:
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criteria or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search criteria.
Click Find.
All or matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by
choosing a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
37-3
Chapter 37
Step 2
To add a new AAR group, click the Add New button, and continue with Step 3.
To update an existing AAR group, locate the appropriate AAR group as described in the Finding
an AAR Group section on page 37-3, and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
In the AAR Group Configuration window that displays, enter a name in the AAR Group Name field. The
name can contain alphanumeric characters, any combination of spaces, periods (.), hyphens (-), and
underscore characters (_). Ensure each AAR group name is unique. The current size for this field is 20
characters.
Timesaver
Use concise and descriptive names for your AAR groups. The CompanynameLocationGroup format
usually provides a sufficient level of detail and is short enough to enable you to quickly and easily
identify an AAR group. For example, CiscoDallasAA1 identifies a Cisco Access Analog AAR group for
the Cisco office in Dallas.
Step 4
Click Save.
Step 5
Step 6
Additional Information
You cannot delete an AAR group that one or more devices references. To find out which devices are
using the AAR group, choose the Dependency Records link from the Related Links drop-down list box
that is on the AAR Group Configuration window. If the dependency records are not enabled for the
system, the dependency records summary window displays a message. For more information about
dependency records, see the Accessing Dependency Records section in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration Guide. You must remove the AAR group from all devices to
which it belongs before deleting the AAR group.
37-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 37
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the AAR group that you want to delete. See the Finding an AAR Group section on page 37-3.
Step 3
Check the check box next to the AAR group that you want to delete and click Delete Selected.
A dialog box displays to warn you that you cannot undo deletion of AAR groups.
Step 4
To delete the group, click OK, or to cancel the action, click Cancel. If you click OK, the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager removes the AAR group from the AAR group list.
You can delete multiple AAR groups from the Find and List AAR groups window by checking
the check boxes next to the appropriate AAR groups and clicking Delete Selected. You can
delete all the AAR groups in the window by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete
Selected.
Note
Additional Information
Related Topics
37-5
Chapter 37
Related Topics
37-6
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
38
Field
Description
Name
Description
38-1
Chapter 38
Table 38-1
Field
Description
Enter the initial digits of the directory numbers to which you want to
apply this application dial rule.
Valid values include numeric digits (0 through 9), plus (+), asterisk (*),
and pound (#).
Number of Digits
Enter the length of the dialed numbers to which you want to apply this
application dial rule. Enter a number of digits between 1 and 100 or the
characters +, *, and #.
Total Digits to be Removed Enter the number of digits that you want Cisco Unified Communications
Manager to remove from the beginning of dialed numbers that apply to
this dial rule. Enter a number of digits between 0 and 100.
Prefix With Pattern
This field displays when you enter the Prefix With Pattern
information.
Additional Information
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your dial rule search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item, Cisco
Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your dial search preferences until you modify
your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Call Routing > Dial Rules > Application Dial Rules.
The Find and List Application Dial Rules window displays.
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records:
38-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 38
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criteria or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All or matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by
choosing a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
In the menu bar, choose Call Routing > Dial Rules > Application Dial Rules.
The Find and List Application Dial Rules window displays.
Step 2
To add a new dial rule, click the Add New button and continue with Step 3.
To update an existing dial rule, locate the appropriate dial rule as described in Finding a Dial Rule
section on page 38-2, and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
Enter the appropriate dial rule information settings as found in Table 38-1.
Step 4
38-3
Chapter 38
Note
If more than one dial rule exists, you can change the priority of the dial rules. See the
Reprioritizing a Dial Rule section on page 38-4.
Additional Information
From Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration, choose Call Routing > Dial Rules >
Application Dial Rules.
Step 2
Locate the application dial rule that you want to delete. See the Finding a Dial Rule section on
page 38-2.
Step 3
Check the check box next to the application dial rule that you want to delete and click Delete Selected.
A dialog box appears to warn you that you cannot undo deletion of application dial rules.
Step 4
To delete the group, click OK, or to cancel the action, click Cancel. If you click OK, the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager removes the application dial rule from the application dial rules list.
Note
You can delete multiple dial rules from the Find and List Application Dial Rules window by
checking the check boxes next to the appropriate dial rules and clicking Delete Selected. You
can delete all the AAR groups in the window by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete
Selected.
Additional Information
From Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration, choose Call Routing > Dial Rules >
Application Dial Rules.
38-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 38
You can also change the priority by starting from the Application Dial Rules Configuration
window.
Note
Step 2
In the Find and List Application Dial Rules window, choose a dial rule and click the dial rule name. The
Application Dial Rule Configuration window displays.
Step 3
Use the up and down arrows to move the dial rule up or down the list.
Step 4
Additional Information
Related Topics
38-5
Chapter 38
Related Topics
38-6
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
39
Field
Description
Name
Enter a name for the directory lookup dial rule. The name can contain up
to 50 alphanumeric characters and can contain any combination of
spaces, periods (.), hyphens (-), and underscore characters (_).
Description
Enter the initial digits of the directory numbers to which you want to
apply this directory lookup dial rule. For example, if you enter 972, this
dial rule applies to directory numbers that include 9725551212.
Valid values include numeric digits (0 through 9), plus (+), asterisk (*),
and pound (#).
39-1
Chapter 39
Table 39-1
Field
Description
Number of Digits
Enter the length of the directory numbers to which you want to apply this
directory lookup dial rule. For example, if you enter 7, this dial rule
applies to directory numbers including 8675309.
Total Digits to be Removed Enter the number of digits that you want Cisco Unified Communications
Manager to remove from directory numbers that apply to this dial rule.
For example, if you enter 3, Cisco Unified Communications Manager
removes 408 from directory numbers that include 4085556666.
Valid values for this field range from 0 to 100. The total digits to be
removed cannot be more than the number of digits of the directory
numbers that apply to this directory lookup dial rule.
Prefix With Pattern
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your directory lookup dial rule search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this
menu item, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your dial search preferences
until you modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Call Routing > Dial Rules > Directory Lookup Dial Rules.
The Directory Lookup Dial Rule Find and List window displays.
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records:
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criteria or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All or matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by
choosing a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
39-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 39
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
Choose Call Routing > Dial Rules > Directory Lookup Dial Rules.
The Directory Lookup Dial Rule Find and List window displays.
Step 2
To edit an existing directory lookup dial rule, display the appropriate dial as described in the
Finding a Directory Lookup Dial Rule section on page 39-2.
Step 4
Click Save.
Additional Information
39-3
Chapter 39
Choose Call Routing > Dial Rules > Directory Lookup Dial Rules.
The Directory Lookup Dial Rule Find and List window displays.
Step 2
To locate a specific directory lookup dial rule, enter search criteria and click Find.
A list of phones that match the search criteria displays.
Step 3
Check the check boxes next to the directory lookup dial rules that you want to delete and click
Delete Selected.
Delete all the directory lookup dial rules in the window by checking the check box in the matching
records title bar and clicking Delete Selected.
Display the directory lookup dial rule that you want to delete by clicking the name of the directory
lookup dial rule and clicking Delete.
To delete the directory lookup dial rules, click OK; to cancel the action, click Cancel.
Additional Information
Related Topics
Configuring Cisco Unified Communications Manager Attendant Console Users, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Features and Services Guide
39-4
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
40
Synchronizing Configuration of a SIP Dial Rule with Affected SIP Phones, page 40-8
Cisco Unified IP Phone 7911, 7941, 7961, 7970, and 7971. These phones use the
7940_7960_OTHER dial rules patterns. Key Press Markup Language (KPML) allows the digits to
be sent to Cisco Unified Communications Manager digit by digit; SIP Dial Rules allow a pattern of
digits to be collected locally on the phone prior to sending to Cisco Unified Communications
Manager. If SIP dial rules are not configured, KPML gets used. To increase the performance of
Cisco Unified Communications Manager (increasing the number of calls that get processed), Cisco
recommends that administrators configure SIP dial rules.
Cisco Unified IP Phone 7940 and 7960. These phones use the 7940_7960_OTHER dial rules
patterns and do not support KPML. If the administrator does not configure a SIP dial plan for these
phones, the user must press the Dial softkey or wait a specified time before digits are sent to Cisco
Unified Communications Manager for processing. This extra step for the user delays the actual call
from being processed.
Cisco Unified IP Phone 7905 and 7912. These phones use the 7905_7912 dial rules patterns and do
not support KPML. If the administrator does not configure a SIP dial plan for these phones, the user
must press the Dial softkey or wait a specified time before digits are sent to Cisco Unified
Communications Manager for processing. This extra step for the user delays the actual call from
being processed.
If the administrator does not configure a dial plan for a phone that is running SIP, the user must press
the Dial softkey unless the phone supports KPML. If the administrator configures SIP dial plans, those
dial plans must get associated with a phone that is running SIP, so the dial plans get sent to the device.
40-1
Chapter 40
Table 40-1 describes the available settings in the SIP Dial Rules Configuration window. For more
information about related procedures, see the Related Topics section on page 40-9.
Table 40-1
Field
Description
Dial Pattern
Choose the dial pattern that is applicable to the type of phone that is
running SIP that you have; for example, dial pattern 7905_7912 applies
for Cisco Unified IP Phones 7905 and 7912, and dial pattern
7940_7960_OTHER applies for Cisco Unified IP Phones 7911, 7940,
7941, 7960, 7961, 7970, and 7971.
Note
Name
Enter a name for the SIP dial rule; for example, Long Distance. Enter up
to 50 alphanumeric characters including spaces and special characters.
Description
Pattern Information
Pattern Description
Delete Pattern
Check this check box to delete the dial pattern; then, click the Delete
Selected button.
Dial Parameter
From this drop-down list box, choose the type of parameter for this
pattern from the following choices:
Value
For the dial parameters that this table describes, enter the value for that
field here. For example, enter 1 for Button 1 of PLAR, or 8,..... for a
7940_7960_OTHER pattern.
40-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 40
Table 40-1
Field
Description
Delete Parameter
Check this check box to delete the dial pattern; then, click the Delete
Selected button.
Edit Parameter
Delete Selected
Pattern Addition
Pattern Description
Enter a name for a new pattern; for example, Longdistance; then, click
the Add Pattern or Add PLAR button.
Add Pattern
Click this button to add the new pattern to the Pattern Information pane.
Add PLAR
Click this button to add the new PLAR pattern to the Pattern Information
pane.
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your SIP dial rule search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item,
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your SIP dial rule search preferences
until you modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Call Routing > Dial Rules > SIP Dial Rules.
The Find and List SIP Dial Rules window displays.
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criteria or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
40-3
Chapter 40
Step 3
Click Find.
All or matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by
choosing a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
In the menu bar, choose Call Routing > Dial Rules > SIP Dial Rules.
The Find and List SIP Dial Rules window displays.
Step 2
To add a new SIP dial rule, click the Add New button and continue with Step 3.
To update an existing SIP dial rule, locate the appropriate SIP dial rule as described in Finding a
SIP Dial Rule section on page 40-3 and continue with Step 9.
Step 3
From the Dial Pattern drop-down list box, choose either 7905_7912 or 7940_7960_OTHER as the SIP
dial rule type.
Step 4
Step 5
Enter a name and description of the Dial Rule that you are creating by using the information as described
in Table 40-1. Click Save.
The SIP Dial Rule Configuration redisplays with updated information.
Step 6
Enter a name for the pattern description by using the information as described in Table 40-1.
40-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 40
Step 7
Depending on the type of dial pattern that you want to create, click Add Pattern or Add PLAR (Private
Line Automatic Ringdown [PLAR]).
Note
The Add PLAR button only displays for 7940_7960_OTHER dial rules.
The SIP Dial Rule Configuration redisplays with updated information and an area to configure the dial
pattern parameters.
Step 8
From the Dial Parameter drop-down list box, choose the type of parameter by using the information as
described in Table 40-1.
Step 9
Enter the appropriate value, parameter, and description for the dial rule as described in Table 40-1.
Step 10
Additional Information
Pattern Formats
See the following formats for the 7905_7912 and 7940_7960_OTHER patterns.
Value for 7905_7912 Pattern
Hyphen (-) means more digits can be entered. If this character is needed, it must appear at the end
of an individual rule. For example, 1408t5- is legal, but 1408t5-3... is illegal.
Pound sign (#) acts as the terminating key, and termination can be applied only after matching
hits >#. So >* means that the terminating character specifies the asterisk (*); that is, the terminating
key must follow the greater-than sign (>).
Note
Note
The characters ># and tn specify modifiers, not patterns. n equals 0-9 and a-z, which ranges
from 0 to 26. Use the repeat modifier to specify more rules in less space.
Modifier S causes rule-matching to cease (that is, if a rule matches and the modifier S is seen,
all other rules after that matching rule do not get used for matching).
Pound sign (#) acts as the terminating key, and termination can be applied only after matching
hits >#. So >* means that the terminating character specifies the asterisk (*); that is, the terminating
key must follow the greater-than sign (>).
40-5
Chapter 40
Note
You must configure the pound sign in the pattern field for it to be valid for 7940_7960_OTHER.
Asterisk (*) matches one or more characters. The * gets processed as a wildcard character. You can
override this by preceding the * with a backward slash (\) escape sequence, which results in the
sequence \*. The phone automatically strips the \, so it does not appear in the outgoing dial string.
When * is received as a dial digit, it gets matched by the wildcard characters * and period (.).
Pattern String
Effect
.t7>#......t4-
You must enter at least one digit. After that, the send occurs after 7
seconds. The terminating # character can also be applied after the first
digit is entered. After 7 digits are entered, the timeout changes to 4
seconds. The * character means that more digits can be entered, as long
as timeout or # does not terminate the string.
Send immediately. Configure a SIP dial rule for each of these strings,
with the timeout dial parameter set to 0, to ensure that no delay occurs in
sending the call. The user does not have to press the Dial softkey to
initiate the call, even if the phone does not support Key Press Markup
Language (KPML).
1t7>#..........t1-
You must enter at least one digit. After that, the send occurs after 7
seconds. The terminating character # can also be applied after the first
digit is entered. After 10 digits are entered, the timeout changes to 1
second. The * character means that more digits can be entered, as long as
timeout or # does not terminate the string.
0t4>#.t7-"
40-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 40
Table 40-3 provides some example SIP dial rules for the 7940_7960_OTHER dial rules.
Table 40-3
Pattern String
Effect
123#45#6
The 123#45#6 string gets matched if the user dials 123#45#6. Pressing
the pound sign (#) does not cause the phone to dial immediately because
# is explicitly specified. For Cisco SIP IP Phones 7940 and 7960, dialing
1# or 123#4# causes the phone to dial immediately.
Send immediately. Configure a SIP dial rule for each of these strings,
with the timeout dial parameter set to 0, to ensure that no delay occurs in
sending the call. The user does not have to press the Dial softkey to
initiate the call, even if the phone does not support Key Press Markup
Language (KPML).
12\*345
This example uses the backward slash (\) and asterisk (*) to indicate that
the asterisk (*) is a dialed digit. If you omit the backslash (\), the
asterisk(*) gets treated as a wildcard pattern match. If you use the
backslash (\) with a character other than the asterisk (*), the \ gets
ignored, and the \\ character gets matched. If you need to explicitly
specify the \ character in a dial plan, use \\. The \ does not get sent out as
part of the dialed digit string because the phone removes it before it sends
the dial string.
From Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration, choose Call Routing > Dial Rules >
SIP Dial Rules.
Step 2
Locate the SIP dial rule that you want to delete. See the Finding a SIP Dial Rule section on page 40-3.
Step 3
Check the check box next to the SIP dial rule that you want to delete and click Delete Selected.
A dialog box displays to warn you that you cannot undo deletion of SIP dial rules.
Step 4
To delete the SIP dial rule, click OK or, to cancel the action, click Cancel. If you click OK, Cisco
Unified Communications Manager removes the SIP dial rule from the SIP dial rules list.
Note
You can delete multiple dial rules from the Find and List SIP Dial Rules window by checking
the check boxes next to the appropriate dial rules and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete
all the SIP dial rules in the window by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
Additional Information
40-7
Chapter 40
From Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration, choose Call Routing > Dial Rules >
SIP Dial Rules.
Step 2
Locate the SIP dial rule that you want to reset. See the Finding a SIP Dial Rule section on page 40-3.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Reset.
The Device Reset dialog displays.
Step 5
RestartRestarts the chosen devices without shutting them down (reregisters the phones with
Cisco Unified Communications Manager).
Additional Information
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
The window displays a list of SIP Dial Rules that match the search criteria.
Step 4
Click the SIP Dial Rule to which you want to synchronize applicable SIP phones. The SIP Dial Rule
Configuration window displays.
Step 5
40-8
OL-18611-01
Chapter 40
Step 6
Click Save.
Step 7
Step 8
Click OK.
Additional Information
Related Topics
Synchronizing Configuration of a SIP Dial Rule with Affected SIP Phones, page 40-8
40-9
Chapter 40
Related Topics
40-10
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
41
Tip
Always add and define the route filter first and then add the route filter to the route pattern/hunt pilot.
41-1
Chapter 41
Field
Description
Numbering Plan
From the drop-down list, choose a dial plan; for example, North
American Numbering Plan. Click Next.
Enter a name in the Route Filter Name field. The name can contain up
to 50 alphanumeric characters and can contain any combination of
spaces, periods (.), hyphens (-), and underscore characters (_). Ensure
each route filter name is unique to the route plan.
Note
Use concise and descriptive names for your route filters. The
CompanynameLocationCalltype format usually provides a
sufficient level of detail and is short enough to enable you to
quickly and easily identify a route filter. For example,
CiscoDallasMetro identifies a route filter for tollfree, inter-local
access and transport area (LATA) calls from the Cisco office in
Dallas.
Clause Information
Route Filter Tags
Choose the route filter tags and operators and enter data, where
appropriate, to create a clause for this route filter.
See Table 41-2 in the Route Filter Tag Descriptions section on
page 41-7 for explanations of the route filter tags, such as
AREA-CODE.
Choose the route filter tags and operators and enter data, where
appropriate, to create a clause for this route filter.
See Table 41-3 in the Route Filter Tag Descriptions section on
page 41-7 for explanations of the route filter operators, such as
NOT-SELECTED.
Additional Information
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your route filter search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item,
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your route filter search preferences
until you modify your search or close the browser.
41-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 41
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
41-3
Chapter 41
From Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration, choose Call Routing > Route Filter.
Step 2
To copy an existing route filter, locate the appropriate route filter as described in the Finding a
Route Filter section on page 41-2, click the Copy button next to the route filter that you want to
copy, and continue with Step 3.
To add a new route filter, click the Add New button and continue with Step 3.
To update an existing route filter, locate the appropriate route filter as described in the Finding a
Route Filter section on page 41-2, and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
In the Route Filter Configuration window that displays, enter the appropriate settings as described in
Table 41-1, Table 41-2, and Table 41-3.
Step 4
Note
Step 5
Refer to the Synchronizing a Route Filter With Affected Devices section on page 41-6 before
deciding whether to proceed to Step 5 below.
If you are updating a route filter, click Reset Devices. Resetting the devices that are associated with the
route filter causes calls on affected gateways to drop.
Additional Information
From Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration, choose Call Routing > Route Filter.
Step 2
Locate the route filter to which you want to add or edit route filter clauses. See the Finding a Route
Filter section on page 41-2.
Step 3
If you want to add a new route filter clause, click Add Clause to display a new Route Filter Clause
Configuration data entry window. All the operator fields for this new clause display NOT-SELECTED.
41-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 41
Step 4
Choose the route filter tags and operators and enter data, where appropriate, to create an additional
clause for this route filter.
Note
Step 5
For help with entering data for route filter tags and operators for the North American Numbering
Plan, see the Route Filter Tag Descriptions section on page 41-7.
Step 6
If you want to edit an existing route filter clause, click the Edit Clause button directly above the route
filter clause that you want to edit. The Route Filter Clause Configuration window opens to display the
current definition of the route filter clause that you chose.
Step 7
Modify the route filter tags and operators and enter data, where appropriate, to edit the route filter clause
that you chose to edit.
Note
Step 8
For help with entering data for route filter tags and operators for the North American Numbering
Plan, see the Route Filter Tag Descriptions section on page 41-7.
Additional Information
From Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration, choose Call Routing > Route Filter.
Step 2
Locate the route filter from which you want to remove route filter clauses.
Step 3
Scroll down to the top of the clause that you want to remove and click Remove Clause.
A dialog box appears that warns you that you cannot undo the removal of this route filter clause.
Caution
Step 4
Each Remove Clause button applies to the clause immediately below the button. Check carefully to
ensure that you are removing the correct clause before initiating this action. If you accidentally remove
a clause, you cannot retrieve it, and you must rebuild it.
To remove the clause, click OK or to cancel the action, click Cancel. If you click OK, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager removes the clause from the route filter.
41-5
Chapter 41
Additional Information
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
The window displays a list of route filters that match the search criteria.
Step 4
Click the route filter to which you want to synchronize applicable devices. The Route Filter
Configuration window displays.
Step 5
Step 6
Click Save.
Step 7
Note
Step 8
Any necessary resetting of devices that are associated with the route filter causes calls on
affected gateways to drop.
Click OK.
Additional Information
You cannot delete a route filter that route patterns/hunt pilots, translation patterns, or other items use. To
find out which route patterns/hunt pilots, translation patterns, or other items are using the route filter, in
the Route Filter Configuration window, choose Dependency Records from the Related Links
drop-down list box and click Go. If the dependency records are not enabled for the system, the
Dependency Records Summary window displays a message. For more information about dependency
41-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 41
records, see the Accessing Dependency Records section on page A-2. If you try to delete a route filter
that is in use, Cisco Unified Communications Manager displays an error message. Before deleting a
route filter that is currently in use, you must perform either or both of the following tasks:
Assign a different route filter to any route patterns/hunt pilots, translation patterns, or other items
that are using the route filter that you want to delete. See the Configuring a Route Pattern section
on page 44-11 and the Configuring a Translation Pattern section on page 60-10.
Delete the route patterns/hunt pilots, translation patterns, or other items that are using the route filter
that you want to delete. See the Deleting a Route Pattern section on page 44-12 and the Deleting
a Translation Pattern section on page 60-11.
Procedure
Step 1
From Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration, choose Call Routing > Route Filter.
Step 2
Locate the route filter that you want to delete. See the Finding a Route Filter section on page 41-2.
Step 3
Check the check box of the route filter that you want to delete and click Delete Selected.
A message displays that states that you cannot undo this action.
Caution
Step 4
Check carefully to ensure that you are deleting the correct route filter before initiating this action. You
cannot retrieve deleted route filters. If a route filter is accidentally deleted, you must rebuild it.
To delete the route filter, click OK or to cancel the deletion, click Cancel.
Tip
You can also delete a route filter by locating and displaying the route filter that you want to delete
and clicking Delete.
Additional Information
41-7
Chapter 41
Route filter tags vary depending on the numbering plan that you choose from the Numbering Plan
drop-down list box on the Route Filter Configuration window. Table 41-2 describes the route filter tags
for the North American Numbering Plan.
Table 41-2
Tag
Description
AREA-CODE
COUNTRY CODE
END-OF-DIALING
INTERNATIONAL-ACCESS
INTERNATIONAL-DIRECT-DIAL
INTERNATIONAL-OPERATOR
LOCAL-AREA-CODE
LOCAL-DIRECT-DIAL
LOCAL-OPERATOR
LONG-DISTANCE-DIRECT-DIAL
LONG-DISTANCE-OPERATOR
NATIONAL-NUMBER
OFFICE-CODE
SATELLITE-SERVICE
SERVICE
SUBSCRIBER
41-8
OL-18611-01
Chapter 41
Table 41-2
Tag
Description
TRANSIT-NETWORK
TRANSIT-NETWORK-ESCAPE
Route filter tag operators determine whether a call is filtered based on the existence, and sometimes the
contents, of the dialed-digit string that is associated with that tag. The operators EXISTS and
DOES-NOT-EXIST simply check for the existence of that part of the dialed-digit string. The operator
== matches the actual dialed digits with the specified value or pattern. Table 41-3 describes the operators
that can be used with route filter tags.
Table 41-3
Operator
Description
NOT-SELECTED
EXISTS
DOES-NOT-EXIST
==
41-9
Chapter 41
Related Topics
Caution
Do not enter route filter tag values for tags that are using the operators EXISTS, DOES-NOT-EXIST, or
NOT-SELECTED.
Examples
Example 1: A route filter that uses AREA-CODE and the operator DOES-NOT-EXIST selects all
dialed-digit strings that do not include an area code.
Example 2: A route filter that uses AREA-CODE, the operator ==, and the entry 515 selects all
dialed-digit strings that include the 515 area code.
Example 3: A route filter that uses AREA-CODE, the operator ==, and the entry 5[2-9]X selects all
dialed-digit strings that include area codes in the range of 520 through 599.
Example 4: A route filter that uses TRANSIT-NETWORK, the operator ==, and the entry 0288 selects
all dialed-digit strings with the carrier access code 1010288.
Additional Information
Related Topics
41-10
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
42
Note
For information about configuring the Local Route Group feature, refer to the Local Route Groups
chapter in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide.
Table 42-1 describes the route group configuration settings. For related procedures, see the Related
Topics section on page 42-7.
Table 42-1
Field
Description
Enter a name for this route group. The name can comprise up to 50
alphanumeric characters and can contain any combination of spaces,
periods (.), hyphens (-), and underscore characters (_). Ensure that each
route group name is unique to the route plan.
42-1
Chapter 42
Table 42-1
Field
Description
Distribution Algorithm
Enter the character(s) that are found in the device name that you are
seeking and click the Find button. Device names that match the
character(s) that you entered display in the Available Devices box.
Note
Available Devices
To find all available devices, leave the text box blank and click
the Find button.
Choose a device in the Available Devices list box and add it to the
Selected Devices list box by clicking Add to Route Group.
If the route group contains a gateway that uses the QSIG protocol, only
gateways that use the QSIG protocol display in the list. If the route group
contains a gateway that uses the non-QSIG protocol, gateways that use
the controlled intercluster trunks, which are QSIG protocol, do not
display in the list.
If you included the route group in a route list that contains QSIG
gateways, the H.323 gateways do not display in the list.
Port(s)
42-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 42
Table 42-1
Field
Description
Removed Devices
Choose a device in the Selected Devices list box and add it to the
Removed Devices list box by clicking the down arrow button between
the two list boxes.
Note
This pane displays links to the devices that have been added to this route
group. Click one of the device names to go to the configuration window
for that particular device.
Note
When you are adding a new route group, this list does not
display until you save the route group.
Additional Information
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your route group search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item,
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your route group search preferences
until you modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
42-3
Chapter 42
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
Step 2
To copy an existing route group, locate the appropriate route group as described in the Finding a
Route Group section on page 42-3, click the Copy button next to the route group that you want to
copy, and continue with Step 3.
To add a new route group, click the Add New button, and continue with Step 3.
To update an existing route group, locate the appropriate route group as described in the Finding a
Route Group section on page 42-3, and continue with Step 3.
42-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 42
Step 3
In the Route Group Configuration window that displays, enter a name in the Route Group Name field.
The name can contain up to 50 alphanumeric characters and can contain any combination of spaces,
periods (.), hyphens (-), and underscore characters (_). Ensure that each route group name is unique to
the route plan.
Timesaver
Use concise and descriptive names for your route groups. The CompanynameLocationGroup format
usually provides a sufficient level of detail and is short enough to enable you to quickly and easily
identify a route group. For example, CiscoDallasAA1 identifies a Cisco Access Analog route group for
the Cisco office in Dallas.
Step 4
Note
Step 5
You must choose at least one device for a new route group before adding the new route group.
Additional Information
You must define one or more gateway and trunk devices before performing this procedure. A device can
reside in only one route group.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the route group to which you want to add a device. See the Finding a Route Group section on
page 42-3.
Step 3
In the Available Devices list box, choose a device to add and click Add to Route Group to move it to
the Selected Devices list box. Repeat this step for each device that you want to add to this route group.
Step 4
In the Selected Devices list box, choose the order in which the new device or devices are to be accessed
in this route group. To change the order, click a device and use the Up and Down arrows to the right of
the list box to change the order of devices.
Step 5
To add the new device(s) and to update the device order for this route group, click Save.
42-5
Chapter 42
Additional Information
Step 2
Locate the route group from which you want to remove a device. See the Finding a Route Group
section on page 42-3.
Step 3
In the Selected Devices list box, choose a device to be removed and click the Down arrow below the
Selected Devices list box to move the device to the Removed Devices list box. Repeat this step for each
device that you want to remove from this route group.
Note
Step 4
Additional Information
You cannot delete a route group that a route/hunt list references. To find out which route lists are using
the route group, in the Route Group Configuration window, choose Dependency Records from the
Related Links drop-down list box and click Go. If the dependency records are not enabled for the system,
the Dependency Records Summary window displays a message. For more information about dependency
records, refer to the Accessing Dependency Records section on page A-2. If you try to delete a route
group that is in use, Cisco Unified Communications Manager displays a message. Before deleting a route
group that is currently in use, you must perform the following task:
Tip
Remove the route group from all route lists to which it belongs before deleting the route group. See
the Removing Route Groups from a Route List section on page 43-5.
To delete route groups and route patterns, first delete the route pattern; second, delete the route list; and
finally, delete the route group.
42-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 42
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the route group that you want to delete. See the Finding a Route Group section on page 42-3.
Step 3
Check the check box next to the route group that you want to delete and click Delete Selected.
A dialog box displays to warn you that you cannot undo deletion of route groups.
Step 4
To delete the route group, click OK, or, to cancel the action, click Cancel. If you click OK, the Cisco
Unified Communications Manager removes the route group from the route group list.
You can delete multiple route groups from the Find and List Route Groups window by checking
the check boxes next to the appropriate route groups and clicking Delete Selected. You can
delete all the route groups in the window by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete
Selected.
Note
Additional Information
Related Topics
Route Groups
Local Route Groups, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide
Route Lists
42-7
Chapter 42
Related Topics
42-8
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
43
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your route list search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item,
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your route list search preferences until
you modify your search or close the browser.
43-1
Chapter 43
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
Step 2
43-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 43
Step 3
Timesaver
In the Route List Name field, enter a name. The name can comprise up to 50 alphanumeric characters
and can contain any combination of spaces, periods (.), hyphens (-), and underscore characters (_).
Ensure that each route list name is unique to the route plan.
Use concise and descriptive names for your route lists. The CompanynameLocationCalltype format
usually provides a sufficient level of detail and is short enough to enable you to quickly and easily
identify a route list. For example, CiscoDallasMetro identifies a route list for toll-free, inter-local access
transport area (LATA) calls from the Cisco office in Dallas.
Add a description in the Description field.
Step 4
From the drop-down list box, choose a Cisco Unified Communications Manager group.
Note
The Route List registers with the first Cisco Unified Communications Manager in the group, which
is its primary Cisco Unified Communications Manager.
Note
If you choose a Cisco Unified Communications Manager group that has only one configured
Cisco Unified Communications Manager, you receive the following warning:
WARNING! The selected Cisco Unified Communications Manager Group has only one Cisco
Unified Communications Manager configured. For the control process to have redundancy
protection, please select a Cisco Unified Communications Manager Group with more than one
Cisco Unified Communications Manager.
Step 5
Note
A popup message reminds you that you must add at least one route group to this route list for it
to accept calls.
The Route List Configuration window displays the newly added route list.
Step 6
By default, the system checks the Enable this Route List check box for the new route list.
If you want to disable this route list, uncheck this check box. A popup window explains that calls in
progress do not get affected, but this route list will not accept additional calls.
Step 7
Note
For called party and calling party transformation information, you can click the name of a route
group that belongs to this route list. The route group names display in the Route List Details list
box at the bottom of the Route List Configuration window. This action displays the Route List
Detail Configuration window for the route group that you choose.
43-3
Chapter 43
Additional Information
Note
You cannot add route groups that contain MGCP gateways that use the QSIG protocol (a QSIG route
group) and route groups that contain gateways that use the H.323 protocol (H.323 route group) to the
same route list. For more information, refer to the Route Groups and Route Lists section in the Cisco
Unified Communications Manager System Guide.
Before You Begin
Before performing this procedure, you must build one or more route groups and add a route list.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the route list to which you want to add route group. See the Finding Route Lists section on
page 43-1.
Step 3
Step 4
From the Route Group drop-down list box, choose a route group to add to the route list.
Note
If the route list contains a QSIG route group, H.323 route groups do not display in the drop-down
list box. If the route group contains a H.323 route group, QSIG route groups do not display in
the drop-down list box.
Note
When you are configuring the Local Route Group feature, add the Standard Local Route Group
to the route list by selecting the Standard Local Route Group entry in the drop-down list box.
Refer to the Local Route Groups chapter in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Features and Services Guide for details.
Step 5
If you need to manipulate the calling party number on calls that are routed through this route group, set
up the calling party transformations in the appropriate fields.
Note
Step 6
For more information on calling party transformations, see Calling and Called Party
Transformations in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide.
If you need to manipulate the dialed digits on calls that are routed through this route group, set up the
called party transformations in the appropriate fields.
43-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 43
Note
Step 7
For more information on called party transformations, see Called Party Number
Transformations Settings in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide.
Step 8
To add more route groups to this list, click Add Route Group and repeat Step 3 through Step 7.
Step 9
When you finish adding route groups to the route list, click Save.
Note
Step 10
Refer to the Synchronizing a Route List With Affected Route Groups section on page 43-6
before deciding whether to proceed to Step 10 below.
Click Reset for changes to take effect. When the popup windows display, click OK.
Additional Information
Choose Call Routing > Route/Hunt > Route List in the menu bar.
Step 2
Locate the route list from which you want to remove a route group. See the Finding Route Lists section
on page 43-1.
Step 3
Note
To select multiple route groups from the list, press the Shift key and click the desired route
groups.
Step 4
Click the down arrow below the Selected Groups list box to move the selected route group to the
Removed Groups list.
Step 5
To remove the route group, click Save. If you click OK, when the window refreshes, the route group no
longer appears in the route list.
Step 6
Click Reset for the changes to take effect. Click OK in response to the popup windows.
Additional Information
43-5
Chapter 43
Step 2
Locate the route list in which you want to change the order of a route group. See the Finding Route
Lists section on page 43-1.
Step 3
Step 4
To move the route group up or down in the list, select a route group; then, click the up or down arrows
on the right side of the list box.
Step 5
Click Save.
Note
Step 6
For called party and calling party transformation information, click the route group icon or route
group name in the Route List Details list at left. This action takes you to the Route List Detail
Configuration window for the corresponding route group.
Click Reset for the changes to take effect. Click OK in response to the popup windows.
Additional Information
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
The window displays a list of route lists that match the search criteria.
Step 4
Check the check boxes next to the route lists to which you want to synchronize applicable route groups.
To choose all route lists in the window, check the check box in the matching records title bar.
Step 5
43-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 43
Step 6
Click OK.
Additional Information
Tip
To delete route groups and route patterns, first delete the route pattern; second, delete the route list, and
finally, delete the route group.
The following procedure describes how to delete a route list.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the route list that you want to delete. See the Finding Route Lists section on page 43-1.
Step 3
Step 4
Caution
To delete the route list, click OK or to cancel the action, click Cancel.
You cannot delete a route list if it is associated with one or more route patterns.
Additional Information
Related Topics
43-7
Chapter 43
Related Topics
Understanding How Presence Works with Route Lists, Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Features and Services Guide
Local Route Groups, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide
43-8
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
44
Note
Refer to the Local Route Groups chapter in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and
Services Guide for a discussion of route patterns and their use and configuration when the Local Route
Group feature is configured.
44-1
Chapter 44
Table 44-1 describes the available fields in the Route Pattern Configuration window. For related
procedures, see the Related Topics section on page 44-13.
Table 44-1
Field
Description
Pattern Definition
Route Pattern
Enter the route pattern, including numbers and wildcards (do not use spaces);
for example, for NANP, enter 9.@ for typical local access or 8XXX for a
typical private network numbering plan. Valid characters include the
uppercase characters A, B, C, and D and \+, which represents the international
escape character +.
Note
Ensure that the directory route pattern, which uses the chosen
partition, route filter, and numbering plan combination, is unique.
Check the route pattern, translation pattern, directory number, call
park number, call pickup number, message waiting on/off, or meet me
number if you receive an error that indicates duplicate entries. You can
also check the route plan report.
See the Wildcards and Special Characters in Route Patterns and Hunt Pilots
section in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide for more
information about wildcards.
Route Partition
If you want to use a partition to restrict access to the route pattern, choose the
desired partition from the drop-down list box. If you do not want to restrict
access to the route pattern, choose <None> for the partition. See the Partition
Configuration section on page 52-1 for more information on how to use
partitions.
You can configure the number of partitions that display in this drop-down list
box by using the Max List Box Items enterprise parameter. If more partitions
exist than the Max List Box Items enterprise parameter specifies, the Find
button displays next to the drop-down list box. Click the Find button to display
the Find and List Partitions window. Find and choose a partition name by using
the Finding a Partition procedure in the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager Administration Guide.
Note
To set the maximum list box items, choose System > Enterprise
Parameters and choose CCMAdmin Parameters.
Note
Make sure that the combination of route pattern, route filter, and
partition is unique within the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
cluster.
Description
Numbering Plan
44-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 44
Table 44-1
Field
Description
Route Filter
If your route pattern includes the @ wildcard, you may choose a route filter.
The optional act of choosing a route filter restricts certain number patterns.
The route filters that display depend on the numbering plan that you choose
from the Numbering Plan drop-down list box.
You can configure the number of items that display in this drop-down list box
by using the Max List Box Items enterprise parameter. If more route filters
exist than the Max List Box Items enterprise parameter specifies, the Find
button displays next to the drop-down list box. Click the Find button to display
the Find and List Route Filters window. Find and choose a route filter name by
using the Finding a Route Filter procedure in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration Guide.
Note
MLPP Precedence
To set the maximum list box items, choose System > Enterprise
Parameters and choose CCMAdmin Parameters.
Choose an MLPP precedence setting for this route pattern from the drop-down
list box:
DefaultDoes not override the incoming precedence level but rather lets
it pass unchanged.
Note
Resource Priority
Namespace Network
Domain
Gateway/Route List
Choose the gateway or route list for which you are adding a route pattern.
Note
If the gateway is included in a Route Group, this drop-down list box does
not display the gateway. When a gateway is chosen in the drop-down
list box, Cisco Unified Communications Manager uses all the ports in
the gateway to route/block this route pattern. This action does not
apply for MGCP gateways.
44-3
Chapter 44
Table 44-1
Field
Description
Route Option
The Route Option designation indicates whether you want this route pattern to
be used for routing calls (such as 9.@ or 8[2-9]XX) or for blocking calls.
Choose the Route this pattern or Block this pattern radio button.
If you choose the Block this pattern radio button, you must choose the reason
for which you want this route pattern to block calls. Choose a value from the
drop-down list box:
No Error
Unallocated Number
Call Rejected
Number Changed
Call Classification
Call Classification indicates whether the call that is routed through this route
pattern is considered either off (OffNet) or on (OnNet) the local network. The
default value specifies OffNet. When adding a route pattern, if you uncheck
the Provide Outside Dial Tone check box, you set Call Classification as
OnNet.
Allow Device
Override
This check box remains unchecked by default. When the check box is checked,
the system uses the Call Classification setting that is configured on the
associated gateway or trunk to consider the outgoing call as OffNet or OnNet.
Check this check box to provide outside dial tone. To route the call in the
network, leave the check box unchecked.
Allow Overlap
Sending
Urgent Priority
Require Forced
Authorization Code
If you want to use forced authorization codes with this route pattern, check this
check box.
The FAC feature does not support overlap sending because the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager cannot determine when to prompt the user for the
code. If you check the Allow Overlap Sending check box, the system disables
the Require Forced Authorization Code check box.
44-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 44
Table 44-1
Field
Description
Authorization Level
Enter the authorization level for the route pattern. The number that you specify
in this field determines the minimum authorization level that is needed to
successfully route a call through this route pattern.
Tip
Require Client Matter If you want to use client matter codes with this route pattern, check this check
Code
box.
The CMC feature does not support overlap sending because the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager cannot determine when to prompt the user for the
code. If you check the Allow Overlap Sending check box, the Require Client
Matter Code check box become disabled.
Calling Party Transformations
Check the check box if you want the full, external phone number to be used
for calling line identification (CLID) on outgoing calls. You may also
configure an External Phone Number Mask on all phone devices.
Note
The calling party transformation settings that are assigned to the route
groups in a route list override any calling party transformation settings
that are assigned to a route pattern that is associated with that route
list.
Calling Party
Transform Mask
Enter a transformation mask value. Valid entries for the NANP include the
digits 0 through 9; the wildcard characters X, asterisk (*), and octothorpe (#);
the international escape character +; and blank. If this field is blank and the
preceding field is not checked, no calling party transformation takes place. See
the Calling Party Number Transformations Settings section in the Cisco
Unified Communications Manager System Guide for more information.
Prefix Digits
(Outgoing Calls)
Enter prefix digits in the Prefix Digits (Outgoing Calls) field. Valid entries for
the NANP include the digits 0 through 9, the wildcard characters asterisk (*)
and octothorpe (#), the international escape character +, and blank.
Note
Calling Line ID
Presentation
The appended prefix digit does not affect which directory numbers
route to the assigned device.
44-5
Chapter 44
Table 44-1
Field
Description
Calling Name
Presentation
Calling Party Number Choose the format for the number type in calling party directory numbers.
Type
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the calling directory number
(DN) type. Cisco recommends that you do not change the default value unless
you have advanced experience with dialing plans such as NANP or the
European dialing plan. You may need to change the default in Europe because
Cisco Unified Communications Manager does not recognize European
national dialing patterns. You can also change this setting when you are
connecting to a PBX that expects the calling directory number to be encoded
to a non-national numbering plan type.
Choose one of the following options:
NationalUse when you are dialing within the dialing plan for your
country.
InternationalUse when you are dialing outside the dialing plan for your
country.
44-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 44
Table 44-1
Field
Description
Calling Party
Numbering Plan
Choose the format for the numbering plan in calling party directory numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the calling DN numbering plan.
Cisco recommends that you do not change the default value unless you have
advanced experience with dialing plans such as NANP or the European dialing
plan. You may need to change the default in Europe because Cisco Unified
Communications Manager does not recognize European national dialing
patterns. You can also change this setting when you are connecting to PBXs
by using routing as a non national type number.
Choose one of the following options:
ISDNUse when you are dialing outside the dialing plan for your
country.
National StandardUse when you are dialing within the dialing plan for
your country.
Connected Line ID
Presentation
44-7
Chapter 44
Table 44-1
Field
Description
Connected Name
Presentation
Discard Digits
From the Discard Digits drop-down list box, choose the discard digits
instructions that you want to associate with this route pattern. The discard
digits that display depend on the numbering plan that you choose from the
Numbering Plan drop-down list box. See the Discard Digits Instructions
section in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide for more
information on discard instructions for the North American Numbering Plan.
Note
The called party transformation settings that are assigned to the route
groups in a route list override any called party transformation settings
that are assigned to a route pattern that is associated with that route
list.
Called Party
Transform Mask
Enter a transformation mask value. Valid entries for the NANP include the
digits 0 through 9; the wildcard characters X, asterisk (*), and octothorpe (#);
the international escape character +; and blank. If the field is blank, no
transformation takes place. Cisco Unified Communications Manager sends the
dialed digits exactly as dialed.
Prefix Digits
(Outgoing Calls)
Enter prefix digits in the Prefix Digits (Outgoing Calls) field. Valid entries for
the NANP include the digits 0 through 9; the wildcard characters asterisk (*)
and octothorpe (#); the international escape character +; and blank.
Note
The appended prefix digit does not affect which directory numbers
route to the assigned device.
44-8
OL-18611-01
Chapter 44
Table 44-1
Field
Description
Choose the format for the number type in called party directory numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the called directory number
(DN) type. Cisco recommends that you do not change the default value unless
you have advanced experience with dialing plans such as NANP or the
European dialing plan. You may need to change the default in Europe because
Cisco Unified Communications Manager does not recognize European
national dialing patterns. You can also change this setting when you are
connecting to a PBX that expects the called directory number to be encoded to
a non-national type numbering plan.
Choose one of the following options:
Called Party
Numbering Plan
NationalUse when you are dialing within the dialing plan for your
country.
InternationalUse when you are dialing outside the dialing plan for your
country.
Choose the format for the numbering plan in called party directory numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the called DN numbering plan.
Cisco recommends that you do not change the default value unless you have
advanced experience with dialing plans such as NANP or the European dialing
plan. You may need to change the default in Europe because Cisco Unified
Communications Manager does not recognize European national dialing
patterns. You can also change this setting when you are connecting to PBXs
by using routing as a non national type number.
Choose one of the following options:
ISDNUse when you are dialing outside the dialing plan for your
country.
National StandardUse when you are dialing within the dialing plan for
your country.
Network Service
Protocol
From the Network Service Protocol drop-down list box, choose the PRI
protocol that matches the protocol of the terminating gateway.
44-9
Chapter 44
Table 44-1
Field
Description
Carrier Identification
Code
Enter the appropriate carrier identification code (0, 3, or 4 digits) in the Carrier
Identification Code field. Carrier identification codes allow customers to reach
the services of interexchange carriers.
The following list shows examples of commonly used carrier identification
codes:
ATT0288
Sprint0333
WorldCom/MCI0222
Choose the appropriate network service. The values vary depending on the
network service protocol that you choose from the Network Service Protocol
field.
Service Parameter
Name
This field displays the service parameter name that is associated with the
chosen network service. If no service parameter exists for the network service,
the field displays <Not Exist>.
Service Parameter
Value
Enter the appropriate service parameter value. Valid entries include the digits
0 through 9. If a service parameter does not exist for the network service,
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration disables this field.
Additional Information
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your route pattern search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item,
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your route pattern search preferences
until you modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
44-10
OL-18611-01
Chapter 44
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
Ensure that the following items are configured in Cisco Unified Communications Manager:
Gateway
Route list
44-11
Chapter 44
Timesaver
Assigning 8XXX to a gateway routes all directory numbers 8000 to 8999 out the gateway. Similarly,
82XX routes directory numbers 8200 to 8299. See the Special Characters and Settings section in the
Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide for more information about wildcards.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To copy an existing route pattern, locate the appropriate route pattern as described in the Finding
a Route Pattern section on page 44-10, click the Copy button next to the route pattern that you want
to copy, and continue with Step 3.
To add a new route pattern, click the Add New button and continue with Step 3.
To update an existing route pattern, locate the appropriate route pattern as described in the Finding
a Route Pattern section on page 44-10 and continue with Step 3.
Note
Step 3
In the Route Pattern Configuration window that displays, enter the appropriate settings as described in
Table 44-1.
Note
Step 4
If you change the gateway or route list, you must click Update prior to choosing the Edit link.
Otherwise, you get linked to the previous gateway or route list.
The (Edit) link next to the Gateway or Route List field takes you to the Gateway Configuration
or Route List Configuration window for reference, depending on whether the Gateway or Route
List field contains a gateway or a route list. The Gateway Configuration window displays
devices that are associated with the specified gateway. The Route List Configuration window
displays the route groups that are associated with the specified route list.
Click Save.
Additional Information
Step 2
Locate the route pattern that you want to delete. See the Finding a Route Pattern section on page 44-10.
44-12
OL-18611-01
Chapter 44
Step 3
Check the check box of the route pattern that you want to delete and click Delete Selected.
A message that displays states that you cannot undo this action.
Step 4
To delete the route pattern, click OK, or, to cancel the deletion, click Cancel.
You can also delete a route pattern by locating and displaying the route pattern that you want to
delete and clicking Delete.
Tip
Additional Information
Related Topics
Wildcards and Special Characters in Route Patterns and Hunt Pilots, Cisco Unified Communications
Manager System Guide
Local Route Groups, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide
44-13
Chapter 44
Related Topics
44-14
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
45
Note
Users cannot pick up calls to a DN that belongs to a line group by using the Directed Call Pickup feature.
Tip
Although you can configure an empty line group with no members (directory numbers), Cisco Unified
Communications Manager does not support this configuration for routing calls. If the line group contains
no members, the hunt list stops hunting when the call gets routed to the empty line group. To avoid this
situation, make sure that you configure at least one member in the line group.
45-1
Chapter 45
Field
Description
Enter a name for this line group. The name can comprise up to 50
alphanumeric characters and can contain any combination of spaces,
periods (.), hyphens (-), and underscore characters (_). Ensure that each
line group name is unique to the route plan.
Distribution Algorithm
45-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 45
Table 45-1
Field
Description
Hunt Options
No Answer
For a given distribution algorithm, choose a hunt option for Cisco Unified
Communications Manager to use if a call is distributed to a member of a
line group that does not answer. This option gets applied at the member
level. Choose from the options in the drop-down list box:
Try next member; then, try next group in Hunt ListIf you choose
this hunt option, Cisco Unified Communications Manager distributes
a call to idle or available members starting from the first idle or
available member of a line group to the last idle or available member.
If unsuccessful, Cisco Unified Communications Manager then tries
the next line group in a hunt list.
Try next member, but do not go to next groupIf you choose this
hunt option, Cisco Unified Communications Manager distributes a
call to idle or available members starting from the first idle or
available member of a line group to the last idle or available member.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager stops trying upon reaching
the last member of the current line group.
45-3
Chapter 45
Table 45-1
Field
Description
Busy
For a given distribution algorithm, choose a hunt option for Cisco Unified
Communications Manager to use if a call is distributed to a member of a
line group that is busy. Choose from the options in the drop-down list
box:
Try next member; then, try next group in Hunt ListIf you choose
this hunt option, Cisco Unified Communications Manager distributes
a call to idle or available members starting from the first idle or
available member of a line group to the last idle or available member.
If unsuccessful, Cisco Unified Communications Manager then tries
the next line group in a hunt list.
Try next member, but do not go to next groupIf you choose this
hunt option, Cisco Unified Communications Manager distributes a
call to idle or available members starting from the first idle or
available member of a line group to the last idle or available member.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager stops trying upon reaching
the last member of the current line group.
45-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 45
Table 45-1
Field
Description
Not Available
For a given distribution algorithm, choose a hunt option for Cisco Unified
Communications Manager to use if a call is distributed to a member of a
line group that is not available. The Not Available condition occurs when
none of the phones that are associated with the DN in question is
registered. Not Available also occurs when extension mobility is in use
and the DN/user is not logged in. Choose from the options in the
drop-down list box:
Try next member; then, try next group in Hunt ListIf you choose
this hunt option, Cisco Unified Communications Manager distributes
a call to idle or available members starting from the first idle or
available member of a line group to the last idle or available member.
If unsuccessful, Cisco Unified Communications Manager then tries
the next line group in a hunt list.
Try next member, but do not go to next groupIf you choose this
hunt option, Cisco Unified Communications Manager distributes a
call to idle or available members starting from the first idle or
available member of a line group to the last idle or available member.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager stops trying upon reaching
the last member of the current line group.
Choose a route partition for this line group from the drop-down list box.
The default value specifies <None>.
If you click Find, the Available DN/Route Partition list box displays all
DNs that belong to the chosen partition.
Directory Number Contains Enter the character(s) that are found in the directory number that you are
seeking and click the Find button. Directory numbers that match the
character(s) that you entered display in the Available DN/Route Partition
box.
Available DN/Route
Partition
45-5
Chapter 45
Table 45-1
Field
Description
Removed DN/Route
Partition
Do not put DNs that are shared lines in a line group that uses the
Broadcast distribution algorithm. Cisco Unified Communications
Manager cannot display all DNs that are shared lines on devices
where the DNs are configured as shared lines if the DNs are
members of a line group that uses the Broadcast distribution
algorithm.
Directory Numbers
(list of DNs that currently
belong to this line group)
When you are adding a new line group, this list does not display
until you save the line group.
Additional Information
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your line group search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item,
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your line group search preferences until
you modify your search or close the browser.
45-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 45
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
45-7
Chapter 45
You must define one or more directory numbers before performing this procedure.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To copy an existing line group, locate the appropriate line group as described in the Finding a Line
Group section on page 45-6, click the Copy button next to the line group that you want to copy and
continue with Step 3.
To add a new line group, click the Add New button and continue with Step 3.
To update an existing line group, locate the appropriate line group as described in the Finding a
Line Group section on page 45-6 and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
In the Line Group Configuration window that displays, enter a name in the Line Group Name field. The
name can contain up to 50 alphanumeric characters and can contain any combination of spaces, periods
(.), hyphens (-), and underscore characters (_). Ensure that each line group name is unique to the route
plan.
Timesaver
Use concise and descriptive names for your line groups. The CompanynameLocationGroup format
usually provides a sufficient level of detail and is short enough to enable you to quickly and easily
identify a line group. For example, CiscoDallasAA1 identifies a Cisco Access Analog line group for the
Cisco office in Dallas.
Step 4
Step 5
Additional Information
You must define one or more directory numbers before performing this procedure.
45-8
OL-18611-01
Chapter 45
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the line group to which you want to add a member. See the Finding a Line Group section on
page 45-6.
Step 3
If you need to locate a directory number, choose a route partition from the Partition drop-down list box,
enter a search string in the Directory Number Contains field, and click Find. To find all directory
numbers that belong to a partition, leave the Directory Number Contains field blank and click Find.
A list of matching directory numbers displays in the Available DN/Route Partition list box.
Step 4
In the Available DN/Route Partition list box, choose a directory number to add and click Add to Line
Group to move it to the Selected DN/Route Partition list box. Repeat this step for each member that you
want to add to this line group.
Step 5
In the Selected DN/Route Partition list box, choose the order in which the new directory number(s) is to
be accessed in this line group. To change the order, click a directory number and use the Up and Down
arrows to the right of the list box to change the order of directory numbers.
Step 6
Click Save to add the new directory numbers and to update the directory number order for this line
group.
Additional Information
Step 2
Locate the line group from which you want to remove a directory number. See the Finding a Line
Group section on page 45-6.
Step 3
In the Selected DN/Route Partition list box, choose a directory number to be deleted and click the down
arrow below the list box to move the directory number to the Removed DN/Route Partition list box.
Repeat this step for each member that you want to remove from this line group.
Step 4
Additional Information
45-9
Chapter 45
You cannot delete a line group that one or more route/hunt lists references. To find out which hunt lists
are using the line group, in the Line Group Configuration window, choose Dependency Records from
the Related Links drop-down list box and click Go. If the dependency records are not enabled for the
system, the Dependency Records Summary window displays a message. For more information about
dependency records, see the Accessing Dependency Records section on page A-2. If you try to delete
a line group that is in use, Cisco Unified Communications Manager displays an error message. Before
deleting a line group that is currently in use, you must perform the following task:
Tip
Remove the line group from all hunt lists to which it belongs before deleting the line group. See the
Removing Route Groups from a Route List section on page 43-5.
To delete line groups and hunt pilots; first, delete the hunt pilot; second, delete the hunt list; and finally,
delete the line group.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the line group that you want to delete. See the Finding a Line Group section on page 45-6.
Step 3
Check the check box next to the line group that you want to delete and click Delete Selected.
A dialog box displays to warn you that you cannot undo deletion of line groups.
Step 4
To delete the line group, click OK or to cancel the action, click Cancel. If you click OK, the Cisco
Unified Communications Manager removes the line group.
You can delete multiple line groups from the Find and List Line Groups window by checking the
check boxes next to the appropriate line groups and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all
the line groups in the window by clicking Select All and clicking Delete Selected.
Note
Additional Information
Related Topics
Line Groups
45-10
OL-18611-01
Chapter 45
45-11
Chapter 45
Related Topics
45-12
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
46
Note
The Group Call Pickup feature and Directed Call Pickup feature do not work with hunt lists.
A hunt list can contain only line groups. Each hunt list should have at least one line group. Each line
group includes at least one directory number. A single line group can appear in multiple hunt lists.
Use the following topics to add or remove hunt lists or to add, remove, or change the order of line groups
in a hunt list, or synchronize configuration changes with affected line groups:
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your hunt list search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item, Cisco
Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your hunt list search preferences until you
modify your search or close the browser.
46-1
Chapter 46
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
Step 2
46-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 46
Step 3
In the Name field, enter a name. The name can comprise up to 50 alphanumeric characters and can
contain any combination of spaces, periods (.), hyphens (-), and underscore characters (_). Ensure each
hunt list name is unique to the route plan.
Timesaver
Use concise and descriptive names for your hunt lists. The CompanynameLocationCalltype format,
which usually provides a sufficient level of detail and is short enough, enables you to quickly and easily
identify a hunt list. For example, CiscoDallasMetro identifies a hunt list for toll-free, inter-local access
transport area (LATA) calls from the Cisco office in Dallas.
Step 4
Step 5
Choose a Cisco Unified Communications Manager Group from the drop-down list box.
Note
Hunt List registers to the first Cisco Unified Communications Manager in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Group as primary Cisco Unified Communications Manager.
Note
If you choose a Cisco Unified Communications Manager group that has only one Cisco Unified
Communications Manager that is configured, you receive the following warning:
WARNING! The selected Cisco Unified Communications Manager Group has only one Cisco
Unified Communications Manager configured. For the control process to have redundancy
protection, please select a Cisco Unified Communications Manager Group with more than one
Cisco Unified Communications Manager.
Step 6
If this hunt list is to be used for voice mail, click the For Voice Mail Usage check box.
Step 7
Note
A popup message reminds you that you must add at least one line group to this hunt list for it to
accept calls.
The Hunt List window displays the newly added hunt list.
Step 8
The system checks the Enable this Hunt List check box by default for the new hunt list.
If you want to disable this hunt list, uncheck this check box. A popup window explains that calls in
progress are not affected, but this hunt list will not accept additional calls.
Step 9
Additional Information
46-3
Chapter 46
You must build one or more line groups and add a hunt list before performing this procedure.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the hunt list to which you want to add a line group. See the Finding Hunt Lists section on
page 46-1.
Step 3
Step 4
From the Line Group drop-down list box, choose a line group to add to the hunt list.
Step 5
Note
The added line group also displays in the Hunt List Details pane at the bottom of the Hunt List
Configuration window. You can make changes to a line group by clicking on the line group
name. Doing so causes the Line Group Configuration window for that line group to display.
Step 6
To add more line groups to this list, click Add Line Group and repeat Step 3 through Step 5.
Step 7
When you finish adding line groups to the hunt list, click Save.
Note
Step 8
Refer to the Synchronizing a Hunt List With Affected Line Groups section on page 46-6
before deciding whether to proceed to Step 8 below.
To reset the hunt list, click Reset. When the popup windows display, click OK.
Additional Information
46-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 46
Choose Call Routing > Route/Hunt > Hunt List in the menu bar.
Step 2
Locate the hunt list from which you want to remove a line group. See the Finding Hunt Lists section
on page 46-1.
Step 3
Note
To choose multiple line groups from the list, press the Shift key and click the desired line groups.
Step 4
Click the down arrow below the Selected Groups list box to move the chosen line group to the Removed
Groups list.
Step 5
To remove the line group, click Save. If you click OK, when the window refreshes, the line group no
longer displays in the Selected Groups pane of the hunt list.
Step 6
Click Reset for the changes to take effect. Click Reset and Close in response to the popup window.
Additional Information
Step 2
Locate the hunt list in which you want to change the order of a line group. See the Finding Hunt Lists
section on page 46-1.
Step 3
Step 4
To move the line group up or down in the list, select a group; then, click the up or down arrows on the
right side of the list box.
Step 5
Click Save.
Step 6
Click Reset for the changes to take effect. Click Reset and Close in response to the popup window.
Additional Information
46-5
Chapter 46
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
The window displays a list of hunt lists that match the search criteria.
Step 4
Check the check boxes next to the hunt lists to which you want to synchronize applicable line groups.
To choose all hunt lists in the window, check the check box in the matching records title bar.
Step 5
Step 6
Click OK.
Additional Information
Tip
To delete line groups and hunt pilots, first delete the hunt pilot; second, delete the hunt list; and finally,
delete the line group.
The following procedure describes how to delete a hunt list.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the hunt list that you want to delete. See the Finding Hunt Lists section on page 46-1.
Step 3
Click Delete.
A dialog box displays to warn you that you cannot undo the deletion of a hunt list.
46-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 46
Step 4
Caution
To delete the hunt list, click OK or to cancel the action, click Cancel.
You cannot delete a hunt list if it is associated with one or more hunt pilots.
Additional Information
Related Topics
46-7
Chapter 46
Related Topics
46-8
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
47
47-1
Chapter 47
Table 47-1
Field
Description
Pattern Definition
Hunt Pilot
Enter the hunt pilot, including numbers and wildcards (do not use
spaces); for example, for NANP, enter 9.@ for typical local access, or
8XXX for a typical private network numbering plan. Valid characters
include the uppercase characters A, B, C, and D and \+, which represents
the international escape character +.
Note
Route Partition
Ensure that the directory hunt pilot, which uses the chosen
partition, route filter, and numbering plan combination, is unique.
Check the hunt pilot, translation pattern, directory number, call
park number, call pickup number, message waiting on/off, or
meet me number if you receive an error that indicates duplicate
entries. You can also check the route plan report.
See the Wildcards and Special Characters in Route Patterns and
Hunt Pilots section in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
System Guide for more information about wildcards.
If you want to use a partition to restrict access to the hunt pilot, choose
the desired partition from the drop-down list box. If you do not want to
restrict access to the hunt pilot, choose <None> for the partition. See the
Partition Configuration section on page 52-1 for more information on
how to use partitions.
You can configure the number of partitions that display in this drop-down
list box by using the Max List Box Items enterprise parameter. If more
partitions exist than the Max List Box Items enterprise parameter
specifies, the Find button displays next to the drop-down list box. Click
the Find button to display the Find and List Partitions window. Find and
choose a partition name by using the Finding a Partition procedure in the
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration Guide.
Note
To set the maximum list box items, choose System > Enterprise
Parameters and choose Unified CMAdmin Parameters.
Note
Make sure that the combination of hunt pilot, route filter, and
partition is unique within the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager cluster.
Description
Numbering Plan
47-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 47
Table 47-1
Field
Description
Route Filter
If your hunt pilot includes the @ wildcard, you may choose a route filter.
The optional act of choosing a route filter restricts certain number
patterns.
The route filters that display depend on the numbering plan that you
choose from the Numbering Plan drop-down list box.
You can configure the number of items that display in this drop-down list
box by using the Max List Box Items enterprise parameter. If more route
filters exist than the Max List Box Items enterprise parameter specifies,
the Find button displays next to the drop-down list box. Click the Find
button to display the Find and List Route Filters window. Find and
choose a route filter name by using the Finding a Route Filter procedure
in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration Guide.
Note
MLPP Precedence
Choose an MLPP precedence setting for this hunt pilot from the
drop-down list box:
Note
Hunt List
To set the maximum list box items, choose System > Enterprise
Parameters and choose Unified CMAdmin Parameters.
Choose the hunt list for which you are adding a hunt pilot from the
drop-down list box.
After you choose a hunt list, click the Edit link to the right to edit the hunt
list.
47-3
Chapter 47
Table 47-1
Field
Description
Route Option
The Route Option designation indicates whether you want this hunt pilot
to be used for routing calls (such as 9.@ or 8[2-9]XX) or for blocking
calls. Choose the Route this pattern or Block this pattern radio button.
If you choose the Block this pattern radio button, you must choose the
reason for which you want this hunt pilot to block calls. Choose a value
from the drop-down list box:
No Error
Unallocated Number
Call Rejected
Number Changed
Urgent Priority
47-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 47
Table 47-1
Field
Description
When the call that is distributed through the hunt list is not answered in
a specific period of time, this field specifies the destination to which the
call gets forwarded.
Choose from the following options:
Note
When the call that is distributed through the hunt list is busy in a specific
period of time, this field specifies the destination to which the call gets
forwarded.
Choose from the following options:
Note
47-5
Chapter 47
Table 47-1
Field
Description
Enter a value (in seconds) that specifies the maximum time for hunting.
Valid values specify 1 to 3600. The default value specifies 1800 seconds
(30 minutes).
This timer cancels if either a hunt member answers the call or if the hunt
list gets exhausted before the timer expires. If you do not specify a value
for this timer, hunting continues until a hunt member answers or hunting
exhausts. If neither event takes place, hunting continues for 30 minutes,
after which the call gets taken for final treatment.
Note
Check the check box if you want the full, external phone number to be
used for calling line identification (CLID) on outgoing calls. You may
also configure an External Phone Number Mask on all phone devices.
Note
Enter a transformation mask value. Valid entries for the NANP include
the digits 0 through 9, the wildcard character X, asterisk (*), and
octothorpe (#); the international escape character +; and blank. If this
field is blank and the preceding field is not checked, no calling party
transformation takes place. See the Calling Party Number
Transformations Settings section in the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager System Guide for more information.
Enter prefix digits in the Prefix Digits (Outgoing Calls) field. Valid
entries for the NANP include the digits 0 through 9; the wildcard
characters asterisk (*) and octothorpe (#); the international escape
character +; and blank.
Note
47-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 47
Table 47-1
Field
Description
Calling Line ID
Presentation
Calling Name Presentation Cisco Unified Communications Manager uses calling name presentation
(CNIP/CNIR) as a supplementary service to allow or restrict the
originating caller name on a call-by-call basis.
Choose whether you want the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
to allow or restrict the display of the calling party name on the called
party phone display for this hunt pilot.
Choose Default if you do not want to change calling name presentation.
Choose Allowed if you want Cisco Unified Communications Manager to
display the calling name information. Choose Restricted if you want
Cisco Unified Communications Manager to block the display of the
calling name information.
For more information about this field, see Table 17-8 in the Calling
Party Number Transformations Settings section in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager System Guide.
47-7
Chapter 47
Table 47-1
Field
Description
Calling Party Number Type Choose the format for the number type in calling party directory
numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the calling directory
number (DN) type. Cisco recommends that you do not change the default
value unless you have advanced experience with dialing plans such as
NANP or the European dialing plan. You may need to change the default
in Europe because Cisco Unified Communications Manager does not
recognize European national dialing patterns. You can also change this
setting when you are connecting to a PBX that expects the calling
directory number to be encoded to a non-national numbering plan type.
Choose one of the following options:
NationalUse when you are dialing within the dialing plan for your
country.
InternationalUse when you are dialing outside the dialing plan for
your country.
Choose the format for the numbering plan in calling party directory
numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the calling DN numbering
plan. Cisco recommends that you do not change the default value unless
you have advanced experience with dialing plans such as NANP or the
European dialing plan. You may need to change the default in Europe
because Cisco Unified Communications Manager does not recognize
European national dialing patterns. You can also change this setting when
you are connecting to PBXs by using routing as a non-national type
number.
Choose one of the following options:
ISDNUse when you are dialing outside the dialing plan for your
country.
National StandardUse when you are dialing within the dialing plan
for your country.
47-8
OL-18611-01
Chapter 47
Table 47-1
Field
Description
Connected Line ID
Presentation
Connected Name
Presentation
Discard Digits
From the Discard Digits drop-down list box, choose the discard digits
instructions that you want to associate with this hunt pilot. The discard
digits that display depend on the numbering plan that you choose from
the Numbering Plan drop-down list box. See the Discard Digits
Instructions section in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
System Guide for more information on discard instructions for the North
American Numbering Plan.
Note
Enter a transformation mask value. Valid entries for the NANP include
the digits 0 through 9; the wildcard characters X, asterisk (*), and
octothorpe (#); the international escape character +; and blank. If the
field is blank, no transformation takes place. Cisco Unified
Communications Manager sends the dialed digits exactly as dialed.
47-9
Chapter 47
Table 47-1
Field
Description
Enter prefix digits in the Prefix Digits (Outgoing Calls) field. Valid
entries for the NANP include the digits 0 through 9; the wildcard
characters asterisk (*) and octothorpe (#); the international escape
character +; and blank.
Note
Choose the format for the number type in called party directory numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the called directory
number (DN) type. Cisco recommends that you do not change the default
value unless you have advanced experience with dialing plans such as
NANP or the European dialing plan. You may need to change the default
in Europe because Cisco Unified Communications Manager does not
recognize European national dialing patterns. You can also change this
setting when you are connecting to a PBX that expects the called
directory number to be encoded to a non-national type numbering plan.
Choose one of the following options:
NationalUse when you are dialing within the dialing plan for your
country.
InternationalUse when you are dialing outside the dialing plan for
your country.
47-10
OL-18611-01
Chapter 47
Table 47-1
Field
Description
Choose the format for the numbering plan in called party directory
numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the called DN numbering
plan. Cisco recommends that you do not change the default value unless
you have advanced experience with dialing plans such as NANP or the
European dialing plan. You may need to change the default in Europe
because Cisco Unified Communications Manager does not recognize
European national dialing patterns. You can also change this setting when
you are connecting to PBXs by using routing as a non-national type
number.
Choose one of the following options:
ISDNUse when you are dialing outside the dialing plan for your
country.
National StandardUse when you are dialing within the dialing plan
for your country.
AAR Group
You can enable AAR for this hunt pilot only if all members of the
line group are in the same location.
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your hunt pilot search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item,
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your hunt pilot search preferences until
you modify your search or close the browser.
47-11
Chapter 47
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
47-12
OL-18611-01
Chapter 47
Ensure that the following items are configured in Cisco Unified Communications Manager:
Timesaver
Hunt list
Assigning 8XXX to a hunt pilot causes hunting through all directory numbers 8000 to 8999. Similarly,
82XX hunts through directory numbers 8200 to 8299. See the Special Characters and Settings section
in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide for more information about wildcards.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To copy an existing hunt pilot, locate the appropriate hunt pilot as described in Finding a Hunt
Pilot section on page 47-11. Click the Copy button next to the hunt pilot that you want to copy. The
window displays the copy of the hunt pilot. Change the value in the Hunt Pilot field, and continue
with Step 3.
To add a new hunt pilot, click the Add New button and continue with Step 3.
To update an existing hunt pilot, locate the appropriate hunt pilot as described in Finding a Hunt
Pilot section on page 47-11, and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Save.
Note
After you choose a hunt list from the Hunt List drop-down list box, you can use the (Edit) link
that displays next to the Hunt List field to take you to the Hunt List Configuration window for
the hunt list that you choose. Use the Hunt List Configuration window to see the line group(s)
that are included in that hunt list.
Additional Information
47-13
Chapter 47
Step 2
Locate the hunt pilot that you want to delete. See the Finding a Hunt Pilot section on page 47-11.
Step 3
Check the check box of the hunt pilot that you want to delete and click Delete Selected.
A message that displays states that you cannot undo this action.
Step 4
To delete the hunt pilot, click OK or to cancel the deletion, click Cancel.
You can also delete a hunt pilot by locating and displaying the hunt pilot that you want to delete
and clicking Delete.
Tip
Additional Information
Related Topics
Wildcards and Special Characters in Route Patterns and Hunt Pilots, Cisco Unified Communications
Manager System Guide
47-14
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
48
Note
Because there are no default SIP route patterns in Cisco Unified Communications Manager, the
administrator must set them up.
Domain name examples: cisco.com, my-pc.cisco.com, *.com, rtp-ccm[1-5].cisco.com
Valid characters for domain names: [, -, ., 0-9, A-Z, a-z, *, and ].
IPv4 address examples: 172.18.201.119 or 172.18.201.119/32 (explicit IP host address); 172.18.0.0/16
(IP subnet); 172.18.201.18.21 (IP subnet).
Valid characters for IP addresses: 0-9, ., and /
Before you begin:
Ensure at least one SIP Profile and SIP trunk are configured before you can configure a SIP route pattern.
Table 48-1 describes the SIP route pattern configuration settings. For related procedures, see the
Related Topics section on page 48-7.
48-1
Chapter 48
Table 48-1
Field
Description
Pattern Definition
Pattern Usage
IPv4 Pattern
IPv6 Pattern
Tip
If the SIP trunk supports IPv6 or both IPv4 and IPv6 (dual-stack
mode), configure the IPv6 Pattern in addition to the IPv4 pattern.
Note
If the SIP trunk supports IPv6 or both IPv4 and IPv6 (dual-stack
mode), configure the IPv4 Pattern in addition to the IPv6
Pattern.
Description
For this optional entry, enter a description of the SIP Route Pattern.
Route Partition
If you want to use a partition to restrict access to the SIP route pattern,
choose the desired partition from the drop-down list box. If you do not
want to restrict access to the SIP route pattern, choose <None> for the
partition. See the Partition Configuration section on page 52-1 for
more information on how to use partitions.
You can configure the number of partitions that display in this
drop-down list box by using the Max List Box Items enterprise
parameter. If more than 250 partitions are specified by using the Max
List Box Items enterprise parameter, the Find button displays next to the
drop-down list box. Click the Find button to display the Select Partition
window. Enter a partial partition name in the List items where Name
contains field. Click the desired partition name in the list of partitions
that displays in the Select item to use box and click OK.
SIP Trunk
Note
Note
Make sure that the combination of SIP route pattern, route filter,
and partition is unique within the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager cluster.
(Required) Use the drop-down list to choose the SIP trunk to which the
SIP route pattern should be associated.
48-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 48
Table 48-1
Field
Description
Block Pattern
If you do not want this pattern to be used for routing calls, click the
Block Pattern check box.
Use Calling Partys External Check the check box if you want the full, external phone number to be
Phone Mask
used for calling line identification (CLID) on outgoing calls. You may
also configure an External Phone Number Mask on all phone devices.
Calling Party
Transformation Mask
Enter prefix digits in the Prefix Digits (Outgoing Calls) field. Valid
entries include the digits 0 through 9 and the wildcard characters
asterisk (*) and octothorpe (#).
Note
Calling Line ID Presentation Cisco Unified Communications Manager uses calling line ID
presentation (CLIP/CLIR) as a supplementary service to allow or
restrict the originating caller phone number on a call-by-call basis.
Choose whether you want the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
to allow or restrict the display of the calling party phone number on the
called party phone display for this SIP route pattern.
Choose Default if you do not want to change calling line ID
presentation. Choose Allowed if you want Cisco Unified
Communications Manager to allow the display of the calling number.
Choose Restricted if you want Cisco Unified Communications Manager
to block the display of the calling number.
For more information about this field, see Table 17-8 in the Calling
Party Number Transformations Settings section in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager System Guide.
48-3
Chapter 48
Table 48-1
Field
Description
48-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 48
Note
During your work in a browser session, the cookies on the client machine store your find/list search
preference. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item, or if you close the browser
and then reopen a new browser window, the machine retains your Cisco Unified Communications
Manager search preferences until you modify your search.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records:
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criteria or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search criteria.
Click Find.
All or matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by
choosing a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
48-5
Chapter 48
You must configure a SIP trunk before you can configure the SIP route pattern. See the Configuring a
Trunk section on page 92-48.
Procedure
Step 1
To add a SIP route pattern, choose Call Routing > SIP Route Pattern and click Add New.
To update a SIP route pattern, find the pattern by using the procedure in the Finding a SIP Route
Pattern section on page 48-5
To copy a SIP route pattern, find the pattern that you want to copy by using the procedure in the
Finding a SIP Route Pattern section on page 48-5. Click the Copy icon that is associated with the
pattern that you want to copy.
Step 3
To save the data and to add the server to the database, click the Save icon that displays in the tool bar in
the upper, left corner of the window (or click the Save button that displays at the bottom of the window).
Additional Information
Find the SIP route pattern by using the procedure in the Finding a SIP Route Pattern section on
page 48-5.
Step 2
From the list of matching records, choose the SIP route pattern that you want to delete.
Step 3
To delete the SIP route pattern, click the Delete Selected Item icon that displays in the tool bar in the
upper, left corner of the window (or click the Delete Selected button that displays at the bottom of the
window).
If the SIP route pattern is not in use, Cisco Unified Communications Manager deletes it. If it is in use, a
message displays.
48-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 48
Additional Information
Related Topics
48-7
Chapter 48
Related Topics
48-8
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
49
49-1
Chapter 49
49-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
50
50-1
Chapter 50
Table 50-1
Field
Description
Enter a name in the Time Period Name field. The name can comprise up
to 50 alphanumeric characters and can contain any combination of
spaces, periods (.), hyphens (-), and underscore characters (_). Ensure
each time period name is unique to the plan.
Note
Use concise and descriptive names for your time periods. The
hours_or_days format usually provides a sufficient level of detail
and is short enough to enable you to quickly and easily identify a
time period. For example, office_M_to_F identifies a time period
for the business hours of an office from Monday to Friday.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager provides the All the time time
period. This special, system time period includes all hours, is published
to end users, and cannot be deleted; this time period can be copied.
Description
From the drop-down list box, choose the time when this time period
starts. The available listed start times comprise 15-minute intervals
throughout a 24-hour day.
The default value is No Office Hours.
Note
From the drop-down list box, choose the time when this time period ends.
The available listed end times comprise 15-minute intervals throughout a
24-hour day.
The default value is No Office Hours.
Note
You must choose an End Time that is later than the Start Time
that you chose.
Note
50-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 50
Table 50-1
Field
Description
Repeat Every
Week fromIf you click on the Week from radio button, use the
drop-down list boxes next to from and through to choose the days of
the week during which this time period applies.
Examples: Choose a from value of Mon(day) and a through value of
Fri(day) to define a time period that applies from Monday through
Friday.
Choose a from value of Sat(urday) and a through value of Sat(urday)
to define a time period that applies only on Saturdays.
Year onIf you click on the Year on radio button, use the
drop-down list boxes next to Year on and until to choose the
month-and-day combinations of the year during which this time
period applies.
Example: Choose a Year on value of Jan and 15 and an until value
of Mar and 15 to choose the days from January 15 to March 15
during which this time period applies.
Choose a Year on value of Jan and 1 and an until value of Jan and 1
to specify January 1st as the only day during which this time period
applies.
Clear Repeat
Click this button to clear the previously chosen Repeat Every values from
the time period that you are modifying.
Additional Information
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your time period search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item,
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your time period search preferences
until you modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
50-3
Chapter 50
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records:
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criteria or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All or matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by
choosing a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
In the menu bar, choose Call Routing > Class of Control > Time Period.
The Find and List Time Periods window displays.
Step 2
To copy an existing time period, locate the appropriate time period as described in Finding a Time
Period section on page 50-3. Click the Copy icon next to the time period that you want to copy.
The window displays the copy of the time period. Change the value in the Name field, and continue
with Step 3.
To add a new time period, click the Add New button, and continue with Step 3.
50-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 50
To update an existing time period, locate the appropriate time period as described in Finding a Time
Period section on page 50-3, and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Save.
Additional Information
You cannot delete time periods that time schedules are using. To find out which time schedules or other
items are using the time period, choose Dependency Records from the Related Links drop-down list
box that is on the Time Period Configuration window. If the dependency records are not enabled for the
system, the dependency records summary window displays a message. For more information about
dependency records, see the Accessing Dependency Records section on page A-2. If you try to delete
a time period that is in use, Cisco Unified Communications Manager displays an error message. Before
deleting a time period that is currently in use, you must perform either or both of the following tasks:
Assign a different time period to any time schedules that are using the time period that you want to
delete. See the Configuring a Time Schedule section on page 51-4.
Delete the time schedules that are using the time period that you want to delete. See the Deleting
a Time Schedule section on page 51-4.
Procedure
Step 1
In the menu bar, choose Call Routing > Class of Control > Time Period.
Step 2
Locate the time period that you want to delete. See the Finding a Time Period section on page 50-3.
Step 3
Check the check box of the time period that you want to delete and click Delete Selected.
A message displays that states that you cannot undo this action.
Step 4
Caution
Click OK to delete the time period or click Cancel to cancel the deletion.
Before initiating this action, check carefully to ensure that you are deleting the correct time period. You
cannot retrieve deleted time periods. If a time period is accidentally deleted, you must rebuild it.
Tip
You can also delete a time period by locating and displaying the time period that you want to
delete and clicking Delete.
50-5
Chapter 50
Related Topics
Additional Information
Related Topics
50-6
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
51
Field
Description
Cisco Unified Communications Manager provides the All the time time
schedule. This special, system time schedule includes all days and all
hours, is published to end users, and cannot be deleted; this time schedule
can be copied.
Description
51-1
Chapter 51
Table 51-1
Field
Description
This list box lists the time periods that were selected for this time
schedule. To remove a time period from the list of selected time periods,
choose the time period to remove and click the up arrow between the two
list boxes. To reorder the selected time periods, choose a time period and
click the up and down arrows to the right of this list box.
Note
Note
Additional Information
51-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 51
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your time schedule search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item,
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your time schedule search preferences
until you modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records:
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criteria or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All or matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by
choosing a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
51-3
Chapter 51
In the menu bar, choose Call Routing > Class of Control > Time Schedule.
The Find and List Time Schedules window displays.
Step 2
To copy an existing time schedule, locate the appropriate time schedule as described in the Finding
a Time Schedule section on page 51-2. Click the Copy icon next to the time schedule that you want
to copy. The window displays the copy of the time schedule. Change the value in the Name field,
and continue with Step 3.
To add a new time schedule, click the Add New button and continue with Step 3.
To update an existing time schedule, locate the appropriate time schedule as described in the
Finding a Time Schedule section on page 51-2, and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Save.
Additional Information
You cannot delete time schedules that partitions are using. To find out which items are using the time
schedule, choose Dependency Records from the Related Links drop-down list box that is on the Time
Schedule Configuration window. If the dependency records are not enabled for the system, the
dependency records summary window displays a message. For more information about dependency
records, see the Accessing Dependency Records section on page A-2. If you try to delete a time
schedule that is in use, Cisco Unified Communications Manager displays an error message. Before
deleting a time schedule that is currently in use, you must perform either or both of the following tasks:
Assign a different time schedule to any partitions that are using the time schedule that you want to
delete. See the Configuring a Partition section on page 52-4.
Delete the partitions that are using the time schedule that you want to delete. See the Partition
Configuration chapter.
51-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 51
Procedure
Step 1
In the menu bar, choose Call Routing > Class of Control > Time Schedule.
Step 2
Locate the time schedule that you want to delete. See the Finding a Time Schedule section on
page 51-2.
Step 3
Check the check box of the time schedule that you want to delete and click Delete Selected.
A message displays that states that you cannot undo this action.
Step 4
Caution
To delete the time schedule, click OK or to cancel the deletion, click Cancel.
Before initiating this action, check carefully to ensure that you are deleting the correct time schedule.
You cannot retrieve deleted time schedules. If a time schedule is accidentally deleted, you must rebuild
it.
You can also delete a time schedule by locating and displaying the time schedule that you want
to delete and clicking Delete.
Tip
Additional Information
Related Topics
51-5
Chapter 51
Related Topics
51-6
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
52
Partition Configuration
Use the following topics to find, add, update, or delete route partitions:
52-1
Chapter 52
Partition Configuration
Table 52-1
Field
Description
Partition Information
(Partition Name,
Description)
Enter a name in the partition name and description box. Ensure each
partition name is unique to the route plan. Partition names can contain
alphanumeric characters, as well as spaces, hyphens (-), and underscore
characters (_).
Note
From the drop-down list box, choose a time schedule to associate with
this partition. The associated time schedule specifies when the partition
is available to receive incoming calls.
The default value specifies None, which implies that time-of-day routing
is not in effect and the partition remains active at all times.
In combination with the Time Zone value in the following field,
association of a partition with a time schedule configures the partition
for time-of-day routing. The system checks incoming calls to this
partition against the specified time schedule.
Time Zone
Originating DeviceIf you choose this option, the system checks the
partition against the associated time schedule with the time zone of the
calling device.
Specific Time ZoneIf you choose this option, choose a time zone
from the drop-down list box. The system checks the partition
against the associated time schedule at the time that is specified in
this time zone.
These options all specify the Time Zone. When an incoming call occurs,
the current time on the Cisco Unified Communications Manager gets
converted into the specific time zone set when one option is chosen. The
system validates this specific time against the value in the Time
Schedule field.
52-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 52
Partition Configuration
Finding a Partition
Timesaver
Tip
Use concise and descriptive names for your partitions. The CompanynameLocationCalltype format
usually provides a sufficient level of detail and is short enough to enable you to quickly and easily
identify a partition. For example, CiscoDallasMetroPT identifies a partition for toll-free, inter-local
access and transport area (LATA) calls from the Cisco office in Dallas.
You can enter multiple partitions at the same time by entering the partition name and description, if
applicable, in the Partition Name & Description text box. Remember to use one line for each partition
entry and to separate the partition name and description with a comma.
Table 52-2 provides examples of the maximum number of partitions that can be added to a calling search
space if partition names are of fixed length. Refer to Partition Name Limitations in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager System Guide for details about how this maximum number is calculated.
Table 52-2
2 characters
170
3 characters
128
4 characters
102
5 characters
86
...
...
10 characters
46
15 characters
32
Additional Information
Finding a Partition
Because you might have several partitions in your network, Cisco Unified Communications Manager lets
you locate specific partitions based on specific criteria. Use the following procedure to locate partitions.
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your partition search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item, Cisco
Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your partition search preferences until you
modify your search.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
52-3
Chapter 52
Partition Configuration
Configuring a Partition
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criteria or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search criteria.
Click Find.
All or matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by
choosing a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
Configuring a Partition
Perform the following procedure to add a partition.
Procedure
Step 1
In the menu bar, choose Call Routing > Class of Control > Partition.
The Find and List Partitions window displays.
Step 2
To add a new partition, click the Add New button, and continue with Step 3.
To update an existing partition, locate the appropriate partition as described in Finding a Partition
section on page 52-3, and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Save.
52-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 52
Partition Configuration
Searching for a Partition
If you are updating a partition, click Reset, or use the Apply Config button as described in the
Synchronizing a Partition With Affected Devices section on page 52-5. When you reset devices that
are associated with the partition, all calls on affected gateways drop.
Note
You can configure multiple partitions. To enter multiple partitions, use one line for each partition
entry. You can enter up to 75 partitions; the names and descriptions can have a total of up to 1475
characters. Use a comma (,) to separate the partition name and description on each line. If you
do not enter a description, Cisco Unified Communications Manager uses the name as the
description.
Additional Information
Click the Find button next to the Partition drop-down list box.
The Find and List Partitions window displays.
Step 2
In the Find partition where field, choose search criteria and enter a partial partition name.
Step 3
In the list of partitions that displays, click the desired partition name and click OK.
Additional Information
52-5
Chapter 52
Partition Configuration
Deleting a Partition
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
The window displays a list of partitions that match the search criteria.
Step 4
Click the partition to which you want to synchronize applicable devices. The Partition Configuration
window displays.
Step 5
Step 6
Click Save.
Step 7
Note
Step 8
If devices that are associated with the partition get reset, all calls on affected gateways drop.
Click OK.
Additional Information
Deleting a Partition
The following procedure describes how to delete a partition.
Before You Begin
You cannot delete a partition if it is assigned to an item such as calling search space or to a route pattern.
To find out which calling search spaces or other items are using the partition, choose Dependency
Records from the Related Links drop-down list box in the Partition Configuration window and click Go.
If the dependency records are not enabled for the system, the dependency records summary window
displays a message. For more information about dependency records, refer to the Accessing
Dependency Records section on page A-2. If you try to delete a partition that is in use, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager displays a message. Before deleting a partition that is currently in use, you
must perform either or both of the following tasks:
Assign a different partition to any calling search spaces, devices, or other items that are using the
partition that you want to delete.
Delete the calling search spaces, devices, or other items that are using the partition that you want to
delete.
Procedure
Step 1
In the menu bar, choose Call Routing > Class of Control > Partition.
Step 2
Locate the partition that you want to delete. See the Finding a Partition section on page 52-3.
Step 3
Check the check box of the partition that you want to delete and click Delete Selected.
52-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 52
Partition Configuration
Related Topics
You can delete all the partitions in the list by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete
Selected.
Tip
A message displays that states that you cannot undo this action.
Step 4
Caution
Before initiating this action, check carefully to ensure that you are deleting the correct partition. You
cannot retrieve deleted partitions. If a partition is accidentally deleted, you must rebuild it.
You can also delete a partition by locating and displaying the partition that you want to delete
and clicking Delete.
Tip
Additional Information
Related Topics
Local Route Groups, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide
52-7
Chapter 52
Partition Configuration
Related Topics
52-8
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
53
Field
Description
Enter a name in the Calling Search Space Name field. The name can
comprise up to 50 alphanumeric characters and can contain any
combination of spaces, periods (.), hyphens (-), and underscore
characters (_). Ensure each calling search space name is unique to the
system.
Note
53-1
Chapter 53
Table 53-1
Field
Description
Description
Choose a partition in the Available Partitions list box and add it to the
Selected Partitions list box by clicking the arrow button between the two
list boxes.
To add a range of partitions at once, click the first partition in the range;
then, hold down the Shift key while clicking the last partition in the
range. Click the arrow button between the two list boxes to add the range
of partitions.
To add multiple partitions that are not contiguous, hold down the
Control (Ctrl) key while clicking multiple partitions. Click the arrow
button between the two list boxes to add the chosen partitions.
Note
Selected Partitions
Table 53-2 provides examples of the maximum number of partitions that can be added to a calling search
space if partition names are of fixed length. Refer to Partition Name Limitations in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager System Guide for details about how this maximum number is calculated.
Table 53-2
2 characters
170
3 characters
128
4 characters
102
5 characters
86
...
...
10 characters
46
15 characters
32
Additional Topics
53-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 53
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your calling search space search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu
item, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your calling search space search
preferences until you modify your search.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Call Routing > Class of Control > Calling Search Space.
The Find and List Calling Search Spaces window displays.
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records:
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criteria or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All or matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by
choosing a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Topics
53-3
Chapter 53
In the menu bar, choose Call Routing > Class of Control > Calling Search Space.
Step 2
To copy an existing calling search space, locate the appropriate calling search space as described in
Finding a Calling Search Space section on page 53-3. Click the Copy icon next to the calling
search space that you want to copy. The window displays the copy of the calling search space.
Change the Calling Search Space Name, and continue with Step 3.
To add a calling search space, click the Add New button, and continue with Step 3.
To update an existing calling search space, locate the appropriate calling search space as described
in Finding a Calling Search Space section on page 53-3, and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Save.
Additional Topics
You cannot delete calling search spaces that devices, lines (DNs), translation patterns, or other items are
using. To find out which devices, lines, translation patterns, or other items are using the calling search
space, choose the Dependency Records from the Related Links drop-down list box in the Calling Search
Space Configuration window and click Go. If the dependency records are not enabled for the system,
the dependency records summary window displays a message. For more information about dependency
records, refer to the Accessing Dependency Records section on page A-2. If you try to delete a calling
search space that is in use, Cisco Unified Communications Manager displays a message. Before deleting
a calling search space that is currently in use, you must perform either or both of the following tasks:
Assign a different calling search space to any devices, lines, or translation patterns that are using
the calling search space that you want to delete. Refer to the Directory Number Configuration
section on page 64-1 and the Configuring a Translation Pattern section on page 60-10.
Delete the devices, lines, or translation patterns that are using the calling search space that you want
to delete. Refer to the Removing a Directory Number from a Phone section on page 64-28, and
the Deleting a Translation Pattern section on page 60-11.
53-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 53
Procedure
Step 1
In the menu bar, choose Call Routing > Class of Control > Calling Search Space.
Step 2
Locate the calling search space that you want to delete. See the Finding a Calling Search Space section
on page 53-3.
Step 3
Check the check box of the calling search space that you want to delete and click Delete Selected.
A message displays that states that you cannot undo this action.
Step 4
Caution
Before initiating this action, check carefully to ensure that you are deleting the correct calling search
space. You cannot retrieve deleted calling search spaces. If a calling search space is accidentally deleted,
you must rebuild it.
You can also delete a calling search space by locating and displaying the calling search space
that you want to delete and clicking Delete.
Tip
Additional Topics
Related Topics
Local Route Groups, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide
53-5
Chapter 53
Related Topics
53-6
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
54
54-1
Chapter 54
54-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
55
55-1
Chapter 55
55-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
56
56-1
Chapter 56
56-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
57
57-1
Chapter 57
57-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
58
58-1
Chapter 58
58-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
59
59-1
Chapter 59
59-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
60
Field
Description
Pattern Definition
Translation Pattern
Enter the translation pattern, including numbers and wildcards (do not
use spaces), in the Translation Pattern field. For example, for the NANP,
enter 9.@ for typical local access or 8XXX for a typical private network
numbering plan. Valid characters include the uppercase characters A, B,
C, and D and \+, which represents the international escape character +. If
you leave this field blank, you must select a partition from the Partition
drop-down list box.
Note
60-1
Chapter 60
Table 60-1
Field
Description
Partition
To set the maximum list box items, choose System > Enterprise
Parameters and choose CCMAdmin Parameters.
Note
Description
Numbering Plan
Route Filter
To set the maximum list box items, choose System > Enterprise
Parameters and choose CCMAdmin Parameters.
60-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 60
Table 60-1
Field
Description
MLPP Precedence
Choose an MLPP precedence setting for this translation pattern from the
drop-down list box:
Note
Resource-Priority
Namespace Network
Domain
From the drop-down list box, choose the calling search space for which
you are adding a translation pattern, if necessary.
You can configure the number of calling search spaces that display in this
drop-down list box by using the Max List Box Items enterprise
parameter. If more calling search spaces exist than the Max List Box
Items enterprise parameter specifies, the Find button displays next to the
drop-down list box. Click the Find button to display the Find and List
Calling Search Space window. Find and choose a calling search space
name (see the Finding a Calling Search Space section on page 53-3).
Note
Route Option
To set the maximum list box items, choose System > Enterprise
Parameters and choose CCMAdmin Parameters.
No Error
Unallocated Number
Call Rejected
Number Changed
60-3
Chapter 60
Table 60-1
Field
Description
Urgent Priority
Check the check box if you want the full, external phone number to be
used for calling line identification (CLID) on outgoing calls.
Enter a transformation mask value. Valid entries for the NANP include
the digits 0 through 9, and the wildcard characters asterisk (*) and
octothorpe (#); the international escape character +; and blank. If this
field is blank and the preceding field is not checked, no calling party
transformation takes place. Refer to the Adding a Route List section on
page 43-2 for more detailed information.
Enter prefix digits. Valid entries for the NANP include the digits 0
through 9, and the wildcard characters asterisk (*) and octothorpe (#); the
international escape character +.
Note
60-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 60
Table 60-1
Field
Description
Calling Line ID
Presentation
Calling Name Presentation Cisco Unified Communications Manager uses calling name presentation
(CNIP/CNIR) as a supplementary service to allow or restrict the
originating caller name on a call-by-call basis.
Choose whether you want the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
to allow or restrict the display of the calling party name on the called
party phone display for this translation pattern.
Choose Default if you do not want to change calling name presentation.
Choose Allowed if you want Cisco Unified Communications Manager to
display the calling name information. Choose Restricted if you want
Cisco Unified Communications Manager to block the display of the
calling name information.
For more information about this field, see Table 17-8 in the Calling
Party Number Transformations Settings section in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager System Guide.
60-5
Chapter 60
Table 60-1
Field
Description
Calling Party Number Type Choose the format for the number type in calling party directory
numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the calling directory
number (DN) type. Cisco recommends that you do not change the default
value unless you have advanced experience with dialing plans such as
NANP or the European dialing plan. You may need to change the default
in Europe because Cisco Unified Communications Manager does not
recognize European national dialing patterns. You can also change this
setting when you are connecting to a PBX that expects the calling
directory number to be encoded to a non-national numbering plan type.
Choose one of the following options:
NationalUse when you are dialing within the dialing plan for your
country.
InternationalUse when you are dialing outside the dialing plan for
your country.
Choose the format for the numbering plan in calling party directory
numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the calling DN numbering
plan. Cisco recommends that you do not change the default value unless
you have advanced experience with dialing plans such as NANP or the
European dialing plan. You may need to change the default in Europe
because Cisco Unified Communications Manager does not recognize
European national dialing patterns. You can also change this setting when
you are connecting to PBXs by using routing as a non-national type
number.
Choose one of the following options:
ISDNUse when you are dialing outside the dialing plan for your
country.
National StandardUse when you are dialing within the dialing plan
for your country.
60-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 60
Table 60-1
Field
Description
Connected Line ID
Presentation
Connected Name
Presentation
Discard Digits
Choose the discard digits instructions that you want to be associated with
this translation pattern. Refer to the Discard Digits Instructions section
in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide for more
information.
Note
The discard digits that display depend on the numbering plan that
you choose from the Numbering Plan drop-down list box.
Enter a transformation mask value. Valid entries for the NANP include
the digits 0 through 9, and the wildcard characters asterisk (*) and
octothorpe (#); the international escape character +; and blank. If the
field is blank, no transformation takes place. The dialed digits get sent
exactly as dialed.
60-7
Chapter 60
Table 60-1
Field
Description
Enter prefix digits. Valid entries for the NANP include the digits 0
through 9, and the wildcard characters asterisk (*) and octothorpe (#);the
international escape character +; and blank.
Note
Choose the format for the number type in called party directory numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the called directory
number (DN) type. Cisco recommends that you do not change the default
value unless you have advanced experience with dialing plans such as
NANP or the European dialing plan. You may need to change the default
in Europe because Cisco Unified Communications Manager does not
recognize European national dialing patterns. You can also change this
setting when you are connecting to a PBX that expects the called
directory number to be encoded to a non-national type numbering plan.
Choose one of the following options:
NationalUse when you are dialing within the dialing plan for your
country.
InternationalUse when you are dialing outside the dialing plan for
your country.
60-8
OL-18611-01
Chapter 60
Table 60-1
Field
Description
Choose the format for the numbering plan in called party directory
numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the called DN numbering
plan. Cisco recommends that you do not change the default value unless
you have advanced experience with dialing plans such as NANP or the
European dialing plan. You may need to change the default in Europe
because Cisco Unified Communications Manager does not recognize
European national dialing patterns. You can also change this setting when
you are connecting to PBXs by using routing as a non-national type
number.
Choose one of the following options:
ISDNUse when you are dialing outside the dialing plan for your
country.
National StandardUse when you are dialing within the dialing plan
for your country.
Additional Information
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your translation pattern search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu
item, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your translation pattern search
preferences until you modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
60-9
Chapter 60
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
Configure the following Cisco Unified Communications Manager items before configuring a translation
pattern:
Partition
Route filter
60-10
OL-18611-01
Chapter 60
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To copy an existing translation pattern, locate the appropriate translation pattern as described in the
Finding a Translation Pattern section on page 60-9, click the Copy button next to the translation
pattern that you want to copy, and continue with Step 3.
To add a new translation pattern, click the Add New button, and continue with Step 3.
To update an existing translation pattern, locate the appropriate translation pattern as described in
the Finding a Phone section on page 91-26, and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
In the Translation Pattern Configuration window that displays, enter the appropriate configuration
settings as described in Table 60-1.
Step 4
Click Save.
Note
Ensure that the translation pattern, that uses the selected partition, route filter, and numbering
plan combination, is unique. Check the route pattern/hunt pilot, translation pattern, directory
number, call park number, call pickup number, or meet-me number configuration windows if you
receive an error that indicates duplicate entries.
The Translation Pattern Configuration window displays the newly configured translation pattern.
Additional Information
Step 2
Locate the translation pattern that you want to delete. See the Finding a Translation Pattern section on
page 60-9.
Step 3
Check the check box of the translation pattern that you want to delete and click Delete Selected.
A message displays that states that you cannot undo this action.
Step 4
Caution
To delete the translation pattern, click OK or to cancel the deletion, click Cancel.
Check carefully to ensure that you are deleting the correct translation pattern before you initiate this
action. You cannot retrieve deleted translation patterns. If you accidentally delete a translation pattern,
you must rebuild it.
60-11
Chapter 60
Related Topics
Tip
You can also delete a translation pattern by locating and displaying the translation pattern that you want
to delete and clicking Delete.
Additional Information
Related Topics
60-12
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
61
Call Park
The Call Park feature allows you to place a call on hold, so it can be retrieved from another phone in the
Cisco Unified Communications Manager system (for example, a phone in another office or in a
conference room). If you are on an active call at your phone, you can park the call to a call park extension
by pressing the Park softkey or the Call Park button. Someone on another phone in your system can then
dial the call park extension to retrieve the call.
For more information on how to use and configure the Call Park feature, refer to the Call Park and
Directed Call Park chapter in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide.
61-1
Chapter 61
Call Park
61-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
62
62-1
Chapter 62
62-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
63
The Call Pickup feature allows users to pick up incoming calls within their own group. Cisco
Unified Communications Manager automatically dials the appropriate call pickup group number
when a user activates this feature on a phone.
The Group Call Pickup feature allows users to pick up incoming calls in another group. Users must
dial the appropriate call pickup group number when they activate this feature on a phone.
The Other Group Pickup feature allows users to pick up incoming calls in a group that is associated
with their own group. When a phone rings in a group that is associated with the user group, Cisco
Unified Communications Manager automatically searches for the incoming call in the associated
groups when they activate this feature on a phone.
The Directed Call Pickup feature allows a user to pick up an incoming call on a directory number
(DN) directly by pressing the GPickUp softkey and entering the directory number.
The Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Call Pickup feature allows a user to pick up a call that is directed to
the DN that is associated with the BLF button that is configured on the user Cisco Unified IP Phone.
For more information on how to use and configure the various Call Pickup features and how to configure
call pickup groups, refer to the Call Pickup chapter in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Features and Services Guide.
63-1
Chapter 63
63-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
64
Configure call forward, call pickup, call waiting, and multilevel precedence and preemption (MLPP)
options.
Set the display text that appears on the called party phone when a call is placed from a line.
Table 64-1 describes the fields that are available in the Directory Number Configuration window. For
related procedures, see the Related Topics section on page 64-30.
64-1
Chapter 64
Note
Shared lines always have identical DN settings, except for the field sections in the Directory Number
Configuration window that contain the naming convention on Device SEPXXXXXXXXXXXX, which
are maintained/mapped to a specific device.
If you add a shared line to a device, the shared DN configuration settings, such as Calling Search Space
and Call Forward and Pickup, will display. If these DN configuration settings are changed, the new
settings will apply to all the shared lines.
Table 64-1
Field
Description
Directory Number
Enter a dialable phone number. Values can include route pattern wildcards and numeric
characters (0 through 9). Special characters such as a question mark (?), exclamation mark (!),
backslash (\), brackets ([ ]), plus sign (+), dash (-), asterisk (*), caret (^), pound sign (#), and
an X are also allowable. Special characters that are not allowed are a period (.), at sign (@),
dollar sign ($), and percent sign (%).
At the beginning of the pattern, enter \+ if you want to use the international escape character
+. For this field, \+ does not represent a wildcard; instead, entering \+ represents a dialable
digit.
Note
When a pattern is used as a directory number, the display on the phone and the caller
ID that displays on the dialed phone will both contain characters other than digits. To
avoid this, Cisco recommends that you provide a value for Display (Internal Caller
ID), Line text label, and External phone number mask.
The directory number that you enter can appear in more than one partition.
Route Partition
Choose the partition to which the directory number belongs. Make sure that the directory
number that you enter in the Directory Number field is unique within the partition that you
choose. If you do not want to restrict access to the directory number, choose <None> for the
partition.
You can configure the number of partitions that display in this drop-down list box by using the
Max List Box Items enterprise parameter. If more partitions exist than the Max List Box Items
enterprise parameter specifies, the Find button displays next to the drop-down list box. Click
the Find button to display the Find and List Partitions window. Find and choose a partition
name (see the Finding a Partition section on page 52-3).
Note
Description
To set the maximum list box items, choose System > Enterprise Parameters and
choose CCMAdmin Parameters.
64-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 64
Table 64-1
Field
Description
Alerting Name
Enter a name that you want to display on the phone of the caller.
This setting, which supports the Identification Services for the QSIG protocol, applies to
shared and nonshared directory numbers. If you configure an alerting name for a directory
number with shared-line appearances, when the phone rings at the terminating PINX, the
system performs the following tasks:
Forwards the name of the caller that is assigned to the directory number.
Applies the Connected Name Restrictions (CONR) that are configured for the translation
pattern (if restrictions exist); the originating PINX may modify the CONR, depending on
the route pattern configuration.
If you do not configure an alerting name, Name Not Available may display on the caller
phone. If you do not enter a name for the Display (Internal Caller ID) field, the information
in the Alerting Name field displays in the Display (Internal Caller ID) field.
Setting the Always Display Original Dialed Number service parameter to True impacts the
alerting name functionality. If you set the service parameter to True, the alerting name does
not display on the calling phone; only the original dialed number displays.
ASCII Alerting Name
This field provides the same information as the Alerting Name field, but you must limit input
to ASCII characters. Devices that do not support Unicode (internationalized) characters
display the content of the Alerting Name ASCII field.
Active
To view this check box on the Directory Number Configuration window, access an unassigned
directory number from the Route Plan Report window. Checking this check box allows calls
to this DN to be forwarded (if forwarding is configured). If check box is not checked, Cisco
Unified Communications Manager ignores the DN.
Check this check box to allow CTI to control and monitor a line on a device with which this
directory number is associated
If the directory number specifies a shared line, ensure the check box is enabled as long as at
least one associated device specifies a combination of device type and protocol that CTI
supports.
Line Group
From this drop-down list box, choose a line group with which to associate this DN.
To edit or view the line group information for a line group, choose a line group from the
drop-down list box and click the Edit Line Group button. See the Line Group
Configuration section on page 45-1 for more information about configuring line groups.
Note
If you configure a DN as part of a line group, you will not be able to associate that DN
with a CTI port nor a CTI route point. Conversely, when you configure a CTI port or
CTI route point, you will not be able to specify a DN that already belongs to a line
group or to a hunt list. Furthermore, if a DN is a member of a line group or hunt list,
any device (CTI port, CTI route point, phone that is running SCCP, or phone that is
running SIP) that uses that DN should not be associated with a CTI user.
64-3
Chapter 64
Table 64-1
Field
Description
Associated Devices
After you associate this DN with a device(s), this pane displays the devices with which this
DN is associated.
To edit a device with which this DN is associated, choose a device name in the Associated
Devices pane and click the Edit Device button. The Phone Configuration window or Device
Profile Configuration window displays for the device that you choose. See the Cisco Unified
IP Phone Configuration chapter or the Device Profile Configuration chapter for more
information about configuring phones or device profiles.
To edit a line appearance that has been defined for this DN, choose a device name in the
Associated Devices pane and click the Edit Line Appearance button. The Directory Number
Configuration window or Device Profile Configuration window refreshes to show the line
appearance for this DN on the device that you choose.
To associate a device to this DN from the list of devices in the Dissociate Devices pane, choose
a device in the Dissociate Devices pane and add it to the Associated Devices pane by clicking
the up arrow between the two panes.
Dissociate Devices
If you choose to dissociate a DN from a device, this pane displays the device(s) from which
you dissociate this DN.
Choose a device in the Associated Devices pane and add it to the Dissociate Devices pane by
clicking the down arrow between the two panes.
Choose from list of Voice Mail Profiles that the Voice Mail Profile Configuration defines.
The first option specifies <None>, which represents the current default Voice Mail Profile that
is configured in the Voice Mail Profile Configuration.
64-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 64
Table 64-1
Field
Description
From the drop-down list box, choose the appropriate calling search space. A calling search
space comprises a collection of partitions that are searched for numbers that are called from
this directory number. The value that you choose applies to all devices that are using this
directory number. For configuration information about calling search space for directory
numbers, see the Calling Search Space section on page 64-23.
Changes result in an update of the numbers that the Call Pickup Group field lists.
You can configure calling search space for Forward All, Forward Busy, Forward No Answer,
Forward No Coverage, and Forward on CTI Failure directory numbers. The value that you
choose applies to all devices that are using this directory number.
You must configure either primary Forward All Calling Search Space or Secondary Forward
All Calling Search Space or both for Call Forward All to work properly. The system uses these
concatenated fields (Primary CFA CSS + Secondary CFA CSS) to validate the CFA
destination and forward the call to the CFA destination.
Note
If the system is using partitions and calling search spaces, Cisco recommends that you
configure the other call forward calling search spaces as well. When a call is
forwarded or redirected to the call forward destination, the configured call forward
calling search space gets used to forward the call. If the forward calling search space
is None, the forward operation may fail if the system is using partitions and calling
search spaces. For example, if you configure the Forward Busy destination, you should
also configure the Forward Busy Calling Search Space. If you do not configure the
Forward Busy Calling Search Space and the Forward Busy destination is in a partition,
the forward operation may fail.
When you forward calls by using the CFwdAll softkey on the phone, the automatic
combination of the line CSS and device CSS does not get used. Only the configured Primary
CFA CSS and Secondary CFA CSS get used. If both of these fields are None, the combination
results in two null partitions, which may cause the operation to fail.
If you want to restrict users from forwarding calls on their phones, you must choose a
restrictive calling search space from the Forward All Calling Search Space field.
For more information, refer to Partitions and Calling Search Spaces, in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager System Guide.
Presence Group
Choose the audio source that plays when a user initiates a hold action.
64-5
Chapter 64
Table 64-1
Field
Description
Choose the audio source that plays when the network initiates a hold action.
Auto Answer
Choose one of the following options to activate the Auto Answer feature for this directory
number:
Note
Make sure that the headset or speakerphone is not disabled when you choose Auto
Answer with headset or Auto Answer with speakerphone.
Note
Do not configure Auto Answer for devices that have shared lines.
AAR Settings
The settings in this row of fields specify treatment of calls for which insufficient bandwidth
exists to reach the destination. Automated alternate routing (AAR) handles these calls that are
routed to the AAR Destination Mask or Voice Mail.
Configure the following values:
Voice MailCheck this check box to use settings in the Voice Mail Profile Configuration
window.
When this check box is checked, Cisco Unified Communications Manager ignores the
settings in the Coverage/Destination box and Calling Search Space.
AAR Destination MaskUse this setting instead of the external phone number mask to
determine the AAR Destination to be dialed.
AAR GroupThis setting provides the prefix digits that are used to route calls that are
otherwise blocked due to insufficient bandwidth. An AAR group setting of None indicates
that no rerouting of blocked calls will be attempted.
Retain this destination in the This setting determines whether the AAR leg of the call will be present in the call forwarding
call forwarding history
history. If you uncheck the check box, the AAR leg of the call is not present in the call history.
If you check the check box, the AAR leg of the call will be present in the call history.
By default, the directory number configuration retains the AAR leg of the call in the call
history, which ensures that the AAR forward to voice-messaging system will prompt the user
to leave a voice message.
64-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 64
Table 64-1
Field
Description
If you select the With Configured CSS option, the Forward All Calling Search Space that is
explicitly configured in the Directory Number Configuration window controls the forward all
activation and call forwarding. If the Forward All Calling Search Space is set to None, no CSS
gets configured for Forward All. A forward all activation attempt to any directory number with
a partition will fail. No change in the Forward All Calling Search Space and Secondary
Calling Search Space for Forward All occurs during the forward all activation.
If you prefer to utilize the combination of the Directory Number Calling Search Space and
Device Calling Search Space without explicitly configuring a Forward All Calling Search
Space, select With Activating Device/Line CSS for the Calling Search Space Activation
Policy. With this option, when Forward All is activated from the phone, the Forward All
Calling Search Space and Secondary Calling Search Space for Forward All automatically gets
populated with the Directory Number Calling Search Space and Device Calling Search Space
for the activating device.
With this configuration (Calling Search Space Activation Policy set to With Activating
Device/Line), if the Forward All Calling Search Space is set to None, when forward all is
activated through the phone, the combination of Directory Number Calling Search Space and
activating Device Calling Search Space gets used to verify the forward all attempt.
If you configure the Calling Search Space Activation Policy to Use System Default, then the
CFA CSS Activation Policy cluster-wide service parameter determines which Forward All
Calling Search space will be used. If the CFA CSS Activation Policy service parameter gets
set to With Configured CSS, then Forward All Calling Search Space and Secondary Calling
Search Space for Forward All will be used for Call Forwarding. If CFA CSS Activation Policy
service parameter gets set to With Activating Device/Line CSS, then Forward All Calling
Search Space and Secondary Calling Search Space for Forward All will be automatically
populated with the Directory Number Calling Search Space and Device Calling Search Space
for the activating device.
64-7
Chapter 64
Table 64-1
Field
Description
CFA CSS Activation Policy Service Parameter
Ensure the CFA CSS Activation Policy service parameter that displays in the Clusterwide
Parameters (Feature - Forward) section of the Service Parameter Configuration window is set
correctly for call forward all to work as intended. The parameter includes two possible values:
When the Calling Search Space Activation Policy is set to Use System Default, the value of
the CFA CSS Activation Policy service parameter gets used to determine the Call Forward All
CSS.
When the option With Configured CSS is selected, the primary and secondary CFA Calling
Search Space get used. When the option With Activating Device/Line CSS is selected, the
primary and secondary CFA Calling Search Space get updated with primary line Calling
Search Space and activating Device Calling Search Space.
By default, the value of the CFA CSS Activation Policy service parameter is set to With
Configured CSS.
See Service Parameters Configuration for information on accessing and configuring service
parameters.
Roaming
When a device is roaming in the same device mobility group, Cisco Unified Communications
Manager uses the Device Mobility CSS to reach the local gateway. If a user sets Call Forward
All at the phone, the CFA CSS is set to None, and the CFA CSS Activation Policy is set to
With Activating Device/Line CSS, then:
The Device CSS and Line CSS get used as the CFA CSS when the device is in its home
location.
If the device is roaming within the same device mobility group, the Device Mobility CSS
from the Roaming Device Pool and the Line CSS get used as the CFA CSS.
If the device is roaming within a different device mobility group, the Device CSS and Line
CSS get used as the CFA CSS.
64-8
OL-18611-01
Chapter 64
Table 64-1
Field
Description
Forward All
The settings in this row of fields specify the forwarding treatment for calls to this directory
number if the directory number is set to forward all calls. The Calling Search Space field gets
used to validate the Forward All destination that is entered when the user activates Call
Forward All from the phone. This field also gets used to redirect the call to the Call Forward
All destination.
Specify the following values:
Note
Voice MailCheck this check box to use settings in the Voice Mail Profile Configuration
window.
When this check box is checked, Cisco Unified Communications Manager ignores the
settings in the Destination box and Calling Search Space.
DestinationThis setting indicates the directory number to which all calls are forwarded.
Use any dialable phone number, including an outside destination.
Calling Search SpaceThis setting applies to all devices that are using this directory
number.
Because call forwarding is a line-based feature, in cases where the device calling search space
is unknown, the system uses only the line calling search space to forward the call. If the line
calling search space is restrictive and not routable, the forward attempt fails.
Addition of a secondary calling search space for Call Forward All provides a solution to
enable forwarding. The primary calling search space for Call Forward All and secondary
calling search space for Call Forward All get concatenated (Primary CFA CSS + Secondary
CFA CSS). Cisco Unified Communications Manager uses this combination to validate the
CFA destination and to forward the call.
See the description for the field, Calling Search Space, page 64-5, for information about how
the combination of Primary and Secondary CFA CSSs works
64-9
Chapter 64
Table 64-1
Field
Description
The settings in this row of fields specify the forwarding treatment for internal calls to this
directory number if the directory number is busy. See Busy Trigger, page 64-22 for
information on when a line is considered busy. The call forward destination and Calling
Search Space field get used to redirect the call to the forward destination. See
Specify the following values:
Voice MailCheck this check box to use settings in the Voice Mail Profile Configuration
window for internal calls.
Note
When this check box is checked, the calling search space of the voice mail pilot gets
used. Cisco Unified Communications Manager ignores the settings in the Destination
box and Calling Search Space.
Note
When this check box is checked for internal calls, the system automatically checks the
Voice Mail check box for external calls. If you do not want external calls to forward
to the voice-messaging system, you must uncheck the Voice Mail check box for
external calls.
Note
DestinationThis setting indicates the call forward busy destination for internal calls.
Use any dialable phone number, including an outside destination.
When you enter a destination value for internal calls, the system automatically copies
this value to the Destination field for external calls. If you want external calls to
forward to a different destination, you must enter a different value in the Destination
field for external calls.
Calling Search SpaceThe Forward Busy internal Calling Search Space is used to
forward the call to the Forward Busy Internal destination. It applies to all devices that are
using this directory number.
Note
If the system is using partitions and calling search spaces, Cisco recommends that you
configure the forward calling search spaces. When a call is forwarded or redirected to
the call forward destination, the configured call forward calling search space gets used
to forward the call. If the forward calling search space is None, the forward operation
may fail if the system is using partitions and calling search spaces. For example, if you
configure the Forward Busy Destination, you should also configure the Forward Busy
Calling Search Space. If you do not configure the Forward Busy Calling Search Space
and the Forward Busy destination is in a partition, the forward operation may fail.
Note
When you choose a Calling Search Space for internal calls, the system automatically
copies this setting to the Calling Search Space setting for external calls. If you want
external calls to forward to a different calling search space, you must choose a
different setting in the Calling Search Space drop-down list box.
64-10
OL-18611-01
Chapter 64
Table 64-1
Field
Description
The settings in this row of fields specify the forwarding treatment for external calls to this
directory number if the directory number is busy. See Busy Trigger, page 64-22 for
information on when a line is considered busy. The call forward destination and Calling
Search Space field get used to redirect the call to the forward destination.
Specify the following values:
Voice MailCheck this check box to use settings in the Voice Mail Profile Configuration
window for external calls.
Note
When this check box is checked, the calling search space of the voice mail pilot gets
used. Cisco Unified Communications Manager ignores the settings in the Destination
box and Calling Search Space.
Note
When the Voice Mail check box is checked for internal calls, the system automatically
checks the Voice Mail check box for external calls. If you do not want external calls
to forward to the voice-messaging system, you must uncheck the Voice Mail check box
for external calls.
Note
DestinationThis setting indicates the call forward busy destination for external calls.
Use any dialable phone number, including an outside destination.
When you enter a destination value for internal calls, the system automatically copies
this value to the Destination field for external calls. If you want external calls to
forward to a different destination, you must enter a different value in the Destination
field for external calls.
Calling Search SpaceThe Forward Busy external Calling Search Space is used to
forward the call to the Forward Busy External destination. It applies to all devices that are
using this directory number.
Note
If the system is using partitions and calling search spaces, Cisco recommends that you
configure the forward calling search spaces. When a call is forwarded or redirected to
the call forward destination, the configured call forward calling search space gets used
to forward the call. If the forward calling search space is None, the forward operation
may fail if the system is using partitions and calling search spaces. For example, if you
configure the Forward Busy Destination, you should also configure the Forward Busy
Calling Search Space. If you do not configure the Forward Busy Calling Search Space
and the Forward Busy destination is in a partition, the forward operation may fail.
Note
When you choose a Calling Search Space for internal calls, the system automatically
copies this setting to the Calling Search Space setting for external calls. If you want
external calls to forward to a different calling search space, you must choose a
different setting in the Calling Search Space drop-down list box.
64-11
Chapter 64
Table 64-1
Field
Description
Forward No Answer Internal The settings in this row of fields specify the forwarding treatment for internal calls to this
directory number if the directory number does not answer. The call forward destination and
Calling Search Space field get used to redirect the call to the forward destination. Specify the
following values:
Voice MailCheck this check box to use settings in the Voice Mail Profile Configuration
window.
Note
When this check box is checked, the calling search space of the voice mail pilot gets
used. Cisco Unified Communications Manager ignores the settings in the Destination
box and Calling Search Space.
Note
When this check box is checked for internal calls, the system automatically checks the
Voice Mail check box for external calls. If you do not want external calls to forward
to the voice-messaging system, you must uncheck the Voice Mail check box for
external calls.
Note
Note
If the system is using partitions and calling search spaces, Cisco recommends that you
configure the forward calling search spaces. When a call is forwarded or redirected to
the call forward destination, the configured call forward calling search space gets used
to forward the call. If the forward calling search space is None, the forward operation
may fail if the system is using partitions and calling search spaces. For example, if you
configure the Forward No Answer destination, you should also configure the Forward
No Answer Calling Search Space. If you do not configure the Forward No Answer
Calling Search Space, and the Forward No Answer destination is in a partition, the
forward operation may fail.
Note
When you choose a Calling Search Space for internal calls, the system automatically
copies this setting to the Calling Search Space setting for external calls. If you want
external calls to forward to a different calling search space, you must choose a
different setting in the Calling Search Space drop-down list box for external calls.
64-12
OL-18611-01
Chapter 64
Table 64-1
Field
Description
Forward No Answer External The settings in this row of fields specify the forwarding treatment for external calls to this
directory number if the directory number does not answer. The call forward destination and
Calling Search Space field get used to redirect the call to the forward destination. Specify the
following values:
Voice MailCheck this check box to use settings in the Voice Mail Profile Configuration
window.
Note
When this check box is checked, the calling search space of the voice mail pilot gets
used. Cisco Unified Communications Manager ignores the settings in the Destination
box and Calling Search Space.
Note
When this check box is checked for internal calls, the system automatically checks the
Voice Mail check box for external calls. If you do not want external calls to forward
to the voice-messaging system, you must uncheck the Voice Mail check box for
external calls.
Note
Note
If the system is using partitions and calling search spaces, Cisco recommends that you
configure the forward calling search spaces. When a call is forwarded or redirected to
the call forward destination, the configured call forward calling search space gets used
to forward the call. If the forward calling search space is None, the forward operation
may fail if the system is using partitions and calling search spaces. For example, if you
configure the Forward No Answer destination, you should also configure the Forward
No Answer Calling Search Space. If you do not configure the Forward No Answer
Calling Search Space, and the Forward No Answer destination is in a partition, the
forward operation may fail.
Note
When you choose a Calling Search Space for internal calls, the system automatically
copies this setting to the Calling Search Space setting for external calls. If you want
external calls to forward to a different calling search space, you must choose a
different setting in the Calling Search Space drop-down list box for external calls.
64-13
Chapter 64
Table 64-1
Field
Description
Forward No Coverage
Internal
For complete information about Call Coverage, see Call Coverage in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager System Guide.
The call forward destination and Calling Search Space field get used to redirect the call to the
forward destination. Specify the following values:
Note
Note
Voice MailCheck this check box to use settings in the Voice Mail Profile Configuration
window.
When this check box is checked, Cisco Unified Communications Manager ignores the
settings in the Destination box and Calling Search Space. When this check box is
checked for internal calls, the system automatically checks the Voice Mail check box
for external calls. If you do not want external calls to forward to the voice-messaging
system, you must uncheck the Voice Mail check box for external calls.
DestinationThis setting specifies the directory number to which an internal
nonconnected call is forwarded when an application that controls that directory number
fails. Use any dialable phone number, including an outside destination.
When you enter a destination value for internal calls, the system automatically copies
this value to the Destination field for external calls. If you want external calls to
forward to a different destination, you must enter a different value in the Destination
field for external calls.
Calling Search SpaceThe Forward No Coverage internal Calling Search Space is used
to forward the call to the Forward No Coverage internal destination. This setting applies
to all devices that are using this directory number.
Note
If the system is using partitions and calling search spaces, Cisco recommends that you
configure the forward calling search spaces. When a call is forwarded or redirected to
the call forward destination, the configured call forward calling search space gets used
to forward the call. If the forward calling search space is None, the forward operation
may fail if the system is using partitions and calling search spaces. For example, if you
configure the Forward No Coverage destination, you should also configure the
Forward No Coverage Calling Search Space. If you do not configure the Forward No
Coverage Calling Search Space, and the Forward No Coverage destination is in a
partition, the forward operation may fail.
Note
When you choose a Calling Search Space for internal calls, the system automatically
copies this setting to the Calling Search Space setting for external calls. If you want
external calls to forward to a different calling search space, choose a different setting
in the Calling Search Space for external calls.
64-14
OL-18611-01
Chapter 64
Table 64-1
Field
Description
Forward No Coverage
External
For complete information about Call Coverage, see Call Coverage in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager System Guide.
The call forward destination and Calling Search Space field get used to redirect the call to the
forward destination. Specify the following values:
Note
Note
Voice MailCheck this check box to use settings in the Voice Mail Profile Configuration
window.
When this check box is checked, Cisco Unified Communications Manager ignores the
settings in the Destination box and Calling Search Space. When this check box is
checked for internal calls, the system automatically checks the Voice Mail check box
for external calls. If you do not want external calls to forward to the voice-messaging
system, you must uncheck the Voice Mail check box for external calls.
DestinationThis setting specifies the directory number to which an internal
nonconnected call is forwarded when an application that controls that directory number
fails. Use any dialable phone number, including an outside destination.
When you enter a destination value for internal calls, the system automatically copies
this value to the Destination field for external calls. If you want external calls to
forward to a different destination, you must enter a different value in the Destination
field for external calls.
Calling Search SpaceThe Forward No Coverage external Calling Search Space is used
to forward the call to the Forward No Coverage external destination. This setting applies
to all devices that are using this directory number.
Note
If the system is using partitions and calling search spaces, Cisco recommends that you
configure the forward calling search spaces. When a call is forwarded or redirected to
the call forward destination, the configured call forward calling search space gets used
to forward the call. If the forward calling search space is None, the forward operation
may fail if the system is using partitions and calling search spaces. For example, if you
configure the Forward No Coverage destination, you should also configure the
Forward No Coverage Calling Search Space. If you do not configure the Forward No
Coverage Calling Search Space, and the Forward No Coverage destination is in a
partition, the forward operation may fail.
Note
When you choose a Calling Search Space for internal calls, the system automatically
copies this setting to the Calling Search Space setting for external calls. If you want
external calls to forward to a different calling search space, choose a different setting
in the Calling Search Space for external calls.
64-15
Chapter 64
Table 64-1
Field
Description
This field applies only to CTI route points and CTI ports. The settings in this row specify the
forwarding treatment for external calls to this CTI route point or CTI port if the CTI route
point or CTI port fails. Specify the following values:
Voice MailCheck this check box to use settings in the Voice Mail Profile Configuration
window.
When this check box is checked, Cisco Unified Communications Manager ignores the
settings in the Destination box and Calling Search Space.
Note
Forward Unregistered
Internal
Calling Search SpaceThis setting applies to all devices that are using this directory
number.
This field applies to unregistered internal DN calls. The calls are rerouted to a specified
Destination Number or Voice Mail.
Note
Forward Unregistered
External
This field applies to unregistered external DN calls. The calls are rerouted to a specified
Destination Number or Voice Mail.
Note
You must also specify the maximum number of forwards in the Service Parameters
Configuration window for a Directory Number. See the Service Parameters
Configuration section on page 25-1.
Used in conjunction with Call Forward No Answer Destination, this field sets the timer for
how long the phone will ring before it gets forwarded. Leave this setting blank to use the value
that is set in the Cisco CallManager service parameter, Forward No Answer Timer.
Caution
You must also specify the maximum number of forwards in the Service Parameters
Configuration window for a Directory Number. See the Service Parameters
Configuration section on page 25-1.
By default, Cisco Unified Communications Manager makes the time for the T301
timer longer than the No Answer Ring Duration time; if the set time for the T301
timer expires before the set time for the No Answer Ring Duration expires, the call
ends, and no call forwarding can occur. If you choose to do so, you can configure
the time for the No Answer Ring Duration to be greater than the time for the T301
timer. For information on the T301 timer, choose System > Service Parameters;
choose the server, the Cisco CallManager service, and then the parameter in the
window that displays.
Choose the number that can be dialed to answer calls to this directory number (in the specified
partition).
Park Monitoring
Park Monitoring Forward No This release of Cisco Unified Communications Manager does not support this setting.
Retrieve Destination
External
Park Monitoring Forward No This release of Cisco Unified Communications Manager does not support this setting.
Retrieve Destination Internal
64-16
OL-18611-01
Chapter 64
Table 64-1
Field
Description
This release of Cisco Unified Communications Manager does not support this setting.
Target (Destination)
Enter the number to which MLPP precedence calls should be diverted if this directory number
receives a precedence call and neither this number nor its call forward destination answers the
precedence call.
Values can include numeric characters, octothorpe (#), and asterisk (*).
From the drop-down list box, choose the calling search space to associate with the MLPP
alternate party target (destination) number. For configuration information about calling search
space for directory numbers, see the Calling Search Space section on page 64-23.
Enter the number of seconds (between 4 and 60) after which an MLPP precedence call will be
directed to this directory number alternate party if this directory number and its
call-forwarding destination have not answered the precedence call.
Leave this setting blank to use the value that is set in the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager enterprise parameter, Precedence Alternate Party Timeout.
Enter a number from 0 to 1200 (inclusive) to specify the wait time in seconds before issuing
a reverted call alert to the holding party phone.
If you enter a value of 0, Cisco Unified Communications Manager does not invoke the reverted
call feature for a held call.
At installation, this field remains blank. If you leave this setting blank, the Hold Reversion
Duration timer setting for the cluster applies.
Enter a number from 0 to 1200 (inclusive) to specify the interval time in seconds for sending
periodic reminder alerts to the holding party phone.
If you enter a value of 0, Cisco Unified Communications Manager does not send reminder
alerts.
At installation, this field remains blank. If you leave this setting blank, the Hold Reversion
Notification Interval timer setting for the cluster applies.
From the Party Entrance Tone drop-down list box, choose one of the following options:
DefaultUse the value that you configured in the Party Entrance Tone service parameter.
OnA tone plays on the phone when a basic call changes to a multi-party call; that is, a
barge call, cBarge call, ad hoc conference, meet-me conference, or a joined call. In
addition, a different tone plays when a party leaves the multi-party call. If the controlling
device, that is, the originator of the multi-party call has a built-in bridge, the tone gets
played to all parties if you choose On for the controlling device. When the controlling
device leaves the call, Cisco Unified Communications Manager identifies whether
another device on the call can play the tone; if another device on the call can play the tone,
Cisco Unified Communications Manager plays the tone. If the controlling device cannot
play the tone, Cisco Unified Communications Manager does not play the tone even if you
enable the party entrance tone feature.
OffA tone does not play on the phone when a basic call changes to a multi-party call.
64-17
Chapter 64
Table 64-1
Field
Description
These fields display only after you associate this directory number with a device.
Leave this field blank to have the system display the extension.
Use a maximum of 30 alphanumeric characters. Typically, use the user name or the directory
number (if using the directory number, the person receiving the call may not see the proper
identity of the caller).
Setting applies only to the current device unless you check the check box at right (Update
Shared Device Settings) and click the Propagate Selected button. (The check box at right
displays only if other devices share this directory number.)
This field provides the same information as the Display (Internal Caller ID) field, but you
must limit input to ASCII characters. Devices that do not support Unicode (internationalized)
characters display the content of the ASCII Display (Internal Caller ID) field.
Setting applies only to the current device unless you check the check box at right (Update
Shared Device Settings) and click the Propagate Selected button. (The check box at right
displays only if other devices share this directory number.)
Use this field only if you do not want the directory number to show on the line appearance.
Enter text that identifies this directory number for a line/phone combination.
Suggested entries include boss name, department name, or other appropriate information to
identify multiple directory numbers to secretary/assistant who monitors multiple directory
numbers.
Setting applies only to the current device unless you check the check box at right (Update
Shared Device Settings) and click the Propagate Selected button. (The check box at right
displays only if other devices share this directory number.)
This field provides the same information as the Line Text Label field, but you must limit input
to ASCII characters. Devices that do not support Unicode (internationalized) characters
display the content of the ASCII Line Text Label field.
Setting applies only to the current device unless you check the check box at right (Update
Shared Device Settings) and click the Propagate Selected button. (The check box at right
displays only if other devices share this directory number.)
Indicate phone number (or mask) that is used to send Caller ID information when a call is
placed from this line.
You can enter a maximum of 24 number, the international escape character +, and X
characters. The Xs represent the directory number and must appear at the end of the pattern.
For example, if you specify a mask of 972813XXXX, an external call from extension 1234
displays a caller ID number of 9728131234.
Setting applies only to the current device unless you check the check box at right (Update
Shared Device Settings) and click the Propagate Selected button. (The check box at right
displays only if other devices share this directory number.)
64-18
OL-18611-01
Chapter 64
Table 64-1
Field
Description
Use this field to configure the handset lamp illumination policy. Choose one of the following
options:
Use System Policy (The directory number refers to the service parameter Message
Waiting Lamp Policy setting.)
Prompt Only
Light Only
None
Setting applies only to the current device unless you check the check box at right (Update
Shared Device Settings) and click the Propagate Selected button. (The check box at right
displays only if other devices share this directory number.)
Audible Message Waiting
Indicator Policy
Use this field to configure an audible message waiting indicator policy. Choose one of the
following options:
Off
OnWhen you select this option, you will receive a stutter dial tone when you take the
handset off hook.
DefaultWhen you select this option, the phone uses the default that was set at the
system level.
Use this field to configure the ring setting for the line appearance when an incoming call is
received and no other active calls exist on that device. Choose one of the following options:
Disable
Flash only
Ring once
Ring
Setting applies only to the current device unless you check the check box at right (Update
Shared Device Settings) and click the Propagate Selected button. (The check box at right
displays only if other devices share this directory number.)
Note
Turning on MLPP Indication (at the enterprise parameter, device pool, or device level)
disables normal Ring Setting behavior for the lines on a device, unless MLPP
Indication is turned off (overridden) for the device.
64-19
Chapter 64
Table 64-1
Field
Description
From the drop-down list box, choose the ring setting that is used when this phone has another
active call on a different line. Choose one of the following options:
Disable
Flash only
Ring once
Ring
Beep only
Setting applies only to the current device unless you check the check box at right (Update
Shared Device Settings) and click the Propagate Selected button. (The check box at right
displays only if other devices share this directory number.)
Note
Turning on MLPP Indication (at the enterprise parameter, device pool, or device level)
disables normal Ring Setting behavior for the lines on a device, unless MLPP
Indication is turned off (overridden) for the device.
This field determines the type of notification an incoming call sends to members of a call
pickup group. If the called phone does not answer, the phones in the call pickup group that are
idle will either hear a short ring (ring once) or hear nothing (disabled).
Use System DefaultThe value of this field gets determined by the setting of the Cisco
CallManager service parameter Call Pickup Group Audio Alert Setting of Idle Station.
Ring OnceA short ring is sent to members of the call pickup group.
Use System DefaultThe value of this field gets determined by the setting of the Cisco
CallManager service parameter Call Pickup Group Audio Alert Setting of Busy Station.
Beep OnlyA beep beep is sent to members of the call pickup group.
64-20
OL-18611-01
Chapter 64
Table 64-1
Field
Description
Recording Option
This field determines the recording option on the line appearance of an agent. By default, the
recording option specifies Call Recording Disabled.
Choose one of the following options:
Call Recording DisabledThe calls that the agent makes on this line appearance are not
recorded.
Automatic Call Recording EnabledThe calls that the agent makes on this line
appearance are automatically recorded.
Application Invoked Call Recording EnabledThe calls that the agent makes on this line
appearance are recorded if an application invokes calling recording.
When the recording option is set to either Automatic Call Recording Enabled or Application
Invoked Call Recording Enabled, the line appearance can be associated with a recording
profile.
When automatic recording is enabled, the application recording requests get rejected.
Recording Profile
This field determines the recording profile on the line appearance of an agent. Choose an
existing recording profile from the drop-down list box. To create a recording profile, use the
Device > Device Settings > Recording Profile menu option.
The default value specifies None.
The monitoring calling search space of the supervisor line appearance must include the agent
line or device partition to allow monitoring the agent.
Set the monitoring calling search space on the supervisor line appearance window. Choose an
existing calling search space from the drop-down list box.
The default value specifies None.
If the check box displays as checked, which is the default for this setting, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager logs missed calls in the call history for the shared line appearance
on the phone. If you uncheck the check box, missed calls do not get logged to the shared line
appearance.
64-21
Chapter 64
Table 64-1
Field
Description
These fields display only after you associate this directory number with a device.
You can configure up to 200 calls for a line on a device, with the limiting factor being the total
number of calls that are configured on the device. As you configure the number of calls for
one line, the calls that are available for another line decrease.
The default specifies 4. If the phone does not allow multiple calls for each line, the default
specifies 2.
For CTI route points, you can configure up to 10,000 calls for each port. The default specifies
5000 calls. Use this field in conjunction with the Busy Trigger field.
Busy Trigger
Note
Although the default specifies 5000 calls for maximum number of active calls that can
be configured on a CTI route point, Cisco recommends that you set the maximum
number of calls to no more than 200 per route point. This will prevent system
performance degradation. If the CTI application needs more than 200 calls, Cisco
recommends that you configure multiple CTI route points.
Tip
To review how this setting works for devices with shared line appearances, refer to
Shared Line Appearance in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager System
Guide.
This setting, which works in conjunction with Maximum Number of Calls and Call Forward
Busy, determines the maximum number of calls to be presented at the line. If maximum
number of calls is set for 50 and the busy trigger is set to 40, incoming call 41 gets rejected
with a busy cause (and will get forwarded if Call Forward Busy is set). If this line is shared,
all the lines must be busy before incoming calls get rejected.
Use this field in conjunction with Maximum Number of Calls for CTI route points. The default
specifies 4500 calls.
Tip
To review how this setting works for devices with shared line appearances, refer to
Shared Line Appearance in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager System
Guide.
These fields display only after you associate this directory number with a device.
Caller Name
Checking this check box will cause the caller name to display upon call forward.
Caller Number
Checking this check box will cause the caller number to display upon call forward.
Redirected Number
Checking this check box will cause the number that was redirected to display upon call
forward.
Dialed Number
Checking this check box will cause the original dialed number to display upon call forward.
64-22
OL-18611-01
Chapter 64
Table 64-1
Field
Description
This information displays only after you associate this directory number with a device.
(user name)
This pane displays the end users that are associated with this line.
To associate end users with this line, click the Associate End Users button, which causes the
Find and List Users popup window to display. In the popup window, you can use the Find
function to find end users to associate with this line. Refer to Finding an End User section
on page 114-8 for more information about finding end users. After you have found the end
users to associate with this line, click the Add Selected button, and the selected end users will
be added to the Users Associated with Line pane for this line.
For each associated end user, the following information displays:
Full NameThis column displays the last name and first name entries for the associated
end user.
User IDThis column displays the user ID of the associated end user.
PermissionClick the i button to display the user privilege information for this end user.
After at least one end user has been associated with this line, the following additional buttons
display:
Select AllClick this button to select all end users that are associated with this line.
Clear AllClick this button to deselect all end users that are associated with this line.
Delete SelectedAfter selecting any end users that you wish to dissociate from this line,
click this button. Doing so dissociates the end users from this line, but does not delete the
end user records.
You can configure the number of calling search spaces that display in this drop-down list box by using
the Max List Box Items enterprise parameter. If more partitions exist than the Max List Box Items
enterprise parameter specifies, the Find button displays next to the Calling Search Space drop-down list
box on the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration windows where the button appears.
Click the Find button to search for the calling search space that you want.
Note
To set the maximum list box items, choose System > Enterprise Parameters and choose CCMAdmin
Parameters.
Additional Topic
64-23
Chapter 64
Choose Call Routing > Directory Number. Records from an active (prior) query may also display in
the window.
The Find and List Directory Numbers window displays.
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Topics
64-24
OL-18611-01
Chapter 64
Tip
You can assign patterns to directory numbers; for example, 352XX. To avoid user confusion when you
assign a pattern to a directory number, add text or digits to the DN configuration fields, Line Text Label,
Display (Internal Caller ID), and External Phone Number Mask. (These fields display for a directory
number only after you add the directory number and you associate the directory number with a phone.)
For example, add the user name to the line text label and internal caller ID, but add the outside line
number to the external number mask, so when the calling information displays, it says John Chan, not
352XX.
For information on how to configure Private Line Automatic Ringdown (PLAR), see the Configuring
Private Line Automatic Ringdown (PLAR) section on page 64-27.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To locate a specific directory number, enter search criteria and click Find.
A list of directory numbers that match the search criteria displays.
Step 3
To add a directory number, click the Add New button to add a new directory number. The Directory
Number Configuration window displays.
Note
The Phone Configuration window provides an alternate method for adding a directory
number. Use the Device > Phone menu option and create a new phone or search for an
existing phone. After you create the new phone or display the existing phone, click either
the Line [1] - Add a new DN or Line [2] - Add a new DN link in the Association Information
area on the left side of the Phone Configuration window. The Directory Number
Configuration window displays, and you can continue with Step 4 of this procedure.
To update a directory number, click the directory number that you want to update. The Directory
Number Configuration window displays.
Step 4
Step 5
Click Save.
Note
Refer to the Synchronizing a Directory Number With Affected Devices section on page 64-26
before deciding whether to proceed to Step 6 below.
64-25
Chapter 64
Step 6
Click Reset Phone. For more information, refer to the Resetting a Phone section on page 91-32.
Tip
If you need more than two lines, you can increase the lines by modifying the phone button
template for the phone type (such as Cisco IP Phone 7960). Some phone types, however, only
support one or two lines (such as Cisco IP Phone 7902).
Note
Restart devices as soon as possible. During this process, the system may drop calls on gateways.
Additional Topics
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
The window displays a list of directory numbers that match the search criteria.
Step 4
Click the directory number to which you want to synchronize applicable devices. The Directory Number
Configuration window displays.
Step 5
Step 6
Click Save.
Step 7
Note
Step 8
If devices require a restart, the system may drop active calls on gateways.
Click OK.
Additional Information
64-26
OL-18611-01
Chapter 64
Tip
Step 1 through Step 4 apply if you want to configure PLAR for phones that are running SCCP. For
phones that are running SIP, you must perform Step 1 through Step 6. Before you attempt to configure
PLAR, verify that your phone model supports PLAR. To determine whether your phone supports PLAR,
refer to the Cisco Unified IP Phone Administration Guide that supports your phone model and this
release of Cisco Unified Communications Manager.
Example for How to Configure PLAR
Step 1
Create a partition, for example, P1, and a calling search space, for example CSS1, so CSS1 contains P1.
(In Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration, choose Call Routing > Class of Control
> Partition or Calling Search Space.)
Step 2
Create a null (blank) translation pattern, for example, TP1, which contains calling search space CSS1
and partition P1. In this null (blank) pattern, make sure that you enter the directory number for the B1
PLAR destination in the Called Party Transformation Mask field. (In Cisco Unified Communications
Manager Administration, choose Call Routing > Translation Pattern.)
Step 3
Assign the calling search space, CS1, to either A or A. (In Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Administration, choose Device > Phone.)
Step 4
Assign the P1 partition to the directory number for B1, which is the PLAR destination. (In Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration, choose Call Routing > Directory Number.)
Step 5
For phones that are running SIP, create a SIP dial rule. (In Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Administration, choose Call Routing > Dial Rules > SIP Dial Rules. Choose 7940_7960_OTHER.
Enter a name for the pattern; for example, PLAR1. Click Save; then, click Add Plar. Click Save.)
Step 6
For phones that are running SIP, assign the SIP dial rule configuration that you created for PLAR to the
phones, which, in this example, are A and A. ((In Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Administration, choose Device > Phone. Choose the SIP dial rule configuration from the SIP Dial Rules
drop-down list box.)
64-27
Chapter 64
If you try to remove a directory number that is in use, Cisco Unified Communications Manager displays
a message. To find out which line groups are using the directory number, click the Dependency Records
link from the Directory Number Configuration window. If the dependency records are not enabled for
the system, the dependency records summary window displays a message. For more information about
dependency records, refer to the Accessing Dependency Records section on page A-2.
When you remove a directory number from a phone, the number still exists within Cisco Unified
Communications Manager. To see a list of directory numbers that are not associated with phones, use
the Route Plan Report menu option. For more information, refer to the Deleting Unassigned Directory
Numbers section on page 67-2.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To locate a specific phone, enter the search criteria and click Find.
A list of phones that match the search criteria displays.
Step 3
Choose the device name that contains the directory number that you want to remove.
The Phone Configuration window displays.
Step 4
In the Association Information area on the left, choose the line that you want to remove.
The Directory Number Configuration window displays.
Step 5
In the Associated Devices pane, choose the device name of the phone from which you want to remove
this directory number.
Step 6
Step 7
Click the Save button at the bottom of the Directory Number Configuration window.
The Phone Configuration window displays with the directory number removed. The change gets
automatically applied to the phone; however, you can click Reset Phone. For more information, refer to
the Resetting a Phone section on page 91-32.
Additional Topics
64-28
OL-18611-01
Chapter 64
Note
Before you can create a Cisco Unity Connection voice mailbox for the end user, you must first configure
the end user with a phone device association and a primary extension, and the integration between Cisco
Unified Communications Manager and Cisco Unity Connection must be complete. For more
information, refer to the Cisco Unified Communications Manager SCCP Integration Guide for
Cisco Unity Connection or the Cisco Unified Communications Manager SIP Trunk Integration Guide for
Cisco Unity Connection.
Before You Begin
Note
You must configure Cisco Unified Communications Manager for voice-messaging service. Refer to
Cisco Unity and Cisco Unity Connection Configuration Checklist in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager System Guide.
You must configure Cisco Unity Connection servers. Refer to the applicable Installation Guide for
Cisco Unity Connection.
For Cisco Unity Connection integration, create an AXL connection via Cisco Unity Connection, as
described in the Managing the Phone System Integrations chapter in the System Administration
Guide for Cisco Unity Connection.
Ensure the Cisco RIS Data Collector service is activated. Refer to the Cisco Unified Serviceability
Administration Guide.
On the Directory Number configuration window, ensure the Voice Mail Profile setting is configured
and contains a pilot number, or the Voice Mail Profile setting should be set to None. If the Voice
Mail Profile is set to No Voice Mail, the Create Cisco Unity User link does not display.
Ensure that you have defined an appropriate template and selected a class of service (COS) for the
users you plan to add. For Cisco Unity Connection users, refer to the User Moves, Adds, and
Changes Guide for Cisco Unity Connection.
The End User Configuration window also includes the Create Cisco Unity Voice Mailbox link.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Call Routing > Directory Number and click Add New.
Step 2
Step 3
From the Related Links drop-down list box, in the upper, right corner of the window, choose the Create
Cisco Unity Voice Mailbox link and click Go.
The Add Cisco Unity User dialog box displays.
64-29
Chapter 64
Related Topics
Step 4
From the Application Server drop-down list box, choose the Cisco Unity Connection server on which
you want to create a Cisco Unity Connection mailbox and click Next.
Step 5
From the Subscriber Template drop-down list box, choose the subscriber template that you want to use.
Step 6
Click Save.
The Cisco Unity Connection mailbox gets created.
From Cisco Unity Connection Administration, you can now see the mailbox that you created. Refer to
the applicable User Moves, Adds, and Changes Guide for Cisco Unity Connection.
Additional Topics
Related Topics
Directory Number Configuration Checklist, Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide
Cisco Unity and Cisco Unity Connection Configuration Checklist, Cisco Unified Communications
Manager System Guide
User Moves, Adds, and Changes Guide for Cisco Unity Connection
64-30
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
65
Make sure that the following prerequisites are met before you configure Meet-Me numbers/patterns:
Configure the server(s). Refer to the Server Configuration section on page 2-1.
Configure the device pools. Refer to the Device Pool Configuration section on page 9-1.
Table 65-1 describes the meet-me number/pattern configuration settings. For related procedures, see the
Related Topics section on page 65-5.
Table 65-1
Field
Description
Directory Number or
Pattern
Description
To configure a range, the dash must appear within brackets and follow a
digit; for example, to configure the range 1000 to 1050, enter 10[0-5]0.
65-1
Chapter 65
Table 65-1
Field
Description
Partition
Note
Note
Note
Additional Topics
65-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 65
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your meet-me number/pattern search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this
menu item, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your meet-me
number/pattern search preferences until you modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Topics
65-3
Chapter 65
Make sure that the following prerequisites are met before proceeding with the steps:
Configure the server(s). Refer to the Server Configuration section on page 2-1.
Configure the device pools. Refer to the Device Pool Configuration section on page 9-1.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To add a Meet-Me Number/Pattern, click the Add New button and continue with Step 3.
Note
You can change the number or pattern as needed (example, changing 5000 to 500X).
Step 3
Step 4
Click Save.
Additional Topics
Make sure that the following prerequisites are met before proceeding with the steps:
65-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 65
Procedure
Step 1
Find the meet-me number/pattern by using the procedure in the Finding a Meet-Me Number/Pattern
section on page 65-2.
Step 2
Step 3
Click Delete.
Additional Topics
Related Topics
65-5
Chapter 65
Related Topics
65-6
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
66
Configuring Route Pattern Details for a non-NANP Dial Plan, page 66-4
66-1
Chapter 66
Note
During your work in a browser session, cookies on the client machine store your find/list search
preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item, or if you close the browser
and then open a new browser window, the system retains your Cisco Unified Communications Manager
search preferences until you modify your search.
Procedure
Step 1
From the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration window, choose Call Routing > Dial
Plan Installer.
The Find and List Dial Plans window displays.
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criteria or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search criteria.
Click Find.
All or matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by
choosing a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
66-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 66
Find the Dial Plan that you want to install by using the procedure defined in the Finding a Dial Plan
section on page 66-2
Step 2
From the list of records, click the Dial Plan name that matches your search criteria.
The Dial Plan Configuration window displays.
Step 3
To install a dial plan, see the Installing a Dial Plan on Cisco Unified Communications Manager
section on page 66-3.
To upgrade a dial plan, see the Upgrading a Dial Plan section on page 66-4.
To uninstall a dial plan, see the Uninstalling a Dial Plan section on page 66-6.
Additional Information
Find the Dial Plan that you want to install by using the procedure that is defined in the Finding a Dial
Plan section on page 66-2.
Step 2
From the list of records, click the Dial Plan name that matches your search criteria.
The Dial Plan Configuration window displays.
Step 3
The dial plan name and description display in the Dial Plan and Description fields.
Step 4
The Installed Version displays the current version that is installed on Cisco Unified Communications
Manager server. If no version of the dial plan is installed, the Installed Version displays Not Installed.
Step 5
Choose the dial plan version that you want to install from the Available Version drop-down list box.
Step 6
Click Install.
The Status displays that the dial plan has been installed.
The Installed Version field displays the dial plan version that is installed on Cisco Unified
Communications Manager server.
66-3
Chapter 66
Step 7
Note
Repeat Step 1 to Step 6 to install the dial plans on all the nodes Cisco Unified Communications Manager
cluster.
After installation of the dial plans, restart the Cisco CallManager service to load the dial plan.
Additional Information
For a non-NANP dial plan, if you want to retain the settings at the Route Pattern level, make one of
the following choices in the Route Details Configuration window:
a. Choose None in the Discard Digits field. Choosing None DDI in the Discard Digits field
Digits.)
2.
If you want to specify settings at the Route Group level that will override the Route Pattern settings,
choose the appropriate DDI for that dial plan from the Discard Digits field. Examples of DDI:
NANP:PreDot, AMNP:PreDot.
Additional Information
Caution
Upgrading a dial plan will fail if you configured one or more tags as a clause for a route filter in the
existing version of the dial plan and the upgrade version does not contain these tags. After you upgrade
to the new dial plan, the upgrade will list all such tags. You need to disassociate these tags from the route
filter and run the dial plan upgrade again on the Cisco Unified Communications Manager system.
Caution
Upgrading a dial plan will fail if you have associated one or more DDIs with Route Patterns/Translation
Patterns/Route Lists in the existing version of the dial plan and the upgrade version does not contain
these DDIs. The dial plan upgrade will list all such DDIs. You need to disassociate these DDIs from
Route Patterns/Translation Patterns/Route Lists and run the dial plan upgrade again on the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager system.
66-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 66
Note
Make sure that you update the dial plans on the first node server of the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager cluster before updating them on subscribers or other nodes in the cluster.
Use the following procedure to upgrade an existing dial plan.
Procedure
Step 1
Find the Dial Plan that you want to upgrade by using the procedure that is defined in the Finding a Dial
Plan section on page 66-2
Step 2
From the list of records, click the Dial Plan name that matches your search criteria.
The Dial Plan Configuration window displays.
Step 3
The dial plan name and description display in the Dial Plan and Description fields.
Step 4
The Installed Version displays the current version that is installed on Cisco Unified Communications
Manager server. If no version of the dial plan is installed, the Installed Version displays Not Installed.
Step 5
Choose the dial plan version that you want to upgrade from the Available Version drop-down list box.
Step 6
Click Install.
The Status displays that the dial plan has been upgraded.
The Installed Version field displays the latest dial plan version.
Step 7
Repeat Step 1 to Step 6 to upgrade the dial plans on all nodes of Cisco Unified Communications
Manager cluster where the Cisco CallManager service is installed.
Note
After upgrading the dial plans, restart the Cisco CallManager service for the changes to take effect. See
the Restarting the Cisco CallManager Service section on page 66-6.
Note
When dial plans are migrated from 4.x to 6.0, all configurations, such as route patterns, get retained; the
dial plans do not display in the Find and List Dial Plans window. To update dial plans, you must install
the COP file, as described in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Dial Plan Guide, and install
the dial plans that you want. See the Installing a Dial Plan on Cisco Unified Communications Manager
section on page 66-3.
Note
When you upgrade from 4.x to 6.0, to retain the dial plan and the dial plan configurations, such as route
pattern/route filter associated for a dial plan, install the latest dial plans that are available on CCO.
Additional Information
66-5
Chapter 66
Before you uninstall a dial plan, ensure that you remove the route patterns, translation patterns, route
lists, and route filters that are configured in the dial plan on the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
system.
Use the following procedure to uninstall a dial plan.
Procedure
Step 1
Find the Dial Plan that you want to delete by using the procedure that is defined in the Finding a Dial
Plan section on page 66-2.
Step 2
From the list of records, click the Dial Plan name that matches your search criteria.
The Dial Plan Configuration window displays.
Step 3
The dial plan name and description display in the Dial Plan and Description fields.
Step 4
The Installed Version displays the current version that is installed on the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager server.
Step 5
Click Uninstall.
Note
Dial plans should be uninstalled first from the first node in the cluster and then from the
subsequent nodes.
Repeat Step 1 to Step 5 to uninstall the dial plans on all nodes of the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager cluster.
Additional Information
In the Cisco Unified Serviceability window, choose Tools > Control Center - Feature Services.
The Control CenterFeature Services window displays.
66-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 66
Step 2
Choose the Cisco Unified Communications Manager server from the Servers drop-down list box.
In the CM Services area, Cisco CallManager displays in the Service Name column.
Note
Step 3
Step 4
Additional Information
Related Topics
Configuring Route Pattern Details for a non-NANP Dial Plan, page 66-4
66-7
Chapter 66
Related Topics
66-8
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
67
Note
Refer to the Local Route Groups chapter in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and
Services Guide for a discussion of the route plan report and its format when the Local Route Group
feature is configured.
Use the following procedures to view route plan records:
67-1
Chapter 67
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Step 3
Click Find.
All or matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by
choosing a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Step 4
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
The window displays the item that you choose.
Additional Information
Step 2
Click the directory number that you want to delete. When the Directory Number Configuration
window displays, click Delete.
b.
Check the check box next to the directory number that you want to delete. Click Delete Selected.
c.
To delete all found unassigned directory numbers, click Delete All Found Items.
A warning message verifies that you want to delete the directory number.
Step 3
To delete the directory number, click OK. To cancel the delete request, click Cancel.
Additional Information
67-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 67
Step 2
Note
You can update all the settings of the directory number except the directory number and
partition.
Step 3
Make the required updates such as calling search space or forwarding options.
Step 4
Click Save.
The Directory Number Configuration window redisplays, and the directory number field is blank.
Additional Information
Step 2
Choose View In File from the Related Links drop-down list box on the Route Plan Report window and
click Go. A dialog box displays.
From this dialog box, you can either save the file or import it into another application.
Step 3
Click Save.
Another window displays that allows you to save this file to a location of your choice.
67-3
Chapter 67
Related Topics
You may also save the file as a different file name, but the file name must include a .csv
extension.
Note
Step 4
Choose the location in which to save the file and click Save. This action should save the file to the
location that you designated.
Step 5
Locate the .csv file that you just saved and double-click its icon to view it.
Related Topics
Local Route Groups, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide
67-4
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
68
Note
Refer to the Local Route Groups chapter in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and
Services Guide for a discussion of called party transformation patterns and their use and configuration
when the Local Route Group feature is configured.
68-1
Chapter 68
Table 68-1 describes the calling party transformation pattern configuration settings. For related
procedures, see the Related Topics section on page 68-7.
Table 68-1
Field
Description
Pattern Definition
Pattern
Enter the transformation pattern, including numbers and wildcards (do not use
spaces); for example, for NANP, enter 9.@ for typical local access or 8XXX
for a typical private network numbering plan. Valid characters include the
uppercase characters A, B, C, and D and \+, which represents the international
escape character +.
Note
See the Wildcards and Special Characters in Route Patterns and Hunt Pilots
section in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide for more
information about wildcards.
Partition
Note
To set the maximum list box items, choose System > Enterprise
Parameters and choose CCMAdmin Parameters.
Note
Make sure that the combination of pattern, route filter, and partition is
unique within the Cisco Unified Communications Manager cluster.
Description
Numbering Plan
68-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 68
Table 68-1
Field
Description
Route Filter
Urgent Priority
To set the maximum list box items, choose System > Enterprise
Parameters and choose CCMAdmin Parameters.
Check the check box if you want the full, external phone number to be used
for calling line identification (CLID) on outgoing calls. You may also
configure an External Phone Number Mask on all phone devices.
Discard Digits
Instructions
Choose the discard digits instructions that you want to be associated with this
calling party transformation pattern. The discard digits that display depend on
the numbering plan that you choose from the Numbering Plan drop-down list
box.
Calling Party
Transform Mask
Enter a transformation mask value. Valid entries for the NANP include the
digits 0 through 9; the wildcard characters X, asterisk (*), and octothorpe (#);
and the international escape character +.
If the Discard Digits Instructions field is blank, the Prefix Digits (Outgoing
Calls) field is blank, the Calling Party Transformation Mask field is blank, and
the Use Calling Partys External Phone Number Mask is not checked, no
calling party transformation takes place.
Prefix Digits
(Outgoing Calls)
Enter prefix digits in the Prefix Digits (Outgoing Calls) field. Valid entries for
the NANP include the digits 0 through 9, the wildcard characters asterisk (*)
and octothorpe (#), and the international escape character +.
Note
The appended prefix digit does not affect which directory numbers
route to the assigned device.
68-3
Chapter 68
Table 68-1
Field
Description
Calling Line ID
Presentation
Calling Party Number Choose the format for the number type in calling party directory numbers.
Type
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the calling directory number
(DN) type. Cisco recommends that you do not change the default value unless
you have advanced experience with dialing plans such as NANP or the
European dialing plan. You may need to change the default in Europe because
Cisco Unified Communications Manager does not recognize European
national dialing patterns. You can also change this setting when you are
connecting to a PBX that expects the calling directory number to be encoded
to a non national type numbering plan.
Choose one of the following options:
NationalUse when you are dialing within the dialing plan for your
country.
InternationalUse when you are dialing outside the dialing plan for your
country.
68-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 68
Table 68-1
Field
Description
Calling Party
Numbering Plan
Choose the format for the numbering plan in calling party directory numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the calling DN numbering plan.
Cisco recommends that you do not change the default value unless you have
advanced experience with dialing plans such as NANP or the European dialing
plan. You may need to change the default in Europe because Cisco Unified
Communications Manager does not recognize European national dialing
patterns. You can also change this setting when you are connecting to PBXs
by using routing as a non-national type number.
Choose one of the following options:
ISDNUse when you are dialing outside the dialing plan for your
country.
National StandardUse when you are dialing within the dialing plan for
your country.
Additional Topics
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your transformation pattern search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this
menu item, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your calling party
transformation pattern search preferences until you modify your search.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Call Routing > Transformation Pattern > Calling Party Transformation Pattern.
The Find and List Calling Party Transformation Patterns window displays.
68-5
Chapter 68
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criteria or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search criteria.
Click Find.
All or matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by
choosing a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Topics
Choose Call Routing > Transformation Pattern > Calling Party Transformation Pattern.
The Find and List Calling Party Transformation Patterns window displays.
Step 2
To copy an existing calling party transformation pattern, locate the appropriate calling party
transformation pattern as described in the Finding a Calling Party Transformation Pattern section
on page 68-5, click the Copy button next to the calling party transformation pattern that you want
to copy, and continue with Step 3.
To add a new calling party transformation pattern, click the Add New button and continue with
Step 3.
68-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 68
To update an existing calling party transformation pattern, locate the appropriate transformation
pattern as described in the Finding a Calling Party Transformation Pattern section on page 68-5,
and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
In the Calling Party Transformation Pattern Configuration window that displays, enter the appropriate
configuration settings as described in Table 68-1.
Step 4
Click Save.
Additional Topics
Locate the calling party transformation pattern that you want to delete, as described in the Finding a
Calling Party Transformation Pattern section on page 68-5.
Step 2
Click Delete.
Step 3
Click OK.
Additional Topics
Related Topics
Calling Party Number Transformations Settings, Cisco Unified Communications Manager System
Guide
Wildcards and Special Characters in Route Patterns and Hunt Pilots, Cisco Unified Communications
Manager System Guide
Calling Party Normalization, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide
Local Route Groups, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide
68-7
Chapter 68
Related Topics
68-8
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
69
Note
Refer to the Local Route Groups chapter in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and
Services Guide for a discussion of called party transformation patterns and their use and configuration
when the Local Route Group feature is configured.
69-1
Chapter 69
Table 69-1 describes the called party transformation pattern configuration settings. For related
procedures, see the Related Topics section on page 69-7.
Table 69-1
Field
Description
Pattern Definition
Pattern
Enter the transformation pattern, including numbers and wildcards (do not use
spaces); for example, for NANP, enter 9.@ for typical local access, or 8XXX
for a typical private network numbering plan. Valid characters include the
uppercase letters A, B, C, and D and \+, which represents the international
escape character +.
Note
See the Wildcards and Special Characters in Route Patterns and Hunt Pilots
section in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide for more
information about wildcards.
Partition
Note
To set the maximum list box items, choose System > Enterprise
Parameters and choose CCMAdmin Parameters.
Note
Make sure that the combination of pattern, route filter, and partition is
unique within the Cisco Unified Communications Manager cluster.
Description
Numbering Plan
69-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 69
Table 69-1
Field
Description
Route Filter
Urgent Priority
To set the maximum list box items, choose System > Enterprise
Parameters and choose CCMAdmin Parameters.
Discard Digits
Choose the discard digits instructions that you want to be associated with this
called party transformation pattern. The discard digits that display depend on
the numbering plan that you choose from the Numbering Plan drop-down list
box.
Called Party
Transform Mask
Enter a transformation mask value. Valid entries for the NANP include the
digits 0 through 9; the wildcard characters X, asterisk (*), and octothorpe (#);
the international escape character +; and blank. If this field is blank and the
preceding field is not checked, no transformation takes place.
Prefix Digits
Enter prefix digits in the Prefix Digits (Outgoing Calls) field. Valid entries for
the NANP include the digits 0 through 9, the wildcard characters asterisk (*)
and octothorpe (#), the international escape character +, and blank.
Note
The appended prefix digit does not affect which directory numbers get
routed to the assigned device.
69-3
Chapter 69
Table 69-1
Field
Description
Choose the format for the number type in called party directory numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the called party directory
number (DN) type. Cisco recommends that you do not change the default
value unless you have advanced experience with dialing plans such as NANP
or the European dialing plan. You may need to change the default in Europe
because Cisco Unified Communications Manager does not recognize
European national dialing patterns. You can also change this setting when you
are connecting to a PBX that expects the called directory number to be
encoded to a non national type numbering plan.
Choose one of the following options:
Called Party
Numbering Plan
NationalUse when you are dialing within the dialing plan for your
country.
InternationalUse when you are dialing outside the dialing plan for your
country.
Choose the format for the numbering plan in called party directory numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the called DN numbering plan.
Cisco recommends that you do not change the default value unless you have
advanced experience with dialing plans such as NANP or the European dialing
plan. You may need to change the default in Europe because Cisco Unified
Communications Manager does not recognize European national dialing
patterns. You can also change this setting when you are connecting to PBXs
by using routing as a non national type number.
Choose one of the following options:
ISDNUse when you are dialing outside the dialing plan for your
country.
National StandardUse when you are dialing within the dialing plan for
your country.
Additional Topics
69-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 69
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your transformation pattern search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this
menu item, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your called party
transformation pattern search preferences until you modify your search.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Call Routing > Transformation Pattern > Called Party Transformation Pattern.
The Find and List Called Party Transformation Patterns window displays.
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criteria or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All or matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by
choosing a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Topics
69-5
Chapter 69
Choose Call Routing > Transformation Pattern > Called Party Transformation Pattern.
The Find and List Called Party Transformation Patterns window displays.
Step 2
To copy an existing called party transformation pattern, locate the appropriate called party
transformation pattern as described in the Finding a Called Party Transformation Pattern section
on page 69-5, click the Copy button next to the called party transformation pattern that you want to
copy, and continue with Step 3.
To add a new called party transformation pattern, click the Add New button, and continue with
Step 3.
To update an existing called party transformation pattern, locate the appropriate transformation
pattern as described in the Finding a Called Party Transformation Pattern section on page 69-5,
and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
In the Called Party Transformation Pattern Configuration window that displays, enter the appropriate
configuration settings as described in Table 69-1.
Step 4
Click Save.
Additional Topics
Locate the called party transformation pattern that you want to delete, as described in the Finding a
Called Party Transformation Pattern section on page 69-5.
Step 2
Click Delete.
Step 3
Click OK.
Additional Topics
69-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 69
Related Topics
Calling Party Number Transformations Settings, Cisco Unified Communications Manager System
Guide
Wildcards and Special Characters in Route Patterns and Hunt Pilots, Cisco Unified Communications
Manager System Guide
Local Route Groups, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide
69-7
Chapter 69
Related Topics
69-8
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
70
Mobility Configuration
Mobile Connect allows users to manage business calls using a single phone number and pick up
in-progress calls on the desktop phone and cellular phone. The Mobility Configuration window contains
dual mode phone handoff settings for call transfers between a user desktop phone and cellular phone.
For more information on Mobile Connect and how to configure mobility settings for dual-mode phones,
refer to the Cisco Unified Mobility chapter in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and
Services Guide.
70-1
Chapter 70
Mobility Configuration
70-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
71
71-1
Chapter 71
71-2
OL-18611-01
A R T
CH A P T E R
72
Annunciator Configuration
An annunciator, an SCCP device that uses the Cisco Media Streaming Application service, enables Cisco
Unified Communications Manager to play prerecorded announcements (.wav files) and tones to Cisco
Unified IP Phones and gateways. The annunciator, which works with Cisco Multilevel Precedence and
Preemption (MLPP), enables Cisco Unified Communications Manager to alert callers as to why the call
fails. Annunciator can also play tones for some transferred calls and some conferences.
Use the following topics to find and update annunciators:
Verify that you have activated the Cisco IP Voice Media Streaming Application service on the server
where you plan to configure the annunciator.
Tip
When you add a Cisco Unified Communications Manager server, the annunciator for the server will
automatically get added to the database. After you activate the Cisco IP Voice Media Streaming
Application service, the annunciator device registers with Cisco Unified Communications Manager.
Verify whether the annunciator exists by using the Finding an Annunciator section on page 72-3.
72-1
Chapter 72
Annunciator Configuration
Table 72-1 describes the annunciator configuration settings. For more information about related
procedures, see the Related Topics section on page 72-6.
Table 72-1
Field
Description
Server
Name
This field designates the name that is used when the device registers
with the Cisco Unified Communications Manager. Enter a name of up to
15 alphanumeric characters (you can use periods, dashes, and
underscores).
Description
Device Pool
Location
72-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 72
Annunciator Configuration
Finding an Annunciator
Table 72-1
Field
Description
From the drop-down list box, enable or disable whether Cisco Unified
Communications Manager inserts a trusted relay point (TRP) device
with this media endpoint. Choose one of the following values:
OffChoose this value to disable the use of a TRP with this device.
OnChoose this value to enable the use of a TRP with this device.
Finding an Annunciator
Perform the following procedure to find an annunciator:
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
72-3
Chapter 72
Annunciator Configuration
Updating an Annunciator
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criteria or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All or matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by
choosing a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
Updating an Annunciator
This section describes how to update an annunciator.
Before You Begin
Before you update an annunciator, verify that you have completed the following tasks:
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
72-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 72
Annunciator Configuration
Resetting an Annunciator
Tip
When you add a Cisco Unified Communications Manager server, the annunciator for the sever
will automatically get added to the database. After you activate the Cisco IP Voice Media
Streaming Application service, the annunciator device registers with Cisco Unified
Communications Manager.
Step 3
Click the annunciator that you want to update and continue with Step 4.
Step 4
Step 5
Click Save.
Step 6
Be sure the Cisco IP Voice Media Streaming Application service has been activated. For information on
activating services, refer to the Cisco Unified Serviceability Administration Guide.
Additional Information
Resetting an Annunciator
To reset an annunciator, perform the following procedure:
Procedure
Step 1
Locate the annunciator by using the procedure in the Finding an Annunciator section on page 72-3.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Additional Information
Synchronizing an Annunciator
To synchronize an annunciator with the most recent configuration changes, perform the following
procedure, which will apply any outstanding configuration settings in the least-intrusive manner
possible. (For example, a reset/restart may not be required on some affected devices.)
72-5
Chapter 72
Annunciator Configuration
Related Topics
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
The window displays a list of annunciators that match the search criteria.
Step 4
Check the check boxes next to the annunciators that you want to synchronize. To choose all annunciators
in the window, check the check box in the matching records title bar.
Step 5
Step 6
Click OK.
Additional Information
Related Topics
Multilevel Precedence and Preemption, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and
Services Guide
72-6
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
73
73-1
Chapter 73
Refer to the Conference Bridges chapter of the Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide
for more information about conference bridges.
Table 73-1 describes the software conference bridge configuration settings. For related procedures, see
the Related Topics section on page 73-18.
Table 73-1
Field
Description
Host Server
Description
Device Pool
Choose a device pool that has the highest priority within the Cisco
Unified Communications Manager group that you are using or choose
Default.
Common Device
Configuration
Location
73-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 73
Table 73-1
Field
Description
From the drop-down list box, enable or disable whether Cisco Unified
Communications Manager inserts a trusted relay point (TRP) device
with this media endpoint. Choose one of the following values:
DefaultIf you choose this value, the device uses the Use Trusted
Relay Point setting from the common device configuration with
which this device associates.
OffChoose this value to disable the use of a TRP with this device.
This setting overrides the Use Trusted Relay Point setting in the
common device configuration with which this device associates.
OnChoose this value to enable the use of a TRP with this device.
This setting overrides the Use Trusted Relay Point setting in the
common device configuration with which this device associates.
73-3
Chapter 73
Note
The hardware model type for Conference Bridge contains a specific Media Access Control (MAC)
address and device pool information.
Refer to the Conference Bridges chapter of the Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide
for more information about conference bridges.
Before you configure a conference bridge, configure the device pools. See the Deleting a Device Pool
section on page 9-13.
Table 73-2 describes the hardware conference bridge configuration settings. For related procedures, see
the Related Topics section on page 73-18.
Table 73-2
Field
Description
MAC Address
1231123245AB
Description
This field automatically generates from the MAC address that you
provide. You can update this field if you choose.
Device Pool
Choose a device pool that has the highest priority within the Cisco
Unified Communications Manager group that you are using or choose
Default.
Common Device
Configuration
73-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 73
Table 73-2
Field
Description
Location
73-5
Chapter 73
Table 73-2
Field
Description
From the drop-down list box, enable or disable whether Cisco Unified
Communications Manager inserts a trusted relay point (TRP) device
with this media endpoint. Choose one of the following values:
DefaultIf you choose this value, the device uses the Use Trusted
Relay Point setting from the common device configuration with
which this device associates.
OffChoose this value to disable the use of a TRP with this device.
This setting overrides the Use Trusted Relay Point setting in the
common device configuration with which this device associates.
OnChoose this value to enable the use of a TRP with this device.
This setting overrides the Use Trusted Relay Point setting in the
common device configuration with which this device associates.
Additional Information
73-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 73
Be aware that both hardware and software conference bridges can be active at the same time. Software
and hardware conference devices differ in the number of streams and the types of codec that they
support.
Before you configure a conference bridge, configure the device pools. See the Deleting a Device Pool
section on page 9-13.
Refer to the Conference Bridges chapter of the Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide
for more information about conference bridges.
Table 73-3 describes the Cisco IOS conference bridge configuration settings. For related procedures, see
the Related Topics section on page 73-18.
Table 73-3
Field
Description
Enter the same name that exists in the gateway Command Line Interface
(CLI).
Description
This field automatically generates from the conference bridge name that
you provide. You can update this field if you choose.
Device Pool
Common Device
Configuration
Location
73-7
Chapter 73
Table 73-3
Field
Description
This field displays for Cisco IOS Enhanced Conference Bridge only.
If you choose Non Secure Conference Bridge, the nonsecure
conference establishes a TCP port connection to Cisco Unified
Communications Manager on port 2000.
Tip
From the drop-down list box, enable or disable whether Cisco Unified
Communications Manager inserts a trusted relay point (TRP) device
with this media endpoint. Choose one of the following values:
DefaultIf you choose this value, the device uses the Use Trusted
Relay Point setting from the common device configuration with
which this device associates.
OffChoose this value to disable the use of a TRP with this device.
This setting overrides the Use Trusted Relay Point setting in the
common device configuration with which this device associates.
OnChoose this value to enable the use of a TRP with this device.
This setting overrides the Use Trusted Relay Point setting in the
common device configuration with which this device associates.
73-8
OL-18611-01
Chapter 73
Additional Information
Field
Description
MAC Address
1231123245AB
Description
This field automatically generates from the conference bridge name that
you provide. You can update this field if you choose.
Device Pool
Common Device
Configuration
73-9
Chapter 73
Table 73-4
Field
Description
Location
73-10
OL-18611-01
Chapter 73
Table 73-4
Field
Description
From the drop-down list box, enable or disable whether Cisco Unified
Communications Manager inserts a trusted relay point (TRP) device
with this media endpoint. Choose one of the following values:
DefaultIf you choose this value, the device uses the Use Trusted
Relay Point setting from the common device configuration with
which this device associates.
OffChoose this value to disable the use of a TRP with this device.
This setting overrides the Use Trusted Relay Point setting in the
common device configuration with which this device associates.
OnChoose this value to enable the use of a TRP with this device.
This setting overrides the Use Trusted Relay Point setting in the
common device configuration with which this device associates.
Model-specific
The device manufacturer specifies the model-specific fields under
configuration fields that the product-specific configuration. Because they are dynamically
device manufacturer
configured, they can change without notice.
defines
To view field descriptions and help for product-specific configuration
items, click the ? information icon under the Product Specific
Configuration heading to display help in a popup dialog box.
If you need more information, refer to the documentation for the specific
device that you are configuring or contact the manufacturer.
Additional Information
73-11
Chapter 73
Field
Description
Description
MAC Address
1231123245AB
Subunit
From the drop-down list box, choose the value for the daughter card for
a given slot on the Communication Media Module card.
Device Pool
Common Device
Configuration
73-12
OL-18611-01
Chapter 73
Table 73-5
Field
Description
Location
73-13
Chapter 73
Table 73-5
Field
Description
From the drop-down list box, enable or disable whether Cisco Unified
Communications Manager inserts a trusted relay point (TRP) device
with this media endpoint. Choose one of the following values:
DefaultIf you choose this value, the device uses the Use Trusted
Relay Point setting from the common device configuration with
which this device associates.
OffChoose this value to disable the use of a TRP with this device.
This setting overrides the Use Trusted Relay Point setting in the
common device configuration with which this device associates.
OnChoose this value to enable the use of a TRP with this device.
This setting overrides the Use Trusted Relay Point setting in the
common device configuration with which this device associates.
Product-Specific Configuration
Model-specific
To view field descriptions and help for product-specific configuration
configuration fields that the items, click the ? information icon under the Product Specific
device manufacturer
Configuration heading to display help in a popup dialog box.
defines
If you need more information, refer to the documentation for the specific
device that you are configuring or contact the manufacturer.
73-14
OL-18611-01
Chapter 73
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your conference bridge search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu
item, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your conference bridge search
preferences until you modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the Find dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added criteria.
Click Find.
All or matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by
choosing a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all conference bridge records
in the database by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
73-15
Chapter 73
Make sure that the following prerequisites are met before you proceed with the steps:
Note
Configure the device pools. See the Deleting a Device Pool section on page 9-13.
Software conference bridges automatically get created when the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager server gets created. You cannot add software conference bridges to Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration. See the Software Conference Bridge Configuration
Settings section on page 73-1.
For software conference bridges, activate the Cisco IP Voice Media Streaming Application service.
Refer to the Cisco Unified Serviceability Administration Guide.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To update a conference device, locate the conference bridge by using the procedure in the Finding
a Conference Bridge section on page 73-15.
Step 4
Click Save.
Note
Step 5
See the procedure described in Synchronizing a Conference Device section on page 73-17
before deciding on whether to proceed to Step 5.
To reset the conference bridge device and apply your changes, click Reset.
The Device Reset window displays.
Step 6
Additional Information
73-16
OL-18611-01
Chapter 73
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
The window displays a list of conference bridges that match the search criteria.
Step 4
Check the check boxes next to the conference bridges that you want to synchronize. To choose all
conference bridges in the window, check the check box in the matching records title bar.
Step 5
Step 6
Click OK.
Additional Information
Cisco Unified Communications Manager allows you to delete devices that may be associated with things
such as media resource groups. To find out what dependencies the conference device may have, choose
the Dependency Records link from the drop-down list box and click Go from the Conference Bridge
Configuration window. If the dependency records are not enabled for the system, the dependency records
summary window displays a message. For more information about dependency records, see the
Accessing Dependency Records section on page A-2.
Procedure
Step 1
Locate the conference bridge by using the procedure in the Finding a Conference Bridge section on
page 73-15.
Step 2
73-17
Chapter 73
Related Topics
Step 3
Step 4
Additional Information
Related Topics
Other Information
Cisco Unified Videoconferencing 3511 MCU and Cisco Unified Videoconferencing 3540 MCU
Module Administrator Guide
73-18
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
74
Note
Depending on the capabilities of the SIP endpoint, Cisco Unified Communications Manager may require
an RFC 2833 DTMF-compliant media termination point device to make SIP calls. For RSVP calls, the
Media Resource Group List (MRGL) that is associated with the endpoint device needs to include the
media termination point devices that support RSVP.
Use the following topics to add, update, and delete media termination points:
74-1
Chapter 74
Field
Description
Note
Tip
Ensure that you enter the same media termination point name
that exists in the gateway Command Line Interface (CLI).
Description
Device Pool
Choose a device pool that has the highest priority within the Cisco
Unified Communications Manager group that you are using or choose
Default.
Check this check box to designate this media termination point (MTP)
as a trusted relay point (TRP) that Cisco Unified Communications
Manager can use in a network virtualization environment.
Refer to Trusted Relay Point in the Media Resource Management
chapter in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide
and its subtopics for a discussion of trusted relay points.
Additional Information
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your media termination point search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this
menu item, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your media termination
point search preferences until you modify your search or close the browser.
74-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 74
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
Note
To perform this procedure, you must activate the Cisco IP Voice Media Streaming App service by using
Cisco Unified Serviceability. For information about activating services, refer to the Cisco Unified
Serviceability Administration Guide.
74-3
Chapter 74
Make sure that the following prerequisites are met before you proceed with the steps:
Note
You can have only one Media Termination Point device for each Cisco Unified Communications
Manager server. When a Cisco Unified Communications Manager Server is added, a media termination
point device automatically gets created for the server but is not available for use until the Cisco IP Voice
Media Streaming App service gets activated.
Procedure
Step 1
To add a Media Termination Point, choose Media Resources > Media Termination Point. The
Find and List Media Termination Point window displays. Click Add New.
To copy a Media Termination Point, choose Media Resources > Media Termination Point. The
Find and List Media Termination Point window displays. Click the Copy icon next to the media
termination point that you want to copy.
To update a Media Termination Point, locate the media termination point by using the procedure in
the Finding a Media Termination Point section on page 74-2.
Step 2
Step 3
Click Save.
Additional Information
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
The window displays a list of a Media Termination Points that match the search criteria.
Step 4
Check the check boxes next to the Media Termination Points that you want to synchronize. To choose
all Media Termination Points in the window, check the check box in the matching records title bar.
74-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 74
Step 5
Step 6
Click OK.
Additional Information
Before deleting a media termination point that is currently in use and is the last device in the Media
Resource Group, you should perform either or both of the following tasks:
Assign a different media termination point to the media resource groups that are using the media
termination point that you want to delete. See the Finding a Media Resource Group section on
page 79-2 section.
Delete the media resource groups that are using the media termination point that you want to delete.
See the Deleting a Media Resource Group section on page 79-4.
Procedure
Step 1
Locate the media termination point by using the procedure in the Finding a Media Termination Point
section on page 74-2.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Click OK.
Additional Information
74-5
Chapter 74
Related Topics
Related Topics
74-6
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
75
Network hold, which includes transfer hold, conference hold, and park hold
Music on hold configuration comprises configuration of music on hold audio sources and music on hold
servers.
For more information on how to use the Music On Hold Audio Source Configuration window, refer to
the Music On Hold chapter in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide.
75-1
Chapter 75
75-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
76
Network hold, which includes transfer hold, conference hold, and park hold
Music on hold configuration comprises configuration of music on hold audio sources and music on hold
servers. You can also enable a music on hold fixed audio source, and this audio source can allow
multicasting.
For more information on how to use the Fixed MOH Audio Source Configuration window, refer to the
Music On Hold chapter in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide.
76-1
Chapter 76
76-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
77
77-1
Chapter 77
77-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
78
Transcoder Configuration
Use the following topics to configure transcoders:
78-1
Chapter 78
Transcoder Configuration
Table 78-1 describes the transcoder configuration settings. For related procedures, see the Related
Topics section on page 78-6.
Table 78-1
Field
Description
Transcoder Type
Description
Device Name
This field displays if you chose Cisco IOS Media Termination Point or
Cisco IOS Enhanced Media Termination Point as the transcoder type.
Enter the same transcoding name that you entered in the gateway
Command Line Interface (CLI).
Transcoder Name
MAC Address
Subunit
Device Pool
From the drop-down list box, choose a device pool. For more detailed
information on the chosen device pool, click View Details.
Common Device
Configuration
Enter any special load information into the Special Load Information
field or leave blank to use default. Valid characters include letters,
numbers, dashes, dots (periods), and underscores.
Check this check box to designate this transcoder as a trusted relay point
(TRP) that Cisco Unified Communications Manager can use in a
network virtualization environment.
Refer to Trusted Relay Point and its subtopics in the Media Resource
Management chapter in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
System Guide for a discussion of trusted relay points.
Maximum Capacity
78-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 78
Transcoder Configuration
Finding a Transcoder
Table 78-1
Field
Description
Model-specific
configuration fields defined
by the device manufacturer
Additional Information
Finding a Transcoder
Because you might have several transcoders in your network, Cisco Unified Communications Manager
lets you locate specific transcoders on the basis of specific criteria. Use the following procedure to locate
transcoders.
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your transcoder search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item,
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your transcoder search preferences
until you modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
78-3
Chapter 78
Transcoder Configuration
Configuring a Transcoder
Step 3
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
Configuring a Transcoder
This section describes how to configure a transcoder.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To copy an existing transcoder, locate the appropriate transcoder as described in the Finding a
Transcoder section on page 78-3, click the Copy button next to the transcoder that you want to
copy, and continue with Step 3.
To add a new transcoder, click the Add New button and continue with Step 3.
To update an existing transcoder, locate the appropriate transcoder as described in the Finding a
Transcoder section on page 78-3 and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Save.
The window refreshes and shows specific information, including the status, for the transcoder that you
just configured.
Additional Information
78-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 78
Transcoder Configuration
Resetting a Transcoder
Resetting a Transcoder
This section describes how to reset a Transcoder.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
From the Transcoders list, choose the transcoder that you want to reset.
The window refreshes and displays the transcoder that you chose.
Step 3
Click Reset.
The Reset dialog box displays.
Step 4
Additional Information
Synchronizing a Transcoder
To synchronize a transcoder with the most recent configuration changes, perform the following
procedure, which will apply any outstanding configuration settings in the least-intrusive manner
possible. (For example, a reset/restart may not be required on some affected devices.).
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
The window displays a list of transcoders that match the search criteria.
Step 4
Check the check boxes next to the transcoders that you want to synchronize. To choose all transcoders
in the window, check the check box in the matching records title bar.
Step 5
Step 6
Click OK.
Additional Information
78-5
Chapter 78
Transcoder Configuration
Deleting a Transcoder
Deleting a Transcoder
This section describes how to delete a transcoder.
Before You Begin
You cannot delete a transcoder that is assigned to a media resource group. To find out which media
resource groups are using the transcoder, from the Transcoder Configuration window, choose
Dependency Records from the Related Links drop-down list box and click Go. If the dependency
records are not enabled for the system, the dependency records summary window displays a message.
For more information about dependency records, see the Accessing Dependency Records section on
page A-2. If you try to delete a transcoder that is in use, Cisco Unified Communications Manager
displays a message. Before deleting a transcoder that is currently in use, you must remove the transcoder
from the media resource group(s) to which it is assigned.
Procedure
Step 1
Locate the transcoder by using the procedure in the Finding a Transcoder section on page 78-3.
Step 2
From the list of matching records, choose the transcoder that you want to delete.
The window refreshes and displays the transcoder that you chose.
Step 3
Click Delete.
A message displays that states that you are about to permanently delete this transcoder and that you
cannot undo this action.
Step 4
If you want to continue, click OK or, to cancel the deletion, click Cancel.
After the window refreshes, the transcoder that you deleted no longer appears in the transcoder list.
Additional Information
Related Topics
78-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 78
Transcoder Configuration
Related Topics
78-7
Chapter 78
Transcoder Configuration
Related Topics
78-8
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
79
Transcoder (XCODE)
Annunciator (ANN)
Media Resource Group and Media Resource Group List Configuration Checklist, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager System Guide
79-1
Chapter 79
Table 79-1 describes the configuration settings that are used for configuring media resource groups. For
more information about related procedures, see the Related Topics section on page 79-5.
Table 79-1
Field
Description
Name
Enter a unique name in this required field for the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager to identify the media resource group. This
name can comprise up to 50 characters. Valid characters include
letters, numbers, spaces, dashes, dots (periods), and underscores.
Description
Enter a description for the media resource group. This description can
comprise up to 50 characters. Ensure Description does not contain
double quotes (), less than (<), greater than (>), ampersand (&), or
the percent sign (%).
This area comprises two panes that are used to define the media
resources for a media resource group: Available Media Resources and
Selected Media Resources.
This pane lists the media resources that can be chosen for a media
resource group. The list includes the following media resource types:
Transcoders (XCODE)
Annunciator (ANN)
Music on hold servers that are configured for multicast get labeled as
(MOH)[Multicast].
To add a media resource for this media resource group, choose one
from the list and click the down arrow. After a media resource is
added, its name moves to the Selected Media Resources pane.
Selected Media Resources
This pane lists the media resources that were chosen for a media
resource group. For any media resource group, you must choose at
least one media resource.
To delete (unselect) a media resource, choose its name in the list and
click the up arrow.
Use Multicast for MOH Audio To use multicast for Music On Hold Audio, check this check box. To
(If at least one multicast MOH do so, make sure that at least one of the selected media resources is a
resource is available)
multicast MOH server.
Note
79-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 79
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your media resource group search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this
menu item, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your media resource group
search preferences until you modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
79-3
Chapter 79
Note
You cannot delete a media resource, such as a conference bridge, that is part of a media resource group
unless you first remove the resource from the media resource group or you delete the media resource
group that contains the media resource.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To copy a media resource group, locate the appropriate media resource group as described in
Finding a Media Resource Group section on page 79-2. From the Search Results list, click the
Copy icon that corresponds to the media resource group that you want to copy, and continue with
Step 3.
To add a new media resource group, click the Add New button. The Media Resource Group
Configuration window displays. Continue with Step 3.
To update an existing media resource group, locate the appropriate media resource group as
described in Finding a Media Resource Group section on page 79-2, and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Save.
If you are copying a media resource group, you should change at least the media resource group name.
If you are adding a media resource group, the Status changes from Ready to Insert completed. The list
of media resource groups now includes the new media resource group.
If you are updating an existing media resource group, the Status changes from Ready to Update
completed.
Additional Information
You cannot delete a media resource group that is assigned to a Media Resource Group List. To find out
which media resource groups lists are using the media resource group, in the Media Resource Group
Configuration window, from the Related Links drop-down list box, choose Dependency Records and
click Go. If the dependency records are not enabled for the system, the dependency records summary
window displays a message. For more information about dependency records, see the Accessing
79-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 79
Dependency Records section on page A-2. If you try to delete a media resource group that is in use,
Cisco Unified Communications Manager displays a message. Before deleting a media resource group
that is currently in use, you must perform either or both of the following tasks:
Assign a different media resource group list to any media resource groups that are using the media
resource group that you want to delete. See the Configuring a Media Resource Group List section
on page 80-3.
Delete the media resource group lists that are using the media resource group that you want to delete.
See the Deleting a Media Resource Group List section on page 80-4.
Procedure
Step 1
Locate the media resource group by using the procedure in the Finding a Media Resource Group
section on page 79-2.
Step 2
From list of matching records, choose the media resource group that you want to delete.
Step 3
Step 4
Additional Information
Related Topics
Media Resource Group and Media Resource Group List Configuration Checklist, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager System Guide
79-5
Chapter 79
Related Topics
79-6
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
80
Field
Description
Enter a unique name in this required field for the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager to identify the Media Resource Group
List. This name can comprise up to 50 characters. Valid characters
include letters, numbers, spaces, dashes, dots (periods), and
underscores.
80-1
Chapter 80
Table 80-1
Field
Description
This window lists the media resource groups that can be chosen for
a Media Resource Group List. The list includes only previously
defined media resource groups.
To add a media resource group for this Media Resource Group List,
choose one from the list and click the down arrow that is located
between the two panes.
After a media resource group is added, its name moves to the
Selected Media Resource Groups pane.
This pane lists the media resource groups that were chosen for a
Media Resource Group List. For any Media Resource Group List,
you must choose at least one media resource group.
To delete (unselect) a media resource group, choose its name in the
list and click the up arrow that is located between the two panes.
Because media resource groups are listed in order of priority
(highest to lowest), you must use the up and down arrows that are
located to the right of this pane to reorder the media resource group
priority. To do so, choose a media resource group in the list and use
the up or down arrow to change its priority.
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your media resource group list search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this
menu item, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your media resource group
list search preferences until you modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
80-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 80
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
Note
You cannot delete a media resource group that is assigned to a Media Resource Group List unless you
first remove the media resource group from the Media Resource Group List(s) to which it is assigned or
you delete the Media Resource Group List.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To copy a media resource group list, locate the appropriate media resource group list as described
in Finding a Media Resource Group List section on page 80-2. From the Search Results list, click
the Copy icon that corresponds to the media resource group list that you want to copy and continue
with Step 3.
To add a new media resource group list, click the Add New button. The Media Resource Group List
Configuration window displays. Continue with Step 3.
80-3
Chapter 80
To update an existing media resource group list, locate the appropriate Media Resource Group List
as described in Finding a Media Resource Group List section on page 80-2, and continue with
Step 3.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Save.
If you are adding a new media resource group list, the Status changes to from Ready to Add successful.
The Media Resource Group Lists list now includes the new Media Resource Group List.
If you are copying a media resource group, you should change at least the media resource group name.
Additional Information
Note
You cannot delete a Media Resource Group List that is assigned to a device pool(s) or to a device(s).
You must first modify the device pool(s) or device(s) to which a Media Resource Group List is assigned.
Procedure
Step 1
Locate the media resource group list by using the procedure in the Finding a Media Resource Group
List section on page 80-2.
Step 2
From list of matching records, choose the media resource group list that you want to delete.
Step 3
Step 4
Additional Information
Related Topics
80-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 80
Media Resource Group and Media Resource Group List Configuration Checklist, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager System Guide
80-5
Chapter 80
Related Topics
80-6
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
81
Display a list of the MOH audio files that are stored on the system.
For more information on how to use the MOH Audio File Management Configuration window, refer to
the Music On Hold chapter in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide.
81-1
Chapter 81
81-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
82
82-1
Chapter 82
82-2
OL-18611-01
A R T
CH A P T E R
83
Synchronizing a Cisco Voice Mail Port with Affected Devices, page 83-8
83-1
Chapter 83
Table 83-1 describes the Cisco voice-mail port configuration settings. For more information about
related procedures, see the Related Topics section on page 83-9.
Table 83-1
Field
Description
Device Information
Port Name
Enter a name to identify the Cisco voice-mail port. You must add a
device for each port on Cisco voice-messaging system. If 24 ports exist,
you must define 24 devices.
The Port Name field allows 1 to 15 characters, which can include
letters, numbers, periods, underscores, and dashes, followed by -VI and
the port number.
Note
For Cisco Unity, this name must match the name in the Unity
Telephony Integration Manager (UTIM), such as Cisco
UM-VI1 or Cisco UM-VI2. For Cisco Unity Connection, this
name must match the name in Cisco Unity Connection
Administration, such as Cisco UM-VI1 or Cisco UM-VI2.
Description
Device Pool
Common Device
Configuration
Choose the common device configuration to which you want this device
assigned. The common device configuration includes the attributes
(services or features) that are associated with a particular user.
Common device configurations are configured in the Common Device
Configuration window. See Common Device Configuration for more
information.
From the drop-down list box, choose the appropriate calling search
space. A calling search space comprises a collection of partitions that
are searched for numbers that were called from this device. Choose the
name of the calling search space that allows calls to the subscriber
phones and to any network devices.
You can configure the number of calling search spaces that display in
this drop-down list box by using the Max List Box Items enterprise
parameter. If more calling search spaces exist than the Max List Box
Items enterprise parameter specifies, the ellipsis button (...) displays
next to the drop-down list box. Click the ... button to display the Select
Calling Search Space window. Enter a partial calling search space name
in the List items where Name contains field. Click the desired calling
search space name in the list of calling search spaces that displays in
the Select item to use box and click OK.
Note
Choose the appropriate calling search space for the device to use when
automated alternate routing (AAR) is performed. The AAR calling
search space specifies the collection of route partitions that are
searched to determine how to route a collected (originating) number
that is otherwise blocked due to insufficient bandwidth.
83-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 83
Table 83-1
Field
Description
Location
From the drop-down list box, choose a security mode to apply to the
voice-mail server port. The database predefines these options. The
default value specifies Not Selected.
For more information on configuring security for the voice-mail server,
refer to the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Security Guide.
83-3
Chapter 83
Table 83-1
Field
Description
From the drop-down list box, enable or disable whether Cisco Unified
Communications Manager inserts a trusted relay point (TRP) device
with this media endpoint. Choose one of the following values:
DefaultIf you choose this value, the device uses the Use Trusted
Relay Point setting from the common device configuration with
which this device associates.
OnChoose this value to enable the use of a TRP with this device.
This setting overrides the Use Trusted Relay Point setting in the
common device configuration with which this device associates.
Directory Number
Enter the number that is associated with this voice-mail port. Make sure
that this field is unique in combination with the Partition field.
83-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 83
Table 83-1
Field
Description
Partition
From the drop-down list box, choose the appropriate calling search
space. A calling search space comprises a collection of partitions that
are searched for numbers that are called from this directory number. If
you choose a partition, you must choose a calling search space that
includes that partition.
You can configure the number of calling search spaces that display in
this drop-down list box by using the Max List Box Items enterprise
parameter. If more calling search spaces exist than the Max List Box
Items enterprise parameter specifies, the Find button displays next to
the drop-down list box. Click the Find button to display the Find and
List Calling Search Space window. Find and choose a calling search
space name (see the Finding a Calling Search Space section on
page 53-3).
Note
AAR Group
Choose the automated alternate routing (AAR) group for this device.
The AAR group provides the prefix digits that are used to route calls
that are otherwise blocked due to insufficient bandwidth. An AAR
group setting of None specifies that no rerouting of blocked calls will
be attempted.
This field indicates text that displays on the called party phone when a
call is placed from this line.
This field indicates text that appears on the called party phone, in
ASCII format, when a call is placed from this line.
83-5
Chapter 83
Table 83-1
Field
Description
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your Cisco voice-mail port search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this
menu item, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your Cisco voice-mail port
search preferences until you modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
83-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 83
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
Tip
You can also use the Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard to add a new Cisco voice-mail server and ports or to
add multiple ports to an existing server rather than using the procedure that is described here. See Cisco
Voice Mail Port Wizard, page 84-1 for more information.
Perform this procedure to add individual Cisco voice-mail ports to the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager database, or update or copy an existing voice-mail port.
Procedure
Step 1
83-7
Chapter 83
Step 2
To copy Cisco voice-mail port and its settings, locate the appropriate Cisco voice-mail port as
described in Finding a Cisco Voice-Mail Port section on page 83-6. From the Search Results list,
click the Copy icon that corresponds to the voice-mail port that you want to copy, and continue with
Step 3.
To add a new voice-mail port, click the Add New button. The Voice Mail Port Configuration window
displays. Continue with Step 3.
To update an existing Cisco voice-mail port, locate the appropriate voice-mail port as described in
Finding a Cisco Voice-Mail Port section on page 83-6. Click the voice-mail port that you want to
update and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Save.
If you are copying the basic settings of an existing Cisco voice-mail port to apply to another Cisco
voice-mail port, you must change the Port Name and Directory Number fields.
Additional Information
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
The window displays a list of voice mail ports that match the search criteria.
Step 4
Check the check boxes next to the voice mail ports with which you want to synchronize affected devices.
To choose all voice mail ports in the window, check the check box in the matching records title bar.
Step 5
Step 6
Click OK.
Additional Information
83-8
OL-18611-01
Chapter 83
When you delete a Cisco voice-mail port that a directory number uses, the number remains in the Cisco
Unified Communications Manager database. To determine which directory numbers are using the
voice-mail port, in the Voice Mail Port Configuration window, choose Dependency Records from the
Related Links drop-down list box and click Go. If the dependency records are not enabled for the system,
the dependency records summary window displays a message. For more information about dependency
records, see the Accessing Dependency Records section on page A-2.
When you delete a voice-mail port that is in use, Cisco Unified Communications Manager displays a
message. Before deleting a voice-mail port that is currently in use, you can assign a different voice-mail
port to any directory number that is using the voice-mail port that you want to delete. See the
Configuring a Directory Number section on page 64-25.
After you delete the voice-mail port, you can delete the directory number that was using the voice-mail
port. See the Deleting Unassigned Directory Numbers section on page 67-2.
Tip
Instead of using the procedure that is described here, you can use the Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard to
delete ports from an existing server. See Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard section on page 84-1 for more
information.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Find the Cisco voice-mail port by using the procedure in the Finding a Cisco Voice-Mail Port section
on page 83-6.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Delete.
Additional Information
Related Topics
Synchronizing a Cisco Voice Mail Port with Affected Devices, page 83-8
83-9
Chapter 83
Related Topics
Cisco Unity and Cisco Unity Connection Configuration Checklist, Cisco Unified Communications
Manager System Guide
83-10
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
84
The Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard requires a range of consecutive directory numbers for the voice-mail
ports. Make sure the voice-mail pilot number and subsequent numbers are available.
84-1
Chapter 84
Procedure
Step 1
Create a new Cisco Voice Mail Server and add ports to it. Click Next and continue with Step 2.
Add ports to an existing Cisco Voice Mail server. Click Next and continue with the Adding Ports
to an Existing Cisco Voice-Mail Server section on page 84-6.
Delete ports from an existing Cisco Voice Mail server. Click Next and continue with the Deleting
Ports from an Existing Cisco Voice-Mail Server section on page 84-7.
Step 2
Choose Add ports to a new Cisco Voice Mail server using this name.
Step 3
Note
Step 4
For Cisco Unity, this name must match the name in the Unity Telephony Integration Manager
(UTIM), such as Cisco UM-VI1 or Cisco UM-VI2. For Cisco Unity Connection, this name must
match the name in Cisco Unity Connection Administration, such as Cisco UM-VI1 or Cisco
UM-VI2.
Click Next.
The Cisco Voice Mail Ports window displays.
Step 5
From the drop-down list box, choose the number of ports to add.
Step 6
Click Next.
The Cisco Voice Mail Device Information window displays.
Step 7
Enter the appropriate configuration settings, as described in Table 84-1. The wizard applies these
configuration settings to all the new ports.
Table 84-1
Field
Description
Description
Device Pool
Common Device
Configuration
84-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 84
Table 84-1
Field
Description
From the drop-down list box, choose the appropriate calling search
space. A calling search space comprises a collection of partitions that
are searched for numbers that are called from this directory number.
You can configure the number of calling search spaces that display in
this drop-down list box by using the Max List Box Items enterprise
parameter. If more calling search spaces exist than the Max List Box
Items enterprise parameter specifies, the Find button displays next to
the drop-down list box. Click the Find button to display the Find and
List Calling Search Space window. Find and choose a calling search
space name (see the Finding a Calling Search Space section on
page 53-3).
Note
Choose the appropriate calling search space for the device to use when
it performs automated alternate routing (AAR). The AAR calling
search space specifies the collection of route partitions that are
searched to determine how to route a collected (originating) number
that is otherwise blocked due to insufficient bandwidth.
Location
From the drop-down list box, choose a security mode to apply to the
voice-mail server port. The database predefines these options. The
default value specifies Not Selected.
For more information on configuring security for the voice-mail
server, refer to the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Security
Guide.
84-3
Chapter 84
Step 8
Click Next.
The Cisco Voice Mail Directory Numbers window displays.
Step 9
Enter the directory number settings for the new Cisco voice-mail server as described in Table 84-2.
Table 84-2
Field
Description
Beginning Directory
Number
Enter the number that people call to access the Cisco voice-mail server.
Each new port receives the next available directory number.
Partition
Choose the partition to which this set of directory numbers belong. Choose
None if partitions are not used. If you choose a partition, you must choose
a calling search space that includes that partition.
You can configure the number of partitions that display in this drop-down
list box by using the Max List Box Items enterprise parameter. If more
partitions exist than the Max List Box Items enterprise parameter
specifies, the Find button displays next to the drop-down list box. Click
the Find button to display the Find and List Partitions window. Find and
choose a partition name (see the Finding a Partition section on
page 52-3).
Note
To set the maximum list box items, choose System > Enterprise
Parameters and choose CCMAdmin Parameters.
From the drop-down list box, choose the appropriate calling search space.
A calling search space comprises a collection of partitions that are
searched for numbers that are called from this directory number.
If you choose a partition, you must choose a calling search space that
includes that partition.
You can configure the number of calling search spaces that display in this
drop-down list box by using the Max List Box Items enterprise parameter.
If more calling search spaces exist than the Max List Box Items enterprise
parameter specifies, the Find button displays next to the drop-down list
box. Click the Find button to display the Find and List Calling Search
Space window. Find and choose a calling search space name (see the
Finding a Calling Search Space section on page 53-3).
Note
AAR Group
To set the maximum list box items, choose System > Enterprise
Parameters and choose CCMAdmin Parameters.
Choose the automated alternate routing (AAR) group for this device. The
AAR group provides the prefix digits that are used to route calls that are
otherwise blocked due to insufficient bandwidth. An AAR group setting of
None specifies that no rerouting of blocked calls will be attempted.
Internal Caller ID Display This field indicates text that displays on the calling party phone when a
call is placed to this line.
Internal Caller ID Display This field indicates text that displays on the calling party phone, in ASCII
(ASCII format)
format, when a call is placed to this line.
84-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 84
Table 84-2
Field
Description
Specify the mask that is used to format caller ID information for external
(outbound) calls. The mask can contain up to 50 characters. Enter the
literal digits that you want to display in the caller ID information and use
Xs to represent the directory number of the device.
You can also enter the international escape character +.
Step 10
Click Next.
A window that asks whether you want to add these directory numbers to a line group displays.
Step 11
If you choose to add directory numbers to a new line group, skip to Step 12.
If you choose to add directory numbers to an existing line group, skip to Step 14.
If you choose to add directory numbers to a line group later, skip to Step 16.
Step 12
Choose the Yes. Add directory numbers to a new Line Group option and click Next.
Step 13
In the Line Group window that displays, enter the name of the new line group and click Next.
The Ready to Add Cisco Voice Mail Ports summary window displays. This summary window lists the
settings that you configured in the previous windows. The Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard automatically
assigns the correct values for each port.
Skip to Step 17.
Step 14
Choose the Yes. Add directory numbers to an existing Line Group option and click Next.
Step 15
In the Line Group window that displays, choose a line group from the Line Group Name drop-down list
box and click Next.
The Ready to Add Cisco Voice Mail Ports summary window displays. This summary window lists the
settings that you configured in the previous windows. The Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard automatically
assigns the correct values for each port.
Skip to Step 17.
Step 16
Choose the No. I will add them later option and click Next.
The Ready to Add Cisco Voice Mail Ports summary window displays. This summary window lists the
settings that you configured in the previous windows. The Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard automatically
assigns the correct values for each port.
Step 17
Step 18
After the Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard finishes adding the new voice-mail ports that you specified, the
Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard Results window displays.
The window directs you to the other steps that you need to complete before you can start using these new
voice-mail ports.
84-5
Chapter 84
Next Steps
Make sure that you set up the message-waiting indicator (MWI) device. For more information, refer
to the Cisco Unity and Cisco Unity Connection Configuration Checklist section in the Cisco
Unified Communications Manager System Guide.
Additional Topics
The Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard requires a range of consecutive directory numbers for the voice-mail
ports. Make sure that the voice-mail pilot number and subsequent numbers are available.
The voice-mail pilot number designates the number that people call to access the Cisco voice-mail
server.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Click Next.
The Cisco Voice Mail Server window displays.
Step 4
From the drop-down list box, choose the name of an existing Cisco voice-mail server (pilot number) and
click Next.
The Cisco Voice Mail Ports window displays and identifies the number of ports that are currently
configured.
Step 5
From the drop-down list box, choose the number of ports to add and click Next.
The Cisco Voice Mail Directory Numbers window displays the configuration information for the Cisco
voice-mail server to which you added the ports. The Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard automatically selects
consecutive directory numbers following the last port and uses the same Partition, Calling Search Space,
Display, AAR Group, and External Number Mask settings as the Cisco voice-mail pilot directory
number. You can enter a different range of directory numbers in the New Directory Numbers field.
Step 6
If you need to change the number of ports, click the Back button.
Step 7
Click Next.
The Ready to Add Cisco Voice Mail Ports summary window displays. This summary window lists the
settings that you configured in the previous windows. The Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard automatically
assigns the correct values for each port.
Step 8
84-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 84
Additional Topics
Step 2
Choose Delete ports from an existing Cisco Voice Mail server and click Next.
The Cisco Voice Mail Server window displays.
Step 3
From the drop-down list box, choose the name of an existing Cisco voice-mail server (pilot number) and
click Next.
The Cisco Voice Mail Ports window, which indicates the number of ports that are currently configured,
displays.
Step 4
From the drop-down list box, choose the number of ports to delete and click Next.
The Ready to Delete Cisco Voice Mail Ports summary window displays.
The summary window provides information about the ports to be deleted. The Cisco Voice Mail Port
Wizard automatically updates the port numbers and directory numbers so they are consecutive.
Step 5
Additional Topics
Related Topics
Cisco Unity and Cisco Unity Connection Configuration Checklist, Cisco Unified Communications
Manager System Guide
84-7
Chapter 84
Related Topics
84-8
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
85
Field Name
Description
Enter the Cisco Message Waiting directory number. Make sure that
this number is not used within the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager auto-registration range.
You may use the following characters: 0 to 9, ?, [, ], +, -, *, ^, #, !.
At the beginning of the number, you can enter \+ if you want to enter
the international escape character.
Description
Click On or Off.
85-1
Chapter 85
Table 85-1
Field Name
Description
Partition
Note
Note
If partitions and calling search spaces are used, from the drop-down
list box, choose a calling search space that includes the partitions of
the DNs on all phones whose lamps you want to turn on (the
partition that is defined for a phone DN must be in a calling search
space that the MWI device uses).
You can configure the number of calling search spaces that display
in this drop-down list box by using the Max List Box Items
enterprise parameter. If more calling search spaces exist than the
Max List Box Items enterprise parameter specifies, the Find button
displays next to the drop-down list box. Click the Find button to
display the Find and List Calling Search Space window. Find and
choose a calling search space name (see the Finding a Calling
Search Space section on page 53-3).
Note
Additional Information
85-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 85
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your message-waiting number search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this
menu item, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your message-waiting
number search preferences until you modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
From the third drop-down list box, select Both, On, or Off.
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
85-3
Chapter 85
Step 2
Step 3
Note
Step 4
The voice-messaging system only uses the message-waiting on/off directory number to turn on
the message-waiting indicator. Because Cisco Unified Communications Manager does not use
the Message Waiting on/off number for receiving calls, the Display, Forward All, Forward Busy,
and Forward No Answer fields do not get used.
Additional Information
Step 2
Find the message-waiting number by using the procedure in the Finding a Message Waiting Number
section on page 85-2.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Delete.
A confirmation window displays.
Step 5
To delete the message-waiting number, click OK or to cancel the deletion process, click Cancel.
Additional Information
85-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 85
Related Topics
Cisco Unity and Cisco Unity Connection Configuration Checklist, Cisco Unified Communications
Manager System Guide
85-5
Chapter 85
Related Topics
85-6
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
86
Cisco Unity and Cisco Unity Connection Configuration Checklist, Cisco Unified Communications
Manager System Guide
86-1
Chapter 86
Field
Description
From the drop-down list box, choose the appropriate calling search
space. A calling search space comprises a collection of partitions that
are searched for numbers that are called from this pilot number.
You can configure the number of calling search spaces that display in
this drop-down list box by using the Max List Box Items enterprise
parameter. If more calling search spaces exist than the Max List Box
Items enterprise parameter specifies, the Find button displays next to
the drop-down list box. Click the Find button to display the Find and
List Calling Search Space window. Find and choose a calling search
space name (see the Finding a Calling Search Space section on
page 53-3).
Note
Description
Check the check box to make this pilot number the default Voice Mail
Pilot for the system.
Note
If you check the Default box, this voice mail pilot number
replaces your current default pilot number.
Additional Information
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your Cisco voice-mail pilot search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this
menu item, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your Cisco voice-mail pilot
search preferences until you modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
86-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 86
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
To add the new voice-mail pilot number or to update the settings for an existing voice-mail pilot number,
click Save.
86-3
Chapter 86
Additional Information
You cannot delete voice-mail pilot numbers that a voice-mail profile uses. To find out which voice-mail
profiles are using the voice-mail pilot, in the Voice Mail Pilot Configuration window, choose
Dependency Records from the Related Links drop-down list box and click Go. If the dependency
records are not enabled for the system, the dependency records summary window displays a message.
For more information about dependency records, see the Accessing Dependency Records section on
page A-2. If you try to delete a voice-mail pilot that is in use, Cisco Unified Communications Manager
displays a message. Before deleting a voice-mail pilot that is currently in use, you must perform either
or both of the following tasks:
Assign a different voice-mail pilot to any voice-mail profiles that are using the voice-mail pilot that
you want to delete. See the Configuring a Voice-Mail Profile section on page 87-3.
Delete the voice-mail profiles that are using the voice-mail pilot that you want to delete. See the
Deleting a Voice-Mail Profile section on page 87-5.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Find the voice-mail pilot by using the procedure in the Finding a Cisco Voice-Mail Pilot section on
page 86-2.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Delete.
A confirmation window displays.
Note
Step 5
If you choose the default or the No Voice Mail pilot numbers, the Delete button does not display.
To delete the voice-mail pilot, click OK or to cancel the deletion process, click Cancel.
If a voice-mail profile uses this voice-mail pilot number, a message displays and indicates the number
of voice-mail profiles that use this voice-mail pilot number.
Additional Information
86-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 86
Related Topics
Cisco Unity and Cisco Unity Connection Configuration Checklist, Cisco Unified Communications
Manager System Guide
86-5
Chapter 86
Related Topics
86-6
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
87
Cisco Unity and Cisco Unity Connection Configuration Checklist, Cisco Unified Communications
Manager System Guide
Note
Field
Description
Description
87-1
Chapter 87
Table 87-1
Field
Description
Specify the mask that is used to format the voice mailbox number for
auto-registered phones. When a call is forwarded to a voice-messaging
system from a directory line on an auto-registered phone, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager applies this mask to the number that is
configured in the Voice Mail Box field for that directory line.
For example, if you specify a mask of 972813XXXX, the voice mailbox
number for directory number 7253 becomes 9728137253. If you do not
enter a mask, the voice mailbox number matches the directory number
(7253 in this example).
By default, Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the voice
mailbox number to the same value as the directory number. You can
change the voice mailbox number when you are configuring the directory
number. See the Directory Number Configuration section on page 64-1
for more information.
Note
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your voice-mail profile search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu
item, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your voice-mail profile search
preferences until you modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
87-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 87
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
In the menu bar, choose Voice Mail > Voice Mail Profile.
The Find and List Voice Mail Profiles window displays.
Step 2
To copy a voice-mail profile, locate the appropriate voice-mail profile as described in Finding
Voice-Mail Profiles section on page 87-2. From the Search Results list, click the Copy icon that
corresponds to the voice-mail profile that you want to copy and continue with Step 3.
To configure a voice-mail profile for a directory number, click the Add New button. The Voice Mail
Profile Configuration window displays. Continue with Step 3.
87-3
Chapter 87
To update an existing voice-mail profile, locate the appropriate voice-mail profile as described in
Finding Voice-Mail Profiles section on page 87-2 and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Save.
If you are updating an existing voice-mail profile, click Apply Config to synchronize all devices that are
associated with the voice-mail profile. For more information about the Apply Config button, see the
Synchronizing a Voice Mail Profile With Affected Devices section on page 87-4.
Additional Information
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
The window displays a list of voice mail profiles that match the search criteria.
Step 4
Click the voice mail profile to which you want to synchronize applicable devices. The Voice Mail Profile
Configuration screen displays.
Step 5
Step 6
Click Save.
Step 7
Step 8
Click OK.
Additional Information
87-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 87
You cannot delete a voice-mail profile that a directory number uses. To find out which directory numbers
are using the voice-mail profiles, in the Voice Mail Profile Configuration window, choose Dependency
Records from the Related Links drop-down list box and click Go. If the dependency records are not
enabled for the system, the dependency records summary window displays a message. For more
information about dependency records, see the Accessing Dependency Records section on page A-2.
If you try to delete a voice-mail profile that is in use, Cisco Unified Communications Manager displays
a message. Before deleting a voice-mail profile that is currently in use, you must perform either or both
of the following tasks:
Assign a different voice-mail profile to any devices that are using the voice-mail profile that you
want to delete.
Delete the devices that are using the voice-mail profile that you want to delete.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To locate the voice-mail profile that you want to delete, follow the procedure on Finding Voice-Mail
Profiles section on page 87-2.
Step 3
Check the check box next to the voice-mail profiles that you want to delete. To select all the voice-mail
profiles in the window, check the check box in the matching records title bar.
Step 4
Additional Information
Related Topics
Cisco Unity and Cisco Unity Connection Configuration Checklist, Cisco Unified Communications
Manager System Guide
87-5
Chapter 87
Related Topics
87-6
OL-18611-01
A R T
Device Configuration
CH A P T E R
88
Note
You must not associate CTI route points with directory numbers (DNs) that are members of line groups
and, by extension, that are members of hunt lists. If a DN is a member of a line group or hunt list, you
cannot associate that DN with a CTI route point that you configure with the CTI Route Point
Configuration window.
For detailed instructions on how to configure CTI route points and CTI ports that are associated with
these applications, refer to the documentation and online help that is included with these applications.
This section describes the following basic procedure:
88-1
Chapter 88
Note
You must not associate CTI route points with directory numbers (DNs) that are members of line groups
and, by extension, that are members of hunt lists. If a DN is a member of a line group or hunt list, you
cannot associate that DN with a CTI route point that you configure with the CTI Route Point
Configuration window.
For detailed instructions on how to configure CTI route points and CTI ports that are associated with
these applications, refer to the documentation and online help that is included with these applications.
Table 88-1 describes the CTI route point configuration settings. For more information about related
procedures, see the Related Topics section on page 88-10.
Table 88-1
Field
Description
Device Name
Description
Device Pool
Choose the name of a Device Pool. The device pool specifies the
collection of properties for this device, including Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Group, Date/Time Group, Region, and
Calling Search Space for auto-registration.
Common Device
Configuration
Choose the common device configuration to which you want this CTI
route point assigned. The common device configuration includes the
attributes (services or features) that are associated with a particular user.
Configure common device configurations in the Common Device
Configuration window. See the Common Device Configuration
section on page 102-1 for more information.
88-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 88
Table 88-1
Field
Description
From the drop-down list box, choose a calling search space. The calling
search space specifies the collection of partitions that are searched to
determine how a collected (originating) number should be routed.
You can configure the number of calling search spaces that display in
this drop-down list box by using the Max List Box Items enterprise
parameter. If more calling search spaces exist than the Max List Box
Items enterprise parameter specifies, the Find button displays next to
the drop-down list box. Click the Find button to display the Find and
List Calling Search Space window. Find and choose a calling search
space name (see the Finding a Calling Search Space section on
page 53-3).
Note
Location
To set the maximum list box items, choose System > Enterprise
Parameters and choose CCMAdmin Parameters.
User Locale
From the drop-down list box, choose the locale that is associated with
the CTI route point. The user locale identifies a set of detailed
information to support users, including language and font.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager makes this field available only
for CTI route points that support localization.
Note
Note
88-3
Chapter 88
Table 88-1
Field
Description
Media Resource Group List Choose the appropriate Media Resource Group List. A Media Resource
Group List comprises a prioritized grouping of media resource groups.
An application chooses the required media resource, such as a Music On
Hold server, from the available media resources according to the priority
order that is defined in a Media Resource Group List.
If you choose <none>, Cisco Unified Communications Manager uses the
Media Resource Group that is defined in the device pool.
For more information, see the Media Resource Management section
in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide.
Network Hold MOH Audio
Source
To specify the audio source that plays when the network initiates a hold
action, click the drop-down arrow and choose an audio source from the
list that displays.
If you do not choose an audio source, Cisco Unified Communications
Manager uses the audio source that is defined in the device pool or the
system default if the device pool does not specify an audio source ID.
You define audio sources in the Music On Hold Audio Source
Configuration window. For access, choose Media Resources > Music
On Hold Audio Source.
88-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 88
Table 88-1
Field
Description
From the drop-down list box, enable or disable whether Cisco Unified
Communications Manager inserts a trusted relay point (TRP) device
with this media endpoint. Choose one of the following values:
DefaultIf you choose this value, the device uses the Use Trusted
Relay Point setting from the common device configuration with
which this device associates.
OffChoose this value to disable the use of a TRP with this device.
This setting overrides the Use Trusted Relay Point setting in the
common device configuration with which this device associates.
OnChoose this value to enable the use of a TRP with this device.
This setting overrides the Use Trusted Relay Point setting in the
common device configuration with which this device associates.
This setting allows you to localize the calling party number on the
device. Make sure that the Calling Party Transformation CSS that you
choose contains the calling party transformation pattern that you want to
assign to this device.
Tip
Before the call occurs, the device must apply the transformation
by using digit analysis. If you configure the Calling Party
Transformation CSS as None, the transformation does not match
and does not get applied. Ensure that you configure the Calling
Party Transformation Pattern in a non-null partition that is not
used for routing.
88-5
Chapter 88
Table 88-1
Field
Description
Geolocation
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
88-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 88
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
Step 2
To copy a CTI route point, locate the appropriate route point as described in Finding CTI Route
Points section on page 88-6. From the Search Results list, click the Copy icon that corresponds to
the CTI route point that you want to copy and continue with Step 3.
To add a new CTI route point, click the Add New button. The CTI Route Point Configuration
window displays. Continue with Step 3.
To update a CTI route point, locate the appropriate CTI route point as described in Finding CTI
Route Points section on page 88-6 and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Save.
For instructions on how to add and configure directory numbers, see the Configuring a Directory
Number section on page 64-25.
After you add a CTI route point to Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration, information
from the RIS Data Collector service displays in the CTI Route Point Configuration window. When
available, the device IP address and the name of the Cisco Unified Communications Manager with which
the device registered display.
Additional Information
88-7
Chapter 88
Because you can delete a CTI route point that is assigned to one or more directory numbers, you should
determine which directory numbers are using the CTI route point. To determine which directory numbers
are using the CTI route point, choose Dependency Records link from the Related Links drop-down list
box in the CTI Route Point Configuration window and click Go. If the dependency records are not
enabled for the system, the dependency records summary window displays a message. For more
information about dependency records, see the Accessing Dependency Records section on page A-2.
If you try to delete a CTI route point that is in use, Cisco Unified Communications Manager displays a
message.
If you delete a CTI Route Point that has a directory number assigned to it, you can find the directory
number by using the Route Plan Report. You can also delete the directory number by using the Route
Plan Report.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Specify the search criteria that are needed to locate the CTI route point that you want to delete.
Step 3
Click Find.
The window refreshes to display a list of the CTI route points that match the specified search criteria.
Step 4
Step 5
Check the check boxes next to the CTI route points that you want to delete and click Delete
Selected.
Delete all the CTI route points in the window by clicking Select All and click Delete Selected.
Choose the name of the CTI route point that you want to delete from the list to display its current
settings and click Delete.
Additional Information
88-8
OL-18611-01
Chapter 88
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
The window displays a list of CTI route points that match the search criteria.
Step 4
Check the check boxes next to the CTI route points that you want to reset. To choose all CTI route points
in the window, check the check box in the matching records title bar.
Step 5
Step 6
Additional Information
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
The window displays a list of CTI route points that match the search criteria.
Step 4
Check the check boxes next to the CTI route points that you want to synchronize. To choose all CTI route
points in the window, check the check box in the matching records title bar.
Step 5
Step 6
Click OK.
Additional Information
88-9
Chapter 88
Related Topics
Related Topics
88-10
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
89
Gatekeeper Configuration
A gatekeeper device, also known as a Cisco Multimedia Conference Manager (MCM), supports the
H.225 Registration, Admission, and Status Protocol (RAS) message set that is used for call admission
control, bandwidth allocation, and dial pattern resolution (call routing). The gatekeeper provides these
services for communications between Cisco Unified Communications Manager clusters and H.323
networks. You can configure multiple gatekeeper devices per Cisco Unified Communications Manager
cluster. You can configure alternate gatekeepers for redundancy. Refer to Cisco Multimedia Conference
Manager (MCM) documentation for alternate gatekeeper configuration details.
Gatekeeper configuration comprises two components:
Gatekeeper configuration on the router. This type of configuration applies to a Cisco IOS
Multimedia Conference Manager (MCM) that acts as the gatekeeper. Recommended platforms for
the gatekeeper include Cisco 2600, 3600, or 7200 routers with Cisco IOS Release 12.1(3)T or
higher. Refer to the MCM documentation for information on configuring the gatekeeper. Alternate
gatekeeper configuration occurs in the MCM only, so no configuration is necessary in Cisco Unified
Communications Manager.
The following topics cover gatekeeper configuration in Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Administration:
89-1
Chapter 89
Gatekeeper Configuration
services for communications between Cisco Unified Communications Manager clusters and H.323
networks. You can configure multiple gatekeeper devices per Cisco Unified Communications Manager
cluster. You can configure alternate gatekeepers for redundancy. Refer to Cisco Multimedia Conference
Manager (MCM) documentation and the Cisco Unified Communications Solution Reference Network
Design (SRND) for alternate gatekeeper configuration details.
Gatekeeper configuration comprises two components:
Note
Gatekeeper configuration on the router. This type of configuration applies to a Cisco IOS
Multimedia Conference Manager (MCM) that acts as the gatekeeper. Recommended platforms for
the gatekeeper include Cisco 2600, 3600, or 7200 routers with Cisco IOS Release 12.1(3)T or
higher. Refer to the MCM documentation for information on configuring the gatekeeper. Alternate
gatekeeper configuration occurs in the MCM only, so no configuration is necessary in Cisco Unified
Communications Manager.
You can configure multiple gatekeeper devices per Cisco Unified Communications Manager cluster.
Table 89-1 describes the gatekeeper configuration settings. For related procedures, see the Related
Topics section on page 89-6.
Table 89-1
Field
Description
Gatekeeper Information
Description
Do not change this value unless a Cisco TAC engineer instructs you
to do so. Enter the time in seconds. The default value specifies 60
seconds.
The Registration Request Time to Live field indicates the time that
the gatekeeper considers a registration request (RRQ) valid. The
system must send a keepalive RRQ to the gatekeeper before the
RRQ Time to Live expires.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sends an RRQ to the
gatekeeper to register and subsequently to maintain a connection
with the gatekeeper. The gatekeeper may confirm (RCF) or deny
(RRJ) the request.
89-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 89
Gatekeeper Configuration
Finding a Gatekeeper
Table 89-1
Field
Description
Do not change this value unless a Cisco TAC engineer instructs you
to do so. Enter the time in seconds. The default value specifies 300
seconds.
The Registration Retry Timeout field indicates the time that Cisco
Unified Communications Manager waits before retrying gatekeeper
registration after a failed registration attempt.
Enable Device
This check box allows you to register this gatekeeper with Cisco
Unified Communications Manager. By default, this check box
remains checked. To unregister the gatekeeper from Cisco Unified
Communications Manager gracefully, uncheck this check box. The
gatekeeper unregisters within approximately 1 minute of updating
this field.
Finding a Gatekeeper
Because you might have several gatekeepers in your network, Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Administration lets you locate specific gatekeepers on the basis of specific criteria. Use the following
procedure to locate gatekeepers.
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your gatekeeper search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item,
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your gatekeeper search preferences
until you modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
89-3
Chapter 89
Gatekeeper Configuration
Configuring a Gatekeeper
Step 3
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
Configuring a Gatekeeper
Perform the following procedure to add or update a gatekeeper.
Note
You can configure multiple gatekeeper devices per Cisco Unified Communications Manager cluster.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To add a new gatekeeper, click the Add New button and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Save.
Additional Information
89-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 89
Gatekeeper Configuration
Deleting a Gatekeeper
Deleting a Gatekeeper
Perform the following steps to delete a gatekeeper.
Before You Begin
You cannot delete a gatekeeper that is assigned to one or more trunks. To find out which trunks are using
the gatekeeper, choose Dependency Records from the Related Links drop-down list box that is on the
Gatekeeper Configuration window. If the dependency records are not enabled for the system, the
dependency records summary window displays a message. For more information about dependency
records, see the Accessing Dependency Records section on page A-2. If you try to delete a gatekeeper
that is in use, Cisco Unified Communications Manager displays an error message. Before deleting a
gatekeeper that is currently in use, you must perform either or both of the following tasks:
Assign a different gatekeeper to any trunks that are using the gatekeeper that you want to delete. See
the Configuring a Trunk section on page 92-48.
Delete the trunks that are using the gatekeeper that you want to delete. See the Deleting a Trunk
section on page 92-49.
Procedure
Step 1
Locate the gatekeeper by using the procedure in the Finding a Gatekeeper section on page 89-3.
Step 2
From the list of matching records, choose the gatekeeper that you want to delete.
Step 3
Step 4
Additional Information
Resetting a Gatekeeper
Resetting a gatekeeper does not mean that the physical device is reset; instead, resetting forces the Cisco
Unified Communications Manager to reset the logical connection to the gatekeeper and to reregister with
the gatekeeper. During this time of reregistering and until successful registration, new calls that are made
by using this trunk, which uses this gatekeeper, fail. Perform the following procedure to reset a
gatekeeper.
Note
Resetting a gatekeeper does not cause all active calls that this gatekeeper controls to be dropped;
however, new call attempts fail.
Procedure
Step 1
Locate the gatekeeper by using the procedure in the Finding a Gatekeeper section on page 89-3.
Step 2
From the list of matching records, choose the gatekeeper that you want to reset.
89-5
Chapter 89
Gatekeeper Configuration
Synchronizing a Gatekeeper
Step 3
If you changed any settings for the Gatekeeper Device, click Reset.
The Reset Device dialog displays.
Step 4
RestartRestarts the chosen devices without shutting them down (reregisters the phones and
trunks with Cisco Unified Communications Manager).
ResetShuts down, then restarts, the internal gatekeeper device. The Cisco Unified
Communications Manager cluster unregisters (URQ) and then reregisters (RRQ) with the
gatekeeper.
Additional Information
Synchronizing a Gatekeeper
To synchronize a gatekeeper with the most recent configuration changes, perform the following
procedure, which will apply any outstanding configuration settings in the least-intrusive manner
possible. (For example, a reset/restart may not be required on some affected devices.)
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
The window displays a list of gatekeepers that match the search criteria.
Step 4
Check the check boxes next to the gatekeepers that you want to synchronize. To choose all gatekeepers
in the window, check the check box in the matching records title bar.
Step 5
Step 6
Click OK.
Additional Information
Related Topics
89-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 89
Gatekeeper Configuration
Related Topics
89-7
Chapter 89
Gatekeeper Configuration
Related Topics
89-8
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
90
Gateway Configuration
Cisco Unified Communications gateways enable Cisco Unified Communications Manager to
communicate with non-IP telecommunications devices. Cisco Unified Communications Manager
supports several gateway types as described in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager System
Guide.
These sections provide information about using Cisco Unified Communications Manager for working
with and configuring Cisco gateways.
90-1
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
For detailed information about port configuration settings, see the Port Configuration Settings section
on page 90-30.
Field
Description
Gateway Details
Domain Name
Description
Cisco Unified Communications From the drop-down list box, choose a Cisco Unified
Manager Group
Communications Manager redundancy group.
A Cisco Unified Communications Manager redundancy group
includes a prioritized list of up to three Cisco Unified
Communications Managers. The first Cisco Unified
Communications Manager in the list serves as the primary Cisco
Unified Communications Manager. If the primary Cisco Unified
Communications Manager is not available or fails, the gateway
attempts to connect with the next Cisco Unified Communications
Manager in the list and so on.
90-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Gateway Configuration Settings
Table 90-1
Field
Description
You must specify the beginning port number for some VICs. For example, if the VIC in
Subunit 0 begins at 0 and has two ports (0 and 1), the VIC in Subunit 1 must begin at a port
number greater than 1 and have two ports (2 and 3 or 4 and 5).
Note
The correct number of slots displays for each model of MGCP gateway. (The VG200 gateway
has only one slot.)
Note
To begin configuring ports on a module, select the module first; then, click Save.
Module in Slot 0
Module in Slot 1
Module in Slot 2
Module in Slot 3
For each available slot on the chosen MGCP gateway, choose the
type of module that is installed; for example:
(and so on)
90-3
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-1
Field
Description
Product-Specific Configuration
Model-specific configuration
fields defined by the gateway
manufacturer
Additional Information
After a gateway is registered with Cisco Unified Communications Manager, gateway registration status
may display in Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration as unknown.
Table 90-2 lists configuration settings for H.323 gateways.
Table 90-2
Field
Description
Device Information
Device Name
Description
Device Pool
From the drop-down list box, choose the appropriate device pool.
The device pool specifies a collection of properties for this device
including Communications Manager Group, Date/Time Group,
Region, and Calling Search Space for auto-registration of devices.
Common Device
Configuration
From the drop-down list box, choose the common device configuration
you want to use for this gateway. The common device configuration
determines softkey template, MOH, and MLPP settings.
90-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Gateway Configuration Settings
Table 90-2
Field
Description
Call Classification
Location
90-5
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-2
Field
Description
AAR Group
Choose the automated alternate routing (AAR) group for this device.
The AAR group provides the prefix digits that are used to route calls
that are otherwise blocked due to insufficient bandwidth. An AAR
group setting of None specifies that no rerouting of blocked calls will
be attempted.
Tunneled Protocol
QSIG Variant
To display the options in the QSIG Variant drop-down list box, choose
QSIG from the Tunneled Protocol drop-down list box.
This parameter specifies the protocol profile that is sent in outbound
QSIG facility information elements.
From the drop-down list box, choose one of the following options.
Keep this parameter set to the default value unless a Cisco support
engineer instructs otherwise.
No Changes
Not Selected
90-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Gateway Configuration Settings
Table 90-2
Field
Description
ASN.1 ROSE OID Encoding To display the options in the ASN.1 ROSE OID Encoding drop-down
list box, choose QSIG from the Tunneled Protocol drop-down list box.
This parameter specifies how to encode the Invoke Object ID (OID) for
remote operations service element (ROSE) operations.
From the drop-down list box, choose one of the following options:
No Changes.
Not Selected
90-7
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-2
Field
Description
From the drop-down list box, enable or disable whether Cisco Unified
Communications Manager inserts a trusted relay point (TRP) device
with this media endpoint. Choose one of the following values:
DefaultIf you choose this value, the device uses the Use Trusted
Relay Point setting from the common device configuration with
which this device associates.
OnChoose this value to enable the use of a TRP with this device.
This setting overrides the Use Trusted Relay Point setting in the
common device configuration with which this device associates.
This field applies only to H.323 devices. The value designates the
H.225 signaling port that this device uses.
Default value specifies 1720. Valid values range from 1 to 65535.
90-8
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Gateway Configuration Settings
Table 90-2
Field
Description
This check box applies only to video endpoints that receive a call.
By default, the system checks this check box to specify that this device
should immediately retry a video call as an audio call (if it cannot
connect as a video call) prior to sending the call to call control for
rerouting.
If you uncheck this check box, a video call that fails to connect as video
does not try to establish as an audio call. The call then fails to call
control. Call control reroutes the call within the route/hunt list. If
Automatic Alternate Routing (AAR) is configured and enabled, call
control also reroutes the call between route/hunt lists.
This check box displays if you choose the QSIG option from the
Tunneled Protocol drop-down list box. This setting works with QSIG
tunneling (Annex M.1) to ensure that non-H.323 information gets sent
on the leg of the call that uses path replacement.
Note
The default setting leaves the check box unchecked. When you
choose the QSIG Tunneled Protocol option, the system
automatically checks the check box.
This device uses the user locale setting of the device pool of the device
to determine whether to send unicode and whether to translate received
unicode information.
For the sending device, if you check this check box and the user locale
setting in the device pool of the device matches the terminating phone
user locale, the device sends unicode. If the user locale settings do not
match, the device sends ASCII.
The receiving device translates incoming unicode characters based on
the user locale setting of the sending device pool of the device. If the
user locale setting matches the terminating phone user locale, the
phone displays the characters.
Note
The phone may display junk characters if the two ends of the
trunk configure user locales that do not belong to the same
language group.
90-9
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-2
Field
Description
SRTP Allowed
Check the SRTP Allowed check box if you want Cisco Unified
Communications Manager to allow secure and nonsecure calls over the
gateway.
If you do not check this check box, Cisco Unified Communications
Manager prevents SRTP negotiation with the gateway and uses RTP.
Caution
MLPP Indication
MLPP Preemption
Significant Digits
Significant digits represent the number of final digits that are retained
on inbound calls. Use for the processing of incoming calls and to
indicate the number of digits that are used to route calls coming into the
device.
Choose the number of significant digits to collect, from 0 to 32. Cisco
Unified Communications Manager counts significant digits from the
right (last digit) of the number called.
90-10
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Gateway Configuration Settings
Table 90-2
Field
Description
From the drop-down list box, choose the appropriate calling search
space. A calling search space specifies the collection of Route
Partitions that are searched to determine how a collected (originating)
number should be routed.
You can configure the number of calling search spaces that display in
this drop-down list box by using the Max List Box Items enterprise
parameter. If more calling search spaces exist than the Max List Box
Items enterprise parameter specifies, the Find button displays next to
the drop-down list box. Click the Find button to display the Find and
List Calling Search Space window. Find and choose a calling search
space name (see the Finding a Calling Search Space section on
page 53-3).
Note
Choose the appropriate calling search space for the device to use when
it performs automated alternate routing (AAR). The AAR calling
search space specifies the collection of route partitions that are
searched to determine how to route a collected (originating) number
that is otherwise blocked due to insufficient bandwidth.
Prefix DN
Enter the prefix digits that are appended to the called party number on
incoming calls.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager adds prefix digits after first
truncating the number in accordance with the Significant Digits setting.
You can enter the international escape character +.
Redirecting Number IE
DeliveryInbound
Check this check box to enable the H.323 FastStart call connections on
incoming calls.
By default, the check box remains unchecked for the H.323 gateway.
For intercluster calls, you must check the Enable Inbound FastStart
check box on Cisco Unified Communications Manager servers in other
clusters for the outbound FastStart feature to work.
Note
90-11
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-2
Field
Description
90-12
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Gateway Configuration Settings
Table 90-2
Field
Description
Called party IE Number Type Choose the format for the number type in called party directory
Unknown
numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the called directory
number (DN) type. Cisco recommends that you do not change the
default value unless you have advanced experience with dialing plans
such as NANP or the European dialing plan. You may need to change
the default in Europe because Cisco Unified Communications Manager
does not recognize European national dialing patterns. You can also
change this setting when you are connecting to a PBX that expects the
called directory number to be encoded to a non-national type
numbering plan.
Choose one of the following options:
NationalUse when you are dialing within the dialing plan for
your country.
Choose the format for the number type in calling party directory
numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the calling directory
number (DN) type. Cisco recommends that you do not change the
default value unless you have advanced experience with dialing plans
such as NANP or the European dialing plan. You may need to change
the default in Europe because Cisco Unified Communications Manager
does not recognize European national dialing patterns. You can also
change this setting when you are connecting to a PBX that expects the
calling directory number to be encoded to a non-national type
numbering plan.
Choose one of the following options:
NationalUse when you are dialing within the dialing plan for
your country.
90-13
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-2
Field
Description
Choose the format for the numbering plan in called party directory
numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the called DN numbering
plan. Cisco recommends that you do not change the default value
unless you have advanced experience with dialing plans such as NANP
or the European dialing plan. You may need to change the default in
Europe because Cisco Unified Communications Manager does not
recognize European national dialing patterns. You can also change this
setting when you are connecting to PBXs by using routing as a
non-national type number.
Choose one of the following options:
ISDNUse when you are dialing outside the dialing plan for your
country.
Choose the format for the numbering plan in calling party directory
numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the calling DN
numbering plan. Cisco recommends that you do not change the default
value unless you have advanced experience with dialing plans such as
NANP or the European dialing plan. You may need to change the
default in Europe because Cisco Unified Communications Manager
does not recognize European national dialing patterns. You can also
change this setting when you are connecting to PBXs by using routing
as a non-national type number.
Choose one of the following options:
ISDNUse when you are dialing outside the dialing plan for your
country.
90-14
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Gateway Configuration Settings
Table 90-2
Field
Description
Caller ID DN
Enter the pattern that you want to use for calling line ID, from 0 to 24
digits.
For example, in North America
5555000 = Fixed calling line ID. Use when you want the Corporate
number to be sent instead of the exact extension from which the
call is placed. The CO appends the number with the area code if
you do not specify it.
Redirecting Number IE
DeliveryOutbound
Check this check box to indicate the first redirecting number and the
redirecting reason of the call when the call is forwarded. (The UUIE
part of the outgoing SETUP message from the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager includes the Redirecting Number IE.)
Uncheck the check box to exclude the first redirecting number and the
redirecting reason.
You use Redirecting Number IE for voice-messaging integration only.
If your configured voice-messaging system supports Redirecting
Number IE, you should check the check box.
Check this check box to enable the H.323 FastStart feature on outgoing
calls.
By default, the check box remains unchecked for the H.323 gateway or
trunk.
Note
When you check the Enable Outbound FastStart check box, you
must set the Media Termination Point Required, Media
Resource Group Lists, and Codec for Outbound FastStart.
90-15
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-2
Field
Description
Use the drop-down list box to choose the codec for use with the H.323
device for an outbound FastStart call:
G723
G729
G729AnnexA
G729AnnexB
G729AnnexA-AnnexB
Note
When you check the Enable Outbound FastStart check box, you
must choose the codec for supporting outbound FastStart calls.
You may need to click Save prior to choosing the Codec For
Outbound FastStart.
This setting allows you to localize the called party number on the
device. Make sure that the Called Party Transformation CSS that you
choose contains the called party transformation pattern that you want
to assign to this device.
Note
Use Device Pool Called Party To use the Called Party Transformation CSS that is configured in the
Transformation CSS
device pool that is assigned to this device, check this check box. If you
do not check this check box, the device uses the Called Party
Transformation CSS that you configured in the H.323 Gateway
Configuration window.
Calling Party Transformation This setting allows you to localize the calling party number on the
CSS
device. Make sure that the Calling Party Transformation CSS that you
choose contains the calling party transformation pattern that you want
to assign to this device.
Tip
90-16
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Gateway Configuration Settings
Table 90-2
Field
Description
Geolocation Configuration
Geolocation
Geolocation Filter
To delete all prefixes for all calling party number types, click Clear
Prefix Settings.
To enter the default value for all prefix fields at the same time, click
Default Prefix Settings.
90-17
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-2
Field
Description
National Number
Use Device Pool CSSCheck this check box to use the calling
search space for the National Number field that is configured in the
device pool that is applied to the device.
Tip
90-18
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Gateway Configuration Settings
Table 90-2
Field
Description
International Number
Use Device Pool CSS Check this check box to use the calling
search space for the International Number field that is configured
in the device pool that is applied to the device.
Tip
90-19
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-2
Field
Description
Subscriber Number
Use Device Pool CSSCheck this check box to use the calling
search space for the Subscriber Number field that is configured in
the device pool that is applied to the device.
Tip
90-20
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Gateway Configuration Settings
Table 90-2
Field
Description
Unknown Number
Use Device Pool CSSCheck this check box to use the calling
search space for the Unknown Number field that is configured in
the device pool that is applied to the device.
Tip
Additional Information
90-21
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Field
Description
Device Information
MAC Address
Description
Device Pool
From the drop-down list box, choose the appropriate device pool.
The device pool specifies a collection of properties for this device
including Communications Manager Group, Date/Time Group,
Region, and Calling Search Space for auto-registration of devices.
Choose the appropriate calling search space for the device to use
when it performs automated alternate routing (AAR). The AAR
calling search space specifies the collection of route partitions that
are searched to determine how to route a collected (originating)
number that is otherwise blocked due to insufficient bandwidth.
90-22
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Gateway Configuration Settings
Table 90-3
Field
Description
Location
AAR Group
Network Locale
From the drop-down list box, choose the locale that is associated
with the gateway. The network locale identifies a set of detailed
information to support the hardware in a specific location. The
network locale contains a definition of the tones and cadences that
the device uses in a specific geographic area.
Note
90-23
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-3
Field
Description
DefaultIf you choose this value, the device uses the Use
Trusted Relay Point setting from the common device
configuration with which this device associates.
Load Information
Choose the order in which ports are chosen. If you are not sure
which port order to use, choose Top Down:
90-24
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Gateway Configuration Settings
Table 90-3
Field
Description
This device uses the user locale setting of the device pool of the
device to determine whether to send unicode and whether to
translate received unicode information.
For the sending device, if you check this check box and the user
locale setting in the device pool of the device matches the
terminating phone user locale, the device sends unicode. If the
user locale settings do not match, the device sends ASCII.
The receiving device translates incoming unicode characters
based on the user locale setting of the device pool of the sending
device. If the user locale setting matches the terminating phone
user locale, the phone displays the characters.
Note
Calling Party Transformation CSS This setting allows you to localize the calling party number on the
device. Make sure that the Calling Party Transformation CSS that
you choose contains the calling party transformation pattern that
you want to assign to this device.
Tip
MLPP Domain
MLPP Indication
MLPP Preemption
90-25
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-3
Field
Description
Product-Specific Configuration
Model-specific configuration
fields that the gateway
manufacturer defines
Geolocation Configuration
Geolocation
Geolocation Filter
Additional Information
90-26
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Gateway Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Enter the last 10 digits of the Media Access Control (MAC) address for
the Cisco VG248.
Only one MAC address exists for the Cisco VG248 Analog Phone
Gateway, but Cisco Unified Communications Manager requires unique
MAC addresses for all devices. When only 10 digits of the MAC address
are entered, Cisco Unified Communications Manager can use the MAC
address for the gateway and append additional information to it to create
the MAC addresses for the VGC phones.
The conversion of the MAC address for each device occurs by adding the
two-digit port number to the end of the MAC address (to the right of the
number) and adding VGC at the beginning of the MAC address.
EXAMPLE
MAC Address for the Cisco VG248 is
0039A44218
the MAC address for registered port 12 in
Cisco Unified Communications Manager is
VGC0039A4421812
Description
Load Information
Enter the firmware version for the Cisco VG248 that is being
configured; otherwise, leave blank to use the default.
To begin configuring ports on a module, select the module first; then, click Save.
48_PORTS
From the list of endpoint identifiers, choose one of the ports to configure
the VGC_Phone ports.
Additional Information
90-27
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Field
Description
Enter the last 10 digits of the Media Access Control (MAC) address
for the gateway. Use the MAC address of the interface that the sccp
local IOS command specifies on the gateway. Valid characters
include the digits 0 through 9 and the uppercase characters A
through F.
The conversion of the MAC address for each device occurs by
adding the three-digit mapping of the slot/subunit/port to the end of
the MAC address (to the right of the number).
EXAMPLE
MAC Address for the gateway is
0006D7E5C7
The MAC address in Cisco Unified Communications Manager is
0006D7E5C7281
where 281 is the three-digit mapping of the
slot/subunit/port.
The values 2,8 and 1 can be hex digits and each do not necessarily correspond to
slot, subunit and port values.
BRBRI phone
ANAnalog phone
Cisco Unified Communications From the drop-down list box, choose a Cisco Unified
Manager Group
Communications Manager redundancy group.
A Cisco Unified Communications Manager redundancy group
includes a prioritized list of up to three Cisco Unified
Communications Managers. The first Cisco Unified
Communications Manager in the list serves as the primary Cisco
Unified Communications Manager. If the primary Cisco Unified
Communications Manager is not available or fails, the gateway
attempts to connect with the next Cisco Unified Communications
Manager in the list, and so on.
90-28
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Gateway Configuration Settings
Table 90-5
Field
Description
You must specify the beginning port number for some VICs. For example, if the VIC in
Subunit 0 begins at 0 and has two ports (0 and 1), then the VIC in Subunit 1 must begin at a
port number greater than 1 and have two ports (2 and 3 or 4 and 5).
Note
The correct number of slots displays for each model of SCCP gateway.
Note
To begin configuring ports on a module, select the module first; then, click Save.
Module in Slot 0
Module in Slot 1
Module in Slot 2
Module in Slot 3
(and so on)
For each available slot on the chosen SCCP gateway, choose the
type of module that is installed. The system supports the following
modules:
Network Modules (with VIC slots):
VIC-2FXS
VIC-4FXS
VIC2-2FXS
VIC2-2BRI-NT/TE
90-29
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-5
Field
Description
At the slot level, these options exist:
Model-specific configuration
fields defined by the gateway
manufacturer
Additional Information
90-30
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Port Configuration Settings
For detailed information about gateway configuration settings, see the Gateway Configuration
Settings section on page 90-2.
Note
For the VG200 gateway, not all switch emulation types support the network side. How you configure the
gateway switch type determines whether you may or may not be able to set network side.
Table 90-6
Field
Description
Device Information
Description
Device Pool
From the drop-down list box, choose the appropriate device pool.
The device pool specifies a collection of properties for this device
including Communications Manager Group, Date/Time Group,
Region, and Calling Search Space for auto registration of devices.
90-31
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-6
Field
Description
Choose the appropriate calling search space for the device to use
when it performs automated alternate routing (AAR). The AAR
calling search space specifies the collection of route partitions that
are searched to determine how to route a collected (originating)
number that is otherwise blocked due to insufficient bandwidth.
Location
AAR Group
90-32
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Port Configuration Settings
Table 90-6
Field
Description
Network Locale
From the drop-down list box, choose the locale that is associated
with the gateway. The network locale identifies a set of detailed
information to support the hardware in a specific location. The
network locale contains a definition of the tones and cadences that
the device uses in a specific geographic area.
Note
90-33
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-6
Field
Description
DefaultIf you choose this value, the device uses the Use
Trusted Relay Point setting from the common device
configuration with which this device associates.
90-34
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Port Configuration Settings
Table 90-6
Field
Description
Geolocation
Transmit UTF-8 for Calling Party This device uses the user locale setting of the device pool for the
Name
device o determine whether to send unicode and whether to
translate received unicode information.
For the sending device, if you check this check box and the user
locale setting in the device pool for the device matches the
terminating phone user locale, the device sends unicode. If the
user locale settings do not match, the device sends ASCII.
The receiving device translates incoming unicode characters
based on the user locale setting of the sending device pool for the
device. If the user locale setting matches the terminating phone
user locale, the phone displays the characters.
Note
Calling Party Transformation CSS This setting, which displays for FXS ports (not FXO ports), allows
you to localize the calling party number on the device. Make sure
that the Calling Party Transformation CSS that you choose
contains the calling party transformation pattern that you want to
assign to this device.
Tip
90-35
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-6
Field
Description
MLPP Domain
MLPP Indication
Note
90-36
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Port Configuration Settings
Table 90-6
Field
Description
MLPP Preemption
Note
Port Direction
Prefix DN
(for FXS ports)
Choose the direction of calls that are passing through this port:
Enter the prefix digits that are appended to the digits that this
trunk receives on incoming calls.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager adds prefix digits after
first truncating the number in accordance with the Num Digits
setting.
You can enter the international escape character +.
Num Digits
(for FXS ports)
Expected Digits
(for FXS ports)
Enter the number of digits that are expected on the inbound side
of the trunk. For this rarely used field, leave zero as the default
value if you are unsure.
90-37
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-6
Field
Description
Unattended Port
Product-Specific Configuration
Model-specific configuration
fields defined by the gateway
manufacturer
Geolocation Configuration
Geolocation
90-38
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Port Configuration Settings
Table 90-6
Field
Description
Geolocation Filter
Additional Information
Note
To determine whether your gateway supports the QSIG protocol, refer to the gateway product
documentation. For information on QSIG support with Cisco Unified Communications
Manager, refer to Q.Signaling (QSIG) in the Understanding IP Telephony Protocols chapter
of the Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide.
Table 90-7
Field
Description
Device Information
Endpoint Name
MAC Address
90-39
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-7
Field
Description
Description
Device Pool
From the drop-down list box, choose the appropriate device pool.
The device pool specifies a collection of properties for this device
including Communications Manager Group, Date/Time Group,
Region, and Calling Search Space for auto-registration of devices.
Common Device Configuration From the drop-down list box, choose the common device
configuration you want to use for this gateway. The common device
configuration determines softkey template, MOH, and MLPP
settings.
Call Classification
Network Locale
From the drop-down list box, choose the locale that is associated
with the gateway. The network locale identifies a set of detailed
information to support the hardware in a specific location. The
network locale contains a definition of the tones and cadences that
are used by the device in a specific geographic area.
Note
Packet Capture Mode (for Cisco Configure this field only when you need to troubleshoot encrypted
IOS MGCP gateways only)
signaling information for the Cisco IOS MGCP gateway.
Configuring packet capturing may cause call-processing
interruptions. For more information on this field, refer to the Cisco
Unified Communications Manager Security Guide.
Packet Capture Duration (for
Cisco IOS MGCP gateways
only)
90-40
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Port Configuration Settings
Table 90-7
Field
Description
Location
AAR Group
Load Information
90-41
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-7
Field
Description
DefaultIf you choose this value, the device uses the Use
Trusted Relay Point setting from the common device
configuration with which this device associates.
90-42
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Port Configuration Settings
Table 90-7
Field
Description
This device uses the user locale setting of the device pool for the
device to determine whether to send unicode and whether to
translate received unicode information.
For the sending device, if you check this check box and the user
locale setting in the device pool for the device matches the
terminating phone user locale, the device sends unicode. If the user
locale settings do not match, the device sends ASCII.
The receiving device translates incoming unicode characters based
on the user locale setting of the device pool to which the sending
device belongs. If the user locale setting matches the terminating
phone user locale, the phone displays the characters.
Note
V150 (subset)
The phone may display junk characters if the two ends of the
trunk configure user locales that do not belong to the same
language group.
Check this box to enable v150 (subset) modem relay support on the
gateways. IP-STEs currently use this feature to support end-to-end
secure calls to an ISDN-STE. (Applies only to T1 PRI and T1 CAS.)
The default value specifies unchecked.
MLPP Domain
MLPP Indication
Note
90-43
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-7
Field
Description
MLPP Preemption
Note
90-44
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Port Configuration Settings
Table 90-7
Field
Description
Interface Information
Note
If you specify the PRI NI2 PRI protocol type, configure the
Cisco IOS gateway with the following command:
isdn switch-type primary-ni
Determine the switch to which you are connecting and the preferred
protocol; for example:
90-45
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-7
Field
Description
QSIG Variant
No Changes
Not Selected
90-46
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Port Configuration Settings
Table 90-7
Field
Description
No Changes.
Not Selected
Protocol Side
Choose the order in which channels or ports are enabled from first
(lowest number port) to last (highest number port), or from last to
first.
Valid entries include TOP_DOWN (first to last) or BOTTOM_UP
(last to first). If you are not sure which port order to use, choose
TOP_DOWN.
90-47
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-7
Field
Description
Channel IE Type
PCM Type
Enter the rate at which the spans are brought in service. The delay
occurs when many PRI spans are enabled on a system and the
Inhibit Restarts at PRI Initialization check box is unchecked. For
example, set the first five cards to 0 and set the next five cards to 16.
(Wait 2 seconds before bringing them in service.)
Delay between restarts (1/8 sec Enter the time between restarts. The delay occurs when a PRI
ticks)
RESTART gets sent if the Inhibit Restarts check box is unchecked.
Inhibit restarts at PRI
initialization
Unattended Port
90-48
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Port Configuration Settings
Table 90-7
Field
Description
Enable G.Clear
Check this box to enable G. Clear Codec support for MGCP T1 PRI
gateways and SIP trunks. When you enable G. Clear Codec, echo
cancellation and zero suppression for outbound calls get disabled.
Note
T1 and E1 CAS
SCCP devices
RSVP
Significant Digits
Use for the processing of incoming calls and to indicate the number
of digits, starting from the last digit of the called number, that are
used to route calls that are coming into the PRI span. See Prefix DN.
90-49
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-7
Field
Description
From the drop-down list box, choose the appropriate calling search
space. A calling search space designates a collection of route
partitions that are searched to determine how a collected
(originating) number should be routed.
You can configure the number of calling search spaces that display
in this drop-down list box by using the Max List Box Items
enterprise parameter. If more calling search spaces exist than the
Max List Box Items enterprise parameter specifies, the Find button
displays next to the drop-down list box. Click the Find button to
display the Find and List Calling Search Space window. Find and
choose a calling search space name (see the Finding a Calling
Search Space section on page 53-3).
Note
Choose the appropriate calling search space for the device to use
when automated alternate routing (AAR) is performed. The AAR
calling search space specifies the collection of route partitions that
are searched to determine how to route a collected (originating)
number that is otherwise blocked due to insufficient bandwidth.
Prefix DN
Enter the prefix digits that are appended to the digits that this
gateway receives on incoming calls.
The Cisco Unified Communications Manager adds prefix digits
after first truncating the number in accordance with the Num Digits
setting.
You can enter the international escape character +.
90-50
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Port Configuration Settings
Table 90-7
Field
Description
Choose the format for the number type in called party directory
numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the called directory
number (DN) type. Cisco recommends that you do not change the
default value unless you have advanced experience with dialing
plans such as NANP or the European dialing plan. You may need to
change the default in Europe because Cisco Unified
Communications Manager does not recognize European national
dialing patterns. You can also change this setting when you are
connecting to a PBX that expects the called directory number to be
encoded to a non-national type numbering plan.
Choose one of the following options:
NationalUse when you are dialing within the dialing plan for
your country.
90-51
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-7
Field
Description
Choose the format for the number type in calling party directory
numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the calling directory
number (DN) type. Cisco recommends that you do not change the
default value unless you have advanced experience with dialing
plans such as NANP or the European dialing plan. You may need to
change the default in Europe because Cisco Unified
Communications Manager does not recognize European national
dialing patterns. You can also change this setting when you are
connecting to a PBX that expects the calling directory number to be
encoded to a non-national type numbering plan.
Choose one of the following options:
NationalUse when you are dialing within the dialing plan for
your country.
Choose the format for the numbering plan in called party directory
numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the called DN
numbering plan. Cisco recommends that you do not change the
default value unless you have advanced experience with dialing
plans such as NANP or the European dialing plan. You may need to
change the default in Europe because Cisco Unified
Communications Manager does not recognize European national
dialing patterns. You can also change this setting when you are
connecting to PBXs by using routing as a non-national type number.
Choose one of the following options:
ISDNUse when you are dialing outside the dialing plan for
your country.
90-52
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Port Configuration Settings
Table 90-7
Field
Description
Choose the format for the numbering plan in calling party directory
numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the calling DN
numbering plan. Cisco recommends that you do not change the
default value unless you have advanced experience with dialing
plans such as NANP or the European dialing plan. You may need to
change the default in Europe because Cisco Unified
Communications Manager does not recognize European national
dialing patterns. You can also change this setting when you are
connecting to PBXs by using routing as a non-national type number.
Choose one of the following options:
ISDNUse when you are dialing outside the dialing plan for
your country.
Caller ID DN
Enter the pattern that you want to use for calling line ID, from 0 to
24 digits.
For example, in North America
5555000 = Fixed calling line ID, where you want the Corporate
number to be sent instead of the exact extension from which the
call is placed. The CO appends the number with the area code
if you do not specify it.
90-53
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-7
Field
Description
This setting allows you to localize the called party number on the
device. Make sure that the Called Party Transformation CSS that
you choose contains the called party transformation pattern that you
want to assign to this device.
Note
This setting allows you to localize the calling party number on the
device. Make sure that the Calling Party Transformation CSS that
you choose contains the calling party transformation pattern that
you want to assign to this device.
Tip
Display IE Delivery
Redirecting Number IE
Delivery Outbound
Check this check box to indicate the first redirecting number and the
redirecting reason of the call when the call is forwarded. (The UUIE
part of the outgoing SETUP message from the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager includes the Redirecting Number IE.)
Uncheck the check box to exclude the first redirecting number and
the redirecting reason.
You use Redirecting Number IE for voice-messaging integration
only. If your configured voice-messaging system supports
Redirecting Number IE, you should check the check box.
90-54
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Port Configuration Settings
Table 90-7
Field
Description
Redirecting Number IE
Delivery Inbound
To set the channel number extension bit to zero, check the check
box. To set the extension bit to 1, uncheck the check box.
This setting only applies to the DMS-100 protocol
Check the check box to send the calling name in the Facility IE
field. By default, the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
leaves the check box unchecked.
Set this feature for a private network that has a PRI interface that is
enabled for ISDN calling name delivery. When this check box is
checked, the calling party name gets sent in the Facility IE of the
SETUP or FACILITY message, so the name can display on the
called party device.
Set this feature for PRI trunks in a private network only. Do not set
this feature for PRI trunks that are connected to the PSTN.
Note
90-55
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-7
Field
Description
Enter the value that was obtained from the PBX provider.
This field applies to only the DMS-100 protocol. Valid values range
from 0 through 255.
Connected Line ID Presentation Choose whether you want the Cisco Unified Communications
(QSIG Inbound Call)
Manager to allow or block the connected party phone number from
displaying on an inbound caller phone.
This field applies only to gateways that are using QSIG protocol.
The gateway applies this setting for incoming calls only.
Choose Default if you do not want to change the connected line ID
presentation. Choose Allowed if you want Cisco Unified
Communications Manager to send Connected Line ID Allowed to
enable the connected party number to display for the calling party.
Choose Restricted if you want Cisco Unified Communications
Manager to send Connected Line ID Restricted to block the
connected party number from displaying for the calling party.
For more information about this field, see Table 17-11 in the
Connected Party Presentation and Restriction Settings section in
the Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide.
UUIE Configuration
Enter the value for the security access level. Valid values include 00
through 99. The system makes this field available only if the Passing
Precedence Level Through UUIE check box is checked. The default
value specifies 2.
To delete all prefixes for all calling party number types, click Clear
Prefix Settings.
90-56
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Port Configuration Settings
Table 90-7
Field
Description
To enter the default value for all prefix fields at the same time, click
Default Prefix Settings.
National Number
Use Device Pool CSSCheck this check box to use the calling
search space for the National Number field that is configured in
the device pool that is applied to the device.
Tip
90-57
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-7
Field
Description
International Number
Use Device Pool CSS Check this check box to use the calling
search space for the International Number field that is
configured in the device pool that is applied to the device.
Tip
90-58
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Port Configuration Settings
Table 90-7
Field
Description
Subscriber Number
Use Device Pool CSSCheck this check box to use the calling
search space for the Subscriber Number field that is configured
in the device pool that is applied to the device.
Tip
90-59
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-7
Field
Description
Unknown Number
Use Device Pool CSSCheck this check box to use the calling
search space for the Unknown Number field that is configured
in the device pool that is applied to the device.
Tip
90-60
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Port Configuration Settings
Table 90-7
Field
Description
Product-Specific Configuration
Model-specific configuration
fields that the gateway
manufacturer defines
Geolocation Configuration
Geolocation
Geolocation Filter
Additional Information
90-61
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Field
Description
MAC Address
(non-IOS gateway)
Note
Description
Device Pool
From the drop-down list box, choose the appropriate device pool.
The device pool specifies a collection of properties for this device
including Communications Manager Group, Date/Time Group,
Region, and Calling Search Space for auto-registration of devices.
Common Device Configuration From the drop-down list box, choose the common device
configuration that you want to use for this gateway. The common
device configuration determines softkey template, MOH, and
MLPP settings.
Call Classification
Packet Capture Mode (for Cisco Configure this field only when you need to troubleshoot encrypted
IOS MGCP gateways only)
signaling information for the Cisco IOS MGCP gateway.
Configuring packet capturing may cause call-processing
interruptions. For more information on this field, refer to the Cisco
Unified Communications Manager Security Guide.
90-62
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Port Configuration Settings
Table 90-8
Field
Description
From the drop-down list box, choose the appropriate calling search
space. A calling search space designates a collection of route
partitions that are searched to determine how a collected
(originating) number should be routed.
You can configure the number of calling search spaces that display
in this drop-down list box by using the Max List Box Items
enterprise parameter. If more calling search spaces exist than the
Max List Box Items enterprise parameter specifies, the Find button
displays next to the drop-down list box. Click the Find button to
display the Find and List Calling Search Space window. Find and
choose a calling search space name (see the Finding a Calling
Search Space section on page 53-3).
Note
Choose the appropriate calling search space for the device to use
when automated alternate routing (AAR) is performed. The AAR
calling search space specifies the collection of route partitions that
are searched to determine how to route a collected (originating)
number that is otherwise blocked due to insufficient bandwidth.
Location
90-63
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-8
Field
Description
AAR Group
MLPP Domain
MLPP Indication
Note
MLPP Preemption
Note
90-64
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Port Configuration Settings
Table 90-8
Field
Description
Check this box to enable G. Clear Codec support for MGCP T1 PRI
gateways and SIP trunks. When you enable G. Clear Codec, echo
cancellation and zero suppression for outbound calls get disabled.
Note
T1 and E1 CAS
SCCP devices
RSVP
Load Information
Digit Sending
MFMultifrequency
90-65
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-8
Field
Description
Network Locale
From the drop-down list box, choose the locale that is associated
with the gateway. The network locale identifies a set of detailed
information to support the hardware in a specific location. The
network locale contains a definition of the tones and cadences that
the device uses in a specific geographic area.
Note
90-66
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Port Configuration Settings
Table 90-8
Field
Description
DefaultIf you choose this value, the device uses the Use
Trusted Relay Point setting from the common device
configuration with which this device associates.
Check this box to enable v150 (subset) modem relay support on the
gateways. IP-STEs currently use this feature to support end-to-end
secure calls to an ISDN-STE. (Applies only to T1 PRI and T1 CAS)
The default value specifies unchecked.
90-67
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-8
Field
Description
Product-Specific Configuration
Model-specific configuration
fields that the gateway
manufacturer defines
Geolocation Configuration
Geolocation
Geolocation Filter
Additional Information
90-68
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Port Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Device Information
Description
Device Pool
From the drop-down list box, choose the appropriate device pool.
For this device, the device pool specifies a collection of properties
that includes Communications Manager Group, Date/Time Group,
Region, and Calling Search Space for auto-registration of devices.
Common Device Configuration From the drop-down list box, choose the common device
configuration you want to use for this gateway. The common device
configuration determines softkey template, MOH, and MLPP
settings.
Call Classification
Network Locale
From the drop-down list box, choose the locale that is associated
with the gateway. The network locale identifies a set of detailed
information to support the hardware in a specific location. The
network locale contains a definition of the tones and cadences that
devises use in a specific geographic area.
Packet Capture Mode (for Cisco Configure this field only when you need to troubleshoot encrypted
IOS MGCP gateways only)
signaling information for the Cisco IOS MGCP gateway.
Configuring packet capturing may cause call-processing
interruptions. For more information on this field, refer to the Cisco
Unified Communications Manager Security Guide.
90-69
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-9
Field
Description
Location
AAR Group
Interface Information
BRI Protocol
Protocol Side
90-70
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Port Configuration Settings
Table 90-9
Field
Description
Choose the order in which channels or ports are enabled from first
(lowest number port) to last (highest number port) or from last to
first.
Valid entries include TOP_DOWN (first to last) or BOTTOM_UP
(last to first). If you are not sure which port order to use, choose
TOP_DOWN.
PCM Type
Enter the rate at which the spans are brought in service. The delay
occurs when many BRI spans are enabled on a system and the
Inhibit Restarts at BRI Initialization check box is unchecked. For
example, set the first five cards to 0 and set the next five cards to 16.
(Wait 2 seconds before bringing them in service.)
Delay Between Restarts (1/8 sec Enter the time between restarts. The delay occurs when a BRI
ticks)
RESTART gets sent if the Inhibit Restarts check box is unchecked.
Inhibit Restarts at BRI
Initialization
Check the check box to view the B-channel status in the debug
window.
Establish Datalink on First Call Cisco Unified Communications Manager establishes the data link to
the gateway when the gateway registers with Cisco Unified
Communications Manager.
When you configure the gateway and switch to negotiate the TEI
(terminal endpoint identifier) on the first call, you can check the
check box to establish the data link on the first call.
Note
90-71
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-9
Field
Description
Significant Digits
Use for the processing of incoming calls and to indicate the number
of digits, starting from the last digit of the called number, that are
used to route calls that are coming into the BRI span. See Prefix DN.
Calling Search Space
Choose the appropriate calling search space for the device to use
when automated alternate routing (AAR) is performed. The AAR
calling search space specifies the collection of route partitions that
are searched to determine how to route a collected (originating)
number that is otherwise blocked due to insufficient bandwidth.
Prefix DN
Enter the prefix digits that are appended to the digits that this
gateway receives on incoming calls.
The Cisco Unified Communications Manager adds prefix digits
after first truncating the number in accordance with the Num Digits
setting.
You can enter the international escape character + in this field.
This setting allows you to localize the called party number on the
device. Make sure that the Called Party Transformation CSS that
you choose contains the called party transformation pattern that you
want to assign to this device.
Note
90-72
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Port Configuration Settings
Table 90-9
Field
Description
This setting allows you to localize the calling party number on the
device. Make sure that the Calling Party Transformation CSS that
you choose contains the calling party transformation pattern that
you want to assign to this device.
Tip
Geolocation
90-73
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-9
Field
Description
Choose the format for the number type in called party directory
numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the called directory
number (DN) type. Cisco recommends that you do not change the
default value unless you have advanced experience with dialing
plans such as NANP or the European dialing plan. You may need to
change the default in Europe because Cisco Unified
Communications Manager does not recognize European national
dialing patterns. You can also change this setting when you are
connecting to a PBX that expects the called directory number to be
encoded to a non-national numbering plan type.
Choose one of the following options:
NationalUse when you are dialing within the dialing plan for
your country.
90-74
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Port Configuration Settings
Table 90-9
Field
Description
Choose the format for the number type in calling party directory
numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the calling directory
number (DN) type. Cisco recommends that you do not change the
default value unless you have advanced experience with dialing
plans such as NANP or the European dialing plan. You may need to
change the default in Europe because Cisco Unified
Communications Manager does not recognize European national
dialing patterns. You can also change this setting when you are
connecting to a PBX that expects the calling directory number to be
encoded to a non-national numbering plan type.
Choose one of the following options:
NationalUse when you are dialing within the dialing plan for
your country.
Choose the format for the numbering plan in called party directory
numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the called DN
numbering plan. Cisco recommends that you do not change the
default value unless you have advanced experience with dialing
plans such as NANP or the European dialing plan. You may need to
change the default in Europe because Cisco Unified
Communications Manager does not recognize European national
dialing patterns. You can also change this setting when you are
connecting to PBXs by using routing as a non-national type number.
Choose one of the following options:
ISDNUse when you are dialing outside the dialing plan for
your country.
90-75
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-9
Field
Description
Choose the format for the numbering plan in calling party directory
numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the calling DN
numbering plan. Cisco recommends that you do not change the
default value unless you have advanced experience with dialing
plans such as NANP or the European dialing plan. You may need to
change the default in Europe because Cisco Unified
Communications Manager does not recognize European national
dialing patterns. You can also change this setting when you are
connecting to PBXs by using routing as a non-national type number.
Choose one of the following options:
ISDNUse when you are dialing outside the dialing plan for
your country.
Caller ID DN
Enter the pattern that you want to use for caller ID, from 0 to 24
digits.
For example, in North America
To delete all prefixes for all calling party number types, click Clear
Prefix Settings.
To enter the default value for all prefix fields at the same time, click
Default Prefix Settings.
90-76
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Port Configuration Settings
Table 90-9
Field
Description
National Number
Use Device Pool CSSCheck this check box to use the calling
search space for the National Number field that is configured in
the device pool that is applied to the device.
Tip
90-77
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-9
Field
Description
International Number
Use Device Pool CSS Check this check box to use the calling
search space for the International Number field that is
configured in the device pool that is applied to the device.
Tip
90-78
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Port Configuration Settings
Table 90-9
Field
Description
Subscriber Number
Use Device Pool CSSCheck this check box to use the calling
search space for the Subscriber Number field that is configured
in the device pool that is applied to the device.
Tip
90-79
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-9
Field
Description
Unknown Number
Use Device Pool CSSCheck this check box to use the calling
search space for the Unknown Number field that is configured
in the device pool that is applied to the device.
Tip
90-80
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Port Configuration Settings
Table 90-9
Field
Description
Redirecting Number IE
Delivery Outbound
Check this check box to indicate the first redirecting number and the
redirecting reason of the call when the call is forwarded. (The UUIE
part of the outgoing SETUP message from the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager includes the Redirecting Number IE.)
Uncheck the check box to exclude the first redirecting number and
the redirecting reason.
You use Redirecting Number IE for voice-messaging integration
only. If your configured voice-messaging system supports
Redirecting Number IE, you should check the check box.
Note
Redirecting Number IE
Delivery Inbound
90-81
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-9
Field
Description
Product-Specific Configuration
Model-specific configuration
fields that are defined by the
gateway manufacturer
Additional Information
Field
Description
Port Selection
Port Type
Choose whether you want to add and configure all available ports, a
single port, or a range of ports by setting values for the Beginning
Port Number and Ending Port Number fields:
To add all available ports, choose All Ports for both the
Beginning Port Number and Ending Port Number fields.
Port Details
Port Direction
90-82
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Port Configuration Settings
Table 90-10
Field
Description
Audio Signal Adjustment into This field specifies the gain or loss that is applied to the received audio
IP Network
signal relative to the port application type.
Note
This field specifies the gain or loss that is applied to the transmitted
audio signal relative to the port application type.
Note
Prefix DN
Enter the prefix digits that are appended to the digits that this gateway
receives on incoming calls.
The Cisco Unified Communications Manager adds prefix digits after
it truncates the number in accordance with the Num Digits setting.
You can enter the international escape character +.
Num Digits
Expected Digits
Enter the number of digits that are expected on the inbound side of the
trunk. For this rarely used field, leave zero as the default value if you
are unsure.
SMDI Port Number (0-4096) Use this field for analog access ports that connect to a
voice-messaging system.
Set the SMDI Port Number equal to the actual port number on the
voice-messaging system to which the analog access port connects.
Note
Unattended Port
90-83
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-10
Field
Description
Product-Specific Configuration
Model-specific configuration The gateway manufacturer specifies the model-specific fields under
fields that the gateway
product-specific configuration. Because they are dynamically
manufacturer defines
configured, they can change without notice.
To view field descriptions and help for product-specific configuration
items, click the ? information icon to the right of the Product
Specific Configuration heading to display help in a popup dialog
box.
If you need more information, refer to the documentation for the
specific gateway that you are configuring or contact the manufacturer.
Additional Information
Field
Description
Port Type
From the Port Type drop-down list box, choose Loop Start.
Choose whether you want to add and configure all available ports, a
single port, or a range of ports by setting values for the Port Number
and End Port Number fields:
Port Direction
To add all available ports, choose All Ports for both the Beginning
Port Number and Ending Port Number fields.
Attendant DN
Enter the directory number to which you want incoming calls routed; for
example, zero or a directory number for an attendant.
Unattended Port
90-84
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Port Configuration Settings
Table 90-11
Field
Description
Product-Specific Configurations
Model-specific
The gateway manufacturer specifies the model-specific fields under
configuration fields that the product-specific configuration. Because they are dynamically
gateway manufacturer
configured, they can change without notice.
defines
To view field descriptions and help for product-specific configuration
items, click the ? information icon to the right of the Product Specific
Configuration heading to display help in a popup dialog box.
If you need more information, refer to the documentation for the specific
gateway that you are configuring or contact the manufacturer.
Additional Information
Field
Description
Port Type
From the Port Type drop-down list box, choose Ground Start.
Choose whether you want to add and configure all available ports, a single
port, or a range of ports by setting values for the Beginning Port Number
and Ending Port Number fields:
Port Direction
To create a single port, choose the same number in the Beginning Port
Number and Ending Port Number fields.
To add all available ports, choose All Ports for both the Beginning
Port Number and Ending Port Number fields.
Attendant DN
Enter the number to which you want incoming calls to be routed; for
example, zero or a directory number for an attendant.
Unattended Port
90-85
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-12
Field
Description
Product-Specific Configuration
Model-specific
The gateway manufacturer specifies the model-specific fields under
configuration fields that
product-specific configuration. Because they are dynamically configured,
the gateway manufacturer they can change without notice.
defines
To view field descriptions and help for product-specific configuration
items, click the ? information icon to the right of the Product Specific
Configuration heading to display help in a popup dialog box.
If you need more information, refer to the documentation for the specific
gateway that you are configuring or contact the manufacturer.
Additional Information
Field
Description
Port Type
Choose whether you want to add and configure all available ports, a
single port, or a range of ports by setting values for the Beginning
Port Number and Ending Port Number fields:
To add all available ports, choose All Ports for both the
Beginning Port Number and Ending Port Number fields.
Port Details
Port Direction
90-86
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Port Configuration Settings
Table 90-13
Field
Description
Caller ID Type
Caller ID DN
Enter the pattern that you want to use for calling line ID, from 0 to 24
digits.
For example, in North America
5555000 = Fixed calling line ID, where you want the Corporate
number to be sent instead of the exact extension from which the
call is placed. The CO appends the number with the area code if
you do not specify it.
Enter the prefix digits that are appended to the called party number on
incoming calls.
The Cisco Unified Communications Manager adds prefix digits after
first truncating the number in accordance with the Num Digits setting.
You can enter the international escape character +.
Num Digits
Expected Digits
Enter the number of digits that are expected on the inbound side of the
trunk. If you are unsure, leave zero as the default value for this rarely
used field.
90-87
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-13
Field
Description
Product-Specific Configuration
Model-specific configuration The gateway manufacturer specifies the model-specific fields under
fields that the gateway
product-specific configuration. Because they are dynamically
manufacturer defines
configured, they can change without notice.
To view field descriptions and help for product-specific configuration
items, click the ? information icon to the right of the Product
Specific Configuration heading to display help in a popup dialog
box.
If you need more information, refer to the documentation for the
specific gateway that you are configuring or contact the manufacturer.
Additional Information
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your gateway search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item, Cisco
Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your gateway search preferences until you
modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
90-88
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Adding Gateways to Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Step 3
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
To display the Find and List Gateways window, choose Device > Gateway.
Step 2
Click the Add New button. The Add a New Gateway window displays.
Step 3
From the Gateway Type drop-down list box, choose the gateway type that you want to add. The Device
Protocol field may automatically get populated depending on gateway type that you choose.
Step 4
Click Next.
Step 5
In Table 90-14, click the specific procedure for the gateway type that you are configuring. After you are
in the correct procedure, start with the step where you enter the appropriate settings for that particular
gateway type.
90-89
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Table 90-14
Gateways
Type of Gateway
Procedure to Add
VG224 Gateway
Cisco IOS 269X, 26XX, 362X, 364X, 366X,
3725, 3745 Gateways
Cisco 2801, 2811, 2821, 2851, 3825, 3845
Gateways
Cisco Catalyst 4000 Access Gateway
Module
Cisco Catalyst 4224 Voice Gateway Switch
Communication Media Module
Cisco IAD2400
Cisco IOS 269X, 3725, 3745 Gateways
VG224 Gateway
90-90
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Adding Gateways to Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Note
Like other IOS MGCP gateways, MRP/ASI gateways may work with a Cisco Unified Communications
Manager group that contains three Cisco Unified Communications Managers. ASI/MRP gateways
testing occurs, however, with only one backup Cisco Unified Communications Manager.
Before You Begin
Before configuring a Cisco IOS MGCP gateway for use with Cisco Unified Communications Manager,
you must configure the gateway by using the Cisco IOS command-line interface (CLI). For procedures
and commands that are required to perform this configuration, refer to the configuration documentation
that is supplied with the gateway.
Procedure
Step 1
To display the Find and List Gateways window, choose Device > Gateway.
Step 2
Click the Add New button. The Add a New Gateway window displays.
Step 3
From the Gateway Type drop-down list box, choose one of the following MGCP gateways:
Cisco VG200
VG224
Cisco IAD2400
Note
The Cisco Catalyst 6000 gateways also support MGCP but are configured differently. See the
Adding a Non-IOS MGCP Gateway section on page 90-97.
Cisco IOS MGCP gateways support different device protocols for interfacing to the PSTN or other
non-IP devices, depending on the gateway model and the type of installed network modules and voice
interface cards (VICs). A subsequent web window provides configuration for these interfaces.
Step 4
Click Next.
Step 5
If a Protocol drop-down list box displays, choose MGCP and click Next. Otherwise, skip to Step 6.
Step 6
Step 7
Click Save.
The Gateway Configuration window updates and displays drop-down list boxes with options for
configuring the type of voice interface cards (VICs) in each subunit of each network module.
90-91
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
The available choices depend on the type of network modules that are configured in the Gateway
Configuration window.
Step 8
From the drop-down list boxes, choose the type of VICs that are installed in each subunit and click Save.
The window updates to add links for configuring endpoint information and ports for the chosen type of
VICs.
Step 9
Click an endpoint identifier (for example, 1/0/0) to configure device protocol information and add ports
for the installed types of VICs.
For detailed instructions, see the following procedures:
Step 10
Step 11
Step 12
After you finish configuring the endpoint and adding ports, you need to add the MGCP gateway device
to a route group/route list or assign a route pattern to the gateway, so calls can be routed to the gateway.
Note
You need to add the MGCP gateway to a route pattern only for outbound calling.
You must add an MGCP gateway before configuring ports. See the Adding a Cisco IOS MGCP
Gateway section on page 90-90 for instructions.
90-92
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Adding Gateways to Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Procedure
Step 1
To display the Find and List Gateways window, choose Device > Gateway or skip to Step 4 if you have
already located the MGCP gateway to which you want to add FXS ports.
Step 2
Enter the appropriate search criteria to locate the MGCP gateway to which you want to add FXS ports.
Step 3
Click the name of the desired gateway to display its MGCP configuration settings and endpoint
identifiers.
Step 4
From the Gateway Configuration window, click the endpoint identifier for the FXS VIC that you want
to configure.
The window refreshes and displays the Gateway Configuration window.
Step 5
Step 6
Enter the appropriate Gateway Information and Port Information settings. See the following sections
for details about these fields:
Click Save.
Note
Step 7
After you insert a POTS port, the window refreshes and displays the POTS port information at
the bottom of the window. An Add a new DN link displays below the new port.
Click Add a new DN to add directory numbers to the POTS port or, if you configured another type of
port, go to Step 9.
Note
See the Configuring a Directory Number section on page 64-25 and Directory Number
Configuration Settings section on page 64-1 for information about adding and configuring
DNs.
Step 8
To return to the main MGCP gateway configuration window for the gateway to which you just added the
ports, choose Back to MGCP Configuration in the Related Links drop-down list box and click Go.
Step 9
Step 10
Additional Information
Note
Cisco Unified Communications Manager assumes all loop-start trunks lack positive disconnect
supervision. Configure trunks with positive disconnect supervision as ground start, so active calls can be
maintained during a Cisco Unified Communications Manager server failover.
90-93
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
You must add an MGCP gateway before configuring ports. See the Adding a Cisco IOS MGCP
Gateway section on page 90-90 for instructions.
Procedure
Step 1
To display the Find and List Gateways window, choose Device > Gateway or skip to Step 4 if you have
already located the MGCP gateway to which you want to add FXO ports.
Step 2
Enter the appropriate search criteria to locate the MGCP gateway to which you want to add FXO ports
and click Find. The search results window displays.
Step 3
Click the name of the desired gateway to display its MGCP configuration settings and endpoint
identifiers.
Step 4
From the MGCP Configuration window, click the endpoint identifiers of the FXO port that you want to
configure.
Step 5
From the Port Type drop-down list box, choose either Ground Start or Loop Start.
Note
Step 6
You must choose the same port type for both endpoint identifiers of the VIC-2FXO port. If you
choose different port types, a message displays.
Enter the appropriate Gateway Configuration and Port Information settings as described in the
following sections:
Step 7
Click Save.
Step 8
To return to the main MGCP gateway configuration window for the gateway to which you just added the
ports, choose Back to MGCP Configuration in the Related Links drop-down list box and click Go.
Step 9
Step 10
Additional Information
To display the Find and List Gateways window, choose Device > Gateway or skip to Step 4 if you have
already located the MGCP gateway to which you want to add T1-CAS ports.
Step 2
To locate the MGCP gateway to which you want to add a Digital Access T1 (T1-CAS) port, enter the
appropriate search criteria.
Step 3
To display its MGCP configuration settings and endpoint identifiers, click the name of the desired
gateway.
90-94
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Adding Gateways to Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Step 4
From the Gateway Configuration window, click the endpoint identifier of the Digital Access T1
(T1-CAS) port that you want to configure.
In the Device Protocol drop-down list box that displays, choose Digital Access T1 and click Next.
See the Finding Specific Gateways section on page 90-88 for the appropriate settings for the port type
that you choose.
Step 5
Enter the appropriate Gateway Configuration settings. See the Digital Access T1 Port Configuration
Settings section on page 90-62 for details.
Step 6
Click Save.
Step 7
Additional Information
To display the Find and List Gateways window, choose Device > Gateway or skip to Step 4 if you have
already located the MGCP gateway to which you want to add a port.
Step 2
To locate the MGCP gateway to which you want to add a T1 PRI or E1 PRI port, enter the appropriate
search criteria.
Step 3
To display the configuration information for the selected gateway, click the name of the desired gateway
in the list.
Step 4
From the Gateway Configuration window, click the endpoint identifier of the T1 PRI or E1 PRI port that
you want to configure.
Step 5
Configure the T1 PRI or E1 PRI device protocol settings. See the Digital Access PRI Port Configuration
Settings section on page 90-39 for detailed field descriptions.
Step 6
Click Save.
Step 7
Additional Information
To display the Find/List Gateways window, choose Device > Gateway, or if you have already located
the MGCP gateway to which you want to add a port, skip to Step 4.
Step 2
To locate the MGCP gateway to which you want to add a BRI port, enter the appropriate search criteria.
90-95
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Step 3
To display the configuration information for the chosen gateway, click the name of the desired gateway
in the list.
Step 4
From the MGCP Configuration window, click the endpoint identifier of the BRI port that you want to
configure.
Step 5
Configure the BRI device protocol settings. See the BRI Port Configuration Settings section on
page 90-69 for detailed field descriptions.
Step 6
Click Save.
Step 7
Additional Information
Configure a Cisco IOS SCCP gateway by adding the gateway first to Cisco Unified Communications
Manager. Afterward, configure the gateway by using the Cisco IOS command-line interface (CLI). For
procedures and commands that are required to perform this configuration, refer to the configuration
documentation that is supplied with the gateway.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
From the Gateway Type drop-down list box, choose one of the following SCCP gateways:
Step 5
Click Next.
The Gateway Configuration window displays for this SCCP gateway.
90-96
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Adding Gateways to Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Step 6
Enter the appropriate settings and choose the type of network modules that are installed in each slot, as
described in the Cisco IOS SCCP Gateway Configuration Settings section on page 90-28, including
any product-specific configuration settings.
Step 7
Click Save.
The Gateway Configuration window updates and displays drop-down list boxes with options for
configuring the type of voice interface cards (VICs) in each subunit of each network module.
The available choices depend on the type of network modules that are configured in the Gateway
Configuration window.
Step 8
From the drop-down list boxes, choose the type of VICs that are installed in each subunit and click Save.
The window updates to add links for configuring endpoint information and ports for the chosen type of
VICs.
Step 9
Click an endpoint identifier (for example, 1/0/0) to configure device protocol information, add ports for
the installed types of VICs, and add FXS/BRI port to a SCCP gateway. See the Cisco Unified IP Phone
Configuration section on page 91-1 and the Configuring Speed-Dial Buttons or Abbreviated Dialing
section on page 91-34 for details of configuring the analog phones.
Step 10
Step 11
Procedure
Step 1
To display the Find and List Gateways window, choose Device > Gateway.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
From the Gateway Type drop-down list box, choose one of the following digital gateways and click Next:
From the drop-down list box, choose the appropriate device protocol for the type of interfaces that you
are configuring on the gateway. The available choices vary according to gateway model:
Cisco Catalyst 6000 T1 VoIP GatewayChoose either Digital Access PRI or Digital Access T1.
Cisco Catalyst 6000 E1 VoIP GatewayThe Digital Access PRI device protocol automatically gets
chosen, and the Gateway Configuration window displays. Skip to Step 6.
Click Next.
The Gateway Configuration window displays.
90-97
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Step 6
Enter the appropriate settings, depending on whether you are configuring a Digital Access PRI interface
or a Digital Access T1 interface as described in following sections:
Step 7
Click Save.
Step 8
If you are configuring a Digital Access T1 interface on a Catalyst 6000 T1 VoIP Gateway, in the Ports
pane that displays on the left side of the window, click Add a New Port link to configure ports.
See the Adding Digital Access T1 Ports to an MGCP Gateway section on page 90-94.
Step 9
Additional Information
Note
After a gateway is registered with Cisco Unified Communications Manager, gateway registration status
may display in Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration as unknown.
Before You Begin
Before configuring a Cisco IOS H.323 gateway for use with Cisco Unified Communications Manager,
you must configure the gateway by using the Cisco IOS command-line interface (CLI). Compared to
MGCP gateways, H.323 gateways require more configuration on the gateway because the gateway must
maintain the dial plan and route pattern. For procedures and commands that are required to perform this
configuration, refer to the configuration documentation that is supplied with the gateway.
Procedure
Step 1
To display the Find and List Gateways window, choose Device > Gateway.
Step 2
Step 3
From the Gateway Type drop-down list box, choose H.323 Gateway.
Step 4
Click Next.
Step 5
Enter the appropriate settings as described in H.323 Gateway Configuration Settings section on
page 90-4.
Step 6
Click Save.
Step 7
90-98
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Adding Gateways to Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Additional Information
To display the Find and List Gateways window, choose Device > Gateway.
Step 2
Step 3
From the Gateway type drop-down list box, choose Cisco Catalyst 6000 24 Port FXS Gateway.
Step 4
Click Next.
The Gateway Configuration window displays.
Step 5
Enter the appropriate settings, as described in the Analog Access Gateway Configuration Settings
section on page 90-22.
Step 6
Click Save.
Step 7
To add a port to this gateway, click the Add a New Port link in the Ports pane that displays on the left
side of the window.
The Port Configuration window displays.
Step 8
From the drop-down list box, choose POTS as the port type and click Next.
Step 9
Enter the appropriate port configuration settings as described in the POTS Port Configuration Settings
section on page 90-82.
Step 10
Click Save.
If you have inserted POTS ports, the window refreshes and displays the POTS port in the list on the left
side of the window. An Add DN link displays to the right of the new port.
Step 11
Step 12
After you finish adding POTS ports and configuring directory numbers for the POTS ports, you can
return to the Gateway Configuration window. In the Related Links drop-down list box, choose Configure
Device and click Go.
Step 13
Additional Information
90-99
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
To display the Find and List Gateways window, choose Device > Gateway.
Step 2
Step 3
From the Gateway type drop-down list box, choose Cisco VG248 Gateway.
Step 4
Click Next.
The Gateway Configuration window displays.
Step 5
Enter the appropriate settings, as described in the Cisco VG248 Gateway Configuration Settings
section on page 90-27.
Step 6
From the Configured Slots, VICs and Endpoints drop-down list box, choose 48_PORTS.
Step 7
Click Save.
The ports 0 through 48 display in the Configured Slots, VICs, and Endpoints area.
Step 8
Click a port.
The Phone Configuration window displays and lists the phone model as Cisco VGCPhone. From the
Gateway Configuration window, the MAC address automatically displays.
Step 9
Enter the appropriate settings, as described in the Configuring Speed-Dial Buttons or Abbreviated
Dialing section on page 91-34.
Step 10
Click Save.
Step 11
To configure a directory number for the port, click the Add a New DN link that displays in the
Association Information area on the left side of the window.
The Directory Number Configuration window displays. For information about adding and configuring
directory numbers, see the Configuring a Directory Number section on page 64-25.
Step 12
To configure more ports for the gateway, from the Related Link drop-down list box, choose the Back to
Gateway link and click Go.
The Gateway Configuration window displays. To configure the phone settings and directory numbers for
additional ports, repeat Step 8 through Step 11.
90-100
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Modifying Gateways and Ports
When you configure port 1, the Create all new ports like port 1 button displays at the top of the
Gateway Configuration window. This button allows you to configure ports 2 through 48 with the same
parameters and settings as port 1, but only if ports 2 through 48 are not configured.
Step 13
Additional Information
Deleting Gateways
Complete the following steps to delete a gateway from Cisco Unified Communications Manager.
Before You Begin
If you try to delete a gateway that a route group is using, Cisco Unified Communications Manager
displays a message. To find out which route groups are using the gateway, choose Dependency Records
from the Related Links drop-down list box in the Gateway Configuration window and click Go. If the
dependency records are not enabled for the system, the dependency records summary window displays
a message. For more information about dependency records, see the Accessing Dependency Records
section on page A-2. Before deleting a gateway that is currently in use, you must perform either or both
of the following tasks:
Assign a different gateway to any route groups that are using the gateway that you want to delete.
See the Adding Devices to a Route Group section on page 42-5.
Delete the route groups that are using the gateway that you want to delete. See the Deleting a Route
Group section on page 42-6.
90-101
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
A list of discovered gateways that matches your search criteria displays.
Step 4
Check the check box next to the gateway that you want to delete.
Step 5
Step 6
Tip
You can delete all the gateways in the window by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete
Selected.
Additional Information
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
A list of discovered gateways that matches your search criteria displays.
Step 4
Check the check box next to the gateway that you want to reset.
Step 5
Step 6
90-102
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Modifying Gateways and Ports
Note
Restarting or resetting an H.323 gateway does not physically restart/reset the gateway; it only
reinitializes the configuration that was loaded by Cisco Unified Communications Manager.
When you reset any other gateway type, Cisco Unified Communications Manager automatically
drops the calls that are using the gateway. When you restart any other gateway type, Cisco
Unified Communications Manager attempts to preserve the calls that are using the gateway.
Additional Information
Synchronizing a Gateway
To synchronize a gateway with the most recent configuration changes, perform the following procedure,
which will apply any outstanding configuration settings in the least-intrusive manner possible. (For
example, a reset/restart may not be required on some affected devices.)
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
The window displays a list of gateways that match the search criteria.
Step 4
Check the check boxes next to the gateways that you want to synchronize. To choose all gateways in the
window, check the check box in the matching records title bar.
Step 5
Step 6
Click OK.
Additional Information
90-103
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Related Topics
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
A list of discovered devices displays.
Step 4
Click the Device Name of the gateway that you want to update.
The Gateway Configuration window displays.
Step 5
Update the appropriate gateway or port settings as described in the following sections.
To access gateway ports, click the icon of the gateway port or the MGCP endpoint link on the left side
of the configuration window for the chosen gateway.
Step 6
Click Save.
Step 7
Additional Information
Related Topics
All Gateway Types
90-104
OL-18611-01
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Related Topics
Local Route Groups, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide
Where to Find More Information, Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide
SCCP Gateways
H.323 Gateways
BRI Gateways
MGCP BRI Call Connections, Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide
MGCP BRI Gateway Configuration Checklist, Cisco Unified Communications Manager System
Guide
Ports
90-105
Chapter 90
Gateway Configuration
Related Topics
90-106
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
91
Cisco Unified IP Phone 7900 family for both SCCP and SIP
H.323 clients
Cisco IP Communicator, Cisco Unified Personal Communicator, and Cisco Unified Mobile
Communicator
IP-STE
91-1
Chapter 91
The following topics provide information about working with and configuring Cisco Unified IP Phones
in Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration:
Configuration Settings
Procedures
Table 44-2 in the Cisco Unified IP Phones chapter of the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
System Guide lists the configuration steps for Cisco Unified IP Phones that support SIP.
For third-party phones that run SIP, see the Configuration Checklist for Third-Party Phones That Are
Running SIP section on page B-1 in the Configuring Non-Cisco Phones That Are Running SIP
appendix.
Additional Information
Note
The Product-Specific Configuration section contains model-specific fields that the phone manufacturer
defines. Cisco Unified Communications Manager dynamically populates the fields with default values.
To view field descriptions and help for product-specific configuration items, click the ? question icon
91-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 91
Field
Description
Device Information
MAC Address
Enter the Media Access Control (MAC) address that identifies Cisco Unified IP Phones
(hardware phones only). Make sure that the value comprises 12 hexadecimal characters.
For information on how to access the MAC address for your phone, refer to the Cisco Unified
IP Phone Administration Guide for Cisco Unified Communications Manager that supports
your phone model.
Cisco VG248 Analog Phone Gateway
The MAC address for the Cisco VG248 gateway specifies the endpoint from the Gateway
Configuration window of Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration. See the
Gateway Configuration section on page 90-1 for configuration information.
Only one MAC address exists for the Cisco VG248 Analog Phone Gateway. All 48 ports share
the same MAC address. Cisco Unified Communications Manager requires unique MAC
addresses for all devices.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager converts the MAC address for each device by
Adding the two-digit port number to the end of the MAC address (to the right of the
number)
EXAMPLE
MAC Address for the Cisco VG248 is
000039A44218
the MAC address for registered port 12 in the
Cisco Unified Communications Manager is
0039A4421812
You can configure a Cisco VG224 gateway as an MGCP gateway or an SCCP gateway. When
it is configured as an SCCP gateway, it can have 24 analog phone endpoints. When it is
configured this way, it functions similarly to an IOS SCCP gateway. The MAC address for
each individual phone gets calculated by using a formula that considers the slot position,
subunit, port, and the last 10 characters of the original MAC address.
Device Name
Enter a name to identify software-based telephones, H.323 clients, and CTI ports. The value
can include 1 to 15 characters, including alphanumeric characters, dot, dash, and underscores.
Description
Identify the purpose of the device. You can enter the user name (such as John Smith) or the
phone location (such as Lobby) in this field.
For Cisco VG248 gateways, begin the description with VGC<mac address>.
91-3
Chapter 91
Table 91-1
Field
Description
Device Pool
Choose the device pool to which you want this phone assigned. The device pool defines sets
of common characteristics for devices, such as region, date/time group, softkey template, and
MLPP information.
Common Device
Configuration
Choose the common device configuration to which you want this phone assigned. The
common device configuration includes the attributes (services or features) that are associated
with a particular user. Configure the common device in the Common Device Configuration
window. See Common Device Configuration for more information.
To see the common device configuration settings, click the View Details link.
Choose the appropriate phone button template. The phone button template determines the
configuration of buttons on a phone and identifies which feature (line, speed dial, and so on)
is used for each button.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager does not make this field available for H.323 clients
or CTI ports.
Softkey Template
Choose the appropriate softkey template. The softkey template determines the configuration
of the softkeys on Cisco Unified IP Phones. Leave this field blank if the common device
configuration contains the assigned softkey template.
From the drop-down list box, choose a common phone profile from the list of available
common phone profiles.
From the drop-down list box, choose the appropriate calling search space (CSS). A calling
search space comprises a collection of partitions that are searched to determine how a dialed
number should be routed. The calling search space for the device and the calling search space
for the directory number get used together. The directory number CSS takes precedence over
the device CSS. For more information, refer to Partitions and Calling Search Spaces in the
Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide.
For configuration information about calling search space for phones, see the Calling Search
Space section on page 64-23.
Choose the appropriate calling search space for the device to use when it performs automated
alternate routing (AAR). The AAR calling search space specifies the collection of route
partitions that are searched to determine how to route a collected (originating) number that is
otherwise blocked due to insufficient bandwidth.
For configuration information about calling search space for phones, see the Calling Search
Space section on page 64-23.
Choose the appropriate Media Resource Group List. A Media Resource Group List comprises
a prioritized grouping of media resource groups. An application chooses the required media
resource, such as a Music On Hold server, from the available media resources according to the
priority order that is defined in a Media Resource Group List.
If you choose <None>, Cisco Unified Communications Manager uses the Media Resource
Group List that is defined in the device pool.
For more information, see the Media Resource Management section in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager System Guide.
91-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 91
Table 91-1
Field
Description
To specify the audio source that plays when a user initiates a hold action, click the drop-down
arrow and choose an audio source from the list that displays.
If you do not choose an audio source, Cisco Unified Communications Manager uses the audio
source that is defined in the device pool or the system default if the device pool does not
specify an audio source ID.
Note
You define audio sources in the Music On Hold Audio Source Configuration window.
For access, choose Media Resources > Music On Hold Audio Source.
To specify the audio source that is played when the network initiates a hold action, click the
drop-down arrow and choose an audio source from the list that displays.
If you do not choose an audio source, Cisco Unified Communications Manager uses the audio
source that is defined in the device pool or the system default if the device pool does not
specify an audio source ID.
Note
Location
You define audio sources in the Music On Hold Audio Source Configuration window.
For access, choose Media Resources > Music On Hold Audio Source.
AAR Group
Choose the automated alternate routing (AAR) group for this device. The AAR group provides
the prefix digits that are used to route calls that are otherwise blocked due to insufficient
bandwidth. If no AAR group is specified, Cisco Unified Communications Manager uses the
AAR group that is associated with Device Pool or Line.
User Locale
From the drop-down list box, choose the locale that is associated with the phone user interface.
The user locale identifies a set of detailed information to support users, including language
and font.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager makes this field available only for phone models that
support localization.
Note
If no user locale is specified, Cisco Unified Communications Manager uses the user
locale that is associated with the device pool.
Note
If the users require that information be displayed (on the phone) in any language other
than English, verify that the locale installer is installed before configuring user locale.
Refer to the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Locale Installer documentation.
91-5
Chapter 91
Table 91-1
Field
Description
Network Locale
From the drop-down list box, choose the locale that is associated with the phone. The network
locale contains a definition of the tones and cadences that the phone in a specific geographic
area uses.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager makes this field available only for phone models that
support localization.
Built In Bridge
Note
Note
If users require that country-specific tones be played (on the phone), verify that the
locale is installed before configuring the network locale. Refer to the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Locale Installer documentation.
Enable or disable the built-in conference bridge for the barge feature by using the Built In
Bridge drop-down list box (choose On, Off, or Default).
Note
Cisco Unified IP Phones 7940 and 7960 cannot support two media stream encryptions
or SRTP streams simultaneously. To prevent instability due to this condition, the
system automatically disables the built-in bridge for 7940 and 7960 phones when the
device security mode is set to encrypted.
For more configuration information, refer to Barge and Privacy in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Features and Services Guide. You can also refer to the Cisco
Unified Communications Manager Security Guide for more information.
Privacy
For each phone that wants Privacy, choose On in the Privacy drop-down list box. For more
configuration information, refer to Barge and Privacy in the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager Features and Services Guide.
From the drop-down list box, turn the device mobility feature on or off for this device or
choose Default to use the default device mobility mode. Default setting uses the value for the
Device Mobility Mode service parameter for the device.
Click View Current Device Mobility Settings to display the current values of these device
mobility parameters:
Location
Region
Network Locale
AAR Group
SRST
For more configuration information, refer to Device Mobility in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Features and Services Guide.
91-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 91
Table 91-1
Field
Description
Signaling Port
This field applies only to H.323 devices. The value designates the H.225 signaling port that
this device uses.
Default value specifies 1720. Valid values range from 1 to 65535.
Video Capabilities
Enabled/disabled
Owner User ID
From the drop-down list box, choose the user ID of the assigned phone user. The user ID gets
recorded in the call detail record (CDR) for all calls made from this device.
Note
Mobility User ID
(Dual-mode phones only)
Phone Personalization
Do not configure this field if you are using extension mobility. Extension mobility
does not support device owners.
From the drop-down list box, choose the user ID of the person to whom this dual-mode phone
is assigned.
Note
The Mobility User ID configuration gets used for the Mobile Connect and Mobile
Voice Access features for dual-mode phones.
Note
The Phone Personalization setting allows you to enable a Cisco Unified IP Phone, so it works
with Phone Designer, a Cisco Unified Communications widget that allows a phone user to
customize the wallpaper and ring tones on the phone. From the Phone Personalization
drop-down list box, choose one of the following options:
Disabled-The user cannot customize the Cisco Unified IP Phone by using Phone
Designer.
Default-The phone uses the configuration from the Phone Personalization enterprise
parameter if you choose Default in both the Phone Configuration and Common Phone
Profile Configuration windows. If you choose Default in the Common Phone Profile
Configuration window but not in the Phone Configuration window, the phone uses the
configuration that you specify in the Phone Configuration window.
You must install and configure Phone Designer, so the phone user can customize the phone.
Before you install and configure Phone Designer, identify which Cisco Unified IP Phone
models work with Phone Designer, as described in the Phone Designer documentation. For
more information on Phone Designer, refer to the Phone Designer documentation.
Services Provisioning
From the drop-down list box, choose whether the phone will use the services that are
provisioned in the phone configuration file (Internal), services received from an external URL
(External URL), or both.
The default specifies Internal. Select External URL if you are using an external provisioning
server or Both if are using an external server but also want to allow users to subscribe to
services in Cisco Unified Communications Manager.
Primary Phone
Choose the physical phone that will be associated with the application, such as IP
communicator or Cisco Unified Personal Communicator. When you choose a primary phone,
the application consumes fewer device license units and is considered an adjunct license (to
the primary phone). See Licensing in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager System
Guide.
91-7
Chapter 91
Table 91-1
Field
Description
This check box specifies that Cisco Unified Communications Manager waits to receive the
far-end H.245 Terminal Capability Set before it sends its H.245 Terminal Capability Set. By
default, the system checks this check box. To specify that Cisco Unified Communications
Manager should initiate capabilities exchange, uncheck this check box.
The value that you enter overrides the default value for the current model. For more
information, see the Device Defaults Configuration section on page 94-1.
For more information about Cisco Unified IP Phone software and configuration, refer to the
Cisco Unified IP Phone Administration Guide for Cisco Unified Communications Manager
6.1, which is specific to the phone model.
From the drop-down list box, enable or disable the Single Button Barge/cBarge feature for this
device or choose Default to use the service parameter setting.
OffThis setting disables the Single Button Barge/cBarge feature; however, the regular
Barge or cBarge features will still work.
DefaultUses the Single Button Barge/cBarge setting that is in the service parameter.
For more configuration information, refer to Barge and Privacy in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Features and Services Guide.
Join Across Lines
From the drop-down list box, enable or disable the Join Across Lines feature for this device
or choose Default to use the service parameter setting.
DefaultThis setting uses the Join Across Lines setting that is in the service parameter.
91-8
OL-18611-01
Chapter 91
Table 91-1
Field
Description
From the drop-down list box, enable or disable whether Cisco Unified Communications
Manager inserts a trusted relay point (TRP) device with this media endpoint. Choose one of
the following values:
DefaultIf you choose this value, the device uses the Use Trusted Relay Point setting
from the common device configuration with which this device associates.
OffChoose this value to disable the use of a TRP with this device. This setting overrides
the Use Trusted Relay Point setting in the common device configuration with which this
device associates.
OnChoose this value to enable the use of a TRP with this device. This setting overrides
the Use Trusted Relay Point setting in the common device configuration with which this
device associates.
A Trusted Relay Point (TRP) device designates an MTP or transcoder device that is labeled
as Trusted Relay Point.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager places the TRP closest to the associated endpoint
device if more than one resource is needed for the endpoint (for example, a transcoder or
RSVPAgent).
If both TRP and MTP are required for the endpoint, TRP gets used as the required MTP. See
the TRP Insertion in Cisco Unified Communications Manager in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager System Guide for details of call behavior.
If both TRP and RSVPAgent are needed for the endpoint, Cisco Unified Communications
Manager first tries to find an RSVPAgent that can also be used as a TRP.
If both TRP and transcoder are needed for the endpoint, Cisco Unified Communications
Manager first tries to find a transcoder that is also designated as a TRP.
Refer to the Trusted Relay Point section and its subtopics in the Media Resource
Management chapter of the Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide for a
complete discussion of network virtualization and trusted relay points.
BLF Audible Alert Setting
(Phone Idle)
This setting determines the busy lamp field (BLF) audible alert setting when no current call
exists on the BLF DN:
This setting determines the BLF audible alert setting when at least one active call exists on the
BLF DN, but no call pickup alerts exist:
91-9
Chapter 91
Table 91-1
Field
Description
From the drop-down list box, choose one of the following options:
OffWhen the phone is idle and receives a call on any line, the phone user answers the
call from the line on which the call is received.
OnWhen the phone is idle (off hook) and receives a call on any line, the primary line
gets chosen for the call. Calls on other lines continue to ring, and the phone user must
select those other lines to answer these calls.
From the drop-down list box, choose one of the following options:
OnIf the phone is idle, the primary line on the phone becomes the active line for
retrieving voice messages when the phone user presses the Messages button on the phone.
OffIf the phone is idle, pressing the Messages button on the phone automatically dials
the voice-messaging system from the line that has a voice message. Cisco Unified
Communications Manager always selects the first line that has a voice message. If no line
has a voice message, the primary line gets used when the phone user presses the Messages
button.
Calling Party Transformation This setting allows you to localize the calling party number on the device. Make sure that the
CSS
Calling Party Transformation CSS that you choose contains the calling party transformation
pattern that you want to assign to this device.
Tip
Geolocation
Before the call occurs, the device must apply the transformation by using digit
analysis. If you configure the Calling Party Transformation CSS as None, the
transformation does not match and does not get applied. Ensure that you configure the
Calling Party Transformation Pattern in a non-null partition that is not used for
routing.
To use the Calling Party Transformation CSS that is configured in the device pool that is
assigned to this device, check this check box. If you do not check this check box, the device
uses the Calling Party Transformation CSS that you chose in the Phone Configuration window.
91-10
OL-18611-01
Chapter 91
Table 91-1
Field
Description
Is Active
Cisco Unified Communications Manager uses the Is Active check box for licensing and
registration of phones.
For a phone that uses a real MAC address, not for a phone that uses a dummy MAC address
that was created via BAT, the check box displays as checked and disabled.
For a dummy phone that uses a dummy MAC address that was created via BAT, the Is Active
check box displays as unchecked and enabled. If you manually convert the dummy MAC
address to a real MAC address in the Phone Configuration window, check this check box,
which ensures that the phone can register with Cisco Unified Communications Manager and
that licensing consumes device license units for the phone.
If you use the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Auto-Register Phone Tool (TAPS), the
tool updates the Is Active check box in the Phone Configuration window to display as checked
and disabled after the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Auto-Register Phone Tool
applies the device name to the phone that uses the dummy MAC address.
If the Is Active check box displays as checked and disabled, licensing consumes device license
units for the phone, and the phone can register with Cisco Unified Communications Manager.
This check box applies only to video endpoints that receive a call. If this phone receives a call
that does not connect as video, the call tries to connect as an audio call.
By default, the system checks this check box to specify that this device should immediately
retry a video call as an audio call (if it cannot connect as a video call) prior to sending the call
to call control for rerouting.
If you uncheck this check box, a video call that fails to connect as video does not try to
establish as an audio call. The call then fails to call control, and call control routes the call via
automatic alternate routing (AAR) and/or route/hunt list.
Ignore Presentation
Indicators (internal calls
only)
Check this check box to configure call display restrictions on a call-by-call basis. When this
check box is checked, Cisco Unified Communications Manager ignores any presentation
restriction that is received for internal calls.
Use this configuration in combination with the calling line ID presentation and connected line
ID presentation configuration at the translation pattern level. Together, these settings allow
you to configure call display restrictions to selectively present or block calling and/or
connected line display information for each call.
See Table 60-1 in the Translation Pattern Configuration Settings section on page 60-1 for
more information about the calling line ID presentation and the connected line ID presentation
parameters.
For more information about call display restrictions, refer to the Call Display Restrictions
chapter in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide.
Check this check box to allow CTI to control and monitor this device.
This check box, which gets checked by default for all phones, indicates that the phone is
currently logged in to a hunt list (group). When the phone gets added to a hunt list, the
administrator can log the user in or out by checking (and unchecking) this check box.
If the associated directory number specifies a shared line, the check box should be enabled as
long as at least one associated device specifies a combination of device type and protocol that
CTI supports.
Users use the softkey on the phone to log their phone in or out of the hunt list.
91-11
Chapter 91
Table 91-1
Field
Description
Remote Device
If you are experiencing delayed connect times over SCCP pipes to remote sites, check the
Remote Device check box in the Phone Configuration window. Checking this check box tells
Cisco Unified Communications Manager to allocate a buffer for the phone device when it
registers and to bundle SCCP messages to the phone.
Tip
Because this feature consumes resources, be sure to check this check box only when
you are experiencing signaling delays for phones that are running SCCP. Most users
do not require this option.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sends the bundled messages to the phone when the
station buffer is full, as soon as it receives a media-related message, or when the Bundle
Outbound SCCP Messages timer expires.
To specify a setting other than the default setting (100 msec) for the Bundle Outbound SCCP
Messages timer, configure a new value in the Service Parameters Configuration window for
the Cisco CallManager service. Although 100 msec specifies the recommended setting, you
may enter 15 msec to 500 msec.
The phone must support SCCP version 9 to use this option. The following phones do not
support SCCP message optimization: Cisco Unified IP Phone 7935/7936. This feature may
require a phone reset after update. Refer to the Synchronizing a Phone section on
page 91-32.
Protected Device
Check this check box to designate a phone as protected, which enables the phone to play a
2-second tone to notify the user when a call is encrypted and both phones are configured as
protected devices. The tone plays for both parties when the call is answered. The tone does
not play unless both phones are protected and the call occurs over encrypted media.
Checking this check box represents only one of several configuration requirements for the
secure tone to play. For a detailed description of the secure-tone feature and the configuration
requirements, see the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Security Guide.
This setting exists for troubleshooting encryption only; packet capturing may cause high CPU
usage or call-processing interruptions. Choose one of the following options from the
drop-down list box:
NoneThis option, which serves as the default setting, indicates that no packet capturing
is occurring. After you complete packet capturing, configure this setting.
For more information on packet capturing, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide for Cisco
Unified Communications Manager.
91-12
OL-18611-01
Chapter 91
Table 91-1
Field
Description
This setting exists for troubleshooting encryption only; packet capturing may cause high CPU
usage or call-processing interruptions.
This field specifies the maximum number of minutes that is allotted for one session of packet
capturing. The default setting equals 0, although the range exists from 0 to 300 minutes.
To initiate packet capturing, enter a value other than 0 in the field. After packet capturing
completes, the value, 0, displays.
For more information on packet capturing, refer to the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager Troubleshooting Guide.
SRTP Allowed
As this check box explains, if this flag is checked, IPSec needs to be configured in the network
to provide end-to-end security. Failure to do so will expose keys and other information.
For more information on SRTP encryption, refer to the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager Security Guide.
Presence Group
The CAPF settings that are configured in the profile relate to the Certificate Authority
Proxy Function settings that display in the Phone Configuration window. You must
configure CAPF settings for certificate operations that involve manufacturer-installed
certificates (MICs) or locally significant certificates (LSC). Refer to the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Security Guide for more information about how CAPF
settings that you update in the phone configuration window affect security profile
CAPF settings.
91-13
Chapter 91
Table 91-1
Field
Description
If required, choose the appropriate SIP dial rule. SIP dial rules provide local dial plans for
Cisco Unified IP Phones 7905, 7912, 7940, and 7960, so users do not have to press a key or
wait for a timer before the call gets processed.
Leave the SIP Dial Rules field set to <None> if you do not want dial rules to apply to the IP
phone that is running SIP. This means that the user must use the Dial softkey or wait for the
timer to expire before the call gets processed.
From the drop-down list box, choose the codec to use if a media termination point is required
for SIP calls.
From the drop-down list box, choose a calling search space to use for rerouting.
The rerouting calling search space of the referrer gets used to find the route to the refer-to
target. When the Refer fails due to the rerouting calling search space, the Refer Primitive
rejects the request with the 405 Method Not Allowed message.
The redirection (3xx) primitive and transfer feature also uses the rerouting calling search
space to find the redirect-to or transfer-to target.
From the drop-down list box, choose an out-of-dialog refer calling search space.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager uses the out-of-dialog (OOD) Refer Authorization
calling search space (CSS) to authorize the SIP out-of-dialog Refer. The administrator can
restrict the use of out-of-dialog Refer by configuring the OOD CSS of the Referrer. Refer
Primitive rejects the OOD Refer request with a 403 Forbidden message.
SUBSCRIBE Calling Search Supported with the Presence feature, the SUBSCRIBE calling search space determines how
Space
Cisco Unified Communications Manager routes presence requests that come from the phone.
This setting allows you to apply a calling search space separate from the call-processing
search space for presence (SUBSCRIBE) requests for the phone.
From the drop-down list box, choose the SUBSCRIBE calling search space to use for presence
requests for the phone. All calling search spaces that you configure in Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration display in the SUBSCRIBE Calling Search Space
drop-down list box.
If you do not select a different calling search space for the end user from the drop-down list,
the SUBSCRIBE calling search space defaults to None.
To configure a SUBSCRIBE calling search space specifically for this purpose, you configure
a calling search space as you do all calling search spaces. For information on how to configure
a calling search space, see the Calling Search Space Configuration section on page 53-1
91-14
OL-18611-01
Chapter 91
Table 91-1
Field
Description
No RolloverConference and transfer will not work in this mode. If a user attempts to
use either of these features, the phone status displays as Error Pass Limit. Choose this
setting only if you need to support CTI applications.
Rollover Within Same DNConferences and call transfers complete by using the same
directory number (on different lines). For example, consider a phone that has directory
number 1506 that is assigned to both Line 6 and 7. The user has an active call on Line 6
and decides to transfer the call. When the user presses the Transfer button, the call on Line
6 gets placed on hold, and a new call initiates on Line 7 to complete the transfer.
SIP Profile
Choose the default SIP profile or a specific profile that was previously created. SIP profiles
provide specific SIP information for the phone such as registration and keepalive timers,
media ports, and do not disturb control.
Digest User
Choose an end user that you want to associate with the phone for this setting that is used with
digest authentication (SIP security).
Ensure that you configured digest credentials for the user that you choose, as specified in the
End User Configuration window.
After you save the phone configuration and apply the configuration update to the phone (refer
to the Synchronizing a Phone section on page 91-32), the digest credentials for the user get
added to the phone configuration file.
For more information on digest authentication, refer to the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager Security Guide.
Use this field to indicate whether a media termination point is used to implement features that
H.323 does not support (such as hold and transfer).
Check the Media Termination Point Required check box if you want to use an MTP to
implement features. Uncheck the Media Termination Point Required check box if you do not
want to use an MTP to implement features.
Use this check box only for H.323 clients and those H.323 devices that do not support the
H.245 empty capabilities set or if you want media streaming to terminate through a single
source.
If you check this check box to require an MTP and this device becomes the endpoint of a video
call, the call will be audio only.
Unattended Port
91-15
Chapter 91
Table 91-1
Field
Description
For phones that are running SIP and SCCP, check this check box to require DTMF reception
for this phone.
Note
RFC2833 Disabled
For phones that are running SCCP, check this check box to disable RFC2833 support.
Certificate Operation
From the drop-down list box, choose one of the following options:
For more information on CAPF operations, refer to the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager Security Guide.
91-16
OL-18611-01
Chapter 91
Table 91-1
Field
Description
Authentication Mode
This field allows you to choose the authentication method that the phone uses during the
CAPF certificate operation.
From the drop-down list box, choose one of the following options:
Note
Authentication String
The CAPF settings that are configured in the Phone Security Profile window interact
with the CAPF parameters that are configured in the Phone Configuration window.
If you chose the By Authentication String option in the Authentication Mode drop-down list
box, this field applies. Manually enter a string or generate a string by clicking the Generate
String button. Ensure that the string contains 4 to 10 digits.
To install, upgrade, delete, or troubleshoot a locally significant certificate, the phone user or
administrator must enter the authentication string on the phone.
91-17
Chapter 91
Table 91-1
Field
Description
For this setting that is used for CAPF, choose the key size for the certificate from the
drop-down list box. The default setting equals 1024. Other options include 512 and 2048.
If you choose a higher key size than the default setting, the phones take longer to generate the
entropy that is required to generate the keys. Key generation, which is set at low priority,
allows the phone to function while the action occurs. Depending on the phone model, you may
notice that key generation takes up to 30 or more minutes to complete.
Note
Operation Completes by
The CAPF settings that are configured in the Phone Security Profile window interact
with the CAPF parameters that are configured in the Phone Configuration window.
This field, which supports the Install/Upgrade, Delete, and Troubleshoot Certificate Operation
options, specifies the date and time in which you must complete the operation.
The values that display apply for the publisher database server.
This field displays the progress of the certificate operation; for example, <operation type>
pending, failed, or successful, where operating type equals the Install/Upgrade, Delete, or
Troubleshoot Certificate Operation options. You cannot change the information that displays
in this field.
Module 1
Enter the custom software for the appropriate expansion module, if applicable.
The value that you enter overrides the default value for the current model. Ensure the firmware
load matches the module load.
Module 2
Enter the custom software for the second expansion module, if applicable.
The value that you enter overrides the default value for the current model. Ensure the firmware
load matches the module load.
Information
Enter the location (URL) of the help text for the information (i) button. Leave this field blank
to accept the default setting.
Directory
Enter the server from which the phone obtains directory information. Leave this field blank to
accept the default setting.
Messages
Leave this field blank (not used by Cisco Unified Communications Manager).
Services
Authentication Server
Enter the URL that the phone uses to validate requests that are made to the phone web server.
If you do not provide an authentication URL, the advanced features on the Cisco Unified IP
Phone that require authentication will not function.
By default, this URL accesses a Cisco Unified CM User Options window that was configured
during installation.
Leave this field blank to accept the default setting.
91-18
OL-18611-01
Chapter 91
Table 91-1
Field
Description
Proxy Server
Enter the host and port (for example, proxy.cisco.com:80) that are used to proxy HTTP
requests for access to non-local host addresses from the phone HTTP client.
The rule contains two parts for when to use the proxy server parameter:
1.
2.
If you do not configure this URL, the phone attempts to connect directly to the URL.
To accept the default setting, leave this field blank.
Idle
Enter the URL that displays on the Cisco Unified IP Phone display when the phone has not
been used for the time that is specified in Idle Timer field. For example, you can display a logo
on the LCD when the phone has not been used for 5 minutes.
To accept the default setting, leave this field blank.
Enter the time (in seconds) that you want to elapse before the URL that is specified in the Idle
field displays.
To accept the value of the Idle URL Timer enterprise parameter, leave this field blank.
Extension Information
This drop-down list box specifies the device profile that the device uses when no one is logged
in to the device by using Cisco Extension Mobility. You can choose either Use Current Device
Settings or one of the specific configured profiles that are listed.
If you select a specific configured profile, the system retains a mapping between the device
and the login profile after the user logs out. If you select Use Current Device Settings, no
mapping gets retained.
Log In Time
This field remains blank until a user logs in. When a user logs in to the device by using Cisco
Extension Mobility, the time at which the user logged in displays in this field.
This field remains blank until a user logs in. When a user logs in to the device by using Cisco
Extension Mobility, the time at which the system will log out the user displays in this field.
Symmetric Key
Enter a string of hexadecimal characters that you want to use for the symmetric key. Valid
characters include numerals, 0-9, and upper/lower case characters, A-F (or a-f).
Make sure that you enter the correct bits for the key size; otherwise, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager rejects the value. Cisco Unified Communications Manager
supports the following key sizes:
Use this string for one-time use only. Every time that you update the configuration settings,
you must generate a new key before you apply the configuration changes to the phone (refer
to the Synchronizing a Phone section on page 91-32).
For more information on symmetric key operations for encrypted configuration file
downloads, refer to the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Security Guide.
91-19
Chapter 91
Table 91-1
Field
Description
Generate String
If you want to restore the value that exists in the database, click this button. This button proves
useful if you enter an error in the Symmetric Key field before you save the configuration.
H.323 Information
For outgoing calls to the H.323 Client, enter the pattern, from 0 to 24 digits, that you want to
use for caller ID.
Choose the directory number that is sent on an outbound call to the H.323 Client.
The following options specify which directory number is sent:
Last Redirect NumberSend the directory number of the last device to redirect the call.
First Redirect Number (External)Send the external directory number of the redirecting
device.
Last Redirect Number (External)Send the external directory number of the last device
to redirect the call.
Choose whether the Cisco Unified Communications Manager transmits or blocks caller ID.
If you want the Cisco Unified Communications Manager to send caller ID, choose Allowed.
If you do not want the Cisco Unified Communications Manager to send caller ID, choose
Restricted.
Default specifies that caller ID does not get sent.
Display IE Delivery
This check box enables delivery of the display information element (IE) in SETUP and
CONNECT messages for the calling and called party name delivery service.
The default setting checks this check box.
Redirecting Number IE
Delivery Outbound
Check this check box to indicate the first redirecting number and the redirecting reason of the
call when the call is forwarded. (The UUIE part of the outgoing SETUP message from the
Cisco Unified Communications Manager includes the Redirecting Number IE.)
Uncheck the check box to exclude the first redirecting number and the redirecting reason from
the outgoing SETUP message.
You use Redirecting Number IE for voice-messaging integration only. If your configured
voice-messaging system supports Redirecting Number IE, you should check the check box.
Note
Redirecting Number IE
Delivery Inbound
Check this check box to accept the Redirecting Number IE in the incoming SETUP message
to the Cisco Unified Communications Manager. (The UUIE part of the SETUP message
includes the Redirecting Number IE.)
Uncheck the check box to exclude the Redirecting Number IE in the incoming SETUP
message to the Cisco Unified Communications Manager.
You use Redirecting Number IE for voice-messaging integration only. If your configured
voice-messaging system supports Redirecting Number IE, you should check the check box.
Note
91-20
OL-18611-01
Chapter 91
Table 91-1
Field
Description
Gatekeeper Information
Gatekeeper Name
This field specifies the name of the gatekeeper that controls the H.323 client. Ensure the
gatekeeper is configured in Cisco Unified Communications Manager before an H.323 client
is allowed to specify the gatekeeper in its configuration. Default specifies empty.
E.164
Technology Prefix
This field specifies a number ending with the # sign that describes the capability of an
endpoint in a zone. This field has no impact if via Zone configuration can be used. Default
specifies 1#*. Do not use null value.
Zone
This field specifies the zone name of the zone that the gatekeeper manages. Do not use the
following values: same zone name for the H.323 client and trunk; null.
Gatekeeper Controlled H.323 This check box enables the gatekeeper control of the H.323 client.
Client
Associated Mobility Identity
(mobility identity)
If a mobility identity has already been configured for this device, this area displays the Name
and Destination Number of the mobility identity. You can click either value to display the
Mobility Identity Information in the Remote Destination Configuration window.
Note
This field displays only after a Cisco Unified Mobile Communicator device has been
added.
If no mobility identity has been defined for this device, click this link to add a mobility
identity. The Remote Destination Configuration window displays, which allows you to add a
new mobility identity to associate with this device.
Note
This field displays only after a Cisco Unified Mobile Communicator device has been
added.
(remote destination)
If a remote destination has already been configured for this device, this area displays the Name
and Destination Number of the remote destination(s). You can click the values to display the
Remote Destination Information in the Remote Destination Configuration window.
Note
This field displays only after a Cisco Unified Mobile Communicator device has been
added.
Click this link to add a remote destination to associate with this device. The Remote
Destination Configuration window displays, which allows you to add a new remote
destination to associate with this device.
Note
This field displays only after a Cisco Unified Mobile Communicator device has been
added.
MLPP Information
MLPP Domain
Choose an MLPP domain from the drop-down list box for the MLPP domain that is associated
with this device. If you leave the None value, this device inherits its MLPP domain from the
value that was set for the device pool of the device. If the device pool does not have an MLPP
domain setting, this device inherits its MLPP domain from the value that was set for the MLPP
Domain Identifier enterprise parameter.
91-21
Chapter 91
Table 91-1
Field
Description
MLPP Indication
If available, this setting specifies whether a device that can play precedence tones will use the
capability when it places an MLPP precedence call.
From the drop-down list box, choose a setting to assign to this device from the following
options:
MLPP Preemption
DefaultThis device inherits its MLPP indication setting from its device pool.
OffThis device does not handle nor process indication of an MLPP precedence call.
OnThis device does handle and process indication of an MLPP precedence call.
Note
Note
Turning on MLPP Indication (at the enterprise parameter, device pool, or device level)
disables normal Ring Setting behavior for the lines on a device, unless MLPP
Indication is turned off (overridden) for the device.
Be aware that this setting is not available on all devices. If available, this setting specifies
whether a device that can preempt calls in progress will use the capability when it places an
MLPP precedence call.
From the drop-down list box, choose a setting to assign to this device from the following
options:
DefaultThis device inherits its MLPP preemption setting from its device pool.
DisabledThis device does not allow preemption of lower precedence calls to take place
when necessary for completion of higher precedence calls.
ForcefulThis device allows preemption of lower precedence calls to take place when
necessary for completion of higher precedence calls.
Note
Do Not Disturb
DND Option
When you enable DND on the phone, this parameter allows you to specify how the DND
features handle incoming calls:
Call RejectThis option specifies that no incoming call information gets presented to
the user. Depending on how you configure the DND Incoming Call Alert parameter, the
phone may play a beep or display a flash notification of the call.
Ringer OffThis option turns off the ringer, but incoming call information gets
presented to the device, so the user can accept the call.
Use Common Phone Profile SettingThis option specifies that the DND Option setting
from the Common Phone Profile window will get used for this device.
Note
For 7940/7960 phones that are running SCCP, you can only choose the Ringer Off
option. For mobile devices and dual-mode phones, you can only choose the Call Reject
option. When you activate DND Call Reject on a mobile device or dual-mode phone,
no call information gets presented to the device.
91-22
OL-18611-01
Chapter 91
Table 91-1
Field
Description
When you enable the DND Ringer Off or Call Reject option, this parameter specifies how a
call displays on a phone.
From the drop-down list, choose one of the following options:
NoneThis option specifies that the DND Incoming Call Alert setting from the Common
Phone Profile window gets used for this device.
DisableThis option disables both beep and flash notification of a call, but, for the DND
Ringer Off option, incoming call information still gets displayed. For the DND Call
Reject option, no call alerts display, and no information gets sent to the device.
Beep OnlyFor an incoming call, this option causes the phone to play a beep tone only.
Flash OnlyFor an incoming call, this option causes the phone to display a flash alert.
Enter a user ID for the secure shell user. This field displays when the phone device that you
are configuring supports SSH access.
Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC) uses secure shell for troubleshooting and
debugging. Contact TAC for further assistance.
Refer to the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Security Guide for this release for
information about how to configure encrypted phone configuration files to ensure that Cisco
Unified Communications Manager does not send SSH credentials to the phone in the clear.
Enter the password for a secure shell user. Contact TAC for further assistance.
Refer to the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Security Guide for this release for
information about how to configure encrypted phone configuration files to ensure that Cisco
Unified Communications Manager does not send SSH passwords to the phone in the clear.
Association Information
After you add a phone, the Association Information area displays on the left side of the Phone
Configuration window.
Click this button to manage button associations for this phone. A dialog box warns that any
unsaved changes to the phone may be lost. If you have saved any changes that you made to the
phone, click OK to continue. The Reorder Phone Button Configuration window displays for
this phone.
See the Modifying Phone Button Template Button Items section on page 91-39 for a
detailed procedure.
After you add a phone, the Association Information area displays on the left side of the Phone
Configuration window.
Click these links to add a directory number(s) that associates with this phone. When you click
one of the links, the Directory Number Configuration window displays.
See the Configuring a Directory Number section on page 64-25 for a detailed procedure.
91-23
Chapter 91
Table 91-1
Field
Description
Add a new SD
After you add a phone, the Association Information area displays on the left side of the Phone
Configuration window.
Click this link to add speed-dial settings for this phone. When you click the link, the Speed
Dial and Abbreviated Dial Configuration window displays for this phone.
See the Configuring Speed-Dial Buttons or Abbreviated Dialing section on page 91-34 for
a detailed procedure.
After you add a phone, the Association Information area displays on the left side of the Phone
Configuration window.
Click this link to configure service URL buttons for this phone. When you click the link, the
Configure Service URL Buttons window displays for this phone.
See the Configuring Service URL Buttons section on page 91-37 for a detailed procedure.
After you add a phone, the Association Information area displays on the left side of the Phone
Configuration window.
Click this link to configure busy lamp field/speed dial settings for this phone. When you click
the link, the Busy Lamp Field Configuration window displays for this phone.
See the BLF/Speed Dial Configuration Settings section on page 91-26 for more
information.
Add a new BLF Directed Call After you add a phone, the Association Information area displays on the left side of the Phone
Park
Configuration window.
Click this link to configure busy lamp field/directed call park settings for this phone. When
you click the link, the Busy Lamp Field Configuration window displays for this phone.
For more information on configuring BLF/Directed Call Park buttons, refer to the Call Park
and Directed Call Park chapter in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and
Services Guide.
Product-Specific Configuration Layout
Model-specific configuration To view field descriptions and help for product-specific configuration items, click the ?
fields that the device
information icon in the Product Specific Configuration area to display help in a popup dialog
manufacturer defines
box.
If you need more information, refer to the documentation for the specific device that you are
configuring or contact the manufacturer.
91-24
OL-18611-01
Chapter 91
Configure these settings for the speed-dial numbers that you access with abbreviated dialing. When the
user configures up to 99 speed-dial entries, part of the speed-dial entries can get assigned to the
speed-dial buttons on the IP phone; the remaining speed-dial entries get used for abbreviated dialing.
When a user starts dialing digits, the AbbrDial softkey displays on the phone, and the user can access
any speed-dial entry by entering the appropriate index (code) for abbreviated dialing.
Note
Not all Cisco Unified IP Phones support abbreviated dialing. Refer to the phone user guide for
information.
Table 91-2
Field
Description
(number from 1 to 99 in
the left column)
This column identifies the speed-dial button on the phone or on the Cisco
Unified IP Phone Expansion Module (for example, 1, 2, 3, or 4) or the
abbreviated-dial index for abbreviated dial.
Number
Enter the number that you want the system to dial when the user presses
the speed-dial button. You can enter digits 0 through 9, *, #, and +, which
is the international escape character.
Label
Enter the text that you want to display for the speed-dial button or
abbreviated-dial number.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager does not make this field
available for the Cisco Unified IP Phone 7910.
ASCII Label
This field provides the same information as the Label field, but you must
limit input to ASCII characters. Devices that do not support unicode
(internationalized) characters display the content of the ASCII Label field.
Additional Information
91-25
Chapter 91
Finding a Phone
Because you might have thousands of Cisco Unified IP Phones in your network, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager lets you search for phones on the basis of specified criteria. Follow these steps
to search for a specific Cisco Unified IP Phone in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager database.
Note
The Cisco VG248 and VG224 Analog Phone Gateways will not display when you search for phones.
You can search for the Cisco VG248 and VG224 Analog Phone ports from the Find and List Phones
window of Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration. See the Gateway Configuration
section on page 90-1 for configuration information on the Cisco VG248 and VG224 Gateways.
Tip
For methods to limit your search, refer to the Phone Search section in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager System Guide. To search for devices to which users are actively logged in,
see the Finding an Actively Logged-In Device section on page 91-40.
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your phone search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item, Cisco
Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your phone search preferences until you
modify your search or close the browser.
91-26
OL-18611-01
Chapter 91
Tip
For phones that have an IPv4 address only or both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, the IPv4 address displays
in the Find and List Phones window; for phones that have an IPv6 address only, the IPv6 address displays
in the Find and List Phones window.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
91-27
Chapter 91
By enabling auto-registration, you can automatically add a Cisco Unified IP Phone to the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager database when you connect the phone to your IP telephony network. During
auto-registration, Cisco Unified Communications Manager assigns the next available sequential
directory number to the phone. In many cases, you might not want to use auto-registration; for example,
if you want to assign a specific directory number to a phone.
Note
Note
Add the Cisco VG248 and VG224 Phone Ports from the Gateway Configuration window of Cisco
Unified Communications Manager Administration. See the Gateway Configuration section on
page 90-1 for configuration information.
Tip
In the Phone Configuration window for a specific phone, you can view the IPv4 address and the IPv6
address, if applicable, that the phone uses. For phones in dual-stack mode that have both an IPv4 and
IPv6 address, you can click the IPv4 or IPv6 address in the Phone Configuration window, which points
to an IPv4 URL for the web server on the phone. For phones that use an IPv6 address only, you cannot
click the IPv6 address because the web server on the phone only supports IPv4.
Timesaver
If you plan on using nonstandard phone button and softkey templates, configure the templates before you
add the phones. See the Configuring Phone Button Templates section on page 98-3 and the Creating
Nonstandard Softkey Templates section on page 99-2 for configuration information.
Procedure
Step 1
91-28
OL-18611-01
Chapter 91
Step 2
Note
For information on obtaining the MAC address, see the Displaying the MAC Address of a
Phone section on page 91-41.
To copy an existing phone, locate the appropriate phone as described in Finding a Phone section
on page 91-26, click the Copy button next to the phone that you want to copy, and continue with
Step 5.
To copy an existing phone and copy the directory numbers, speed dials, busy lamp field/speed dials,
and service URLs that are associated with the phone, locate the appropriate phone as described in
Finding a Phone section on page 91-26, click the Super Copy button next to the phone that you
want to copy, and continue with Step 5.
Note
The lines that get copied become shared lines between the original phone and the new phone.
To add a new phone, click the Add New button and continue with Step 3.
To update an existing phone, locate the appropriate phone as described in Finding a Phone section
on page 91-26 and continue with Step 5.
Step 3
From the Phone Type drop-down list box, select the appropriate phone type or device and click Next.
After you choose a phone type, you cannot modify it.
Step 4
If the Select the device protocol drop-down list box displays, choose the appropriate protocol of the
device and click Next. Otherwise, continue with Step 5.
The Phone Configuration window displays.
Step 5
Step 6
Click Save.
If you are adding a phone, a message displays that states that the phone has been added to the database.
To add a directory number to this phone, click one of the line links, such as Line [1] - Add a new DN, in
the Association Information pane that displays on the left side of the window. Continue with the
Directory Number Configuration Settings section on page 64-1.
If you are updating a phone, a message displays that states that you must click the Apply Config button
for your changes to take effect. For more information about the Apply Config button, see the
Synchronizing a Phone section on page 91-32.
Next Steps
To configure speed-dial buttons on this phone, see the Configuring Speed-Dial Buttons or Abbreviated
Dialing section on page 91-34. To configure services for this phone, see the Configuring IP Phone
Services section on page 91-35. To configure service URL buttons for this phone, see the Adding an
IP Phone Service to a Phone Button section on page 100-9. To configure busy lamp field/speed-dial
settings for this phone, see the BLF/Speed Dial Configuration Settings section on page 91-26.
91-29
Chapter 91
Additional Information
For more information on phone configuration, as well as H.323 clients, CTI ports, and other devices from
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration, see the Related Topics section on
page 91-42.
Tip
Phone migration allows you to port existing phone configuration to a new phone without the need to add
a phone, lines, speed dials, and so on.
Before you migrate existing phone configuration to a different phone, see the following topics:
Before You Begin, page 91-30information to review before you migrate the settings.
Table 91-3configuration settings that display in the Phone Migration Configuration window
Before you can migrate phone configuration to a new phone, consider the following information:
If the phone models do not support the same functionality, be aware that you may lose functionality
on the new phone after the migration occurs. Before you save the migration configuration in the
Phone Migration window, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration displays a
warning that you may lose feature functionality.
Some phone models do not support phone migration; for example, CTI port, H.323 client,
Cisco Unified Mobile Communicator, Cisco IP Softphone, and so on.
Before you can migrate the phone configuration, you must create a phone template in BAT for the
phone model and protocol to which you want to migrate. For example, if you want to migrate the
configuration for a Cisco Unified IP Phone 7965 to a Cisco Unified IP Phone 7975, you create the
phone template for the Cisco Unified IP Phone 7975.
If the Phone Configuration window does not display a field for the original phone, but the field is
required for the new phone, the new phone uses the value from the phone template for the required
field.
The new phone uses the same existing database record as the original phone, so migrating the phone
configuration to the new phone removes the configuration for the original phone from Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration/the Cisco Unified Communications Manager database;
that is, you cannot view or access the configuration for the original phone after the migration.
Migrating to a phone that uses fewer speed dials or lines does not remove the speed dials or lines
for the original phone from Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration/the Cisco
Unified Communications Manager database, although some speed dials/lines do not display on the
new phone. After you migrate the configuration, you can see all speed dials and lines for the original
phone in the Phone Configuration window for the new phone.
91-30
OL-18611-01
Chapter 91
Tip
Before you migrate the phone configuration to a new phone, ensure that the phones are unplugged
from the network. After you perform the migration tasks, you can plug the new phone into the
network and register the device.
Before you migrate the phone configuration to a new phone, ensure that you have enough device
license units for the new phone.
If you want to migrate the configuration for multiple phones, use the Bulk Administration Tool; for
information on how to perform this task, refer to the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Bulk
Administration Guide.
Procedure
Step 1
Make sure that you created a phone template in BAT for the phone model and protocol to which you want
to migrate the data. In Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration, choose Bulk
Administration > Phones > Phone Template.
Step 2
Find the phone configuration that you want to migrate, as described in the Finding a Phone section on
page 91-26.
Step 3
After you display the Phone Configuration window for the phone configuration that you want to migrate,
choose Migrate Phone from the Related Links drop-down list box.
Step 4
Step 5
Click Save.
Step 6
If a warning displays that the new phone may lose feature functionality, click OK.
Table 91-3
Field
Description
Phone Template
From the drop-down list box, choose the phone template for the phone
model to which you want to migrate the phone configuration.
Only the phone templates that you configured in the Phone Template
window in Bulk Administration display (Bulk Administration > Phones
> Phone Template).
MAC Address
This field support hardware phones only. Enter the Media Access
Control (MAC) address for the new Cisco Unified IP Phone to which
you are migrating the configuration. Make sure that the value comprises
12 hexadecimal characters.
For information on how to access the MAC address for your phone,
refer to the Cisco Unified IP Phone Administration Guide for Cisco
Unified Communications Manager that supports your phone model.
Description
Additional Information
91-31
Chapter 91
Resetting a Phone
Resetting a Phone
You do not have to reset a Cisco Unified IP Phone after you add a directory number or update its settings
for your changes to take effect. Cisco Unified Communications Manager automatically performs the
reset; however, you can reset a Cisco Unified IP Phone at any time by using the following procedure.
Note
You can also refer to the Synchronizing a Phone section on page 91-32 for instructions on updating
the phone with the latest configuration changes by using the least-intrusive method.
Note
If a call is in progress, the phone does not reset until the call completes.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Check the check boxes next to the phones that you want to reset. To choose all the phones in the window,
click Select All.
Step 4
Step 5
RestartRestarts the chosen devices without shutting them down (reregisters the phones with
Cisco Unified Communications Manager).
ResetShuts down the chosen devices and brings them back up (performs a complete shutdown and
reinitialization of the phones).
CloseReturns you to the previous window without restarting or resetting the chosen devices.
Additional Information
Synchronizing a Phone
To synchronize a phone with the most recent configuration changes, perform the following procedure,
which applies any outstanding configuration settings in the least-intrusive manner possible. (For
example, a reset/restart may not be required on some affected devices.).
91-32
OL-18611-01
Chapter 91
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
The window displays a list of phones that match the search criteria.
Step 4
Check the check boxes next to the phones that you want to synchronize. To choose all phones in the
window, check the check box in the matching records title bar.
Step 5
Step 6
Click OK.
Additional Information
Deleting a Phone
To delete a Cisco Unified IP Phone by using Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration,
perform the following procedure.
Before You Begin
Before you delete the phone, determine whether the directory number that is associated with the phone
needs to be removed or deleted. To remove the directory number before deleting the phone, see the
Removing a Directory Number from a Phone section on page 64-28; otherwise, the directory number
remains in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager database when the phone gets deleted. To delete
a directory number from the database, see the Deleting Unassigned Directory Numbers section on
page 67-2.
You can view the directory numbers that are assigned to the phone from the Association Information area
of the Phone Configuration window. You can also choose Dependency Records from the Related Links
drop-down list box in the Phone Configuration window. If the dependency records are not enabled for
the system, the dependency records summary window displays a message. For more information about
dependency records, see the Accessing Dependency Records section on page A-2.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
91-33
Chapter 91
Step 3
Check the check boxes next to the phones that you want to delete and click Delete Selected.
Delete all the phones in the window by clicking Select All and clicking Delete Selected.
Choose the name of the phone that you want to delete from the list to display its current settings and
click Delete.
Click OK.
Additional Information
Configure these settings for the speed-dial numbers that you access with abbreviated dialing. When the
user configures up to 99 speed-dial entries, part of the speed-dial entries can get assigned to the
speed-dial buttons on the IP phone; the remaining speed-dial entries get used for abbreviated dialing.
When a user starts dialing digits, the AbbrDial softkey displays on the phone, and the user can access
any speed-dial entry by entering the appropriate index (code) for abbreviated dialing.
Note
Not all Cisco Unified IP Phones support abbreviated dialing. Refer to the phone user guide for
information.
Procedure
Step 1
From the Phone Configuration window, choose Add/Update Speed Dials from the Related Links
drop-down list box at the top of the window and click Go.
The Speed Dial and Abbreviated Dial Configuration window displays for this phone.
91-34
OL-18611-01
Chapter 91
Note
To display the Phone Configuration window, choose Device > Phone. Enter your search criteria
and click Find. Choose the phone for which you want to configure speed-dial buttons.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Additional Information
Subscribing to a Service
To subscribe to new services for a phone, perform the following steps.
Before You Begin
Add the phone services to Cisco Unified Communications Manager. For more information, see the
Configuring an IP Phone Service section on page 100-5.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
91-35
Chapter 91
Step 4
On the upper, right side of the window, choose Subscribe/Unsubscribe Services from the Related Links
drop-down list box and click Go.
The Subscribed IP phone services window displays for this phone.
Step 5
From the Select a Service drop-down list box, choose the service that you want to add to the phone.
Step 6
Click Next.
The window displays with the service that you chose. If you want to choose a different service, click
Back and repeat Step 5.
Step 7
If the service has required parameters, enter that information into the field that is provided.
Step 8
Click Subscribe.
The service displays in the Subscribed Services list.
Step 9
If you want to subscribe to additional services, click the Subscribe a New Service link in the Subscribed
Services area. Repeat Step 5 through Step 8.
Additional Information
Updating Services
Perform the following steps to update a service. You can update the service name and service parameter
values, if necessary.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
On the upper, right side of the window, choose Subscribe/Unsubscribe Services from the Related Links
drop-down list box and click Go.
Step 5
Step 6
Additional Information
91-36
OL-18611-01
Chapter 91
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
On the upper, right side of the window, choose Subscribe/Unsubscribe Services from the Related Links
drop-down list box and click Go.
Step 5
Step 6
Click Unsubscribe.
A warning message verifies that you want to unsubscribe from the service.
Step 7
Additional Information
Add the services to Cisco Unified Communications Manager. For more information, see the
Configuring an IP Phone Service section on page 100-5.
91-37
Chapter 91
Configure the service URL button on the phone button template. For more information, see the
Configuring Phone Button Templates section on page 98-3.
Subscribe to the service. See the Configuring IP Phone Services section on page 91-35.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Choose the phone to which you want to add a service URL button.
The Phone Configuration window displays.
Step 4
In the Association Information area on the left side of the Phone Configuration window, click the Add
a new SURL link.
The Configure Service URL Buttons window displays for this phone.
Step 5
From the Button Service drop-down list box, choose the service that you want to add to or update for the
phone.
Step 6
You can change the values in the Label and ASCII Label fields.
Step 7
To add the service to or update for the phone button, click Save.
Step 8
If more buttons and services are available, you can assign additional services to additional buttons by
repeating Step 5 through Step 7.
Step 9
To close this window and return to the Phone Configuration window, click Close.
Additional Information
From the Phone Configuration window, choose Copy to Remote Destination Profile from the Related
Links drop-down list box at the top of the window and click Go.
The Remote Destination Profile Configuration window displays for this phone.
Step 2
Enter the appropriate settings as described in Cisco Unified Mobility in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Features and Services Guide.
91-38
OL-18611-01
Chapter 91
Step 3
Step 4
Additional Information
Cisco Unified Mobility, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide
Note
You cannot perform this procedure if the phone is associated with a standard phone button template. You
must first associate this phone with a custom, nonstandard phone template.
To modify the button items of a custom, nonstandard phone button template, perform the following steps.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Choose the phone for which you want to modify the phone button items.
The Phone Configuration window displays.
Step 4
Click Modify Button Items in the Association Information area on the left side of the window.
A popup window warns you that unsaved changes (to the phone) may be lost. If you have made changes
to the phone configuration, click Cancel and save those changes before proceeding.
Step 5
Associated ItemsThis pane displays a list of the items that are assigned to the phone buttons in
this phone button template. The system assigns the first item in the list to button 1, the second item
to button 2, and so forth.
Unassigned Associated ItemsThis pane displays a list of the items that are not assigned to phone
buttons in this phone button template.
Dissociate These ItemsThis pane displays a list of the items that cannot presently be assigned to
a phone button.
91-39
Chapter 91
Step 6
To change the order of the associated items, select an item in the Associated Items pane and click the up
or down arrows to change its order.
Step 7
To move an item from the Associated Items pane to the Unassigned Associated Items pane or vice versa,
select the item in either pane and click the left or right arrows to move the item to the other pane.
Step 8
To move an item from the Associated Items or Unassigned Associated Items pane to the Dissociate These
Items pane or vice versa, select the item in any pane and click the up or down arrows that are located
between the two panes that you want to affect.
Step 9
After you have finished moving items among the panes and all items are in the desired order, click Save.
Step 10
Additional Information
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your phone search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item, Cisco
Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your phone search preferences until you
modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Select the Actively Logged In Device Report from the drop-down list box in the upper, right corner of
the Find and List Phones window and click Go. The Find and List Actively Logged In Device window
displays.
Step 3
To find all actively logged-in device records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 4.
To filter or search records
91-40
OL-18611-01
Chapter 91
Note
Step 4
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Step 5
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
Cisco IP Phone 12 (SP +) Series and 30 Series (VIP)Press ** to display the MAC address on the
second line of the LCD display.
Cisco VG248 phone portsThe MAC address specifies the endpoint from the Gateway
Configuration window of Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration. See the
Gateway Configuration section on page 90-1 for configuration information.
Cisco VG224 phone portsYou can configure a Cisco VG224 gateway as an MGCP gateway or an
SCCP gateway. When it is configured as an SCCP gateway, it can have 24 analog phone endpoints.
When it is configured this way, it functions similarly to an IOS SCCP gateway. The MAC address
for each individual phone gets calculated by using a formula that considers the slot position, subunit,
port, and the last 10 characters of the original MAC address. See the Gateway Configuration
section on page 90-1 for configuration information.
Cisco IP CommunicatorGet the MAC address from the network interface of the client PC on
which you want to install the Cisco IP Communicator application.
91-41
Chapter 91
Related Topics
Additional Information
Related Topics
Cisco Unified Mobility, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide
91-42
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
92
Trunk Configuration
Use a trunk device to configure a logical route to a gatekeeper (that is, the wholesale network or an
intercluster trunk with gatekeeper control), to an intercluster trunk without a gatekeeper, or to a SIP
network. Choose from the following available trunk types:
SIP trunk
The following topics cover Cisco Unified Communications Manager trunk configuration:
Tip
SIP trunk
Configure SIP Trunk Security Profiles and SIP Profiles before you configure a SIP Trunk. For more
information, see the Configuring SIP Profiles section on page 101-10, SIP Trunk Security Profile
Configuration, and the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Security Guide.
92-1
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Tip
Resetting a trunk drops any calls in progress that are using that trunk. Restarting a gateway tries to
preserve the calls in progress that are using that gateway, if possible. Other devices wait until calls
complete before restarting or resetting. Resetting/restarting an H.323 or SIP device does not physically
reset/restart the hardware; it only reinitializes the configuration that is loaded by Cisco Unified
Communications Manager.
For SIP trunks, Restart and Reset behave the same way, so all active calls will disconnect when either
choice is pressed. Trunks do not have to undergo a Restart or Reset when Packet Capture is enabled or
disabled.
Table 92-1 describes the trunk configuration settings for gatekeeper-controlled H.225 trunks,
gatekeeper-controlled intercluster trunks, and non-gatekeeper-controlled intercluster trunks.
Table 92-2 describes the trunk configuration settings for SIP trunks.
For more information about related procedures, see the Related Topics section on page 92-51.
Table 92-1
Field
Description
Device Information
Device Name
Description
Device Pool
92-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Trunk Configuration Settings
Table 92-1
Field
Description
Call Classification
Location
92-3
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Table 92-1
Field
Description
AAR Group
Tunneled Protocol
QSIG Variant
Not Selected
92-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Trunk Configuration Settings
Table 92-1
Field
Description
Not Selected
Use Global Value ECMAIf you chose the ECMA option from
the QSIG Variant drop-down list box, choose this option.
Use Global Value ISOIf you chose the ISO option from the
QSIG Variant drop-down list box, choose this option.
92-5
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Table 92-1
Field
Description
Tip
92-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Trunk Configuration Settings
Table 92-1
Field
Description
This check box applies only to video endpoints that receive a call.
For trunks, this check box pertains to calls that are received from
Cisco Unified Communications Manager but not to calls that are
received from the wide-area network (WAN).
By default, the system checks this check box to specify that this
device should immediately retry a video call as an audio call (if it
cannot connect as a video call) prior to sending the call to call
control for rerouting.
If you uncheck this check box, a video call that fails to connect as
video does not try to establish as an audio call. The call then fails to
call control, and call control routes the call via Automatic Alternate
Routing (AAR) and/or route/hunt list.
Wait for Far-End H.245 Terminal This field applies only to H.323 devices.
Capability Set
This check box specifies that Cisco Unified Communications
Manager waits to receive the far-end H.245 Terminal Capability Set
before it sends its H.245 Terminal Capability Set. By default, the
system checks this check box. To specify that Cisco Unified
Communications Manager should initiate capabilities exchange,
uncheck this check box.
Path Replacement Support
92-7
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Table 92-1
Field
Description
This device uses the user locale setting of the SIP trunks to
determine whether to send unicode and whether to translate
received Unicode information.
For the sending device, if you check this check box and the user
locale setting in the device pool at the device matches the
terminating phone user locale, the device sends unicode. If the user
locale settings do not match, the device sends ASCII.
The receiving device translates incoming unicode characters based
on the user locale setting of the sending device pool of the device.
If the user locale setting matches the terminating phone user locale,
the phone displays the characters.
Note
Unattended Port
SRTP Allowed
Check the SRTP Allowed check box if you want Cisco Unified
Communications Manager to allow secure and nonsecure calls over
the trunk.
If you do not check this check box, Cisco Unified Communications
Manager prevents SRTP negotiation with the trunk and uses RTP.
Caution
92-8
OL-18611-01
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Trunk Configuration Settings
Table 92-1
Field
Description
DefaultIf you choose this value, the device uses the Use
Trusted Relay Point setting from the common device
configuration with which this device associates.
To delete all prefixes for all calling party number types, click Clear
Prefix Settings.
To enter the default value for all prefix fields at the same time, click
Default Prefix Settings.
92-9
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Table 92-1
Field
Description
National Number
Use Device Pool CSSCheck this check box to use the calling
search space for the National Number field that is configured in
the device pool that is applied to the device.
Tip
92-10
OL-18611-01
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Trunk Configuration Settings
Table 92-1
Field
Description
International Number
Use Device Pool CSS Check this check box to use the calling
search space for the International Number field that is
configured in the device pool that is applied to the device.
Tip
92-11
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Table 92-1
Field
Description
Subscriber Number
Use Device Pool CSSCheck this check box to use the calling
search space for the Subscriber Number field that is configured
in the device pool that is applied to the device.
Tip
92-12
OL-18611-01
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Trunk Configuration Settings
Table 92-1
Field
Description
Unknown Number
Use Device Pool CSSCheck this check box to use the calling
search space for the Unknown Number field that is configured
in the device pool that is applied to the device.
Tip
MLPP Domain
92-13
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Table 92-1
Field
Description
MLPP Indication
Note
Significant Digits
From the drop-down list box, select the appropriate calling search
space for the trunk. The calling search space specifies the collection
of route partitions that are searched to determine how to route a
collected (originating) number.
You can configure the number of items that display in this
drop-down list box by using the Max List Box Items enterprise
parameter. If more calling search spaces exist than the Max List Box
Items enterprise parameter specifies, the Find button displays next
to the drop-down list box. Click the Find button to display the Find
and List Calling Search Spaces window. Find and choose a calling
search space name by using the Finding a Calling Search Space
procedure in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Administration Guide.
Note
Choose the appropriate calling search space for the device to use
when performing automated alternate routing (AAR). The AAR
calling search space specifies the collection of route partitions that
are searched to determine how to route a collected (originating)
number that is otherwise blocked due to insufficient bandwidth.
92-14
OL-18611-01
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Trunk Configuration Settings
Table 92-1
Field
Description
Prefix DN
Enter the prefix digits that are appended to the called party number
on incoming calls.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager adds prefix digits after
first truncating the number in accordance with the Significant Digits
setting.
You can enter the international escape character +.
Redirecting Number IE Delivery Check this check box to accept the Redirecting Number IE in the
- Inbound
incoming SETUP message to the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager. (The UUIE part of the SETUP message includes the
Redirecting Number IE.)
Uncheck the check box to exclude the Redirecting Number IE.
You use Redirecting Number IE for voice-messaging integration
only. If your configured voice-messaging system supports
Redirecting Number IE, you should check the check box.
Note
Check this check box to enable the H.323 FastStart call connections
on incoming calls.
By default, the check box remains unchecked for the H.323
gateway.
For intercluster calls, you must check the Enable Inbound FastStart
check box on Cisco Unified Communications Manager servers in
other clusters for the outbound FastStart feature to work.
Outbound Calls
This setting allows you to localize the called party number on the
device. Make sure that the Called Party Transformation CSS that
you choose contains the called party transformation pattern that you
want to assign to this device.
Note
92-15
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Table 92-1
Field
Description
This setting allows you to localize the calling party number on the
device. Make sure that the Calling Party Transformation CSS that
you choose contains the calling party transformation pattern that
you want to assign to this device.
Before the call occurs, the device must apply the
transformation by using digit analysis. If you configure the
Calling Party Transformation CSS as None, the
transformation does not match and does not get applied.
Ensure that you configure the Calling Party Transformation
Pattern in a non-null partition that is not used for routing.
Tip
92-16
OL-18611-01
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Trunk Configuration Settings
Table 92-1
Field
Description
Choose the format for the type of number in called party directory
numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the called directory
number (DN) type. Cisco recommends that you do not change the
default value unless you have advanced experience with dialing
plans, such as NANP or the European dialing plan. You may need to
change the default in Europe because Cisco Unified
Communications Manager does not recognize European national
dialing patterns. You can also change this setting when you are
connecting to a PBX that expects the called directory number to be
encoded to a non-national numbering plan type.
Choose one of the following options:
NationalUse when you are dialing within the dialing plan for
your country.
92-17
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Table 92-1
Field
Description
Choose the format for the type of number in calling party directory
numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the calling directory
number (DN) type. Cisco recommends that you do not change the
default value unless you have advanced experience with dialing
plans, such as NANP or the European dialing plan. You may need to
change the default in Europe because Cisco Unified
Communications Manager does not recognize European national
dialing patterns. You can also change this setting when you are
connecting to a PBX that expects the calling directory number to be
encoded to a non-national numbering plan type.
Choose one of the following options:
NationalUse when you are dialing within the dialing plan for
your country.
Tip
92-18
OL-18611-01
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Trunk Configuration Settings
Table 92-1
Field
Description
Choose the format for the numbering plan in called party directory
numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the called DN
numbering plan. Cisco recommends that you do not change the
default value unless you have advanced experience with dialing
plans, such as NANP or the European dialing plan. You may need to
change the default in Europe because Cisco Unified
Communications Manager does not recognize European national
dialing patterns. You can also change this setting when you are
connecting to a PBX that expects the called numbering plan to be
encoded to a non-national numbering plan.
Choose one of the following options:
ISDNUse when you are dialing outside the dialing plan for
your country.
92-19
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Table 92-1
Field
Description
Choose the format for the numbering plan in calling party directory
numbers.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager sets the calling DN
numbering plan. Cisco recommends that you do not change the
default value unless you have advanced experience with dialing
plans, such as NANP or the European dialing plan. You may need to
change the default in Europe because Cisco Unified
Communications Manager does not recognize European national
dialing patterns. You can also change this setting when you are
connecting to a PBX that expects the calling numbering plan to be
encoded to a non-national numbering plan.
Choose one of the following options:
Caller ID DN
ISDNUse when you are dialing outside the dialing plan for
your country.
Enter the pattern, from 0 to 24 digits, that you want to use to format
the caller ID on outbound calls from the trunk.
For example, in North America
5555000 = Fixed Caller ID. Use this form when you want the
Corporate number to be sent instead of the exact extension from
which the call is placed. The CO appends the number with the
area code if you do not specify it.
92-20
OL-18611-01
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Trunk Configuration Settings
Table 92-1
Field
Description
Redirecting Number IE Delivery Check this check box to indicate the first redirecting number and the
- Outbound
redirecting reason of the call when the call is forwarded. (The UUIE
part of the outgoing SETUP message from the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager includes the Redirecting Number IE.)
Uncheck the check box to exclude the first Redirecting Number and
the redirecting reason.
You use Redirecting Number IE for voice-messaging integration
only. If your configured voice-messaging system supports
Redirecting Number IE, you should check the check box.
Note
Choose the codec for use with the H.323 device for an outbound
FastStart call:
G723
G729
G729AnnexA
G729AnnexB
G729AnnexA-AnnexB
When you check the Enable Outbound FastStart check box, you
must choose the codec for supporting outbound FastStart calls.
Gatekeeper Information
92-21
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Table 92-1
Field
Description
Terminal Type
Use the Terminal Type field to designate the type for all devices that
this trunk controls.
Always set this field to Gateway for normal trunk call admission
control.
Technology Prefix
Use this optional field to eliminate the need for entering the IP
address of every Cisco Unified Communications Manager when
configuring the gw-type-prefix on the gatekeeper:
If you leave this field blank (the default setting), you must
specify the IP address of each Cisco Unified Communications
Manager that can register with the gatekeeper when you enter
the gw-type-prefix command on the gatekeeper.
When you use this field, make sure that the value that you enter
exactly matches the type-prefix value that is specified with the
gw-type-prefix command on the gatekeeper.
For example, if you leave this field blank and you have two Cisco
Unified Communications Managers with IP addresses of 10.1.1.2
and 11.1.1.3, enter the following gw-type-prefix command on the
gatekeeper:
gw-type-prefix 1#* default-technology gw ip 10.1.1.2 gw ip
11.1.1.3
If you enter 1#* in this field, enter the following gw-type-prefix
command on the gatekeeper:
gw-type-prefix 1#* default-technology
Zone
92-22
OL-18611-01
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Trunk Configuration Settings
Table 92-1
Field
Description
Enter the IP address or host name of the first remote Cisco Unified
Communications Manager that this trunk accesses.
Enter the IP address or host name of the third remote Cisco Unified
Communications Manager that this trunk accesses.
Note
UUIE Configuration
Enter the value for the security access level. Valid values include 00
through 99. The system makes this field available only if the Passing
Precedence Level Through UUIE check box is checked. The default
value specifies 2.
92-23
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Table 92-1
Field
Description
Geolocation Configuration
Geolocation
Geolocation Filter
Table 92-2 describes the trunk configuration settings for SIP trunks.
Table 92-2
Field
Description
Device Information
Device Name
Description
92-24
OL-18611-01
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Trunk Configuration Settings
Table 92-2
Field
Description
Device Pool
Call Classification
92-25
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Table 92-2
Field
Description
Location
AAR Group
92-26
OL-18611-01
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Trunk Configuration Settings
Table 92-2
Field
Description
92-27
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Table 92-2
Field
Description
This check box pertains to outgoing SIP trunk calls and does not
impact incoming calls.
By default, the system checks this check box to specify that this
device should immediately retry a video call as an audio call (if it
cannot connect as a video call) prior to sending the call to call
control for rerouting.
If you uncheck this check box, a video call that fails to connect as
video does not try to establish as an audio call. The call then fails to
call control, and call control routes the call via Automatic Alternate
Routing (AAR) and/or route/hunt list.
92-28
OL-18611-01
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Trunk Configuration Settings
Table 92-2
Field
Description
This device uses the user locale setting of the device pool to
determine whether to send unicode and whether to translate
received Unicode information.
For the sending device, if you check this check box and the user
locale setting in the device pool matches the terminating phone user
locale, the device sends unicode. If the user locale settings do not
match, the device sends ASCII.
The receiving device translates incoming unicode characters based
on the user locale setting of the sending device pool. If the user
locale setting matches the terminating phone user locale, the phone
displays the characters.
The phone may display malformed characters if the two
ends of the trunk configure user locales that do not belong
to the same language group.
Note
The default value for Transmit UTF-8 for Calling Party Name
leaves the check box unchecked.
Unattended Port
SRTP Allowed
Caution
92-29
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Table 92-2
Field
Description
DefaultIf you choose this value, the device uses the Use
Trusted Relay Point setting from the common device
configuration with which this device associates.
To delete all prefixes for all calling party number types, click Clear
Prefix Settings.
To enter the default value for all prefix fields at the same time, click
Default Prefix Settings.
92-30
OL-18611-01
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Trunk Configuration Settings
Table 92-2
Field
Description
Unknown Number
Use Device Pool CSSCheck this check box to use the calling
search space for the Unknown Number field that is configured
in the device pool that is applied to the device.
Tip
92-31
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Table 92-2
Field
Description
MLPP Domain
92-32
OL-18611-01
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Trunk Configuration Settings
Table 92-2
Field
Description
Remote-Party-ID
Use this check box to allow or disallow the SIP trunk to send the
Remote-Party-ID (RPID) header in outgoing SIP messages from
Cisco Unified Communications Manager to the remote destination.
If you check this box, the SIP trunk always sends the RPID header.
If you do not check this box, the SIP trunk does not send the RPID
header.
Outgoing SIP Trunk Calls
92-33
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Table 92-2
Field
Description
Asserted Identity
Use this check box to allow or disallow the SIP trunk to send the
Asserted-Type and SIP Privacy headers in SIP messages. If you
check this check box, the SIP trunk always sends the Asserted-Type
header; whether the SIP trunk sends the SIP Privacy header depends
on the SIP Privacy configuration.
If the check box is not selected, the SIP trunk does not include any
Asserted-Type or SIP Privacy headers in its SIP messages.
For more information, see the descriptions of Asserted-Type and
SIP Privacy in this table.
Outgoing SIP Trunk CallsP Headers
The SIP Privacy header gets used only when you check the Asserted
Identity check box and when the SIP trunk sends either a PAI or PPI
header. (Otherwise the SIP Privacy header neither gets sent nor
processed in incoming SIP messages).
The value of the SIP Privacy headers depends on the configured
value of the SIP Privacy option.
A non-default value for SIP Privacy overrides values that come from
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Call Control.
If the SIP Privacy option is set to Default, the Calling Line ID
Presentation and Calling Name Presentation that the SIP trunk
receives from Cisco Unified Communications Manager Call
Control determines the SIP Privacy header.
92-34
OL-18611-01
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Trunk Configuration Settings
Table 92-2
Field
Asserted Identity (continued)
Description
Incoming SIP Trunk CallsP Headers
The decision of which Asserted Identity (either P-Asserted-Identity
or P-Preferred-Identity) header gets sent depends on the configured
value of the Asserted-Type option. A non-default value for
Asserted-Type overrides values that come from Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Call Control. If the Asserted-Type
option is set to Default, the value of Screening Identification that the
SIP trunk receives from Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Call Control dictates the type of Asserted-Identity.
Incoming SIP Trunk CallsSIP Privacy Header
The SIP Privacy header gets used only when you check the Asserted
Identity check box and when the SIP trunk sends either a PAI or PPI
header. (Otherwise the SIP Privacy header neither gets sent nor
processed in incoming SIP messages.)
The value of the SIP Privacy headers depends on the configured
value of the SIP Privacy option.
A non-default value for SIP Privacy overrides values that come from
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Call Control.
If the SIP Privacy option is set to Default, the Connected Line ID
Presentation and Connected Name Presentation that the SIP trunk
receives from Cisco Unified Communications Manager Call
Control determine the SIP Privacy header.
Note
Asserted-Type
Note
92-35
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Table 92-2
Field
Description
SIP Privacy
Note
Inbound Calls
Significant Digits
92-36
OL-18611-01
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Trunk Configuration Settings
Table 92-2
Field
Description
Connected Line ID Presentation Cisco Unified Communications Manager uses connected line ID
presentation (COLP) as a supplementary service to provide the
calling party with the connected party number. The SIP trunk level
configuration takes precedence over the call-by-call configuration.
The default value for Connected Line ID Presentation specifies
Default, which translates to Allowed. Choose Default if you want
Cisco Unified Communications Manager to send connected line
information.
Choose Restricted if you do not want Cisco Unified
Communications Manager to send connected line information.
Connected Name Presentation
From the drop-down list box, choose the appropriate calling search
space for the trunk. The calling search space specifies the collection
of route partitions that are searched to determine how to route a
collected (originating) number.
You can configure the number of items that display in this
drop-down list box by using the Max List Box Items enterprise
parameter. If more calling search spaces exist than the Max List Box
Items enterprise parameter specifies, the Find button displays next
to the drop-down list box. Click the Find button to display the Find
and List Calling Search Spaces window. Find and choose a calling
search space name by using the Finding a Calling Search Space
procedure in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Administration Guide.
Note
Choose the appropriate calling search space for the device to use
when performing automated alternate routing (AAR). The AAR
calling search space specifies the collection of route partitions that
are searched to determine how to route a collected (originating)
number that is otherwise blocked due to insufficient bandwidth.
The default value for AAR Calling Search Space specifies None.
92-37
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Table 92-2
Field
Description
Prefix DN
Enter the prefix digits that are appended to the called party number
on incoming calls.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager adds prefix digits after
first truncating the number in accordance with the Significant Digits
setting.
You can enter the international escape character +.
Outbound Calls
This setting allows you to localize the called party number on the
device. Make sure that the Called Party Transformation CSS that
you choose contains the called party transformation pattern that you
want to assign to this device.
Note
This setting allows you to localize the calling party number on the
device. Make sure that the Calling Party Transformation CSS that
you choose contains the calling party transformation pattern that
you want to assign to this device.
Tip
92-38
OL-18611-01
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Trunk Configuration Settings
Table 92-2
Field
Description
92-39
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Table 92-2
Field
Description
Caller ID DN
Enter the pattern, from 0 to 24 digits, that you want to use to format
the caller ID on outbound calls from the trunk.
For example, in North America
5555000 = Fixed Caller ID. Use this form when you want the
Corporate number to be sent instead of the exact extension from
which the call is placed. The CO appends the number with the
area code if you do not specify it.
Enter a caller name to override the caller name that is received from
the originating SIP Device.
92-40
OL-18611-01
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Trunk Configuration Settings
Table 92-2
Field
Description
SIP Information
Destination Address
The Destination Address represents the remote SIP peer with which
this trunk will communicate. The allowed values for this field
specify a valid V4 dotted IP address, fully qualified domain name
(FQDN), or DNS SRV record only if the Destination Address is an
SRV field is checked.
Tip
For SIP trunks that can support IPv6 or IPv6 and IPv4
(dual-stack mode), configure the Destination Address IPv6
field in addition to the Destination Address field.
Note
Note
92-41
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Table 92-2
Field
Description
The Destination IPv6 Address represents the remote SIP peer with
which this trunk will communicate. You can enter one of the
following values in this field:
Destination Port
Choose the destination port. Ensure that the value that you enter
specifies any port from 1024 - 65535.
Note
You can now have the same port number that is specified for
multiple trunks.
You need not enter a value if the destination address is an DNS SRV
port. The default 5060 indicates the SIP port.
The default value for Destination Port specifies 5060.
92-42
OL-18611-01
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Trunk Configuration Settings
Table 92-2
Field
Description
711ulaw
711alaw
G729/G729a
G729b/G729ab
Note
To configure G.79 codecs for use with a SIP trunk, you must
use a hardware MTP or transcoder that supports the G.79
codec. For more information, see Chapter 26,
Transcoders, in the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager System Guide.
This field gets used only when the MTP Termination Point Required
check box is checked.
Presence Group
92-43
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Table 92-2
Field
Description
92-44
OL-18611-01
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Trunk Configuration Settings
Table 92-2
Field
Description
SIP Profile
From the drop-down list box, choose the SIP profile that is to be
used for this SIP trunk.
The default value for SIP Profile specifies None Selected.
92-45
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Finding a Trunk
Table 92-2
Field
Description
Geolocation Configuration
Geolocation
Geolocation Filter
Finding a Trunk
Because you might have multiple trunks in your network, Cisco Unified Communications Manager lets
you search for trunks on the basis of specified criteria. Follow these steps to search for a specific trunk
in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager database.
92-46
OL-18611-01
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Finding a Trunk
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your trunk search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item, Cisco
Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your trunk search preferences until you
modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Topics
92-47
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Configuring a Trunk
Configuring a Trunk
Perform the following procedure to add a new trunk device or update an existing trunk device.
Note
You can configure multiple trunk devices per Cisco Unified Communications Manager cluster.
Before You Begin
Configure SIP Trunk Security Profiles and SIP Profiles before you configure a SIP Trunk. For more
information, see the Configuring SIP Profiles section on page 101-10, SIP Trunk Security Profile
Configuration, and the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Security Guide.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To add a new trunk device, click the Add New button. The Trunk Configuration window displays.
Continue with Step 3.
To update trunk settings, locate the appropriate trunk as described in Finding a Trunk section on
page 92-46. Click the name of the trunk that you want to update. Continue with Step 6.
Step 3
From the Trunk Type drop-down list, choose the type of trunk.
Step 4
If applicable, from the Device Protocol drop-down list, choose the device protocol.
Step 5
Click Next.
Step 6
On the Trunk Configuration window that displays, enter the appropriate settings for
gatekeeper-controlled H.225 trunks, gatekeeper-controlled intercluster trunks, and
non-gatekeeper-controlled intercluster trunks as described in Table 92-1. For SIP trunks, enter the
appropriate settings as described in Table 92-2.
Step 7
Note
Resetting a trunk drops any calls in progress that are using that trunk. Restarting a gateway tries
to preserve the calls in progress that are using that gateway, if possible. Other devices wait until
calls complete before restarting or resetting. Resetting/restarting an H.323 or SIP device does
not physically reset/restart the hardware; it only reinitializes the configuration that is loaded by
Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Additional Topics
92-48
OL-18611-01
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Deleting a Trunk
Deleting a Trunk
Perform the following steps to delete a trunk.
Before You Begin
You cannot delete a trunk that is assigned to one or more route patterns. To find out which route patterns
are using the trunk, in the Trunk Configuration window, choose Dependency Records from the Related
Links drop-down list box and click Go. If dependency records are not enabled for the system, the
Dependency Records Summary window displays a message. For more information about dependency
records, see the Accessing Dependency Records section on page A-2. If you try to delete a trunk that
is in use, Cisco Unified Communications Manager displays a message. Before deleting a trunk that is
currently in use, you must perform either or both of the following tasks:
Assign a different trunk to any route patterns that are using the trunk that you want to delete. See
the Configuring a Route Pattern section on page 44-11.
Delete the route patterns that are using the trunk that you want to delete. See the Deleting a Route
Pattern section on page 44-12.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Check the check boxes next to the trunks that you want to delete and click Delete Selected.
Delete all trunks in the window by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list, choose the name of the trunk that you want to delete to display its current settings and
click Delete.
Additional Topics
Resetting a Trunk
Perform the following procedure to reset the trunk.
Caution
92-49
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Synchronizing a Trunk
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
From the list, click the name of the trunk that you want to reset.
The Trunk Configuration window displays.
Step 4
After you change any settings for the Trunk Device, click Reset Trunk.
The Device Reset dialog displays.
Step 5
Note
ResetShuts down, then restarts, the internal trunk device. The Cisco Unified Communications
Manager cluster unregisters (URQ) and then reregisters (RRQ) with the trunk if the trunk is
gatekeeper controlled.
For SIP trunks, Restart and Reset behave the same way, so all active calls will disconnect when either
choice is pressed. Trunks do not have to undergo a Restart or Reset when Packet Capture is enabled or
disabled.
Additional Topics
Synchronizing a Trunk
To synchronize a trunk with the most recent configuration changes, perform the following procedure,
which will apply any outstanding configuration settings in the least-intrusive manner possible. (For
example, a reset/restart may not be required on some affected devices.)
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
The window displays a list of trunks that match the search criteria.
Step 4
Check the check boxes next to the trunks that you want to synchronize. To choose all trunks in the
window, check the check box in the matching records title bar.
92-50
OL-18611-01
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Related Topics
Step 5
Step 6
Note
Click OK.
Additional Topics
Related Topics
Gatekeeper and Trunk Configuration in Cisco Unified Communications Manager, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager System Guide
Local Route Groups, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide
92-51
Chapter 92
Trunk Configuration
Related Topics
92-52
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
93
93-1
Chapter 93
93-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
94
Device load
Device pool
When a device auto-registers with a Cisco Unified Communications Manager, it acquires the device
default settings for its device type. After a device registers, you can update its configuration individually
to change the device settings.
Installing Cisco Unified Communications Manager automatically sets device defaults. You cannot create
new device defaults or delete existing ones, but you can change the default settings.
This section covers the following topics:
Device load
Device pool
When a device auto-registers with a Cisco Unified Communications Manager, it acquires the device
default settings for its device type. After a device registers, you can update its configuration individually
to change the device settings.
94-1
Chapter 94
Before updating the device defaults, perform any of the following tasks that apply to your system:
Add new firmware files for the devices to the TFTP server.
If you use device defaults to assign a firmware load that does not exist in the directory, those devices
will fail to load the assigned firmware.
Configure new device pools. See the Configuring a Device Pool section on page 9-11.
If the device is a phone, configure new phone templates. See the Configuring Phone Button
Templates section on page 98-3.
Table 94-1 describes the configuration settings for device defaults. For more information about related
procedures, see the Related Topics section on page 94-3.
Table 94-1
Field Name
Description
Device Type
This field displays the type of device for which device defaults can be
set.
Protocol
This field displays the protocol that the corresponding device in the
Device Type column uses.
Load Information
Enter the ID number of the firmware load that is used with a particular
type of hardware device. If you install an upgrade or patch load, you
must update the load information for each type of device that uses the
new load.
Device Pool
Choose the device pool that is associated with each type of device.
The device pool defines common characteristics for all devices in the
pool.
Phone Template
Choose the phone button template that each type of Cisco Unified IP
Phone uses. The template defines what keys on the phone perform
that function.
Before updating the device defaults, perform any of the following tasks that apply to your system:
Add new firmware files for the devices to the TFTP server.
If you use device defaults to assign a firmware load that does not exist in the directory, those devices
will fail to load the assigned firmware.
Configure new device pools. See the Configuring a Device Pool section on page 9-11.
If the device is a phone, configure new phone templates. See the Configuring Phone Button
Templates section on page 98-3.
94-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 94
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Update the appropriate settings for the device that you want to change as described in Table 94-1.
Step 3
To save the changes in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager configuration database, click Save.
Step 4
To reset all the devices of that type, click the Reset icon to the left of the device name and load the new
defaults on all Cisco Unified Communications Managers in the cluster.
If you choose not to reset all devices of that type, only new devices that are added after you change the
device defaults receive the latest defaults.
Additional Information
Related Topics
94-3
Chapter 94
Related Topics
94-4
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
95
Note
Each device can have an individually assigned firmware load that overrides the default.
Use the following procedure to locate devices that are not using the default firmware load.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To view a list of devices of a particular device type that are using a non-default device load, click the
entry for that device type in the Devices Not Using Default Load column.
The window that opens lists the devices of a particular device type that are not running the default
firmware load.
Related Topics
95-1
Chapter 95
Related Topics
95-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
96
96-1
Chapter 96
Table 96-1 describes the fields that are available in the Default Device Profile Configuration window.
For related procedures, see the Related Topics section on page 96-7.
Table 96-1
Field
Description
Description
To specify the audio source that plays when a user initiates a hold action,
click the drop-down arrow and choose an audio source from the list that
displays.
If you do not choose an audio source, Cisco Unified Communications
Manager uses the audio source that is defined in the device pool or uses
the system default if the device pool does not specify an audio source ID.
Note
User Locale
From the drop-down list box, choose the locale that is associated with the
phone user interface. The user locale identifies a set of detailed
information, including language and font, to support users.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager makes this field available only
for phone models that support localization.
Note
Note
Choose the appropriate phone button template. The phone button template
determines the configuration of buttons on a phone and identifies which
feature (line, speed dial, and so on) is used for each button.
Softkey Template
Privacy
From the drop-down list box, choose On for each phone on which you
want privacy. For more configuration information, refer to Barge and
Privacy in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and
Services Guide.
96-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 96
Table 96-1
Field
Description
Single Button
Barge/cBarge
From the drop-down list box, choose from the following options:
OffThis device does not allow users to use the Single Button
Barge/cBarge feature.
Note
For more information, refer to Barge and Privacy in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Features and Services Guide.
Join Across Lines
From the drop-down list box, choose from the following options:
OffThis device does not allow users to use the Join Across Lines
feature.
DefaultThis device inherits the Join Across Lines setting from the
service parameter and device pool settings.
Note
From the drop-down list box, choose one of the following options:
OffWhen the phone is idle and receives a call on any line, the phone
user answers the call from the line on which the call is received.
OnWhen the phone is idle (off hook) and receives a call on any line,
the primary line gets chosen for the call. Calls on other lines continue
to ring, and the phone user must select those other lines to answer
these calls.
96-3
Chapter 96
Table 96-1
Field
Description
From the drop-down list box, choose one of the following options:
Ignore Presentation
Indicators (internal calls
only)
OnIf the phone is idle, the primary line on the phone becomes the
active line for retrieving voice messages when the phone user presses
the Messages button on the phone.
OffIf the phone is idle, pressing the Messages button on the phone
automatically dials the voice-messaging system from the line that has
a voice message. Cisco Unified Communications Manager always
selects the first line that has a voice message. If no line has a voice
message, the primary line gets used when the phone user presses the
Messages button.
Check the Ignore Presentation Indicators (internal calls only) check box to
configure call display restrictions and ignore any presentation restriction
that is received for internal calls.
Note
Do Not Disturb
DND Option
When you enable DND on the phone, this parameter allows you to specify
how the DND features handle incoming calls:
Ringer OffThis option turns off the ringer, but incoming call
information gets presented to the device, so that the user can accept
the call.
Note
For mobile devices and dual-mode phones, you can only choose
the Call Reject option. When you activate DND Call Reject on a
mobile device or dual-mode phone, no call information gets
presented to the device.
96-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 96
Table 96-1
Field
Description
DND Incoming Call Alert When you enable the DND Ringer Off or Call Reject option, this
parameter specifies how a call displays on a phone.
From the drop-down list, choose one of the following options:
MLPP Domain
Choose MLPP domain that is associated with this device from the
drop-down list box.
MLPP Indication
Note
Note
96-5
Chapter 96
Table 96-1
Field
Description
MLPP Preemption
Note
Login User Id
This pane displays a link to each default device profile that has been
defined.
Step 2
To add a new profile, choose the type of device that you want to add from the Device Profile Type
drop-down list box; then, click Next and continue with Step 3.
To update an existing profile, click the device profile that you want to update from the Device Profile
Defaults pane. The Default Device Profile Configuration window displays the profile information
of the profile that you chose; continue with Step 3
96-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 96
Step 3
Step 4
Click Save.
Additional Topics
Step 2
From the Default Device Profile pane, click the device profile that you want to delete.
The Default Device Profile Configuration window displays the profile information of the profile that you
chose.
Step 3
Click Delete.
A message displays that states that this action cannot be undone.
Step 4
To delete the default device profile, click OK or, to cancel the deletion, click Cancel.
Additional Topics
Related Topics
96-7
Chapter 96
Related Topics
96-8
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
97
97-1
Chapter 97
You can also assign a user device profile to be the default logout device profile for a particular device.
When a user logs out of a phone, for instance, the logout device profile loads onto the phone and gives
that phone the attributes of the logout device profile. In the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Administration windows, you can create, modify, or delete the user device profile. If a user device profile
is used as the logout device profile, you cannot delete the user device profile.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager also supports a device profile default. Use the device profile
default for whenever a user logs on to a phone model for which no user device profile exists. To create
a device profile default for each phone model that supports Cisco Extension Mobility, use the Device
Profile Default Configuration window. The maximum number of device profile defaults cannot exceed
the number of phone models that support Cisco Extension Mobility. For more information about the
device profile default, see the Default Device Profile Configuration section on page 96-1.
Before You Begin
Make sure that phone button template(s) are already configured before you configure the device profile.
See the Configuring Phone Button Templates section on page 98-3 for more information.
Table 97-1 describes the available settings in the Device Profile Configuration window. For more
information about related procedures, see the Related Topics section on page 97-11.
Table 97-1
Field
Description
This field displays the product type to which this device profile applies.
Device Protocol
This field displays the device protocol to which this device profile
applies.
Description
Enter a description of the device profile. For text, use anything that
describes this particular user device profile.
To specify the audio source that plays when a user initiates a hold
action, choose an audio source from the User Hold MOH Audio Source
drop-down list box.
If you do not choose an audio source, Cisco Unified Communications
Manager uses the audio source that is defined in the device pool or the
system default if the device pool does not specify an audio source ID.
Note
97-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 97
Table 97-1
Field
Description
User Locale
From the drop-down list box, choose the locale that is associated with
the phone user interface. The user locale identifies a set of detailed
information, including language and font, to support users.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager makes this field available
only for phone models that support localization.
Note
Note
From the Phone Button Template drop-down list, choose a phone button
template.
Tip
Softkey Template
From the Softkey Template drop-down list box, choose the softkey
template from the list that displays.
Privacy
From the Privacy drop-down list box, choose On for each phone on
which you want privacy. For more information, refer to Barge and
Privacy in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and
Services Guide.
97-3
Chapter 97
Table 97-1
Field
Description
From the drop-down list box, choose from the following options:
OffThis device does not allow users to use the Single Button
Barge/cBarge feature.
Note
For more information, refer to Barge and Privacy in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Features and Services Guide.
Join Across Lines
From the drop-down list box, choose from the following options:
OffThis device does not allow users to use the Join Across Lines
feature.
Note
From the drop-down list box, choose one of the following options:
OffWhen the phone is idle and receives a call on any line, the
phone user answers the call from the line on which the call is
received.
OnWhen the phone is idle (off hook) and receives a call on any
line, the primary line gets chosen for the call. Calls on other lines
continue to ring, and the phone user must select those other lines to
answer these calls.
97-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 97
Table 97-1
Field
Description
From the drop-down list box, choose one of the following options:
Ignore Presentation
Indicators (internal calls
only)
OnIf the phone is idle, the primary line on the phone becomes
the active line for retrieving voice messages when the phone user
presses the Messages button on the phone.
Do Not Disturb
DND Option
When you enable DND on the phone, this parameter allows you to
specify how the DND feature handles incoming calls:
Ringer OffThis option turns off the ringer, but incoming call
information gets presented to the device, so that the user can accept
the call.
Note
For 7940/7960 phones that are running SCCP, you can only
choose the Ringer Off option. For mobile devices and
dual-mode phones, you can only choose the Call Reject option.
When you activate DND Call Reject on a mobile device or
dual-mode phone, no call information gets presented to the
device.
97-5
Chapter 97
Table 97-1
Field
Description
When you enable the DND Ringer Off or Call Reject option, this
parameter specifies how a call displays on a phone.
From the drop-down list, choose one of the following options:
You can configure one or two expansion modules for this device profile
by choosing phone templates from the expansion module drop-down
lists in the expansion module fields.
You can view a phone button list at any time by choosing the
View button list link next to the phone button template fields.
A separate dialog box pops up and displays the phone buttons
for that particular expansion module.
Note
If this user device profile will be used for MLPP precedence calls,
choose the MLLP Domain from the drop-down list box.
Note
97-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 97
Table 97-1
Field
Description
MLPP Indication
If this user device profile will be used for MLPP precedence calls,
assign an MLPP Indication setting to the device profile. This setting
specifies whether a device that can play precedence tones will use the
capability when it places an MLPP precedence call.
From the drop-down list box, choose a setting to assign to this device
profile from the following options:
Note
MLPP Preemption
If this user device profile will be used for MLPP precedence calls,
assign an MLPP Preemption setting to the device profile. This setting
specifies whether a device that can preempt calls in progress will use
the capability when it places an MLPP precedence call.
From the drop-down list box, choose a setting to assign to this device
profile from the following options:
Note
From the Login User ID drop-down list box, choose a valid login user
ID.
Note
97-7
Chapter 97
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
97-8
OL-18611-01
Chapter 97
Make sure that phone button template(s) are already configured before proceeding with the steps. See
the Configuring Phone Button Templates section on page 98-3 for more information.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To copy an existing device profile, locate the appropriate device profile as described in Finding a
Device Profile section on page 97-8, click the Copy button next to the device profile that you want
to copy and continue with Step 5.
To add a new device profile, click the Add New button. The Device Profile Configuration window
displays. Continue with Step 3.
To update an existing device profile, locate the appropriate device profile as described in Finding
a Device Profile section on page 97-8, and continue with Step 5.
Note
Before updating a device profile, make sure that the device profile that you want to update is
configured in Cisco Unified Communications Manager.
Step 3
From the Device Profile Type drop-down list box, choose a device type. Click Next.
Step 4
If the Select the device profile protocol drop-down list box displays, choose the protocol for the device
profile. Click Next.
Step 5
Step 6
Click Save.
Step 7
From the Association Info pane, you can configure directory numbers, speed dials, and intercom
directory numbers for the device profile. Refer to the Directory Number Configuration section on
page 64-1, the Cisco Unified IP Phone Configuration section on page 91-1, and the Intercom
Directory Number Configuration section on page 56-1 for the appropriate settings as described in these
sections.
Step 8
If you click Modify Button Items, the Reorder Phone Button Configuration window opens. Use this
window if you need to manage the phone button template button items. Refer to the Modifying Phone
Button Template Button Items section on page 91-39 for the appropriate settings for this window.
Note
You must log in to a device for changes to a user device profile to take effect.
97-9
Chapter 97
Additional Configuration
You can use the links in the Related Links drop-down list box at the top, right corner of the Device Profile
Configuration window to perform additional configuration that is related to the device profile that you
created. Use the following links to configure additional items:
Add a New Line AppearanceTo add a new line appearance to a device profile, select this link
and click Go. The Directory Number Configuration window displays and allows you to configure a
new DN that will associate to this device profile. See Directory Number Configuration Settings
section on page 64-1 for the details of the fields in this window.
Add/Update Speed DialsTo add or update the speed dial settings that are associated with a device
profile, select this link and click Go. The Speed Dial and Abbreviated Dial Configuration window
opens and allows you to configure the speed dial settings that will associate to this device profile.
See Configuring Speed-Dial Buttons or Abbreviated Dialing section on page 91-34 for
configuration details of this window.
Add/Update Busy Lamp Field Speed DialsTo add or update the busy lamp field speed dial
settings that are associated with a device profile, select this link and click Go. The Busy Lamp Field
Speed Dial Configuration window opens and allows you to configure the busy lamp field speed dial
settings that will associate to this device profile. See Configuring BLF/SpeedDial Buttons in the
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide for configuration details of
this window.
Add/Update Busy Lamp Field Directed Call ParkTo add or update the busy lamp field directed
call park settings that are associated with a device profile, select this link and click Go. The Busy
Lamp Field Directed Call Park Configuration window opens and allows you to configure the busy
lamp field/directed call park settings that will associated to this device profile. See BLF/Directed
Call Park Configuration Settings in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and
Services Guide for configuration details of this window.
Add/Update Service URL ButtonsTo add or update the service URL buttons that are associated
with a device profile, select this link and click Go. The Configure Service URL Buttons window
opens and allows you to configure the service URL buttons that will associate to this device profile.
See the Configuring Service URL Buttons section on page 91-37 for configuration details of this
window.
Additional Information
97-10
OL-18611-01
Chapter 97
You cannot delete a device profile if it is assigned to devices. To find out which devices are using the
device profile, choose Dependency Records link from the Related Links drop-down list box in the
Device Profile Configuration window. If the dependency records are not enabled for the system, the
dependency records summary window displays a message. For more information about dependency
records, see the Accessing Dependency Records section on page A-2. If you try to delete a device
profile that is in use, Cisco Unified Communications Manager displays message. Before deleting a
device profile that is currently in use, you must perform either or both of the following tasks:
Assign a different device profile to any devices that are using the device profile that you want to
delete.
Delete the devices that are using the device profile that you want to delete.
Procedure
Step 1
Locate the user device profile that you want to delete. See the Finding a Device Profile section on
page 97-8.
Step 2
Step 3
To delete the device profile, click OK or, to cancel the deletion, click Cancel.
If a user device profile is configured as a default logout device profile, you cannot delete it. If
you want to delete a logout device profile, you must change it from a logout device profile and
configure another device profile as the logout device profile for that phone. After the user device
profile is no longer a logout device profile, you can delete it.
Note
Additional Information
Related Topics
Directory Numbers
97-11
Chapter 97
Related Topics
Barge and Privacy, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide
Presence
Call Park and Directed Call Park, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services
Guide
Phone Configuration
97-12
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
98
Configuring a Cisco Unified IP Phone Expansion Module Phone Button Template, page 98-5
98-1
Chapter 98
If you create a template for a Cisco Unified IP Phone, you can change the default template for that phone
during autoregistration. See the Updating Device Defaults section on page 94-2.
Before You Begin
If you are creating a custom, nonstandard phone button template, refer to the guidelines for creating new
phone button templates. Refer to the Guidelines for Customizing Phone Button Templates section in
the Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide.
Table 98-1 describes the phone button template configuration settings.
Table 98-1
Field
Description
Button Information
Feature
Choose the function of the phone button that you want to specify in the
template. The programmable line key feature provides multiple features
that can be assigned to line buttons; for example, MCID, DND, Call Park,
Call Pickup, and many more.
Note
Label
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your phone button template search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this
menu item, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your phone button template
search preferences until you modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
98-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 98
Note
Step 3
From the second drop-down list box, select whether to search for standard, non-standard, or both
types of phone button templates.
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Topics
98-3
Chapter 98
If you create a template for a Cisco Unified IP Phone, you can change the default template for that phone
during auto-registration. See the Updating Device Defaults section on page 94-2.
Before You Begin
If you are creating a custom, nonstandard phone button template, refer to the guidelines for creating new
phone button templates. See the Guidelines for Customizing Phone Button Templates section in the
Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Note
Renaming a template does not affect the phones that use that template. All Cisco Unified IP
Phones that use this template continue to use this template after it is renamed. You can rename
only phone button templates that display a check box in the left column. All other phone button
templates serve as standard, read-only templates.
To add a new phone button template, click the Add New button. The Phone Button Template
Configuration window displays. Continue with Step 3.
To update an existing phone button template, locate the appropriate phone as described in Finding
a Phone Button Template section on page 98-2. From the list of matching records, choose the phone
button template that you want to update. The Phone Button Template Configuration window
displays. Continue with Step 4.
Note
Step 3
To rename an existing phone button template, locate the appropriate phone button template as
described in Finding a Phone Button Template section on page 98-2. The Phone Button Template
Configuration page displays. In the Button Template Name field, enter the new name. Click Save.
The template redisplays with the new name.
When you update a template, the change affects all phones that use the template. You can update
only phone button templates that display a check box in the left column. All other phone button
templates serve as standard, read-only templates. After updating the template, you must restart
devices that are using the template by clicking Restart Devices
From the Phone Button Template drop-down list box, choose a template and click Copy to create a new
template.
The new template exactly duplicates the existing template. You must assign a new name for the new
template. Update this new template if you want it to differ from the original.
Step 4
Step 5
Click Save.
Additional Topics
98-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 98
Find the phone button template by using the procedure in the Finding a Phone Button Template section
on page 98-2.
Step 2
From the list of matching records, locate the Standard 7960 (for SCCP or SIP) phone button template
and click the Copy icon.
Step 3
For Button Template Name, enter a unique name for the phone button template (for example, Expansion
Module 1).
Step 4
Click Save.
Step 5
Update the appropriate settings for Feature and Label as described in Table 98-1 (the button template
name that you just created will already display).
Step 6
Click Save.
Additional Topics
You can delete phone templates that are not currently assigned to any phone in your system. You cannot
delete a template that is assigned to one or more devices or device profiles or the default template for a
model (which is specified in the Device Defaults Configuration window).
To find out which devices are using the phone button template, choose Dependency Records link from
the Related Links drop-down list box in the Phone Button Template Configuration window and click Go.
If the dependency records are not enabled for the system, the dependency records summary window
displays a message. For more information about dependency records, see the Accessing Dependency
Records section on page A-2. If you try to delete a phone button template that is in use, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager displays a message. Before deleting a phone button template that is currently
in use, you must perform either or both of the following tasks:
Assign a different phone button template to any devices that are using the phone button template that
you want to delete. See the Deleting a Phone section on page 91-33.
Delete the devices that are using the phone button template that you want to delete. See the Deleting
a Phone section on page 91-33.
98-5
Chapter 98
Related Topics
Procedure
Step 1
Find the phone button template by using the procedure in the Finding a Phone Button Template section
on page 98-2.
Step 2
From the list of matching records, choose the phone button template that you want to delete.
You can delete only phone button templates that display a check box in the left column. All other
phone button templates serve as standard, read-only templates.
Note
Click Delete.
You can delete multiple nonstandard phone button templates from the Find and List Phone
Button Templates window by checking the check boxes next to the appropriate phone button
templates and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all phone button templates in the window
by clicking Select All and Delete Selected. You can delete only phone button templates that
display a check box in the left column. All other phone button templates serve as standard,
read-only templates
Note
Step 5
Additional Topics
Related Topics
Configuring a Cisco Unified IP Phone Expansion Module Phone Button Template, page 98-5
Guidelines for Customizing Phone Button Templates, Cisco Unified Communications Manager
System Guide
98-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 98
98-7
Chapter 98
Related Topics
98-8
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
99
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your softkey template search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu
item, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your softkey template search
preferences until you modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
99-1
Chapter 99
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
From the third drop-down list box, select whether to search for standard, non-standard, or both types
of softkey templates.
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
Step 2
99-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 99
Step 3
From the drop-down list box, select a softkey template and click Copy to create a new template.
The Softkey Template Configuration window redisplays and contains the fields in which to enter a
unique softkey template name and description. The window displays the applications that are associated
with the softkey template that you are copying.
Step 4
In the Softkey Template Name field, enter a unique name to identify the softkey template.
Step 5
Step 6
To designate this softkey template as the standard softkey template, click the Default Softkey Template
check box.
Note
Step 7
If you designate a softkey template as the default softkey template, you will not be able to delete
this softkey template unless you first remove the default designation.
Click Save.
The softkey template gets copied, and the Softkey Template Configuration window redisplays.
Step 8
If you want to add additional application softkeys to the nonstandard softkey template, see the Adding
Application Softkeys to Nonstandard Softkey Templates section on page 99-3.
Step 9
To configure the positions of the softkeys on the Cisco Unified IP Phone LCD screen, see the
Configuring Softkey Positions in a Nonstandard Softkey Template section on page 99-4.
Step 10
Additional Information
Find the softkey template by using the procedure in the Finding a Softkey Template section on
page 99-1.
Step 2
From the list of matching records, choose the softkey template to which you want to add application
softkeys.
Note
You can modify only softkey templates that display a check box in the left column. All other
softkey templates are standard, read-only templates.
99-3
Chapter 99
Step 3
To add additional application softkeys to the nonstandard softkey template, click the Add Application
button.
The Add Application window displays.
Step 4
Choose the standard softkey template that you want added to the nonstandard softkey template.
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
To make the updates of the softkey template take effect on the phone, click Apply Config. For more
information about the Apply Config button, see the Synchronizing a Softkey Template Configuration
With Affected Devices section on page 99-8.
Additional Information
Find the softkey template by using the procedure in the Finding a Softkey Template section on
page 99-1.
Step 2
From the list of matching records, choose the softkey template in which you want to configure softkey
positions.
Note
You can modify only softkey templates that display a check box in the left column. All other
softkey templates are standard, read-only templates.
To configure the positions of the softkeys on the Cisco Unified IP Phone LCD screen, choose Configure
Softkey Layout from the Related Links drop-down list box; then, click Go.
The Softkey Layout Configuration window displays. The Select a call state to configure drop-down list
box lists each Cisco Unified Communications Manager call state for an IP phone.
Step 4
To configure the softkey positions for a call state, choose the call state from the Select a call state to
configure drop-down list box.
99-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 99
The Softkey Layout Configuration window redisplays, and the Unselected Softkeys pane and Selected
Softkeys pane display softkeys that are applicable to the call state that you chose.
Tip
To create a relative place holder for a softkey, add the Undefined softkey. This allows the softkey
that you added to occupy the same softkey position in all call states.
Step 5
To move softkeys from one list to the other, use the right and left arrows between the panes.
Step 6
To rearrange the positions of the Selected Softkeys, use the up and down arrows to the right of the
Selected Softkeys pane.
Step 7
Step 8
To return to the Softkey Template Configuration window, choose the Softkey Template Configuration
link from the Related Links drop-down list box in the top, right-hand corner; then, click Go.
Step 9
Step 10
To make the updates of the softkey template take effect on the phone, click Apply Config. For more
information about the Apply Config button, see the Synchronizing a Softkey Template Configuration
With Affected Devices section on page 99-8.
Additional Information
Additional Information
99-5
Chapter 99
Find the softkey template by using the procedure in the Finding a Softkey Template section on
page 99-1.
Step 2
From the list of matching records, choose the softkey template that you want to rename.
Note
You can rename only softkey templates that display a check box in the left column. All other
softkey templates are standard, read-only templates.
Step 4
Click Save.
The Softkey Template Configuration window redisplays with the new softkey template name.
Additional Information
You cannot delete a nonstandard softkey template that is currently assigned to a device or device pool.
To find out which devices and device pools are using the nonstandard softkey template, choose
Dependency Records from the Related Links drop-down list box in the Softkey Configuration window
and click Go. If the dependency records are not enabled for the system, the dependency records summary
window displays a message. For more information about dependency records, see the Accessing
Dependency Records section on page A-2. If you try to delete a nonstandard softkey template that is in
use, Cisco Unified Communications Manager displays a message. Before deleting a nonstandard softkey
template that is currently in use, you must perform either or both of the following tasks:
Assign a different softkey template to any devices or device pools that are using the nonstandard
softkey template that you want to delete. See the Deleting a Phone section on page 91-33.
Delete the devices that are using the nonstandard softkey template that you want to delete. See the
Deleting a Phone section on page 91-33.
Procedure
Step 1
Find the softkey template by using the procedure in the Finding a Softkey Template section on
page 99-1.
99-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 99
Step 2
From the list of matching records, choose the softkey template that you want to delete.
Note
You can delete only softkey templates that display a check box in the left column. All other
softkey templates represent standard, read-only templates.
Click Delete.
Note
You can delete multiple softkey templates from the Find and List Softkey Templates window by
checking the check boxes next to the appropriate softkey templates and clicking Delete Selected.
You can delete all softkey templates in the window by clicking Select All and then clicking
Delete Selected.
Click OK.
The Softkey Template Configuration window redisplays with the softkey template deleted.
Additional Information
Find the softkey template by using the procedure in the Finding a Softkey Template section on
page 99-1.
Step 2
From the list of matching records, choose the softkey template that you want to update.
Note
You can update only softkey templates that display a check box in the left column. All other
softkey templates represent standard, read-only templates.
Update the settings that you want changed (such as adding an application softkey set or the softkey
layout). See the Adding Application Softkeys to Nonstandard Softkey Templates section on page 99-3
and the Configuring Softkey Positions in a Nonstandard Softkey Template section on page 99-4.
99-7
Chapter 99
Step 4
Click Save.
The Softkey Template Configuration window redisplays with the softkey template updated.
Step 5
To apply the updated softkey template to affected devices, click Apply Config. For more information
about the Apply Config button, see the Synchronizing a Softkey Template Configuration With Affected
Devices section on page 99-8.
Additional Information
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
The window displays a list of softkey templates that match the search criteria.
Step 4
Click the softkey template to which you want to synchronize applicable devices. The Softkey Template
Configuration window displays.
Step 5
Step 6
Click Save.
Step 7
Step 8
Click OK.
Additional Information
Assign the softkey template to a common device configuration and then assign the common device
configuration to the phone in the Phone Configuration window.
99-8
OL-18611-01
Chapter 99
Assign the softkey template to the phone in the Softkey Template field in the Phone Configuration
window.
For more information about configuring a common device configuration and phones, refer to the
Configuring a Common Device Configuration section on page 102-7and the Configuring Cisco
Unified IP Phones section on page 91-27.
Related Topics
99-9
Chapter 99
Related Topics
99-10
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
100
Note
Cisco Unified IP Phones 7912 and 7905 only support text-based XML applications.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager provides sample IP phone services applications. You can also
create customized Cisco Unified IP Phone applications for your site.
After you configure the list of services, you can add services to the phones in the database and assign
them to phone buttons. In Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration, you can view and
modify settings for phones and device profiles. Users can log on to the Cisco Unified CM User Options
application and subscribe to these services for their Cisco Unified IP Phones.
This section covers the following topics:
100-1
Chapter 100
Note
Cisco Unified IP Phones 7912 and 7905 only support text-based XML applications.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager provides sample IP phone services applications. You can also
create customized Cisco Unified IP Phone applications for your site.
After you configure the list of services, you can add services to the phones in the database and assign
them to phone buttons. In Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration, you can view and
modify settings for phones and device profiles. Users can log on to Cisco Unified CM User Options and
subscribe to these services for their Cisco Unified IP Phones.
Table 100-1 describes the IP phone service configuration settings. See Table 100-2 for information about
the IP phone service parameter settings. For more information about related procedures, see the Related
Topics section on page 100-9.
Table 100-1
Field
Description
Service Information
Service Name
Enter the name of the service to display if the phone cannot display
Unicode.
Service Description
Service URL
Enter the URL of the server where the IP phone services application
is located. Make sure that this server remains independent of the
servers in your Cisco Unified Communications Manager cluster. Do
not specify a Cisco Unified Communications Manager server or any
server that is associated with Cisco Unified Communications Manager
(such as a TFTP server or directory database publisher server).
For the services to be available, the phones in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager cluster must have network connectivity to
the server.
Service Category
Service Type
Service Vendor
For Java MIDlet services, enter the service vendor that exactly
matches the vendor that is defined in the JAD file.
For XML services, you can leave this field blank.
Service Version
You can leave this field blank for XML and Java MIDlet services. If
you enter a value for a Java MIDlet service, the value must exactly
match the version that is defined in the JAD file; otherwise, the
MIDlet will not install or execute.
100-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 100
Table 100-1
Field
Description
Enable
Select this check box to enable the service, or deselect the check box
to disable the service without deleting it.
Note
Enterprise Subscriptions
Select this check box to automatically provision the new service to all
devices in the enterprise without requiring individual subscription. If
this option is selected, the service automatically gets provisioned and
does not get presented for user subscription.
Note
Tip
If you remove an IP phone service parameter or change the parameter name of a phone service for a
phone service to which users are subscribed, be sure to click Update Subscriptions to update all
currently subscribed users with the changes. If you do not do so, users must resubscribe to the service
to rebuild the URL correctly.
When you subscribe devices to the IP phone service, an error results if you click Update Subscriptions
more than once. When you update many phones, it can take some time for the changes to propagate to
all devices. Click Update Subscriptions only once and wait for this propagation to complete.
Table 100-2 describes the IP phone service parameter settings. For more information about related
procedures, see the Related Topics section on page 100-9.
Table 100-2
Field
Description
Enter the exact query string parameter to use when you build the
subscription URL; for example, symbol.
Default Value
Enter the default value for the parameter. This value displays to the user
when a service is being subscribed to for the first time; for example,
CSCO.
100-3
Chapter 100
Table 100-2
Field
Description
Parameter Description
Enter a description of the parameter. The user can access the text that is
entered here while the user is subscribing to the service. The parameter
description should provide information or examples to help users input
the correct value for the parameter.
Parameter is Required
If the user must enter data for this parameter before the subscription can
be saved, check the Parameter is Required check box.
Parameter is a Password
(mask contents)
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your IP phone service search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu
item, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your IP phone service search
preferences until you modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
100-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 100
Step 3
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
Caution
Do not put IP phone services on any Cisco Unified Communications Manager server at your site or any
server that is associated with Cisco Unified Communications Manager, such as the TFTP server or
directory database publisher server. This precaution eliminates the possibility that errors in an IP phone
service application will have an impact on Cisco Unified Communications Manager performance or
interrupt call-processing services.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To add an IP phone service, click the Add New button. The IP phone services Configuration window
displays. Continue with Step 3.
To update an existing IP phone service (for example, to change the service URL or other
information), locate the appropriate IP phone service as described in Finding an IP Phone Service
section on page 100-4. Click the name of the IP phone service that you want to update and continue
with Step 3.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Save.
You can add, update, or delete parameters as needed as described in Configuring an IP Phone Service
Parameter section on page 100-7 and Deleting an IP Phone Service Parameter section on page 100-8.
100-5
Chapter 100
Step 5
If the service was modified after subscriptions existed, click Update Subscriptions to rebuild all
user subscriptions. You must update subscriptions if you changed the service URL, removed a phone
service parameter, or changed the Parameter Name for a phone service parameter.
Note
If you change the service URL, remove an IP phone service parameter, or change the name
of a phone service parameter for a phone service to which users are subscribed, be sure to
click Update Subscriptions to update all currently subscribed users with the changes. If you
do not do so, users must resubscribe to the service to rebuild the URL correctly.
If the service is new and you do not need to rebuild user subscriptions, click Save.
Additional Information
When you delete an IP phone service, Cisco Unified Communications Manager removes all service
information, user subscriptions, and user subscription data from the database. To find out which devices
are using the IP phone service, from the IP phone service Configuration window, choose Dependency
Records from the Related Records drop-down list box and click Go. If the dependency records are not
enabled for the system, the dependency records summary window displays a message. For more
information about dependency records, see the Accessing Dependency Records section on page A-2.
If you try to delete an IP phone service that is in use, Cisco Unified Communications Manager displays
a message. Before deleting an IP phone service that is currently in use, you must perform either or both
of the following tasks:
Assign a different IP phone service to any devices that are using the IP phone service that you want
to delete. See the Deleting a Phone section on page 91-33.
Delete the devices that are using the IP phone service that you want to delete. See the Deleting a
Phone section on page 91-33.
Procedure
Step 1
Find the IP phone service by using the procedure in the Finding an IP Phone Service section on
page 100-4.
Step 2
Click the name of the IP phone service that you want to delete.
The IP phone services Configuration window displays.
Step 3
Click Delete.
You receive a message that asks you to confirm the deletion.
100-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 100
Step 4
Click OK.
The window refreshes, and the IP phone service gets deleted from the database.
Additional Information
Find the IP phone service by using the procedure in the Finding an IP Phone Service section on
page 100-4.
Step 2
From the IP phone services list, choose the service to which you want to add parameters or update
existing parameters.
The IP phone services Configuration window displays.
Step 3
Step 4
To add a new phone service parameter, click the New button to the right of the Parameters list box.
The Configure IP phone service Parameter window displays. Continue with Step 4.
To update an existing parameter, choose the name of the parameter that you want to update in the
Parameters list box. Click Edit and continue with Step 4.
Step 5
If the service was modified after subscriptions existed, click Update Subscriptions to rebuild all
user subscriptions. You must update subscriptions if you changed the service URL, removed a phone
service parameter, or changed the name for a phone service parameter.
100-7
Chapter 100
Note
If you remove an IP phone service parameter or change the parameter name of a phone service
for a phone service to which users are subscribed, be sure to click Update Subscriptions to
update all currently subscribed users with the changes. If you do not do so, users must
resubscribe to the service to rebuild the URL correctly.
When you subscribe devices to the IP phone service, an error results if you click Update
Subscriptions more than once. When you update many phones, it can take some time for the
changes to propagate to all devices. Click Update Subscriptions only once and wait for this
propagation to complete.
If the service is new and you do not need to rebuild user subscriptions, click Save.
Additional Information
Note
If you remove a phone service parameter or modify the Parameter Name of a phone service parameter
for a phone service to which users are subscribed, you must click Update Subscriptions to update all
currently subscribed users with the changes. If you do not do so, users must resubscribe to the service
to rebuild the URL correctly.
Procedure
Step 1
Find the IP phone service by using the procedure in the Finding an IP Phone Service section on
page 100-4.
Step 2
From the IP phone services list, choose the phone service whose parameters you want to delete.
Step 3
In the Parameters list box, choose the name of the parameter that you want to delete.
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
If the service was modified after subscriptions existed, click Update Subscriptions to rebuild all
user subscriptions. You must update subscriptions if you changed the service URL, removed a phone
service parameter, or changed the Parameter Name for a phone service parameter.
If you click Update Subscriptions more than once, an error occurs. When you update many phones,
it can take some time for the changes to propagate to all devices. You must click Update
Subscriptions only once and wait for this propagation to complete.
100-8
OL-18611-01
Chapter 100
If the service is new and you do not need to rebuild user subscriptions, click Save.
Additional Information
Add the service to Cisco Unified Communications Manager (see Configuring an IP Phone Service,
page 100-5).
Step 2
Customize a phone button template by configuring a Service URL button (refer to the Configuring
Phone Button Templates section on page 98-3).
Step 3
Add the customized phone button template to the phone (refer to the Configuring Cisco Unified IP
Phones section on page 91-27).
Step 4
Subscribe the service to the phone (refer to the Configuring IP Phone Services section on page 91-35).
Step 5
Add the service URL to a phone button (refer to the Configuring Service URL Buttons section on
page 91-37).
Additional Information
Related Topics
Cisco Unified IP Phone Services, Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide
100-9
Chapter 100
Related Topics
100-10
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
101
Field
Description
Name
Enter a name to identify the SIP profile; for example, SIP_7905. The
value can include 1 to 50 characters, including alphanumeric characters,
dot, dash, and underscores.
Description
This field identifies the purpose of the SIP profile; for example, SIP for
7970.
101-1
Chapter 101
Table 101-1
Field
Description
This field specifies the default payload type for RFC2833 telephony
event. See RFC 2833 for more information. In most cases, the default
value specifies the appropriate payload type. Be sure that you have a firm
understanding of this parameter before changing it, as changes could
result in DTMF tones not being received or generated. The default value
specifies 101 with range from 96 to 127.
The value of this parameter affects calls with the following conditions:
For the calling SIP trunk, the Media Termination Point Required
check box is checked on the SIP Trunk Configuration window.
Resource Priority
Namespace List
The Early Offer for G.Clear Calls feature supports both standards-based
G.Clear (CLEARMODE) and proprietary Cisco Session Description
Protocols (SDP).
To enable or disable Early Offer for G.Clear Calls, choose one of the
following options:
Redirect by Application
Disabled
CLEARMODE
CCD
G.nX64
X-CCD
Checking this check box and configuring this SIP Profile on the SIP trunk
allows the Cisco Unified Communications Manager administrator to
Apply digit analysis to the redirected contacts to make sure that the
call get routed correctly.
101-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 101
Table 101-1
Field
Description
Disable Early Media on 180 By default, Cisco Unified Communications Manager will signal the
calling phone to play local ringback if SDP is not received in the 180 or
183 response. If SDP is included in the 180 or 183 response, instead of
playing ringback locally, Cisco Unified Communications Manager will
connect media, and the calling phone will play whatever the called device
is sending (such as ringback or busy signal). If you do not receive
ringback, the device to which you are connecting may be including SDP
in the 180 response, but it is not sending any media before the 200OK
response. In this case, check this check box to play local ringback on the
calling phone and connect the media upon receipt of the 200OK response
Note
The parameter applies to SIP trunks only, not phones that are
running SIP or other endpoints.
101-3
Chapter 101
Table 101-1
Field
Description
Enable ANAT
This option allows a dual-stack SIP trunk to offer both IPv4 and IPv6
media.
When you check both the Enable ANAT and the MTP Required check
boxes, Cisco Unified Communications Manager inserts a dual-stack
MTP and sends out an offer with two m-lines, one for IPv4 and another
for IPv6. If a dual- stack MTP cannot be allocated, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager sends an INVITE without SDP.
When you check the Enable ANAT check box and the Media Termination
Point Required check box is unchecked, Cisco Unified Communications
Manager sends an INVITE without SDP.
When the Enable ANAT and Media Termination Point Required check
boxes display as unchecked (or when an MTP cannot be allocated), Cisco
Unified Communications Manager sends an INVITE without SDP.
When you uncheck the Enable ANAT check box but you check the Media
Termination Point Required check box, consider the information, which
assumes that an MTP can be allocated:
This field specifies the time, in seconds, after which a SIP INVITE
expires. The Expires header uses this value. Valid values include any
positive number; 180 specifies the default.
This field specifies the value that the phone that is running SIP will send
in the Expires header of the REGISTER message. Valid values include
any positive number; however, 3600 (1 hour) specifies the default value.
In the 200OK response to REGISTER, Cisco Unified Communications
Manager will include an Expires header with the configured value of the
SIP Station KeepAlive Interval service parameter. This value in the
200OK determines the time, in seconds, after which the registration
expires. The phone will refresh the registration Timer Register Delta
seconds before the end of this interval.
101-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 101
Table 101-1
Field
Description
Timer T1 (msec)
Timer T2 (msec)
Retry INVITE
Retry Non-INVITE
This field specifies the maximum number of times that a SIP message
other than an INVITE request will be retransmitted. Valid values include
any positive number. Default specifies 10.
This field designates the start real-time protocol (RTP) port for media.
Media port ranges from 16384 to 32766. Default specifies 16384.
This field designates the stop real-time protocol (RTP) port for media.
Media port ranges from 16384 to 32766. Default specifies 32766.
This URI provides a unique address that the phone that is running SIP
will send to Cisco Unified Communications Manager to invoke the call
pickup feature.
This URI provides a unique address that the phone that is running SIP
will send to Cisco Unified Communications Manager to invoke the call
pickup group other feature.
This URI provides a unique address that the phone that is running SIP
will send to Cisco Unified Communications Manager to invoke the call
pickup group feature.
This URI provides a unique address that the phone that is running SIP
will send to Cisco Unified Communications Manager to invoke the meet
me conference feature.
User Info
DTMF DB Level
ipThe value user=ip gets inserted in the To, From, and Contact
Headers for REGISTER.
This field specifies in-band DTMF digit tone level. Valid values follow:
1 to 6 dB below nominal
2 to 3 dB below nominal
3 nominal
4 to 3 dB above nominal
5 to 6 dB above nominal
101-5
Chapter 101
Table 101-1
Field
Description
If you have a call on hold and are talking on another call, when you hang
up the call, this parameter causes the phone to ring to let you know that
you still have another party on hold. Valid values follow:
Caller ID Blocking
Off permanently and cannot be turned on and off locally by using the
user interface.
This field sets the Do Not Disturb (DND) feature. Valid values follow:
Cisco Unified IP Phones 7940 and 7960 do not support ssh for login
access or HTTP that is used to collect logs; however, these phones
support Telnet, which lets the user control the phone, collect debugs, and
look at configuration settings. This field controls the telnet_level
configuration parameter with the following possible values:
101-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 101
Table 101-1
Field
Description
Maximum Redirections
This field specifies the time in microseconds that passes when the phone
goes off hook and the first digit timer gets set. The value ranges from 0 15,000 microseconds. Default specifies 15,000 microseconds.
This URI provides a unique address that the phone that is running SIP
will send to Cisco Unified Communications Manager to invoke the call
forward feature.
This URI provides a unique address that the phone that is running SIP
will send to Cisco Unified Communications Manager to invoke the
abbreviated dial feature.
Speed dials that are not associated with a line key (abbreviated dial
indices) will not download to the phone. The phone will use the feature
indication mechanism (INVITE with Call-Info header) to indicate when
an abbreviated dial number has been entered. The request URI will
contain the abbreviated dial digits (for example, 14), and the Call-Info
header will indicate the abbreviated dial feature. Cisco Unified
Communications Manager will translate the abbreviated dial digits into
the configured digit string and extend the call with that string. If no digit
string has been configured for the abbreviated dial digits, a 404 Not
Found response gets returned to the phone.
This check box determines whether the Cisco Unified IP Phones 7940 or
7960, when the conference initiator that is using that phone hangs up,
should attempt to join the remaining conference attendees. Check the
check box if you want to join the remaining conference attendees; leave
it unchecked if you do not want to join the remaining conference
attendees.
Note
Check this check box to enable setting connection address to 0.0.0.0 per
RFC2543 when call hold is signaled to Cisco Unified Communications
Manager. This allows backward compatibility with endpoints that do not
support RFC3264.
This check box determines whether the Cisco Unified IP Phones 7940
and 7960 caller can transfer the second leg of an attended transfer while
the call is ringing. Check the check box if you want semi-attended
transfer enabled; leave it unchecked if you want semi-attended transfer
disabled.
Note
101-7
Chapter 101
Table 101-1
Field
Description
Enable VAD
Check this check box if you want voice activation detection (VAD)
enabled; leave it unchecked if you want VAD disabled. When VAD is
enabled, no media gets transmitted when voice is detected.
Check this check box if you want stutter dial tone when the phone goes
off hook and a message is waiting; leave unchecked if you do not want a
stutter dial tone when a message is waiting.
This setting supports Cisco Unified IP Phones 7960 and 7940 that run
SIP.
Call Stats
Check this check box if you want RTP statistics in BYE requests and
responses enabled; leave unchecked if you want RTP statistics in BYE
requests and responses disabled.
If this check box is checked, the phone inserts the headers RTP-RxStat
and RTP-TxStat as follows:
RTP-RxStat:Dur=a,Pkt=b,Oct=c,LatePkt=d,LostPkt=e,AvgJit=f
RTP-TxStat: Dur=g,Pkt=h,Oct=i
where:
a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, and iIntegers
101-8
OL-18611-01
Chapter 101
Table 101-1
Field
Description
Cisco Unified Communications Manager only accepts calls from the SIP
device whose IP address matches the destination address of the
configured SIP trunk. In addition, the port on which the SIP message
arrives must match the one that is configured on the SIP trunk. After
Cisco Unified Communications Manager accepts the call, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager uses the configuration for this setting to
determine whether the call should get rerouted to another trunk.
From the drop-down list box, choose the method that Cisco Unified
Communications Manager uses to identify the SIP trunk where the call
gets rerouted:
Contact Info HeaderIf the SIP trunk uses a SIP proxy, choose this
option. Cisco Unified Communications Manager parses the contact
header in the incoming request and uses the IP address or domain
name and signaling port number that is specified in the header to
reroute the call to the SIP trunk that uses the IP address and port. If
no SIP trunk is identified, the call occurs on the trunk on which the
call arrived.
Tip
This setting does not work for SIP trunks that are connected to a
Cisco Unified Presence proxy server or SIP trunks that are
connected to originating gateways in different Cisco Unified CM
groups.
Profile name
Description
101-9
Chapter 101
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
101-10
OL-18611-01
Chapter 101
Step 2
To copy an existing SIP profile, locate the appropriate SIP profile as described in Finding SIP
Profiles section on page 101-9, click the Copy button next to the SIP profile that you want to copy
and continue with Step 3.
To add a new SIP profile, click the Add New button and continue with Step 3.
To update an existing SIP profile, locate the appropriate SIP profile as described in Finding SIP
Profiles section on page 101-9 and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Save.
Additional Information
To find out which devices are using the SIP profile, choose Dependency Records link from the Related
Links drop-down list box in the SIP Profile Configuration window. If the dependency records are not
enabled for the system, the dependency records summary window displays a message. For more
information about dependency records, see the Accessing Dependency Records section on page A-2.
Procedure
Step 1
Locate the SIP profile that you want to delete. See the Finding SIP Profiles section on page 101-9.
Step 2
Step 3
To delete the SIP profile, click OK or, to cancel the deletion, click Cancel.
Additional Information
From Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration, choose Device > Device Settings> SIP
Profile.
101-11
Chapter 101
Step 2
Locate the SIP profile that you want to reset. See the Finding SIP Profiles section on page 101-9.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Reset.
The Device Reset dialog displays.
Step 5
RestartRestarts the chosen devices without shutting them down (reregisters the phones and
trunks with Cisco Unified Communications Manager).
Additional Information
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
The window displays a list of SIP Profiles that match the search criteria.
Step 4
Click the SIP profile to which you want to synchronize applicable SIP devices. The SIP Profile
Configuration window displays.
Step 5
Step 6
Click Save.
Step 7
Step 8
Click OK.
Additional Information
101-12
OL-18611-01
Chapter 101
Related Topics
Understanding Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), Cisco Unified Communications Manager System
Guide
101-13
Chapter 101
Related Topics
101-14
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
102
Note
The Device Pool window now contains only location-related information. The Common Device
Configuration window records all the user-oriented information.
Use the following topics to configure common device configurations:
Note
The Device Pool window now contains only location-related information. The Common Device
Configuration window records all the user-oriented information.
Table 102-1 describes the common device configuration settings. For related procedures, see the
Deleting a Common Device Configuration section on page 102-8.
Table 102-1
Field
Description
Name
Softkey Template
From the drop-down list box, choose the softkey template for the common
device configuration.
102-1
Chapter 102
Table 102-1
Field
Description
User Hold MOH Audio Choose the audio source to use for MOH when a user initiates a hold action.
Source
Network Hold MOH
Audio Source
Choose the audio source to use for music on hold (MOH) when the network
initiates a hold action.
User Locale
From the drop-down list box, choose the locale for the common device
configuration. The user locale identifies a set of detailed information to
support users, including language and font.
Note
IP Addressing Mode
If the user does not choose a user locale, the locale that is specified
in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager clusterwide
parameters as Default User Locale applies.
Choose the version of IP address that the device (SIP trunk or phone that runs
SCCP) uses to connect to Cisco Unified Communications Manager. From
the drop-down list box, choose one of the following options:
IPv4 OnlyFor both media and signaling events, the device uses an
IPv4 address to connect to Cisco Unified Communications Manager. If
an IPv4 address is not available for the device, the call fails.
If you choose this option, the phone releases an IPv6 address. If you
choose this option, the SIP trunk uses an IPv4 address to connect to the
peer device.
IPv6 OnlyFor both media and signaling events, the device uses an
IPv6 address to connect to Cisco Unified Communications Manager. If
an IPv6 address is not available for the device, the call fails.
If you choose this option, the phone releases an IPv4 address. If you
choose this option, the SIP trunk uses an IPv6 address to connect to the
peer device.
Phones that run SIP do not support IPv6, so do not choose this option for
these phones. If you configure IPv6 Only as the IP Addressing Mode for
phones that run SIP, the Cisco TFTP service overrides the IP Addressing
Mode configuration and uses IPv4 Only in the configuration file.
102-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 102
Table 102-1
Field
Description
IP Addressing Mode
Preference for
Signaling
For dual-stack phones, which support both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, choose
the version of IP address that the phone prefers to establish a connection to
Cisco Unified Communications Manager during a signaling event. For
dual-stack SIP trunks, choose the version of IP address that the SIP trunk
uses to connect to the peer device for signaling events.
From the drop-down list box, choose one of the following options:
Allow
Auto-Configuration for
Phones
This drop-down list box supports IPv6 for dual-stack Cisco Unified IP
Phones that run SCCP. From the drop-down list box, choose one of the
following options:
Tip
OffThe phone obtains its IPv6 address and TFTP server address from
the DHCPv6 server.
102-3
Chapter 102
Table 102-1
Field
Description
Use Trusted Relay Point Check this check box to enable the devices that associate with this common
device configuration to use a trusted relay point.
A Trusted Relay Point (TRP) device designates an MTP or transcoder device
that is labeled as Trusted Relay Point.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager inserts a TRP for an endpoint if the
Use Trusted Relay Point check box is checked for the endpoint or for the
common device configuration with which the endpoint associates. The
endpoint device can comprise any device that terminates media, including
SIP, H.323, MGCP, and SCCP devices, such as phones that are running
SCCP, CTI devices, MoH servers, annunciators, and conference bridges.
If the Use Trusted Relay Point setting of a device specifies On or Off, the
device setting overrides the Use Trusted Relay Point setting from the
common device configuration with which the device associates.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager places the TRP closest to the
associated endpoint device if more than one resource is needed for the
endpoint (for example, a transcoder or RSVPAgent).
If both TRP and MTP are required for the endpoint, TRP gets used as the
required MTP. See the TRP Insertion in Cisco Unified Communications
Manager in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide for
details of call behavior.
If both TRP and RSVPAgent are needed for the endpoint, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager first tries to find an RSVPAgent that can also be
used as a TRP.
If both TRP and transcoder are needed for the endpoint, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager first tries to find a transcoder that is also
designated as a TRP.
Refer to the Trusted Relay Point section and its subtopics in the Media
Resource Management chapter of the Cisco Unified Communications
Manager System Guide for a complete discussion of network virtualization
and trusted relay points.
102-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 102
Table 102-1
Field
Description
MLPP Indication
This setting specifies whether devices that are capable of playing precedence
tones will use the capability when the devices place an MLPP precedence
call.
From the drop-down list box, choose a setting to assign to the devices from
the following options:
MLPP Preemption
Note
Note
This setting specifies whether devices that are capable of preempting calls in
progress will use the capability when the devices place an MLPP precedence
call.
From the drop-down list box, choose a setting to assign to the devices from
the following options:
Note
MLPP Domain
From the drop-down list box, choose an MLPP domain that is associated
with this common device configuration. If you leave the <None> setting,
devices inherit MLPP domains from the value set for the MLPP Domain
Identifier enterprise parameter.
102-5
Chapter 102
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your common device configuration search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return
to this menu item, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your common device
configuration search preferences until you modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
102-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 102
Step 2
To add a new common device configuration, click the Add New button and continue with Step 3.
To update an existing common device configuration, locate the appropriate common device
configuration as described in Finding a Common Device Configuration section on page 102-6 and
continue with Step 3.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Save.
Additional Information
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
The window displays a list of common device configurations that match the search criteria.
Step 4
Click the common device configuration to which you want to synchronize applicable devices. The
Common Device Configuration Information window displays.
Step 5
Step 6
Click Save.
Step 7
102-7
Chapter 102
Step 8
Click OK.
Additional Information
You cannot delete a common device configuration that a device uses. To find out which devices are using
the common device configuration, click the Dependency Records link from the Common Device
Configuration window. If the dependency records are not enabled for the system, the dependency records
summary window displays a message. For more information about dependency records, see the
Accessing Dependency Records section on page A-2. If you try to delete a common device
configuration that is in use, Cisco Unified Communications Manager displays a message. Before
deleting a common device configuration that is currently in use, you must perform either or both of the
following tasks:
Assign a different common device configuration to any devices that are using the common device
configuration that you want to delete.
Delete the devices that are using the common device configuration that you want to delete.
Procedure
Step 1
To locate the common device configuration that you want to delete, follow the procedure in Finding a
Common Device Configuration section on page 102-6.
Step 2
Check the check box next to the common device configurations that you want to delete. To select all the
common device configurations in the window, check the check box in the matching records title bar.
Step 3
Step 4
Additional Information
Related Topics
102-8
OL-18611-01
Chapter 102
102-9
Chapter 102
Related Topics
102-10
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
103
Note
To view field descriptions and help for product-specific configuration items, click the ? question icon in
the Product Specific Configuration area to display help in a popup window.
Select the Override Common Settings box for any setting in Product Specific Configuration area that
you wish to update. If you do not check this box, the corresponding parameter setting does not take
effect. Parameters that you set in the Product Specific Configuration area may also appear in the Device
Configuration window for various devices and in the Enterprise Phone Configuration window. If you set
these same parameters in these other windows too, the setting that takes precedence is determined in the
following order: 1) Device Configuration window settings, 2) Common Phone Profile window settings,
3) Enterprise Phone Configuration window settings.
103-1
Chapter 103
Table 103-1
Field
Description
Name
Description
Identify the purpose of the common phone profile; for example, common
phone profile for the 7905 phone.
Enter the password that is used to unlock a local phone. Valid values
comprise 1 to 15 characters.
DND Option
When you enable Do Not Disturb (DND) on the phone, this parameter
allows you to specify how the DND features handle incoming calls:
Ringer OffThis option turns off the ringer, but incoming call
information gets presented to the device, so the user can accept the
call.
Note
For 7940/7960 phones that are running SCCP, you can only
choose the Ringer Off option. For mobile devices and dual-mode
phones, you can only choose the Call Reject option. When you
activate DND Call Reject on a mobile device or dual-mode
phone, no call information gets presented to the device.
When you enable the DND Ringer Off or Call Reject option, this
parameter specifies how a call displays on a phone.
From the drop-down list, choose one of the following options:
Enable End User Access to Check this check box to enable end users to change the background
Phone Background Image image on phones that use this common phone profile.
Setting
103-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 103
Table 103-1
Field
Description
Enter the password for a secure shell user. Contact TAC for further
assistance.
Refer to the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Security Guide for
this release for information about how to configure encrypted phone
configuration files to ensure that Cisco Unified Communications
Manager does not send SSH passwords to the phone in the clear.
Phone Personalization
You must install and configure Phone Designer, so the phone user can
customize the phone. Before you install and configure Phone Designer,
identify which Cisco Unified IP Phone models work with Phone
Designer, as described in the Phone Designer documentation. For more
information on Phone Designer, refer to the Phone Designer
documentation.
103-3
Chapter 103
Table 103-1
Field
Description
From the drop-down list box, choose one of the following options:
OffWhen the phone is idle and receives a call on any line, the
phone user answers the call from the line on which the call is
received.
OnWhen the phone is idle (off hook) and receives a call on any
line, the primary line gets chosen for the call. Calls on other lines
continue to ring, and the phone user must select those other lines to
answer these calls.
Always Use Prime Line for From the drop-down list box, choose one of the following options:
Voice Message
OnIf the phone is idle, the primary line on the phone becomes the
active line for retrieving voice messages when the phone user presses
the Messages button on the phone.
Services Provisioning
OffIf the phone is idle, pressing the Messages button on the phone
automatically dials the voice-messaging system from the line that
has a voice message. Cisco Unified Communications Manager
always selects the first line that has a voice message. If no line has a
voice message, the primary line gets used when the phone user
presses the Messages button.
From the drop-down list box, choose whether the phone will use the
services provisioned in the phone configuration file (Internal), services
received from an external URL (External URL), or both.
The default specifies Internal. Select External URL if you are using an
external provisioning server or Both if are using an external server but
also want to allow users to subscribe to services in Cisco Unified
Communications Manager.
103-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 103
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
Step 2
To copy an existing common phone profile, locate the appropriate common phone profile as
described in Finding Common Phone Profiles section on page 103-4, click the Copy button next
to the common phone profile that you want to copy, and continue with Step 3.
To add a new common phone profile, click the Add New button and continue with Step 3.
103-5
Chapter 103
To update an existing common phone profile, locate the appropriate common phone profile as
described in Finding Common Phone Profiles section on page 103-4 and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Save.
Additional Information
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
The window displays a list of common phone profiles that match the search criteria.
Step 4
Click the common phone profile to which you want to synchronize applicable devices. The Common
Phone Profile Configuration window displays.
Step 5
Step 6
Click Save.
Step 7
Step 8
Click OK.
Additional Information
103-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 103
To find out which devices are using the common phone profile, choose Dependency Records link from
the Related Links drop-down list box in the Common Phone Profile Configuration window. If
dependency records are not enabled for the system, the dependency records summary window displays
a message. For more information about dependency records, see the Accessing Dependency Records
section on page A-2.
Procedure
Step 1
Locate the common phone profile that you want to delete. See the Finding Common Phone Profiles
section on page 103-4.
Note
Step 2
Step 3
To delete the common phone profile, click OK or, to cancel the deletion, click Cancel.
Additional Information
Related Topics
Understanding Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), Cisco Unified Communications Manager System
Guide
103-7
Chapter 103
Related Topics
103-8
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
104
104-1
Chapter 104
104-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
105
Field
Description
Name
Recording Calling
Search Space
From the drop-down list box, choose the calling search space that contains
the partition of the route pattern that is associated with the SIP trunk that is
configured for the recorder.
Recording Destination
Address
Enter the directory number (DN) or the URL of the recorder that associates
with this recording profile.
105-1
Chapter 105
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your recording profile search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu
item, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your recording profile search
preferences until you modify your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
105-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 105
Step 2
To add a new recording profile, click the Add New button and continue with Step 3.
To update an existing recording profile, locate the appropriate recording profile as described in
Finding a Recording Profile section on page 105-2 and continue with Step 3.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Save.
Additional Information
You cannot delete a recording profile that a line appearance uses. To find out which line appearances are
using the recording profile, choose Dependency Records from the Related Links drop-down list box that
is on the Recording Profile Configuration window. If the dependency records are not enabled for the
system, the dependency records summary window displays a message. For more information about
dependency records, see the Accessing Dependency Records section on page A-2. If you try to delete
a recording profile that is in use, Cisco Unified Communications Manager displays a message. Before
deleting a recording profile that is currently in use, you must perform either or both of the following
tasks:
Assign a different recording profile to any line appearances that are using the recording profile that
you want to delete.
Delete the line appearances that are using the recording profile that you want to delete.
Procedure
Step 1
To locate the recording profile that you want to delete, follow the procedure in Finding a Recording
Profile section on page 105-2.
Step 2
Check the check box next to the recording profiles that you want to delete. To select all the recording
profiles in the window, check the check box in the matching records title bar.
Step 3
105-3
Chapter 105
Related Topics
Step 4
Additional Information
Related Topics
105-4
OL-18611-01
A R T
Application Configuration
CH A P T E R
106
106-1
Chapter 106
106-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
107
107-1
Chapter 107
107-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
108
108-1
Chapter 108
108-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
109
109-1
Chapter 109
109-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
110
Plug-in Configuration
This section contains the following topics:
Field
Description
Plugin Settings
Plugin Name
URL
Custom URL
Check this check box to show the plug-in on the user option window.
110-1
Chapter 110
Plug-in Configuration
Installing Plug-ins
Installing Plug-ins
Tip
After Cisco Unified Communications Manager upgrades, you must reinstall all plug-ins except the Cisco
CDR Analysis and Reporting plug-in.
Before you install any plug-ins, disable all intrusion detection or antivirus services that run on the server
where you plan to install the plug-in.
Perform the following procedure to install any plug-in.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
From the third drop-down list box, select Application Menu, Installation, User Menu, or Telecaster
Menu.
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
110-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 110
Plug-in Configuration
Updating the Plugin URL
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Click the Save icon that displays in the tool bar in the upper, left corner of the window (or click the Save
button that displays at the bottom of the window) to update and save the URL.
Additional Information
Related Topics
110-3
Chapter 110
Plug-in Configuration
Related Topics
110-4
OL-18611-01
A R T
CH A P T E R
111
Note
Upgrades from 5.x releases automatically migrate end user passwords and PINs.
Upgrades from 4.x releases assign a default password and PIN to end users during installation.
The system does not support empty (null) credentials. If your system uses LDAP authentication, you
must configure end user default credentials immediately after installation, or logins will fail.
You can also assign a new user credential policy, manage user authentication events, or view credential
information for a user in the user configuration windows. For more information, see Managing
Application User Credential Information section on page 113-9 for application users and Managing
End User Credential Information section on page 114-12 for end users.
111-1
Chapter 111
Table 111-1 describes the credential policy default configuration settings. See the Related Topics
section on page 111-4 for related information and procedures.
Table 111-1
Field
Description
Credential User
This field displays the user type for the policy that you selected in the
Find and List Credential Policy Defaults window.
You cannot change this field.
Credential Type
This field displays the credential type for the policy that you selected in
the Find and List Credential Policy Defaults window.
You cannot change this field.
Credential Policy
Change Credential
Confirm Credential
For verification, reenter the login credential that you entered in the
Change Credential field.
Check this check box to block users that are assigned this policy from
changing this credential.
You cannot check this check box when User Must Change at Next Login
is checked. The default setting for this check box specifies unchecked.
Check this check box to require users that are assigned this policy to
change this credential at next login. Use this option after you assign a
temporary credential.
You cannot check this check box when the User Cannot Change check
box is checked. The default setting for this check box specifies
unchecked.
Check this check box to block the system from prompting the user to
change this credential. You can use this option for low-security users or
group accounts.
If this check box is checked, the user can still change this credential at
any time. When this check box is unchecked, the expiration setting in the
associated credential policy applies.
The default setting for this check box specifies unchecked.
111-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 111
Step 2
Additional Information
Note
Upgrades from 5.x releases automatically migrate application and end user passwords and PINs.
Before You Begin
To assign a default credential policy other than the predefined Default Credentials Policy, you must first
create the policy. Go to the Configuring a Credential Policy section on page 112-4 if you have not yet
created the policy you want to use.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Enter the appropriate settings, as described in Table 111-1, using these guidelines:
To change the applied credential policy, select the policy from the drop-down list box.
To change the default credential, enter and confirm the new credential in the appropriate fields.
Next Steps
To assign a new user credential policy, manage user authentication events, or view credential
information for a user, use these procedures:
111-3
Chapter 111
Related Topics
The Bulk Administration Tool (BAT) allows administrators to define common credential parameters,
such as passwords and PINs, for a group of users in the BAT User Template. Refer to the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Bulk Administration Guide for more information.
End users can change PINs at the phone user pages; end users can change passwords at the phone user
pages when LDAP authentication is not enabled. Refer to the documentation for your Cisco Unified IP
Phone for more information.
Additional Information
Related Topics
Application Users and End Users, Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide
Cisco Extension Mobility, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide
111-4
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
112
The system provides trivial credential checks to disallow credentials that are easily hacked. You enable
trivial credential checks by checking the Check for Trivial Passwords check box in the Credential Policy
Configuration window.
112-1
Chapter 112
Passwords can contain any alphanumeric ASCII character and all ASCII special characters. A non-trivial
password meets the following criteria:
Must contain three of the four allowable characteristics: uppercase character, lowercase character,
number, symbol.
Must not use a character or number more than three times consecutively.
Cannot consist of consecutive characters or numbers (for example, passwords such as 654321 or
ABCDEFG)
PINs can contain digits (0-9) only. A non-trivial PIN meets the following criteria:
Must not use the same number more than two times consecutively.
Must not repeat or include the user extension or mailbox or the reverse of the user extension or
mailbox.
Must contain three different numbers; for example, a PIN such as 121212 is trivial.
Must not match the numeric representation (that is, dial by name) for the first or last name of the
user.
Must not contain groups of repeated digits, such as 408408, or patterns that are dialed in a straight
line on a keypad, such as 2580, 159, or 753.
Table 112-1
Field
Description
Display Name
Failed Logon / No Limit for Specify the number of allowed failed logon attempts. When this
Failed Logons
threshold is reached, the system locks the account.
Enter a number in the range 1-100. To allow unlimited failed logons,
enter 0 or check the No Limit for Failed Logons check box. Uncheck the
check box to enter a value greater than 0. The default setting specifies 3.
Reset Failed Logon
Attempts Every
Specify the number of minutes before the counter is reset for failed logon
attempts. After the counter resets, the user can try logging in again.
Enter a number in the range 1-120. The default setting specifies 30.
Lockout Duration /
Specify the number of minutes an account remains locked when the
Administrator Must Unlock number of failed logon attempts exceeds the specified threshold.
Enter a number in the range 1-1440. Enter 0 or check the Administrator
Must Unlock check box, so accounts will remain locked until an
administrator manually unlocks them. Uncheck the check box to enter a
value greater than 0. The default setting specifies 30.
Minimum Duration
Between Credential
Changes
Specify the number of minutes that are required before a user can change
credentials again.
Enter 0 to allow a user to change credentials at any time. Uncheck the
check box to enter a value greater than 0. The default setting specifies 0.
112-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 112
Table 112-1
Field
Description
Minimum Credential
Length
Stored Number of Previous Specify the number of previous user credentials to store. This setting
Credentials
prevents a user from configuring a recently used credential that is saved
in the user list
Enter a number in the range 0-25. If no previous credentials should be
stored, enter 0. The default setting specifies 12.
Inactive Days Allowed
Specify the number of days that a password can remain inactive before
the account gets locked.
Enter a number in the range 0-5000. The default setting specifies 0.
Enter a number in the range 0-90 to specify the number of days before a
user password expires to start warning notifications. The default setting
specifies 0.
Check this check box to require the system to disallow credential that are
easily hacked, such as common words, repeated character patterns, and
so on.
The default setting checks the check box.
Step 2
Additional Information
112-3
Chapter 112
Step 2
To add a new policy, click the Add New button or Add New icon in the Find window OR display a
credential policy from the list and click the Copy or Add New button or icon. When you click Add
New, the Credential Policy Configuration window displays with the default settings for each field.
When you click Copy, the Credential Policy Configuration window displays with the settings from
the displayed policy. Continue with Step 3.
To update an existing entry, click the policy to change. The Credential Policy Configuration window
displays with the current settings. Continue with Step 3.
Step 3
Step 4
Next Steps
To assign the new credential policy as a default policy for a credential type, follow the procedure
described in Assigning and Configuring Credential Policy Defaults section on page 111-3.
To assign the new credential policy to individual users, follow the procedures described in Managing
Application User Credential Information section on page 113-9 and Managing End User Credential
Information section on page 114-12.
Additional Information
Note
You cannot delete a credential policy if it is assigned as the default policy for end user passwords, end
user PINS, or application user passwords.
To find out which default policies use the credential policy, choose Dependency Records from the
Related Links drop-down list box in the Credential Policy Configuration window and click Go.
112-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 112
If the dependency records feature is not enabled for the system, the dependency records summary
window displays a message that shows the action that you can take to enable the dependency records.
The message also displays information about high CPU consumption that is related to the dependency
records feature. For more information about dependency records, see the Accessing Dependency
Records section on page A-2.
If you attempt to delete a credential policy that is in use, a message displays. To delete a credential policy
that is currently in use, you must either choose a different credential policy for the user or create and
assign a new policy, as described in Configuring a Credential Policy, page 112-4.
Procedure
Step 1
Find the credential policy to delete by using the procedure in the Finding a Credential Policy section
on page 112-3. From the list of records, click the policy that you want to delete.
You can delete entries from the Find and List window by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate entries and clicking the Delete Selected button or the Delete Selected icon. You can
delete all entries in the list by clicking the Select All button or the Select All icon and clicking
the Delete Selected button or the Delete Selected icon.
Note
Step 2
Click the Delete icon or the Delete button in the Credential Policy Configuration window to delete the
policy.
Step 3
When asked to confirm the delete operation, click OK to delete the policy.
Additional Information
Related Topics
112-5
Chapter 112
Related Topics
Application Users and End Users, Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide
Where to Find More Information, Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide
Cisco Unity Messaging Integration, Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide
Cisco Extension Mobility, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide
112-6
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
113
Adding an Administrator User to Cisco Unity or Cisco Unity Connection, page 113-7
Field
Description
113-1
Chapter 113
Table 113-1
Field
Description
Password
Confirm Password
Digest Credentials
Confirm Digest Credentials To confirm that you entered the digest credentials correctly, enter the
credentials in this field.
Edit Credential
The Edit Credential button displays after you add this user to the
database.
Click this button to manage credential information for this user. See
Managing Application User Credential Information section on
page 113-9.
Presence Group
If you are not using this application user with presence, leave the
default (None) setting for presence group.
From the drop-down list box, choose a Presence group for the application
user. The group selected specifies the destinations that the application
user, such as IPMASysUser, can monitor.
The Standard Presence group gets configured at installation. Presence
groups configured in Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Administration also appear in the drop-down list box.
Presence authorization works with presence groups to allow or block
presence requests between groups. Refer to the Presence chapter in the
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide
for information about configuring permissions between groups.
113-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 113
Table 113-1
Field
Description
Accept Presence
Subscription
Configure this field with the Presence feature for presence authorization.
If you enabled application-level authorization in the SIP Trunk Security
Profile Configuration applied to the trunk, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager performs application-level authorization.
Check this check box to authorize Cisco Unified Communications
Manager to accept presence requests that come from this SIP trunk
application user.
If you check this check box in the Application User Configuration
window and do not check the Enable Application Level Authorization
check box in the SIP Trunk Security Profile Configuration applied to the
trunk, Cisco Unified Communications Manager sends a 403 error
message to the SIP user agent that is connected to the trunk.
For more information on authorization, refer to the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Security Guide.
Accept Out-of-Dialog
REFER
Accept Unsolicited
Notification
113-3
Chapter 113
Table 113-1
Field
Description
Device Information
Available Devices
This list box displays the devices that are available for association with
this application user.
To associate a device with this application user, select the device and
click the Down arrow below this list box.
If the device that you want to associate with this application user does not
display in this pane, click one of these buttons to search for other devices:
Controlled Devices
Find more Pilot PointsClick this button to find more pilot points
to associate with this application user. The Find and List Pilot Points
window displays to enable a pilot point search.
This field lists the devices that are associated with the application user.
To remove a device, select the device name and click the Up arrow above
this list box. To add a device, select a device in the Available Devices list
box and click the Down arrow.
CAPF Information
Associated CAPF Profiles
This pane displays the Instance ID from the CAPF Profile that you
configured for this user. To view or update the profile, double-click the
Instance ID or click the Instance ID to highlight it; then, click View
Details. The Application User CAPF Profile Configuration window
displays with the current settings.
For information on how to configure the Application User CAPF Profile,
refer to the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Security Guide.
113-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 113
Table 113-1
Field
Description
Permissions Information
Groups
This list box displays after an application user record has been saved. The
list box displays the groups to which the application user belongs.
To add the user to one or more user groups, click the Add to User Group
button. The Find and List User Groups window opens as a separate
window. Locate the groups to which you want to add the user, click in the
check boxes beside those groups, and click Add Selected at the bottom
of the window. The Find and List User Groups window closes, and the
Application User Configuration window displays, now showing the
selected groups in the Groups list box.
To remove the user from a group, highlight the group in the Groups list
box and click the Remove from User Group button.
To view or update a group, double-click the group name or click the
group name to highlight it; then, click View Details. The User Group
Configuration window displays with the current settings.
For more information on finding and configuring user groups, see the
User Group Configuration section on page 116-1.
Roles
This list box displays after an application user has been added, the
Groups list box has been populated, and the user record saved. The list
box displays the roles that are assigned to the application user.
To view or update a role, double-click the role name or click the role
name to highlight it; then, click View Details. The Role Configuration
window displays with the current settings.
For more information on configuring roles, see the Role Configuration
section on page 115-1.
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration retains your search preferences until you modify your search
or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
113-5
Chapter 113
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All or matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by
choosing a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
Note
If you are adding an administrator account for Cisco Unity or Cisco Unity Connection, you must use the
same user name and password that you defined in Cisco Unity and Cisco Unity Connection
Administration.The user ID provides authentication between Cisco Unity or Cisco Unity Connection
and Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration.Refer to the applicable Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Integration Guide for Cisco Unity or Cisco Unity Connection.
You can configure a Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration application user as a Cisco
Unity or Cisco Unity Connection user by using the Create a Cisco Unity Application User option in the
Application User Configuration window. You can then configure any additional settings in Cisco Unity
or Cisco Unity Connection Administration.
113-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 113
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
When you have completed the user information, save your changes and add the user by clicking Save.
Step 5
To show the user privilege report for this application user, from the Related Links drop-down list box,
choose User Privilege Report and click Go.
The User Privilege window displays for this application user. Refer to the Viewing User Roles, User
Groups, and Permissions section on page 116-7 for details of the user privilege report.
After you display the user privilege report for this application user, you can return to the Application
User Configuration window for this application user. From the Related Links drop-down list box in the
User Privilege window, choose Back to Application User and click Go.
Next Steps
If you want to associate devices with this application user, continue with the Associating Devices to an
Application User procedure.
To manage credentials for this application user, continue with the Managing Application User
Credential Information procedure.
To add an administrator user to Cisco Unity or Cisco Unity Connection, continue with the procedure in
Adding an Administrator User to Cisco Unity or Cisco Unity Connection section on page 113-7.
Additional Information
113-7
Chapter 113
The Create Cisco Unity User link displays only if you install and configure the appropriate Cisco Unity
or Cisco Unity Connection software. Refer to the applicable Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Integration Guide for Cisco Unity or the applicable Cisco Unified Communications Manager SCCP
Integration Guide for Cisco Unity Connection.
Before You Begin
Ensure that you have defined an appropriate template for the user that you plan to push to Cisco Unity or
Cisco Unity Connection. For Cisco Unity Connection users, refer to the applicable User Moves, Adds, and
Changes Guide for Cisco Unity Connection. For Cisco Unity users, refer to the System Administration
Guide for Cisco Unity.
Procedure
Step 1
Find the application user, as described in the Finding an Application User section on page 113-5.
Step 2
From the Related Links drop-down list box, choose the Create Cisco Unity Application User link and
click Go.
The Add Cisco Unity User dialog box displays.
Step 3
From the Application Server drop-down list box, choose the Cisco Unity or Cisco Unity Connection
server on which you want to create a Cisco Unity or Cisco Unity Connection user and click Next.
Step 4
From the Application User Template drop-down list box, choose the template that you want to use.
Step 5
Click Save.
The administrator account gets created in Cisco Unity or Cisco Unity Connection. The link in Related
Links changes to Edit Cisco Unity User in the Application User Configuration window. You can now
view the user that you created in Cisco Unity Administration or Cisco Unity Connection Administration.
Note
When the Cisco Unity or Cisco Unity Connection user is integrated with the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Application User, you cannot edit fields such as Alias (User ID in Cisco
Unified Communications Manager Administration), First Name, Last Name, Extension (Primary
Extension in Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration), and so on, in Cisco Unity
Administration or Cisco Unity Connection Administration. You can only update these fields in Cisco
Unified Communications Manager Administration.
Note
Cisco Unity and Cisco Unity Connection monitor the synchronization of data from Cisco Unified
Communications Manager. You can configure the sync time in Cisco Unity Administration or
Cisco Unity Connection Administration on the Tools menu. For Cisco Unity Connection, refer to the
User Moves, Adds, and Changes Guide for Cisco Unity Connection for more information. For
Cisco Unity, refer to the System Administration Guide for Cisco Unity.
Additional Information
113-8
OL-18611-01
Chapter 113
Use the procedure in the Finding an Application User section on page 113-5 to find the application
user whose password you want to change.
The Application User Configuration window displays with information about the chosen application
user.
Step 2
In the Password field, double-click the existing password, which is encrypted, and enter the new
password.
Step 3
In the Confirm Password field, double-click the existing, encrypted password and enter the new
password again.
Step 4
Click Save.
Additional Information
Create the application user in the database. See Configuring an Application User section on
page 113-6.
Procedure
Step 1
Use the procedure in the Finding an Application User section on page 113-5 to find the application
user configuration.
The Application User Configuration window displays the configuration information.
113-9
Chapter 113
Step 2
To change or view password information, click the Edit Credential button next to the Password field.
The user Credential Configuration window displays.
Step 3
View the credential data for the user or enter the appropriate settings, as described in Table 113-2.
Step 4
Additional Information
Field
Description
Locked By Administrator
113-10
OL-18611-01
Chapter 113
Table 113-2
Application User and End User Credential Settings and Fields (continued)
Field
Description
Check this check box to reset the hack count for this user
and clear the Time Locked Due to Failed Login Attempts
field.
The hack count increments whenever authentication fails
for an incorrect credential.
If the policy specifies No Limit for Failed Logons, the
hack count always specifies 0.
Authentication Rule
This field displays the date and time of the most recent
credential change for this user.
This field displays the date and time for the most recent
failed logon attempt for this user credential.
This field displays the date and time that the administrator
locked this user account. This field goes blank after the
administrator unlocks the credential.
This field displays the date and time that the system last
locked this user account due to failed logon attempts.
Time of hack lockout gets set whenever failed logon
attempts exceed the configured threshold in the applied
credential policy.
To assign devices to an application user, you must access the Application User Configuration window
for that user. See the Finding an Application User section on page 113-5 for information on finding
existing application users. When the Application User Configuration window displays, perform the
following procedure to assign devices.
Procedure
Step 1
In the Available Devices list box, choose a device that you want to associate with the application user
and click the Down arrow below the list box. The selected device moves to the
applicationuser.controlledDevices list box.
113-11
Chapter 113
Step 2
To limit the list of available devices, click the Find more Phones, Find more Route Points, or Find
more Pilot Points button:
If you click the Find more Phones button, the Find and List Phones window displays. Perform a
search to find the phones to associate with this application user.
If you click the Find more Route Points button, the Find and List CTI Route Points window displays.
Perform a search to find the CTI route points to associate with this application user.
If you click the Find more Pilot Points button, the Find and List Pilot Points window displays.
Perform a search to find the pilot points to associate with this application user.
Step 3
Repeat the preceding steps for each device that you want to assign to the application user.
Step 4
When you complete the assignment, click Save to assign the devices to the application user.
Additional Information
Before deleting the application user, determine whether the devices or profiles that are associated with
the end user need to be removed or deleted.
You can view the profiles and permissions that are assigned to the application user from the CAPF
Information and Permissions Information areas of the Application User Configuration window. You can
also choose Dependency Records from the Related Links drop-down list box in the Application User
Configuration window. If the dependency records are not enabled for the system, the dependency records
summary window displays a message. For more information about dependency records, see the
Accessing Dependency Records section on page A-2.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To locate a specific end user, enter search criteria and click Find.
A list of application users that match the search criteria displays.
Step 3
Check the check boxes next to the users that you want to delete and click Delete Selected.
Delete all the users in the window by clicking Select All and clicking Delete Selected.
Choose the user ID of the user that you want to delete from the list to display its current settings and
click Delete.
113-12
OL-18611-01
Chapter 113
Step 4
Click OK.
Next Steps
If this user is configured in Cisco Unity or Cisco Unity Connection, the user association to Cisco Unified
Communications Manager is broken when you delete the user in Cisco Unified Communications
Manager Administration. You can delete the orphaned user in Cisco Unity or Cisco Unity Connection
Administration. See the applicable User Moves, Adds, and Changes Guide for Cisco Unity Connection
for more information. Refer to the applicable System Administration Guide for Cisco Unity for more
Cisco Unity information.
Additional Information
Related Topics
Adding an Administrator User to Cisco Unity or Cisco Unity Connection, page 113-7
113-13
Chapter 113
Related Topics
Where to Find More Information, Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide
Application Users and End Users, Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide
Cisco Extension Mobility, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide
Associating a User Device Profile to a User, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and
Services Guide
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Assistant With Proxy Line Support, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Features and Services Guide
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Assistant With Shared Line Support, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Features and Services Guide
Cisco Unity Messaging Integration, Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide
Related Documentation
User Moves, Adds, and Changes Guide for Cisco Unity Connection
113-14
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
114
If you configure your system to use the LDAP corporate directory as the end user directory for Cisco
Unified Communications Manager, you cannot add or delete users in Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration.You add and remove end users in the corporate LDAP
directory.
If you configure your system to authenticate users against the LDAP directory, you cannot configure
or change end user passwords in Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration. You
configure and change end user passwords in the corporate LDAP directory.
The following topics contain information on managing end user directory information:
114-1
Chapter 114
Table 114-1 describes the end user configuration settings. For related procedures, see the Related
Topics section on page 114-18.
Before You Begin
If you configure your system to authenticate users against the LDAP directory, you cannot configure
or change end user passwords in Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration. You
configure and change end user passwords in the corporate LDAP directory.
You can import Cisco Unity Connection users in Cisco Unity Connection, as described in the
applicable User Moves, Adds, and Changes Guide for Cisco Unity Connection. Or, if you want to
do so, you can configure a Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration end user as a
Cisco Unity Connection user by using the Create a Cisco Unity User option in the End User
Configuration window, as described in the Creating a Cisco Unity Connection Voice Mailbox
section on page 114-10.
Table 114-1
Field
Description
User Information
LDAP Sync Status
This field displays the LDAP synchronization status, which you set with
the System > LDAP > LDAP System menu option.
User ID
Enter the unique end user identification name. You can enter any
character, including alphanumeric and special characters. No character
restrictions exist for this field.
You can modify User ID only if synchronization with an LDAP server is
not enabled. If synchronization is enabled, you can view the user ID, but
you cannot modify it.
If synchronization is disabled, Cisco Unified Communications Manager
permits you to modify the user ID after it is created.
Confirm Password
114-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 114
Table 114-1
Field
Description
Enter numeric characters for the end user PIN. You must enter at least the
minimum number of characters that are specified in the assigned
credential policy (1-127 characters).
The Edit Credential button displays after you add this user to the
database. Click the Edit Credential button to manage credential
information for this user. See the Managing End User Credential
Information section on page 114-12.
Confirm PIN
Last Name
Middle Name
First Name
Telephone Number
Enter the end user telephone number. You may use the following special
characters: (, ), and -.
Mail ID
Manager User ID
Enter the user ID of the end user manager ID. The manager user ID that
you enter must already exist in the directory as an end user.
Department
Enter the end user department information (for example, the department
number or name).
User Locale
From the drop-down list box, choose the locale that is associated with the
end user. The user locale identifies a set of detailed information to
support end users, including language and font.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager uses this locale for extension
mobility and the Cisco Unified CM User Options. For Cisco Extension
Mobility log on, the locale that is specified here takes precedence over
the device and device profile settings. For Cisco Extension Mobility log
off, Cisco Unified Communications Manager uses the end user locale
that the default device profile specifies.
Note
If you do not choose an end user locale, the locale that is specified
in the Cisco CallManager service parameters as Default User
Locale applies.
Associated PC
This required field applies for Cisco IP Softphone and Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Attendant Console users.
Digest Credentials
Confirm Digest Credentials To confirm that you entered the digest credentials correctly, re-enter the
credentials in this field.
114-3
Chapter 114
Table 114-1
Field
Description
Device Associations
Controlled Devices
Extension Mobility
Available Profiles
This list box displays the extension mobility profiles that are available for
association with this end user.
To search for an extension mobility profile, click Find. Use the Find and
List Device Profiles window that displays to search for the extension
mobility profile that you want.
To associate an extension mobility profile with this end user, select the
profile and click the Down arrow below this list box.
Controlled Profiles
This field displays a list of controlled device profiles that are associated
with an end user who is configured for Cisco Extension Mobility.
Default Profile
From the drop-down list box, choose a default extension mobility profile
for this end user.
Presence Group
114-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 114
Table 114-1
Field
Description
SUBSCRIBE Calling
Search Space
If this check box is checked, when the user logs in to a device, the
AllowCTIControlFlag device property becomes active, which allows
control of the device from CTI applications. Until the user logs in to a
device, this setting has no effect.
Note
The Allow Control of Device from CTI setting in the end user
configuration overrides the AllowCTIControlFlag device
property of the device to which the user logs in.
This field represents the primary directory number for the end user. End
users can have multiple lines on their phones.
When you associate devices to the end user, directory numbers that are
configured on the associated device become available in the drop-down
list box for Primary Extension. From the drop-down list box, choose a
primary extension for this end user.
If the system is integrated with Cisco Unity Connection, the Create
Cisco Unity User link displays in the Related Links menu.
IPCC Extension
From the drop-down list box, choose an IPCC extension for this end user.
Note
114-5
Chapter 114
Table 114-1
Field
Description
Mobility Information
Enable Mobility
Check this check box to activate Mobile Connect, which allows the user
to manage calls by using a single phone number and to pick up
in-progress calls on the desktop phone and cellular phone.
Checking this check box, which triggers licensing to consume device
license units for Mobile Connect, works in conjunction with the Primary
User Device drop-down list box.
If you check the Enable Mobility check box and fail to choose an adjunct
device from the Primary User Device drop-down list box, four device
license units (DLUs) get consumed, as indicated in the Mobility Enabled
End Users row in the License Unit Calculation window.
If you enable Cisco Unified Mobility and later choose an adjunct device
from the Primary User Device drop-down list box, the system credits you
with two DLUs, as indicated in the Mobility Enabled End Users row in
the License Unit Calculation window.
Only devices that consume two or more device license units (DLUs)
display in the drop-down list box.
For Cisco Unified Mobility, you cannot assign the same device to
multiple users, so only the devices that you can assign display in the
drop-down list box.
If you check the Enable Mobility check box and choose a device
from the drop-down list box, two DLUs get consumed, as indicated
in the Mobility Enabled End Users (Adjunct) row in the Licensing
Unit Calculation window.
Check this check box to allow the user to access the Mobile Voice Access
integrated voice response (IVR) system to initiate Mobile Connect calls
and activate or deactivate Mobile Connect capabilities.
114-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 114
Table 114-1
Field
Description
Remote Destination
Profiles
This field lists the remote destination profiles that have been created for
this user. To view the details of a particular remote destination profile,
choose a remote destination profile in the list and click the View Details
link.
CAPF Information
Associated CAPF Profiles
This pane displays the Instance ID from the CAPF Profile that you
configured for this user. To view or update the profile, double-click the
Instance ID or click the Instance ID to highlight it; then, click View
Details. The End User CAPF Profile Configuration window displays
with the current settings.
For information on how to configure the End User CAPF Profile, refer to
the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Security Guide.
Permissions Information
Groups
This list box displays after an end user record has been saved. The list
box displays the groups to which the end user belongs.
To add the user to one or more user groups, click the Add to User Group
button. The Find and List User Groups window opens as a separate
window. Locate the groups to which you want to add the user, check the
check boxes beside those groups, and click Add Selected at the bottom
of the window. The Find and List User Groups window closes, and the
End User Configuration window displays and now shows the selected
groups in the Groups list box.
To remove the user from a group, highlight the group in the Groups list
box and click the Remove from User Group button.
To view or update a group, double-click the group name or click the
group name to highlight it; then, click View Details. The User Group
Configuration window displays with the current settings.
For more information on finding and configuring user groups, see the
User Group Configuration section on page 116-1.
Roles
This list box displays after an end user has been added, the Groups list
box has been populated, and the user record has been saved. The list box
displays the roles that are assigned to the end user.
To view or update a role, double-click the role name or click the role
name to highlight it; then, click View Details. The Role Configuration
window displays with the current settings.
For more information on configuring roles, see the Role Configuration
section on page 115-1.
114-7
Chapter 114
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration retains your search preferences until you modify your search
or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All or matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by
choosing a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Information
114-8
OL-18611-01
Chapter 114
Note
You can add end users through Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration only when
synchronization with an LDAP server is not enabled. When synchronization is disabled, you can add new
users to the Cisco Unified Communications Manager database, and you can change the settings for
existing users, including the user ID. Use the System > LDAP > LDAP System menu option to verify
that LDAP synchronization is not enabled. In the LDAP System window that displays, ensure that the
Enable Synchronizing from LDAP Server check box is not checked.
If you enable LDAP synchronization, you cannot add an end user, delete an end user, or change some
existing user information, including user IDs, in the End User Configuration windows.
You can configure a Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration end user as a Cisco Unity
Connection user by using the Create a Cisco Unity User option in the End User Configuration window,
as described in the Creating a Cisco Unity Connection Voice Mailbox section on page 114-10. You can
then configure any additional settings in Cisco Unity Connection Administration.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
When you have completed the end user information, save your changes and add the end user by clicking
Save.
Next Steps
If you want to associate devices to this end user, continue with the Associating Devices to an End User
procedure.
To manage credentials for this end user, continue with the Managing End User Credential Information
procedure.
To create a Cisco Unity Connection Voice Mailbox for this user in Cisco Unified Communications
Manager Administration, continue with the procedure in Creating a Cisco Unity Connection Voice
Mailbox section on page 114-10.
Note
Before you can create a Cisco Unity Connection mailbox for the end user, you must configure the end
user with a phone device association and a primary extension, and the integration between Cisco Unified
Communications Manager and Cisco Unity Connection must be complete. For more information, refer
to the Cisco Unified Communications Manager SCCP Integration Guide for Cisco Unity Connection or
the Cisco Unified Communications Manager SIP Trunk Integration Guide for Cisco Unity Connection.
114-9
Chapter 114
Additional Information
Note
You must configure Cisco Unified Communications Manager for voice messaging.
You must configure the Cisco Unity Connection server to use the integrated mailbox feature. Refer
to the Creating Multiple User Accounts from Cisco Unified Communications Manager Users
chapter of the applicable User Moves, Adds, and Changes Guide for Cisco Unity Connection.
For Cisco Unity Connection integration, create an AXL connection via Cisco Unity Connection, as
described in the Managing the Phone System Integrations chapter in the System Administration
Guide for Cisco Unity Connection.
Ensure that you have defined an appropriate template and class of service (COS) for any voice-messaging
users that you plan to add in Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration. For Cisco Unity
Connection users, refer to the applicable User Moves, Adds, and Changes Guide for Cisco Unity
Connection.
You must associate a device and a Primary Extension Number to the end user before the Create
Cisco Unity User link displays. The link displays in the Related Links menu.
If you want to do so, you can use the import feature that is available in Cisco Unity Connection
instead of performing the procedure that is described in the Creating a Cisco Unity Connection
Voice Mailbox section on page 114-10. For information on how to use the import feature, refer to
the Creating Multiple User Accounts from Cisco Unified Communications Manager Users
chapter of the User Moves, Adds, and Changes Guide for Cisco Unity Connection.
The Directory Number Configuration window also displays the Create Cisco Unity User link in the
Related Links drop-down list box.
Procedure
Step 1
Find the end user, as described in Finding an End User section on page 114-8.
Step 2
Note
Step 3
You must ensure that you have defined a primary extension; otherwise, the Create Cisco Unity
User link will not display in the Related Links drop-down list box.
From the Related Links drop-down list box, in the upper, right corner of the window, choose the Create
Cisco Unity User link and click Go.
The Add Cisco Unity User dialog box displays.
Step 4
From the Application Server drop-down list box, choose the Cisco Unity Connection server on which
you want to create a Cisco Unity Connection user and click Next.
114-10
OL-18611-01
Chapter 114
Step 5
From the Subscriber Template drop-down list box, choose the subscriber template that you want to use.
Step 6
Click Save.
The mailbox gets created. The link in the Related Links drop-down list box changes to Edit Cisco Unity
User in the End User Configuration window. In Cisco Unity Connection Administration, you can now
view the user that you created.
Note
When the Cisco Unity Connection user is integrated with the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
end user, you cannot edit fields such as Alias (User ID in Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Administration); First Name; Last Name; Extension (Primary Extension in Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration), and so on, in Cisco Unity Connection Administration. You
can only update these fields in Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration.
Additional Information
Note
You cannot change an end user password when LDAP authentication is enabled.
Procedure
Step 1
Use the procedure in the Finding an End User section on page 114-8 to find the end user configuration.
The End User Configuration window displays the configuration information.
Step 2
In the Password field, double-click the existing password, which is encrypted, and enter the new
password. You must enter at least the minimum number of characters that are specified in the assigned
credential policy (1-127 characters).
Step 3
In the Confirm Password field, double-click the existing, encrypted password and enter the new
password again.
Step 4
Click Save.
Additional Information
114-11
Chapter 114
Procedure
Step 1
Use the procedure in the Finding an End User section on page 114-8 to find the end user configuration.
The End User Configuration window displays the configuration information.
Step 2
In the PIN field, double-click the existing PIN, which is encrypted, and enter the new PIN. You must
enter at least the minimum number of characters that are specified in the assigned credential policy
(1-127 characters).
Step 3
In the Confirm PIN field, double-click the existing, encrypted PIN and enter the new PIN again.
Step 4
Click Save.
Additional Information
Create the end user in the database. See Configuring an End User section on page 114-9.
Procedure
Step 1
To find the end user configuration, use the procedure in the Finding an End User section on
page 114-8.
The End User Configuration window displays the configuration information.
Step 2
To change or view password information, click the Edit Credential button next to the Password field.
To change or view PIN information, click the Edit Credential button next to the PIN field.
Step 3
Step 4
114-12
OL-18611-01
Chapter 114
Additional Information
Field
Description
Locked By Administrator
Check this check box to lock this account and block access
for this user.
Uncheck this check box to unlock the account and allow
access for this user.
Check this check box to block this user from changing this
credential. Use this option for group accounts.
You cannot check this check box when User Must Change
at Next Login check box is checked.
Check this check box to reset the hack count for this user
and clear the Time Locked Due to Failed Login Attempts
field. After the counter resets, the user can try logging in
again
The hack count increments whenever an authentication
fails for an incorrect credential.
If the policy specifies No Limit for Failed Logons, the
hack count always equals 0.
Authentication Rule
This field displays the date and time of the most recent
change for this user credential.
114-13
Chapter 114
Table 114-2
Application User and End User Credential Settings and Fields (continued)
Field
Description
This field displays the date and time for the most recent
failed logon attempt for this user credential.
This field displays the date and time that the administrator
locked this user account.
This field displays the date and time that the system last
locked this user account due to failed logon attempts. The
associated credential policy defines lockouts due to failed
logon attempts.
Make sure that the end user is in the database. See the Finding an End User section on page 114-8 for
more information.
Procedure
Step 1
Use the procedure in the Finding an End User section on page 114-8 to find the end user whose
application profile(s) you want to configure. Click the userid.
The End User Configuration window displays with information about the chosen end user.
Step 2
To configure a manager for Cisco Unified Communications Manager Assistant for this end user, from
the Related Links drop-down list box, choose Manager Configuration and click Go.
The Manager Configuration window displays for this end user. Refer to the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Assistant With Proxy Line Support and Cisco Unified Communications
Manager Assistant With Shared Line Support chapters in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Features and Services Guide for details of configuring Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Assistant.
After you configure the Manager information for this end user, you can return to the End User
Configuration window for this end user. From the Related Links drop-down list box in the Manager
Configuration window, choose Back to User Configuration and click Go.
Step 3
To configure an assistant for Cisco Unified Communications Manager Assistant for this end user, from
the Related Links drop-down list box, choose Assistant Configuration and click Go.
114-14
OL-18611-01
Chapter 114
The Assistant Configuration window displays for this end user. Refer to the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Assistant With Proxy Line Support and Cisco Unified Communications
Manager Assistant With Shared Line Support chapters in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Features and Services Guide for details of configuring Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Assistant.
After you configure the Assistant information for this end user, you can return to the End User
Configuration window for this end user. From the Related Links drop-down list box in the Assistant
Configuration window, choose Back to User Configuration and click Go.
Step 4
To show the user privilege report for this end user, from the Related Links drop-down list box, choose
User Privilege Report and click Go.
The User Privilege window displays for this end user. Refer to the Viewing User Roles, User Groups,
and Permissions section on page 116-7 for details of the user privilege report.
After you display the user privilege report for this end user, you can return to the End User Configuration
window for this end user. From the Related Links drop-down list box in the User Privilege window,
choose Back to User and click Go.
Additional Information
Note
For devices that are not CTI-controllable, such as H.323 devices, an asterisk (*) displays next to the
device icon in the list of available devices. All device association behavior remains identical regardless
of the type of device for which the feature is configured.
Before You Begin
To associate devices with an end user, you must access the End User Configuration window for that user.
See the Finding an End User section on page 114-8 for information on finding existing end users.
When the End User Configuration window displays, perform the following procedure to assign devices.
Do not attempt to associate devices to a new end user before you finish adding the new end user. Be sure
to click Save on the End User Configuration window before you add device associations for a new end
user.
Procedure
Step 1
114-15
Chapter 114
Because you may have several devices in your network, Cisco Unified Communications Manager lets
you locate specific devices on the basis of specific criteria. Use the following steps to locate devices.
Note
Step 2
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration
retains your search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item,
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your search preferences until
you modify your search or close the browser.
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All or matching records display. You can change the number of items that display in each window by
choosing a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Associating a Device
Step 4
From the Device association for (this particular user) pane, choose the devices that you want to associate
with this end user by checking the box to the left of the device name(s).
Use the buttons at the bottom of the window to select and deselect devices to associate with the end user.
Note
The buttons function to select and deselect only the devices that were found as a result of any
search for devices that you performed in the preceding steps.
Tip
Check the Show the devices already associated with user check box to display the devices that
are already associated with this end user.
Select AllClick this button to select all devices that display in this window.
Clear AllClick this button to uncheck the check boxes next to all devices that display in this
window.
Select All in SearchClick this button to select all devices that match the search criteria that you
specified in the Search Options portion of the window. The button performs the search anew and
selects all the matching devices.
Clear All in SearchClick this button to deselect all devices that match the search criteria that you
specified in the Search Options portion of the window. The button performs the search anew and
deselects all the matching devices.
114-16
OL-18611-01
Chapter 114
Save Selected/ChangesClick this button to associate the devices that you have selected with this
end user.
Remove All Associated DevicesClick this button to disassociate all devices that are already
associated with this end user. After you click this button, a popup window asks you to confirm that
you want to remove all device associations from this end user. To confirm, click OK.
Step 5
Repeat the preceding steps for each device that you want to assign to the end user.
Step 6
Step 7
From Related Links drop-down list box in the upper, right corner of the window, choose Back to User,
and click Go.
The End User Configuration window displays, and the associated devices that you chose display in the
Controlled Devices pane.
Additional Information
Before you delete the end user, determine whether the devices or profiles that are associated with the end
user need to be removed or deleted.
You can view the devices and profiles that are assigned to the end user from the Device Associations,
Extension Mobility, Directory Number Associations, CAPF Information, and Permissions Information
areas of the End User Configuration window. You can also choose Dependency Records from the
Related Links drop-down list box in the End User Configuration window. If the dependency records are
not enabled for the system, the dependency records summary window displays a message. For more
information about dependency records, see the Accessing Dependency Records section on page A-2.
114-17
Chapter 114
Related Topics
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To locate a specific end user, enter search criteria and click Find.
A list of end users that match the search criteria displays.
Step 3
Check the check boxes next to the users that you want to delete and click Delete Selected.
Delete all the users in the window by clicking Select All and clicking Delete Selected.
Choose the user ID of the user that you want to delete from the list to display its current settings and
click Delete.
Click OK.
Next Steps
If this user is configured in Cisco Unity Connection, the user association to Cisco Unified
Communications Manager gets broken when you delete the user in Cisco Unified Communications
Manager Administration. You can delete the orphaned user in Cisco Unity Connection Administration.
See the applicable User Moves, Adds, and Changes Guide for Cisco Unity Connection for more
information. Deleting the user will delete all messages in the user voice mailbox.
Additional Information
Related Topics
114-18
OL-18611-01
Chapter 114
Adding an Administrator User to Cisco Unity or Cisco Unity Connection, page 113-7
Where to Find More Information, Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide
Application Users and End Users, Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide
Cisco Extension Mobility, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide
Associating a User Device Profile to a User, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and
Services Guide
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Assistant With Proxy Line Support, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Features and Services Guide
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Assistant With Shared Line Support, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Features and Services Guide
Cisco Unity Messaging Integration, Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide
Related Documentation
User Moves, Adds, and Changes Guide for Cisco Unity Connection
114-19
Chapter 114
Related Topics
114-20
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
115
Role Configuration
Roles allow Cisco Unified Communications Manager administrators who have full administration
privilege (access) to configure end users and application users with different levels of privilege.
Administrators with full administration privilege configure roles and user groups. In general, full-access
administration users configure the privilege of other administration users and end users to Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration and to other applications.
Different levels of privilege exist for each application. For the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Administration application, two levels of privilege exist: read privilege and update privilege. These
privilege levels differ as follows:
Users with update privilege can view and modify the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Administration windows to which the user group of the user has update privilege.
A user with read privilege can view the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration
windows that belong to the roles to which the user group of the user has read privilege. A user with
read privilege for a window cannot, however, make any changes on those administration windows
to which the user has only read privilege. For a user with read privilege, the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration application does not display any update buttons nor
icons.
Roles comprise groups of resources for an application. At installation, default standard roles get created
for various administrative functions. You may, however, create custom roles that comprise custom
groupings of resources for an application.
Note
Certain standard roles have no associated application nor resource. These roles provide login
authentication for various applications.
Use the following topics to configure roles:
Additional Information
115-1
Chapter 115
Role Configuration
Users with update privilege can view and modify the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Administration windows to which the user group of the user has update privilege.
A user with read privilege can view the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration
windows that belong to the roles to which the user group of the user has read privilege. A user with
read privilege for a window cannot, however, make any changes on those administration windows
to which the user has only read privilege. For a user with read privilege, the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration application does not display any update buttons nor
icons.
Roles comprise groups of resources for an application. If you want to do so, you can create custom roles
that comprise custom groupings of resources for an application. At installation, default standard roles
get created for various administrative functions. For example, to configure Audit Log Administration,
choose the Standard Audit Log Administration role. When the Role Configuration window display,
click the Read or Update check box for the resource you want to configure and click Save.
Tip
Certain standard roles have no associated application nor resource. These roles provide login
authentication for various applications.
Table 115-1 describes the role configuration settings. For related procedures, see the Related Topics
section on page 115-5.
Table 115-1
Field
Description
Role Information
Application
From the drop-down list box, choose the application with which this
role associates.
Name
Enter a name for the role. Names can have up to 128 characters.
Description
115-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 115
Role Configuration
Finding a Role
Table 115-1
Field
Description
Click this button to grant privileges for all resources that display on
this page for this role.
Note
Click this button to remove privileges for all resources that display on
this page for this role.
Note
Finding a Role
Because you might have several roles in your network, Cisco Unified Communications Manager lets you
locate specific roles on the basis of specific criteria. Use the following procedure to locate roles.
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your role search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item, Cisco
Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your role search preferences until you modify
your search or close the browser.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
115-3
Chapter 115
Role Configuration
Configuring a Role
Step 3
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Step 4
Note
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
Note
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Note
Additional Information
Configuring a Role
This section describes how to add a role to Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration.
The following example provides more detail about configuring a role.
Example
To configure Audit Log Administration, choose the Standard Audit Log Administration role. When
the Role Configuration window displays, click the Read or Update check box for the resource that you
want to configure and click Save.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To copy an existing role, locate the appropriate role as described in the Finding a Role section on
page 115-3 and click the Copy button next to the role that you want to copy. In the popup window
that displays, enter a name for the new role and click OK. Continue with Step 4.
Note
Copying a role also copies the privileges that are associated with that role.
To add a new role, click the Add New button, and continue with Step 3.
115-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 115
Role Configuration
Deleting a Role
To update an existing role, locate the appropriate role as described in the Finding a Role section
on page 115-3 and continue with Step 4.
Step 3
If you are adding a new role, choose an application from the Application drop-down list box and click
Next.
Step 4
In the Role Configuration window that displays, enter the appropriate settings as described in
Table 115-1.
Step 5
Additional Information
Deleting a Role
This section describes how to delete a role in Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
In the list of Roles at left, click the name of the role that you want to delete.
Note
Click Delete.
You receive a message that asks you to confirm the deletion.
Step 4
Click OK.
The window refreshes, and the role gets deleted from the database.
Additional Information
Related Topics
115-5
Chapter 115
Role Configuration
Related Topics
Roles and User Groups, Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide
115-6
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
116
Note
During your work in a browser session, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains
your user group search preferences. If you navigate to other menu items and return to this menu item,
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration retains your user group search preferences
until you modify your search or close the browser.
116-1
Chapter 116
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To find all records in the database, ensure the dialog box is empty; go to Step 3.
To filter or search records
Note
Step 3
To add additional search criteria, click the + button. When you add criteria, the system searches
for a record that matches all criteria that you specify. To remove criteria, click the button to
remove the last added criterion or click the Clear Filter button to remove all added search
criteria.
Click Find.
All matching records display. You can change the number of items that display on each page by choosing
a different value from the Rows per Page drop-down list box.
Step 4
Note
You can delete multiple records from the database by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate record and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all configurable records for this
selection by clicking Select All and then clicking Delete Selected.
Note
From the list of records that display, click the link for the record that you want to view.
Note
To reverse the sort order, click the up or down arrow, if available, in the list header.
Additional Topics
116-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 116
Example
To allow a user to change Audit Log settings, choose Standard Audit Users and then click Add End
Users to Group. When the Find and List Users window displays, choose the user that you want to add
to the group and click Add Selected.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
To copy an existing user group, locate the appropriate user group as described in Finding a User
Group section on page 116-1 and click the Copy button next to the user group that you want to
copy. In the popup window that displays, enter a name for the new user group and click OK.
Continue with Step 3.
To add a new user group, click the Add New button. Enter a name for the new user group and click
OK. Continue with Step 3.
Note
Note
The user group name can contain up to 50 alphanumeric characters and can contain any
combination of spaces, periods (.), hyphens (-), and underscore characters (_). Ensure that the
user group name is unique.
To update an existing user group, locate the appropriate user group as described in Finding a User
Group section on page 116-1. Click the name of the user group that you want to update. The user
group that you chose displays. Update the appropriate settings. Continue with Step 3.
You cannot delete a standard user group, but you can update the user membership for a standard
user group.
Step 3
Click Save.
Step 4
Proceed to add users to this user group. See Adding Users to a User Group, page 116-4.
Step 5
Proceed to assign roles to the user group. See Assigning Roles to a User Group, page 116-6.
Additional Topics
116-3
Chapter 116
When you delete a user group, Cisco Unified Communications Manager removes all user group data
from the database. To find out which roles are using the user group, in the User Group Configuration
window, choose Dependency Records from the Related Links drop-down list box and click Go. If
dependency records are not enabled for the system, the Dependency Records Summary window displays
a message. For more information about dependency records, see the Accessing Dependency Records
section on page A-2.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Find the user group that you want to delete by using the procedure in the Finding a User Group section
on page 116-1.
Step 3
Click the name of the user group that you want to delete.
The user group that you chose displays. The list shows the users in this user group in alphabetical order.
Step 4
Step 5
To delete the user group, click OK or to cancel the action, click Cancel. If you click OK, Cisco Unified
Communications Manager removes the user group from the database.
Additional Topics
Step 2
Find the user group to which you want to add users. Use the procedure in the Finding a User Group
section on page 116-1.
Step 3
Click the name of the user group that you want to update.
The user group that you chose displays. The Users in Group list shows the users that currently belong to
the user group.
Step 4
To add end users, click Add End Users to Group. To add application users, skip to Step 8.
The Find and List Users window displays.
116-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 116
Step 5
Use the Find User drop-down list boxes to find the end users that you want to add and click Find.
Note
You can perform the search for users in a variety of ways. You can enter the first name, middle
name, last name, user ID, or department of a user. Alternatively, you can leave the field blank,
which results in display of all users.
Note
The list of search results does not display end users that already belong to the user group.
Step 6
In the list of search results, click the check box next to the users that you want to add to this user group.
If the list comprises multiple pages, use the links at the bottom to see more results.
Step 7
Note
Step 8
After you add a user, you can view the roles by clicking the i icon in the Permission column for
that user.
Step 9
Use the Find Application User drop-down list boxes to find the application users that you want to add
and click Find.
Note
You can perform the search for application users by searching for user ID. Alternatively, you can
leave the field blank, which results in display of all application users.
In the list of search results, click the check box next to the application users that you want to add to this
user group. If the list comprises multiple pages, use the links at the bottom to see more results.
Note
Step 11
The list of search results does not display application users that already belong to the user group.
Note
Step 12
After you add an application user, you can view the roles by clicking the i icon in the Permission
column for that user.
116-5
Chapter 116
Additional Topics
Step 2
Find the user group from which you want to delete users. Use the procedure in the Finding a User
Group section on page 116-1.
Step 3
Click the name of the user group that you want to update.
The user group that you chose displays. The Users in Group list shows the users that currently belong to
the user group.
Step 4
Click the check boxes next to the names of the users that you want to delete from this user group.
Step 5
Step 6
To delete the selected user group members, click OK or click Cancel to exit this window.
The User Group redisplays with the deleted users removed from the Users in Group pane.
Additional Topics
Note
When an administrator assigns roles to a user group, the administrator should assign the Standard
Unified CM Admin Users role to the user group. This role enables the users to log into Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration.
Procedure
Step 1
116-6
OL-18611-01
Chapter 116
Step 2
Find the user group to which you want to assign roles. Use the procedure in the Finding a User Group
section on page 116-1.
Step 3
Click the name of the user group for which you want to assign roles.
The user group that you chose displays. The Users in Group list shows the users that currently belong to
the user group.
Step 4
From the Related Links drop-down list box, choose Assign Role to User Group and click Go.
The User Group Configuration window changes to display the Role Assignment pane. For the user group
that you chose, the list of assigned roles displays. Choose one of the following options:
Step 5
To assign additional roles to the user group, click Assign Role to Group.
The Find and List Roles popup window displays.
Step 6
If necessary, use the Find Role search criteria to narrow the list of roles.
Step 7
Choose the roles to assign to this user group by clicking the check boxes next to the role names. To close
the Find and List Roles popup window without assigning roles to this user group, click Close.
Step 8
Step 9
To delete an assigned role from the user group, select a role in the Role Assignment pane and click
Delete Role Assignment. Repeat this step for each role that you want to delete from this user group.
Step 10
Click Save.
The system makes the added and deleted role assignments to the user group in the database.
Additional Topics
Note
You can also view user roles by using User Management > Application User (for application users) or
User Management > End User (for end users) to view a particular user and then display the user roles.
Procedure
Step 1
116-7
Chapter 116
Related Topics
Step 2
Find the user group that has the users for which you want to display assigned roles. Use the procedure
in the Finding a User Group section on page 116-1.
Step 3
Click the name of the user group for which you want to view the roles that are assigned to the users.
The User Group Configuration window displays for the user group that you chose. The Users in Group
pane shows the users that belong to the user group.
Step 4
Step 5
From the Related Links drop-down list box, choose User Privilege Report and click Go.
For the user that you chose, the following information displays:
Resources to which the user has access. For each resource, the following information displays:
Application
Resource
Permission (read and/or update)
Step 6
To return to the user, choose Back to User or Back to Application User in the Related Links drop-down
list box and click Go.
Additional Topics
Related Topics
Roles and User Groups, Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide
116-8
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
117
Note
The End User, Phone, DN, and LA Configuration window does not allow you to enter existing end users,
phones, or directory numbers.
The End User, Phone, DN, and LA Configuration window adds records of the following types:
Note
End users
Phones
Directory numbers
Device profiles
Voicemail profile
You can modify end user information only if synchronization with an LDAP server is not enabled. To
check whether synchronization with an LDAP server is enabled, use the System > LDAP > LDAP
System menu option. In the LDAP System window that displays, ensure that the Enable Synchronizing
from LDAP Server check box is not checked. If synchronization is enabled, access to the End User,
Phone, DN, and LA Configuration window is blocked.
The following topics contain information on adding and configuring end users at the End User, Phone,
DN, and LA Configuration window:
Additional Information
117-1
Chapter 117
Note
End users
Phones
Directory numbers
Device profiles
Voicemail profile
You can modify end user information only if synchronization with an LDAP server is not enabled. To
verify that the Enable Synchronizing from LDAP Server check box is not checked, choose System >
LDAP > LDAP System. If synchronization is enabled (checked), access to the End User, Phone, DN,
and LA Configuration window is blocked.
Table 117-1 describes the end user configuration settings. For related procedures, see the Related
Topics section on page 117-4.
Table 117-1
Field
Description
User Information
User ID
Password
Enter five or more alphanumeric or special characters for the end user
password. You may use the following special characters: =, +, <, >, #, ;,
\, , , and blank spaces.
Confirm Password
PIN
Confirm PIN
Last Name
Enter the end user last name. You may use the following special
characters: =, +, <, >, #, ;, \, , , and blank spaces.
Middle Name
Enter the end user middle name. You may use the following special
characters: =, +, <, >, #, ;, \, , , and blank spaces.
First Name
Enter the end user first name. You may use the following special
characters: =, +, <, >, #, ;, \, , , and blank spaces.
117-2
OL-18611-01
Chapter 117
Table 117-1
Field
Description
Device Associations
Product Type
This list box displays the types of devices that are available for
association with this end user.
From the drop-down list box, choose the type of device to associate with
this end user.
MAC Address
Enter a unique MAC address for the new device that you are associating
with the new user. The MAC address comprises exactly 12 hexadecimal
digits (0 to 9, A to F).
From the drop-down list box, choose the calling search space for the
directory number that you are associating with this user and device.
From the drop-down list box, choose the calling search space for the
phone that you are associating with this user and device.
Specify the mask that is used to format caller ID information for external
(outbound) calls that are made from the associated device.
Enter the literal digits that you want to appear in the caller ID
information and use Xs to represent the directory number of the
associated device.
Extension
This field represents the primary directory number for the end user. End
users can have multiple lines on their phones.
Enter an extension for the new user and phone. You may use the
following characters: 0 to 9, ?, [, ], +, -, *, ^, #, !.
Route Partition
From the drop-down list box, choose a partition for the directory number
that you specified in the Extension field.
From the drop-down list box, choose a voice-mail profile for the
directory number. Choose <None> to use the system default.
Enable Extension Mobility Check this check box to enable extension mobility. After you have added
the new user, you can use the User Management > End User menu
option to choose an Extension Mobility profile.
117-3
Chapter 117
Note
If LDAP synchronization is enabled, access to this window is blocked. For more information
about LDAP synchronization, see the LDAP System Configuration section on page 14-1.
Note
Before you proceed, you can use the links in the Related Links drop-down list box at the top,
right of the End User, Phone, DN, and LA Configuration window to determine whether an end
user or phone already exists.
To find out which end users already exist, choose Back to Find List Users in the Related Links
drop-down list box and click Go. Use the Find and List Users window that displays to search for
the end user ID that you plan to add. If the end user ID already exists, you cannot use the
User/Phone Add menu option to add this end user.
To find out which phones already exist, choose Back to Find List Phones in the Related Links
drop-down list box and click Go. Use the Find and List Phones window that displays to search
for the phone that you plan to add. If the phone already exists, you cannot use the User/Phone
Add menu option to add this phone.
If you use either of the Related Links, repeat Step 1 to return to the End User, Phone, DN, and
LA Configuration window.
Step 2
Step 3
When you complete the end user configuration, click Save to add the end user and device.
The end user gets created in the Cisco Unified Communications Manager database.
Additional Information
Related Topics
Application Users and End Users, Cisco Unified Communications Manager System Guide
117-4
OL-18611-01
Chapter 117
Cisco Extension Mobility, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and Services Guide
Associating a User Device Profile to a User, Cisco Unified Communications Manager Features and
Services Guide
117-5
Chapter 117
Related Topics
117-6
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
118
118-1
Chapter 118
118-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
119
119-1
Chapter 119
119-2
OL-18611-01
CH A P T E R
120
120-1
Chapter 120
120-2
OL-18611-01
A R T
CH A P T E R
121
Add, update, and delete Cisco Unified IP Phones including voice gateway (VGC) phones, computer
telephony interface (CTI) ports, and H.323 clients
Add, update, and delete Cisco Unified Communications Manager Assistant managers and assistants
Add, update, and delete ports on a Cisco Catalyst 6000 FXS Analog Interface Module
Add or delete Cisco VG200 and Cisco VG224 analog gateways and ports
You can also work with these devices in combination with the user information. For example, when you
add CTI ports and users, BAT allows you to Enable CTI Application Use. This saves time when you
are adding users who have applications that require a CTI port, such as Cisco IP Softphone.
An optional component of BAT, the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Auto-Register Phone Tool
(TAPS), further reduces the manual labor that is involved in administering a large system. When you
need to add a large block of new phones, you can use BAT to add the devices with dummy media access
control (MAC) addresses instead of entering each MAC address in the data input file. After the phones
are installed, the phone users or the administrator can call the TAPS directory number, follow the voice
prompts, and download the correct user device profiles for their phones.
121-1
Chapter 121
For more information about the BAT and TAPS, refer to the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Bulk Administration Guide.
121-2
OL-18611-01
A R T
10
Appendixes
A P P E N D I X
Dependency Records
This appendix provides information about the dependency record windows in Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration. These windows help you to determine which records in the
database use other records. For example, you can determine which devices (such as CTI route points or
phones) use a particular calling search space.
If you need to delete a record from Cisco Unified Communications Manager, you can use dependency
records to show which records are associated with the record that you want to delete. You can then
reconfigure those records, so they are associated with a different record.
This appendix contains the following sections:
Caution
Enabling the dependency records functionality causes high CPU usage. This task executes at
below-normal priority and may take time to complete due to dial plan size and complexity, CPU speed,
and the CPU requirements of other applications.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
From the Enable Dependency Records drop-down list box, choose True.
A dialog box displays with a message about the consequences of enabling the dependency records. Read
the information carefully before clicking OK.
A-1
Appendix A
Dependency Records
Step 4
Click OK.
The field displays True.
Step 5
Click Save.
Step 2
Step 3
From the Enable Dependency Records drop-down list box, choose False.
A dialog box displays with a message about dependency records. Read the information carefully before
clicking OK.
Step 4
Click OK.
The field displays False.
Step 5
Click Save.
Note
If the dependency records are not enabled, the Dependency RecordsSummary window displays a
message, not the information about the record. To enable dependency records, see the Enabling
Dependency Records section on page A-1.
For example, if you display a the Default device pool in the Device Pool Configuration window and click
the Dependency Records link, the Dependency Records Summary window displays all the records that
use that device pool, as shown in Figure A-1.
A-2
OL-18611-01
Appendix A
Dependency Records
Accessing Dependency Records
Figure A-1
To display detailed dependency records information, click the record about which you want more
information; for example, click the trunk record. The Dependency Records Detail window displays, as
shown in Figure A-2. If you want to return to the original configuration window, choose Back to
Summary from the Related List Box and click Go; then, choose Back to <configuration window name>
and click Go, or click the Close and go Back button.
A-3
Appendix A
Dependency Records
Figure A-2
To display the configuration window of the record that is displayed in the Dependency Records Detail
window, click the record. The configuration window for that record displays. For example, if you click
the h225trunk record that is shown in Figure A-2, the Trunk Configuration window displays with
information about the h225trunk.
CloseCloses the window but does not return to the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
configuration window in which you clicked the Dependency Records link.
Close and Go BackCloses the window and returns to the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
configuration window in which you clicked the Dependency Records link.
A-4
OL-18611-01
A P P E N D I X
Configuration Differences for Phones That Are Running SIP, page B-3
Migrating from Cisco Unified Communications Manager Release 5.0 to Release 7.1(2), page B-5
Configuration Steps
Step 1
MAC address
B-1
Appendix B
Table B-1
Configuration Steps
Step 2
Determine whether sufficient Device License Units are available. Calculating License Units, page 31-1
If not, purchase and install additional Device License Units.
Obtaining a License File, page 32-2
Third-Party SIP Devices (Basic) and (Advanced) consume three
and six Device License Units each, respectively.
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Configure the SIP Profile or use the default profile. The SIP
Profile gets added to the phone that is running SIP by using the
Phone Configuration window.
Note
Third-party phones that are running SIP use only the SIP
Profile Information section of the SIP Profile
Configuration window.
Add and configure the third-party phone that is running SIP by Configuring Cisco Unified IP Phones,
choosing Third-party SIP Device (Advanced) or (Basic) from the page 91-27
Add a New Phone Configuration window.
Note
Step 7
Step 8
In the End User Configuration window, associate the third-party Associating Devices to an End User,
phone that is running SIP with the user by using Device
page 114-15
Association and choosing the phone that is running SIP.
Step 9
Step 10
Provide power, install, verify network connectivity, and configure Refer to the administration guide that was
network settings for the third-party phone that is running SIP.
provided with your phone that is running SIP.
Step 11
B-2
OL-18611-01
Appendix B
Downloads Downloads
Softkey File Dial Plan File
Supports Reset
and Restart
Cisco Unified
IP Phone 7911,
7941, 7961,
7970, 7971
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Cisco Unified
IP Phone 7940,
7960
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Cisco Unified
IP Phone 7905,
7912
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Third-party
phone that is
running SIP
No
No
No
No
No
No
Phone That Is
Running SIP
Use Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration to configure third-party phones that are
running SIP (see the Where to Find More Information section on page B-6). The administrator must
also perform configuration steps on the third-party phone that is running SIP; see following examples:
Ensure proxy address in the phone is the IP or Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) of Cisco
Unified Communications Manager.
Ensure directory number(s) in the phone match the directory number(s) that are configured for the
device in Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration.
Ensure digest user ID (sometimes referred to as Authorization ID) in the phone matches the Digest
User ID in Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration.
Consult the documentation that came with the third-party phone that is running SIP for more
information.
B-3
Appendix B
The username, swhite, must match an end user that is configured in the End User Configuration window
of Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration (see Configuring an End User, page 114-9).
The administrator configures the SIP third-party phone with the user; for example, swhite, in the Digest
User field of Phone Configuration window (see Configuring Cisco Unified IP Phones, page 91-27).
Note
You can assign each end user ID to only one third-party phone (in the Digest User field of the Phone
Configuration window). If the same end user ID is assigned as the Digest User for multiple phones, the
third-party phones to which they are assigned will not successfully register.
Enabling Digest Authentication for Third-Party Phones That Are Running SIP
To enable digest authentication for third-party phones that are running SIP, the administrator must create
a Phone Security Profile. (See Phone Security Profile Configuration in the Cisco Unified
Communications Manager Administration Guide.) On the Phone Security Profile Configuration window,
check the Enable Digest Authentication check box. After the security profile is configured, the
administrator must assign that security profile to the phone that is running SIP by using the Phone
Configuration window. If this check box is not checked, Cisco Unified Communications Manager will
use digest authentication for purposes of identifying the phone by the end user ID, and it will not verify
the digest password. If the check box is checked, Cisco Unified Communications Manager will verify
the password.
Note
Cisco Unified Communications Manager does not support Transport Layer Security (TLS) from
third-party phones that are running SIP.
DTMF Reception
To require DTMF reception, check the Require DTMF Reception check box that displays on the Phone
Configuration window in Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration.
B-4
OL-18611-01
Appendix B
Note
Third-party SIP Device (Basic)Video calls do not get supported. Video enforcement occurs as part
of the offer/answer process. If video-related media is provided as part of an offer or answer from a
SIP device that is not permitted to negotiate video, only the non-video-related parts of the call get
extended to the destination party. Similarly, a SIP endpoint that is not permitted to negotiate media
will not receive any video-related media in the SDP that is sent from Cisco Unified Communications
Manager.
Third-party SIP Device (Advanced) and (Basic)Cisco-specific SIP extensions do not get
supported. Some Cisco-specific SIP extensions that are not supported include service URIs, header
extensions, dialog subscriptions, and remote call control proprietary mime types. Cisco Unified
Communications Manager will reject any request from a phone that is running SIP that is not
permitted to use an advanced feature that uses a service request URI (such as Call Pickup URI, Meet
Me Service URI). The SIP profile specifies service URIs. The profile gets assigned to SIP devices.
Cisco Unified Communications Manager will block features that require the use of Cisco-specific
SIP extensions.
Ensure that any wireless third-party SIP client or device is configured as a Third-Party SIP Device
(Advanced) in conformance with Cisco Unified Communications Manager licensing policy.
For more information about Cisco SIP Extensions, contact your Cisco representative.
Field Name
Old Value
New Value
B-5
Appendix B
Table B-4
Field Name
Old Value
New Value
64
16
For users that have third-party phones that are running SIP that are configured on any version of release
5.0 that are migrating/upgrading to release 6.0(1) or above, be aware that, after the upgrade, these
devices retain their release 5.0 configured values. However, if users need to make changes to DN
configuration values, users must change Maximum Number of Calls and Default Busy Trigger values on
each DN.
For basic third-party phones that are running SIP, only one line value needs to be modified. However,
for advanced third-party phones that are running SIP, users potentially must disassociate lines on the
device before they can make any DN-related configuration changes. This situation potentially can
happen if more than four lines are configured. An example scenario follows:
Advanced phone configured with 6 lines with Maximum number of calls = 4 and Busy Trigger = 2
for each line.
After upgrade to release 6.1, ensure maximum number of calls on the device is reduced to 16 or
below before any DN changes. The current value on this phone equals 24 (6 lines * 4). The device
essentially exists in a negative zone (16-24).
After the user disassociates those lines from the device, you can modify the DN characteristics for
the remaining four lines by setting Maximum Number of Calls and Busy Trigger to an appropriate
value.
Configuration Checklist for Third-Party Phones That Are Running SIP, page B-1
B-6
OL-18611-01
I N D EX
finding
29-2
related topics
AAR
application user
91-25
1-10
17-1
finding
configuration overview
related topics
72-1
113-6
72-5
113-12
113-5
related topics
finding
38-1
38-1
37-4
37-3
overview
37-1
related topics
38-3
37-1
37-4
37-5
autoregistration
38-4
38-2
related topics
38-5
configuring
reprioritizing
38-4
disabling
34-4
enabling
34-3
application server
29-1
34-1
34-1
related topics
29-1
113-9
113-13
configuring
72-4
configuring
113-10
groups
synchronizing configuration
configuration
113-1
72-6
72-5
configuring
113-1
72-1
updating
configuring
deleting
90-99
annunciator
resetting
113-9
changing password
113-11
118-1
finding
configuration
49-1
admission control
deleting
accessibility
access list
29-5
34-6
34-5
29-3
29-4
IN-1
Index
partition limitations
related topics
BAT
53-2
53-5
call park
application overview
121-1
described
BLF/SpeedDial
61-1
configuration settings
91-26
gateway configuration
90-69
described
BRI
63-1
call routing
ports, adding
browsers
directory numbers
90-95
configuration overview
1-2
64-1
call waiting
browsing
configuration settings
1-2
1-4
64-22
CAPF profile
configuring for application user
configuring for end user
118-1
119-1
activating
deactivating
benefits
60-5
deleting
finding
configuring
69-1
finding
69-6
finding
configuring
deleting
68-1
finding
68-6
68-5
related topics
68-7
configuration overview
4-3
key features
1-1
64-23
53-4
53-4
53-3
4-4
1-4
1-3
more information
53-1
finding
4-5
1-1
logon
53-1
4-1
4-4
introduction
log off
deleting
4-1
synchronizing configuration
68-7
configuring
3-4
69-7
deleting
3-1
configuration overview
69-5
related topics
3-1
groups
69-6
configuring
1-2
1-1
browsing into
91-11
3-7
97-1
3-7
overview
1-10
1-1
related topics
3-8
server configuration
2-1
synchronizing configuration
3-6
IN-2
OL-18611-01
Index
updating
3-6
1-4, 1-6
1-7
configuring
deleting
91-33
finding
91-41
91-40
91-42
91-32
102-6
deleting
B-3
91-35
subscribing
91-35
103-1
103-1, 103-5
103-7
dependency records
finding
103-7
103-4
related topics
103-7
conference bridges
91-37
91-36
Cisco Unity
73-12
Cisco IOS
adding an administrator to
113-7
configuration overview
73-9
73-1
deleting
83-1
86-4
finding
65-2
hardware
adding
73-16
86-2
65-4
73-15
65-4
73-17
configuration overview
related topics
directory numbers
configuring
73-6
Cisco video
adding an administrator to
finding
102-8
configuring
deleting
102-7
synchronizing configuration
updating
102-1
91-32
unsubscribing
102-1
91-26
91-1
91-27
related topics
6-1
configuration overview
58-1
106-1
deleting
1-8
configuring
84-1
related topics
73-3
73-18
86-5
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration Guide
OL-18611-01
IN-3
Index
software
73-1
date/time group
conference devices
synchronizing configuration
configuring
73-17
64-27
date/time groups
credential policy
configuration overview
deleting
configuration overview
112-1
112-1
deleting
finding
112-3
related topics
finding
111-1
deleting
111-2
88-2
updating
88-8
accessing
88-8
buttons
88-9
CUP license
33-1
98-3
95-1
A-2
A-4
103-7
A-4
device profile
94-2
dependency records
88-10
synchronizing configuration
94-1
94-3
88-6
configuring
94-1
88-7
related topics
resetting
96-7
configuration overview
88-1
finding
96-7
defaults, devices
configuration overview
deleting
96-1
96-6
related topics
111-4
configuring
5-1
96-1
111-3
related topics
6-6
configuration overview
111-1
6-3
111-3
configuration overview
6-6
6-1
6-4
related topics
112-5
6-1
112-4
112-4
finding
98-5
98-5
98-2
97-11
disabling
A-2
enabling
A-1
enterprise parameter
overview
A-1
phone services
route filters
A-1
100-6
41-6
A-3
86-4
IN-4
OL-18611-01
Index
voice-mail ports
83-9
voice-mail profile
87-5
device defaults
related topics
configuration overview
94-1
related topics
94-1
10-1
configuring
configuration overview
deleting
11-1
device pools
configuration overview
12-4
12-6
9-1
12-3
subnet
9-11
9-13
configuring
9-10
deleting
9-14
13-1
13-3
13-4
finding
13-2
related topics
13-4
dial plans
configuration overview
97-1
97-1
97-8
12-1, 12-5
related topics
9-1
12-1
12-5
finding
related topics
12-2
server
configuration overview
finding
92-51
configuring
92-1
DHCP
94-3
94-2
deleting
95-1
trunks
configuration overview
updating
85-1
97-11
66-3
finding
66-2
installer
97-11
66-1
installing
97-8
related topics
editing
66-3
related topics
97-11
devices
66-7
uninstalling
upgrading
91-1
9-1
configuring
deleting
95-1
finding
95-1
66-4
directory lookup
91-42
related topics
66-6
dial rules
91-27
configuration overview
66-6
89-1
39-1
39-1, 39-3
39-4
39-2
related topics
39-4
90-1
IN-5
Index
SIP
E
See SIP dial rules
end user
digest authentication
and device
90-95
Digital Access T1
ports
CAPF profile
changing PIN
directory
114-11
114-11
configuration overview
114-10
configuring
39-1
39-2
finding
64-23
64-22
finding
64-29
67-2
67-3
24-1
extension mobility
end user
A-1
64-30
23-1
dependency records
64-24
related topics
114-14
enterprise parameters
configuring
114-12
114-18
user-related information
64-1
64-25
deleting unassigned
114-8
related topics
64-1
114-17
114-13
114-17
extension mobility
directory numbers
configuring
117-1
114-1
114-9
39-1, 39-3
39-4
finding
114-1
114-15
119-1
changing password
62-1
configuring
117-2
90-94
described
117-4
114-17
91-40
34-2
2-1
domains, MLPP
overview
20-1
F
firmware load information
configuration overview
devices with non-default
related topics
95-1
95-1
95-1
IN-6
OL-18611-01
Index
59-1
90-4
90-39
FXO ports
90-93
ISDN BRI
FXS ports
90-92
90-69
90-84
MGCP
BRI, configuring
G
g. clear codec
enable
89-1
89-1
90-93
90-92
modifying
89-3
90-2
90-92
90-94
90-97
89-5
ports, adding
89-6
90-95
90-101
non-IOS, adding
89-6
90-30
90-99
gateways
PRI
90-89
90-22
90-100
90-27
90-1
90-102
90-96
synchronizing configuration
updating
90-103
90-104
groups
Cisco Unified Communications Manager
90-2
configuration overview
90-101
4-1
configuring
deleting
90-86
finding
90-65
4-4
4-5
4-3
configuration overview
90-31
4-1
date/time
90-88
90-102
90-104
SCCP
configuration overview
related topics
restarting
90-69
90-82
90-39
resetting
90-99
deleting
90-90
T1 ports, adding
89-5
synchronizing configuration
adding
ports, adding
89-4
related topics
resetting
90-95
configuration overview
finding
90-65
gatekeepers
deleting
90-69
90-85
6-1
6-1
6-4
6-6
IN-7
Index
finding
6-3
related topics
6-6
presence, configuring
IP address
7-1
2-1
IP Phone Services
See Cisco Unified IP Phone Services
90-98
IVR
HTTPS
HTTP over secure sockets layer
90-69
82-1
1-4
hunt lists
adding
90-39
L
46-2
LDAP
46-4
authentication
46-5
46-1
configuring
46-6
finding
related topics
46-5
46-6
configuring
deleting
hunt pilots
configuration overview
finding
47-1
47-1
15-1, 15-5
15-6
15-4
related topics
15-6
47-11
related topics
15-1
system
47-12
47-14
finding
16-5
directory
46-7
configuring
16-1
related topics
46-1
16-1
14-1
related topics
47-14
14-1
14-4
16-4
14-3
intercom
55-1
56-1
54-1
33-1
33-3
33-3
33-2
33-4
licensing
license file
translation patterns
configuration overview
finding
related topics
partitions
configuration overview
directory numbers
configuration overview
33-1
57-1
obtaining
32-2
related topics
32-7
IN-8
OL-18611-01
Index
uploading
32-1, 32-5
configuration overview
31-1
configuring
31-1
related topics
deleting
31-2
finding
configuring
32-1
B-5
79-4
79-2
45-1
configuration overview
45-8
configuring
45-6
deleting
45-10
removing members
finding
45-9
locations
configuration overview
65-4
65-2
65-5
message waiting
17-1
65-1
65-4
related topics
configuration overview
17-1
85-1
17-5
configuring
17-6
85-1
85-4
17-4
related topics
65-1
45-10
configuring
79-5
See MTP
45-1
related topics
79-1
45-8
configuration overview
configuring
79-1
79-4
related topics
adding members
finding
deleting
finding
32-4
line groups
deleting
80-4
32-3
finding
80-2
configuration overview
30-2
deleting
80-4
30-1
related topics
80-1
80-3
related topics
30-1
generating
80-1
17-7
resynching bandwidth
related topics
17-7
log off
85-2
85-5
MGCP
1-4
logon
1-3
M
max list box enterprise parameter
64-23
90-93
90-92
gateways, adding
90-69
90-90
85-4
90-95
90-94
90-90
90-97
IN-9
Index
ports, adding
90-92
91-30
navigating
MLPP domains
configuration settings (table)
configuring
deleting
20-1
20-3
20-3
finding
20-2
overview
20-1
related topics
20-4
configuring
21-1
deleting
mobile connect
access list
finding
49-1
mobility configuration
remote destination
93-1
1-1
82-1
remote destination
93-1
parameters
104-1
configuring
70-1
25-1
MTP
configuration overview
configuring
finding
65-5
82-1
deleting
65-2
104-1
65-4
70-1
65-4
related topics
82-1
65-1
74-1
enterprise
74-3
74-2
74-6
synchronizing configuration
74-4
85-1
85-4
85-5
deleting
finding
52-1
52-4
52-6
52-3
related topics
searching
52-3
52-1
MWI
configuring
25-4
partitions
74-2
related topics
25-3
23-1
related topics
74-5
25-1
52-7
52-5
98-1
IN-10
OL-18611-01
Index
configuration overview
98-3
physical locations
98-1
PLAR
98-5
configuration overview
98-2
installing
91-39
110-3
5-1
110-1
ports
5-3
5-4
overview
110-3
110-1
110-2
related topics
98-6
deleting
64-27
plug-ins
98-5
configuring
18-1
modifying
5-1
related topics
updating
5-5
phones
90-62
90-101
90-104
voice mail
configuring
117-4
finding
117-1
7-1
90-39
91-26
91-40
91-30
91-32
91-30
R
recording profiles
configuring
synchronizing configuration
91-32
phone services
deleting
finding
100-9
100-1
100-5
100-6
100-9
105-1
related topics
100-1
100-7
regions
deleting
100-3
8-1
8-1, 8-5
8-9
8-4
8-10
100-8
settings (table)
105-4
related topics
service parameters
deleting
105-2
overview
finding
configuring
105-3
configuring
100-4
related topics
105-3
100-6
dependency records
finding
83-6
91-41
deleting
83-9
91-33
deleting
91-2
83-7
93-1
104-1
IN-11
Index
resource priority
namespace list
configuration settings
configuring
deleting
finding
22-1
described (table)
22-3
explained
22-3
overview
related topics
configuration settings
21-1
configuring
deleting
21-3
115-2
43-4
115-1
43-1
43-1
43-7
115-5
43-6
43-7
related topics
115-3
related topics
43-2
configuration overview
115-4
115-5
finding
42-6
116-6
described
42-7
route lists
21-4
adding
deleting
42-3
removing devices
21-1
roles
configuring
42-4
related topics
21-2
42-1
42-6
finding
related topics
42-1
21-4
overview
42-5
configuration overview
22-4
deleting
41-7
adding devices
22-1
configuring
41-7
route groups
22-2
finding
tags
43-5
116-7
43-6
route patterns
route filters
adding clauses
configuration overview
41-4
configuration overview
configuring
deleting
41-1
41-1
finding
41-6
editing clauses
finding
configuring
deleting
41-4
dependency records
44-1
41-6
44-1
44-11
44-12
44-10
related topics
44-13
SIP
41-4
41-2
operators
described (table)
explained
41-7
related topics
41-10
removing clauses
41-9
41-5
configuration overview
67-1
67-2
67-4
67-3
IN-12
OL-18611-01
Index
viewing in a file
67-3
viewing records
67-1
SIP
91-37
configuration differences
B-3
B-1
SCCP
Cisco IOS, adding
90-96
gateways, adding
90-96
security profile
configuring for CUMA
configuring for phone
28-1
configuring
26-1
deleting
27-1
finding
2-1
40-7
related topics
2-6
resetting
2-4
related topics
service parameters
adding
25-1
40-8
configuring
25-4
Cisco CallManager
activating
101-10
deleting
101-11
101-9
related topics
3-7
resetting
phone
101-1
101-1
copying
finding
3-7
deactivating
101-10
configuration settings
25-3
services
101-13
101-11
100-9
configuring
synchronizing configuration
100-1
updating
100-1
100-5
100-8
configuring
100-6
deleting
100-4
finding
100-9
service parameter
101-12
101-10
120-1
dependency records
related topics
101-2
100-6
40-9
SIP profiles
25-1
deleting
40-5
2-8
configuring
40-6
40-3
pattern formats
2-1, 2-5
40-1
40-1, 40-4
servers
deleting
B-1
48-1
48-1, 48-6
48-6
48-5
related topics
48-7
100-7
100-3
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration Guide
OL-18611-01
IN-13
Index
assigning to phones
creating
99-2
deleting
99-6
99-3
99-7
B-4
third-party phones
99-9
SIP
99-6
licenses
99-4
B-5
time periods
99-7
configuration overview
91-34
91-25
SRST
configuring
deleting
configuration overview
19-1
finding
50-1
19-1
50-1
50-4
50-5
50-3
related topics
19-4
50-6
time schedules
19-4
configuration overview
19-2
related topics
99-4
TFTP
softkey positions
finding
99-9
99-6
updating
related topics
deleting
99-5
softkey positions
99-5
configuring
99-1
renaming
99-1
99-1
updating
99-6
related topics
99-8
configuration overview
renaming
deleting
modifying
modifying
99-2
finding
softkey templates
finding
creating
51-1
configuring
deleting
See SRST
finding
51-4
51-4
51-2
related topics
time zones
51-1
51-5
6-1
transcoders
T1 ports, adding
90-94
configuration overview
templates
78-1
phone button
configuring
configuration overview
98-1
deleting
98-1
98-6
finding
resetting
78-4
78-6
78-3
related topics
softkey
99-3
99-8
configuration overview
99-1
78-1
78-6
78-5
synchronizing configuration
78-5
transformation patterns
called party configuration settings (table)
69-1
IN-14
OL-18611-01
Index
deleting
68-6
finding
69-6
68-7
changing PIN
60-1
finding
114-11
114-1
60-11
60-12
60-3
114-9
117-1
trunks
deleting
finding
deleting
92-1
finding
114-17
114-8
92-49
related topics
92-46
resetting
114-13
114-17
extension mobility
92-1
92-48
related topics
114-1
60-9
configuration overview
114-15
114-11
configuration overview
60-1
60-10
related topics
117-4
changing password
configuration overview
113-9
113-13
69-7
translation patterns
deleting
113-5
end
68-5
configuring
113-12
related topics
113-10
68-7
69-5
113-6
69-6
configuring
68-1
114-18
user-related information
92-51
114-12
114-14
user/phone add
92-49
synchronizing configuration
adding
92-50
117-4
configuration
117-1
related topics
117-4
user groups
adding
adding users
67-2
updating
116-2
assigning roles
67-3
deleting
user
and device configuration settings (table)
described
finding
116-6
116-1
116-1
related topics
113-9
116-8
113-1
113-11
116-6
116-3
deleting users
117-2
application
configuration
116-4
116-7
113-1
Cisco Unified Communications Manager Administration Guide
OL-18611-01
IN-15
Index
synchronizing configuration
voice gateways
90-1
voice-mail ports
voice mail
dependency records
84-1
configuration overview
83-1
configuring
83-7
deleting
87-3
85-4
finding
87-5
87-2
87-5
84-7
87-5
87-5
related topics
87-1
87-3
dependency records
83-9
87-1
83-9
voice-mail profiles
84-6
83-8
85-2
83-6
W
web browsers
87-2
85-1
1-2
83-1
84-1
84-7
87-1
83-9
86-1
86-1
86-3
86-4
86-2
related topics
86-5
86-4
IN-16
OL-18611-01